XyList Community Manuals Archive:

XyWrite 4.0 Command Reference Guide

Published by The Technology Group in 1993
Copyright 1993 by The Technology Group
First Edition (Revised), March 1993
Document Control No. 003500-02

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

The Technology Group reserves the right to make changes to this
document without notice.

The Technology Group

36 South Charles Street
Baltimore, MD 21201
410-576-2040

This document was produced using XyWrite 4.0.

 Table of Contents

Preface
Getting Started
11- What You Need
1
1- What You Get
3
1- About XyWrite Commands
1-
3 About XyWrite Files
1-4 Getting Help

Filing
2-2 Overview
2-4 Setting the Default Drive
2-6 Clearing the Display
2-8 Appending One File to Another
2-9 Changing a File's Attribute
2-10 Calling a File to the Display
2-13 Changing the Current Directory
2-15 Copying a File
2-18 Deleting a File from Disk
2-20 Displaying a Directory
2-24 Displaying a Directory with Text
2-26 Running DOS Programs Under XyWrite
2-28 Running DOS Under XyWrite
2-31 Sorting the Directory
2-33 Running XyWrite
2-35 Returning to XyWrite from DOS
2-36 Finding a File
2-38 Stopping the Printer
2-39 Logging On and Off
2-41 Merging One File into Another
2-42 Creating a New File
2-45 Printing a File
2-50 Printing to a File
2-54 Printing to the Screen
2-57 Chain Printing
2-61 Quitting XyWrite
2-63 Reading a File
2-64 Renaming a File
2-65 Saving a File to Disk
2-65 Saving a Selected Block

iii
Table of Contents (confd)

2-
68 Storing a File to Disk
70
2- Displaying Subdirectories
2-
71 Waiting for the Printer
2-
72 Converting a File Between XyWrite and RFT:DCA Formats

Editing
3
3- Basics of the Screen, Keyboard and Mouse
3-
19 Editing Text
3-
33 Changing Case
3-
37 Math
3-41 Text Macro Keys
3-53 Search and Replace Text
3-69 Spelling Checker and Thesaurus
3-91 Windows
3-101 Word Count

Formatting
4-5 Overview
4-13 Alignment
4-25 Date & Time
4-31 Footnotes
4-51 Graphic Design Commands
4-71 Headers &: Footers
4-75 Importing Files
4-91 Numbering
4-117 Page Length
4-137 Page Width
4-153 Printer Control
4-163 Styles
4-169 Type Style
4-179 Vertical Spacing

Special Features
5-3 Columns
5-17 Document Assembly
5-25 Fill-In Forms
5-33 Mail Merge
5-55 Redlining
5-65 Sorting
5-77 Table of Contents & Index
5-97 User Programming

iv
 Preface

The Command Reference Guide describes XyWrite commands and

procedures and is written to help users at every level of experience. Since
the document is organized by topics, the easiest way for you to find
information is by using the Index, which is complete and well cross­
referenced.

Chapter 1 contains general helpful information. Chapters 2,3, and 4 cover

the basic elements of XyWrite. Chapter 5 has procedures for more
involved and highly useful applications.

Each section of the reference guide is self-contained so that you can read
sections in any order. For example, you will find the description of
footnotes all in one place, including both the footnote procedures and
commands.

The description of each command follows this structure:

Format: What is the precise syntax of the command?

Abbrev: Is there a shorter form for the command?
Menu: What items do I choose to perform the same task from a XyWrite
menu?
Purpose: Why would I want to use this command?
Action: What steps do I take to use this command?
Notes: What else should I know about this command?

Notation. Throughout this manual we have used the following

conventions.

• rWl — Refers to the command line, which is located at the top of the
screen.

• sans serif text — Indicates the keys you press to perform an action.
Statements that appear in this font can be typed literally, letter for
letter. For example:
call chapter.doc

• italic — The use of italic with commands is reserved for words (or
characters) that you are to replace with a specific name, such as
filename.

v
Preface (confd)

• filename — Anywhere you see the term filename, you may substitute the
more general term filename.ext. For example, to call up an existing
document:
call filename
can be replaced by:
call filename.ext
You can also add the path name. For example:
call d:\path\filename.ext

• d: — Drive specification A:, B:, C:, D: or any other drive.

• path — The path is a series of directory names separated by

backslashes. For more information on paths, refer to the Overview
section at the start of Chapter 2, "Tiling."

• # — The pound sign means one single character — any letter (A-Z) or
number (0-9).

• n — Represents any number. (The number can contain more than one
digit.)

— Represents an item you choose from a XyWrite menu.

The symbols in the left column are used throughout this manual to
represent keys on the keyboard. For a description of these keys, refer to
the Keyboard section in Chapter 3, 'Tditing."

A to Z Character keys on the center portion of the keyboard

0 to 9 Number keys in either the top row or on the numeric
keypad
ED to ED Function keys Fl through Fl 2
o Tab key
ED Control key
[shiftl Shift key
Alternate key
I Space Bar| Space Bar key
I BackspaceI Backspace key (located above the Enter key)
0 Enter key (also known as the Return key)
Ea Escape key
1 Break I Break key
vi
(confd) Preface

ICaps Lockl Caps Lock key (toggle key)

I Scroll Lockl Scroll Lock (toggle key)
I Num Lockl Numeric Lock (toggle key)
E, E, E, E Cursor keys
[PgUp], [PgDn] Page Up and Page Down keys
s Delete key
Rnsl Insert key
0/ Elz □,
0,0 Math Symbol keys
iHomel Home key
H End key
 NOTES

vi 11
 Introduction

Welcome to XyWrite.

XyWrite is a word processing program that integrates text preparation and

output formatting. XyWrite operates on IBM computers and many
compatibles.

WHAT YOU NEED

To use XyWrite, this is what you need:
• The XyWrite disks
• An 8086 class IBM-compatible computer or better
• 384K bytes or more of RAM memory
• IBM PC-DOS 3.3 or higher
• An EGA, CGA, VGA, or Hercules graphic adapter card
• One hard disk and one floppy disk drive
• A printer
If your system has more than the minimum number of bytes required,
XyWrite makes the most of the extra memory: it uses up to 640K of
memory. If you have expanded memory, it automaticallys uses up to 4MB
of it. More memory results in faster performance, especially when editing
large files.

WHAT YOU Get

XyWrite enables you to:
• Use XyWrite commands or select tasks from a menu.
• Display your document in graphic view, which is a WYSIWYG (what-
you-see-is-what-you-get) display. While in graphic view, you can also
edit and format your document and see the changes instantly.
• Include graphics in your document and see them on the screen.
• Use simple keystroke combinations as a shortcut to perform many
editing and formatting functions.
• Import files from database, spreadsheet, or other word processor
formats.
• Specify in your document the typefaces and type sizes your printer has
available.
• Emphasize an area on a page by including a border with the line
weight, shading, and white space you specify.
• Work on many documents at once (up to nine).
• Review the formatted page before you print it out and print in the
background while you return to work on the same or other documents.

1-1
Introduction (confd)

• Run DOS commands from XyWrite.

• Store text to a text macro for ready retrieval and insertion into your
document.
• Create forms by setting up a file so that you can type into only the
blank fields.
• Generate a Table of Contents and an Index with automatic sorting and
page numbering based on phrases you mark in your document.
• Paginate a document automatically with widow/orphan control and
unbreakable blocks.
• Check the spelling of a word, selected block, or an entire document.
• Keep a record of the edits you make to a document.
• Use Mail Merge to produce form letters and conditionally control
which portions of the main file appear in individual finished letters.
• Record keystroke sequences and create custom procedures with user
programming features.
• Perform arithmetic.
• Insert footnotes and end notes in your document.
• Produce a list of synonyms from the on-line thesaurus.
• Enter text into multiple columns with word wrapping within columns.
• Read and write ASCII files.
• Print proportionally spaced text with automatic hyphenation.
• Customize the program, including the keyboard and menus, to act the
way you want.

And best of all XyWrite is FAST!!

ABOUT XYWRITE COMMANDS

You can accomplish most of the tasks listed above by executing one or
more XyWrite commands. You enter commands on the command line,
which is the top line of the display. The following rules apply:
• Always start at the leftmost position of the command line. Press [F5) to
do this.
• Use either upper- or lowercase letters (or any mix).
• Insert a single space immediately after the command name (if it is to be
followed with arguments).
• Separate multiple arguments with a comma. (Some commands, such
as PRINT, COPY, RENAME, allow use of a blank space instead of a
comma.)
1-2
(confd) Introduction

Once you have typed the command on the command line, you execute it
by pressing either [F9| or 0.

For example, any of these will work:

FCT print chapter.doc, 1-30
ES3 print chapter.doc,1-3 [F9]
Ml print CHAPTER.doc, 1-30

About xywrite Files

EDITOR.EXE is the only file essential to editing text in XyWrite. A printer
file is needed to print any of your files; outline screen fonts are needed to
use graphic view. If you copy XyWrite to another disk, you must include
these files. The other files are needed only if you want them. For
example, you can use STARTUP.INT to start XyWrite with your own
commands or XY4.HLP to access the Help screens, and so on.

Essential Files
XyWrite Program: EDITOR.EXE
Printer Files: filenatne.PRN
Outline Screen Fonts: filename.SPD
Accessory Files
Startup File: STARTUP.INT
Default File: SETTINGS.DFL
Screen Display Backup Files: COLOR.DSP, MONO.DSP, GAS.DSP
LCD.DSP, G-SCALE.DSP
Help File: XY4.HLP
Menu Files: XY4.MNU, XY4.DLG
Keyboard File: XY4.KBD, XY4-3.KBD
Text Macro File: SAVEGET.SGT
Spelling PERS.SPL, DICT.SPL
Thesaurus WORD.OVR, WFBG.SYN
Hyphenation DICT.HYP

Most of the files listed above are in the XY4 directory. Other standard
XyWrite directories are listed below.
\BTFONTS contains the outline screen fonts.
\DOCS contains user files.
\XY4\FILTERS contains text conversion files.
\XY4\PICTURES contains sample graphic files.
\XY4\PRNFONT contains soft printer fonts.

XyWrite Files Are Pure ASCII. XyWrite does not insert control characters
into your document. Therefore, you can transport files to and from other
ASCII systems.
1-3
Introduction (conCd)

GETTING HELP
You have three sources of help available to you: On-Screen Help, the
documentation set, and telephone assistance. Each is described briefly
here.

On-Screen Help. Whether you are using XyWrite commands or menus,

you can use the Help file (XY4.HLP) to put useful information at your
fingertips. XY4.HLP is delivered automatically during the installation.
(Also during installation, a notation is made in your STARTUP.INT file
that loads XY4.HLP automatically on entering XyWrite.)
To get help, press [fT|. XyWrite displays context-sensitive help—in other
words, it displays information that is directly related to the current
position of the cursor. For example, if the cursor is on a dialog box item,
such as a text entry field or radio button, pressing [fT| displays help for that
item. If the cursor is in the text area, pressing [H] displays the help index
from which you can choose a topic. If the cursor is on the command line,
pressing [Fl] displays information about using commands.
You can also use the Help menu to access several categories of help,
including a detailed explanation of how to use on-line help.

Documentation Set XyWrite includes the following pieces of

documentation:
• Installation and Learning Guide: provides directions for installing
XyWrite and performing basic tasks via the menus
• LAN Administrator's Guide: provides technical information for
installing, customizing, and using XyWrite on a LAN
• This Command Reference Guide: covers the complete set of XyWrite
commands
• Customization Guide: provides instructions for customizing your startup
file, keyboard file, default file, printer file, sort file, menu file, and help
file
• Quick Reference Card
• Keyboard Template

Telephone Assistance. If the first two sources cannot help you, then by
all means call or write us at the following location:
The Technology Group
36 South Charles Street
Baltimore, MD 21201
410-576-1960

It will help us if you are at your computer with the problem at hand when
you call.

1-4
 Filing

CONTENTS This chapter is arranged alphabetically as follows:

Page Section Purpose
2-2 Overview
2-4 A: Setting the Default Drive
2-6 ABORT Clearing the Display
2-8 APPEND Appending One File to the End of Another
2-8 APT Appending One File to the Beginning of Another
2-9 ATTRIB Changing a File's Attribute
2-10 CALL Calling a File to the Display
2-13 CHDIR Changing the Current Directory
2-15 COPY Copying a File
2-18 DELETE Deleting a File from Disk
2-20 DIR Displaying a Directory
2-24 DIRL Displaying a Directory with Text
2-26 DO Running DOS Programs Under XyWrite
2-28 DOS Running DOS Under XyWrite
2-31 DSORT Sorting the Directory
2-33 EDITOR Running XyWrite
2-35 EXIT Returning to XyWrite from DOS
2-36 FIND Finding a File
2-36 FINDL Finding a File with Text
2-38 KILPRN Stopping the Printer
2-39 LOGOFF Logging Off
2-39 LOGON Logging On
2-41 MERGE Merging One File into Another
2-42 NEW Creating a New File
2-45 PRINT Printing a File
2-50 PRINTF Printing to a File
2-54 PRINTS Printing to the Screen
2-57 PRINT @ Chain Printing
2-61 QUIT Quitting XyWrite
2-63 READ Reading a File
2-64 RENAME Renaming a File
2-65 SAVE Saving a File to Disk
2-65 SAVESEL Saving a Selected Block
2-68 STORE Storing a File to Disk
2-70 TREE Displaying Subdirectories
2-71 WAIT Waiting for the Printer
2-72 X2R, R2X Converting a File Between XyWrite and RFT:DCA
Formats

2-1
Overview

OVERVIEW This Chapter describes two categories of commands:

• Filing Commands—which handle only entire files rather than
individual pages, words, or paragraphs. For example, NEW creates a
new file, and STORE saves the entire file onto disk.
• System Commands—which enable you to enter XyWrite and run DOS
under XyWrite. In addition, the DO command allows you to run other
programs (besides DOS) under XyWrite.

The Filing commands can be further broken down into three

subcategories:
• Display Commands—which load files to the display, and clear files
from the display, without altering the files on disk. For example, CALL
CHAPTER.DOC loads a copy of the file CHAPTER.DOC from the disk
to the display; the original file CHAPTER.DOC remains on the disk.
• Disk Commands—which save files to the disk, and delete files from
the disk. (The disk is, of course, the place where files are stored.)
• Printer Commands—which send files to the printer.

Immediate vs. Embedded Commands. All of the commands in this

chapter are immediate commands. This means that when you type a
command, it executes immediately on pressing S (Enter). In contrast, the
commands in Chapter 4 are embedded commands—on pressing CT they
are embedded in the text as characters, ready to execute when output to
the printer or graphic display. For a description of embedded commands,
refer to the Overview section at the start of Chapter 4, Formatting.

Use of Path. A path defines the location of a file. It can include a drive, a
series of directory and subdirectory names separated by backslashes (\),
and a filename. For example:
c:\novehdraft\chap1

If a path begins with a backslash, XyWrite starts its search from the root
directory; otherwise, the search begins at the current directory. Thus, you
can specify a path in either of two ways:

\dir1 \dir2\dir3 Relative to root directory

or
dir! \dir2\dir3 Relative to current directory

2-2
(confd) Overview

Calling a File Using a Path. Any of the XyWrite commands that use a
filename allow you to specify a path along with the filename. For example,
you can CALL a file as follows:
EHOcall d:path\filename Format
EEJcall c:\memos\vacation Example

Result: The file VACATION is called from subdirectory MEMOS. The

path and filename both appear on the status line at the top of the display.

Storing a File Using a Path. When you store or save a file, you return it to
the subdirectory from which it was called. Use the command:
Bm store

To STORE a file in some other directory, you must specify the path to that
directory.

Path Statement. The Path statement is a DOS command found in the

AUTOEXEC.BAT file. It defines a series of directories and subdirectories
that DOS searches if a program file is not found in the current directory.
For certain functions, XyWrite also uses the DOS path statement. For
example, when you load a printer file, XyWrite looks in the current direc­
tory for the specified file; if it doesn't find it, it then looks at the path
statement for other possible locations. It will save you time and keystrokes
if you add your XyWrite subdirectories to the path statement in your
AUTOEXEC.BAT file.

For more information on DOS paths, refer to your DOS Manual.

2-3
Setting the Default Drive A:

FORMAT K2K (Option 1)

IfltfRdt.dl: (Option 2)
d: is the letter for the default drive.
dl: is the save-drive you specify. You may specify any number of save­
drives, separated by commas. Do not include spaces before or after the
commas.
MENU See Note til

PURPOSE Any drive can be designated the default drive—a diskette drive, hard
drive, or a RAM (virtual) drive. Setting the default drive is done by
entering the drive letter on the command line. For example:
ESJJd:

When you set the default drive, you are telling XyWrite which drive to use
when a filename is given without a drive letter prefix. For example, if
drive B is made the default drive, then the following statement would call
CHAPTER.DOC from drive B:
□call chapter.doc

There are two options for setting the default drive:

• Setting the Default Drive (Option 1)
ES3±
• Setting the Default and Save-Drives (Option 2)
l^\ad:dl:

Option 2 allows you to specify an additional save-drive (here denoted dl).

If you use Option 2, then every time you SAVE or STORE a file that was
called from the default drive or the save drive, a copy is stored not only to
the normal default drive, but also to save-drive dl. Thus, Option 2 allows
you to keep up-to-date copies on other drives. (You can specify several
save-drives, if you wish.)

ACTION Setting the Default Drive

(Option 1) To set the default drive to drive A, for example:
Type: (Fga:0

2-4
(confd) A:

Action Setting the Default and Save-Drives

(Option 2) First you specify the normal default drive (drive C in the following
example); you then specify the save-drives immediately afterwards,
separated by commas (in this case, only one save-drive, drive B). Do not
include a space after the comma.
Type: [F5]c:,b:G3

Result: Now every time you SAVE or STORE a file that was called from
drive C or B, XyWrite will save identical copies on both drives C and B.
Drive C is the default drive for all other commands (e.g., DIR, CALL,
PRINT, MERGE). When you specify one or more save-drives, you cannot
SAVE or STORE to just a single drive.

NOTE #1 Menu Option. You can change the default drive using the directories list
box, which appears in a number of dialog boxes (for example, Open File,
Manage Files). To change drives from a dialog box, highlight the drive
letter you want to make current and press 0/ or double-click on the drive
letter. You cannot use the menus to establish a save-drive.

NOTE #2 Changing Drives. If you change the default drive, you must re-establish
the save-drive.

NOTE #3 Typical Uses for Save-Drives.

• RAM Drive Backup. If you work on a RAM drive, you can make sure
files are also stored on the floppy drive by setting it to be a save-drive.
• Two-Drive System. If you want to back up files onto another disk as
often as possible, then you can specify your second drive as the save­
drive. The drawbacks are the additional time it takes to save to the
second drive and the space required by having two copies of each file.

NOTE #4 Default Drives at Startup. By adding the default drive as a line in your
STARTUP file, you can have XyWrite automatically switch default drives
at startup.

2-5
Clearing the Display ABORT

FORMAT toziABORT/nv
/nv (No Verify) is an optional switch that allows you to override the
verification message (see Note #1).
Abbrev ESZJAB/nv
MENU

Purpose ABORT clears the file from the display window and memory. Any
changes made to the file since it was last saved are lost and cannot be
recovered. To reduce the risk of having a file inadvertently aborted,
XyWrite displays the message 'Tile was modified-abort changes? (Y/N)"
when you try to ABORT a file that has been edited. You can override this
prompt by adding the /NV switch to the ABORT command.

ABORT has two main uses:

• Clearing the Display. If you have called up a file merely to view, and
you have no changes to save, use ABORT when done.
• Undoing a Big Mistake. If you have made a disastrous mistake in
editing a file, the ABORT command lets you throw away the working
file which contains those errors. (See the tip on the next page.)

Action Clearing the Display

(Option 1) To clear a file from the display:
Type: [fs] abort CT

Result: If you have not made any changes to the file while it was
displayed, XyWrite clears the screen immediately. If you have made
changes, XyWrite displays the message "File modified, abort anyway?
(Y/N)." If you press Y, the display is cleared. If you press N, the
command is cancelled.

Action Clearing the Display Without Verification

(Option 1) To clear a file from the display without having the verification message
appear:
Type: [F5]abort/nv0

Result: XyWrite clears the screen immediately, whether or not the file has
been modified.

2-6
(confd) ABORT

TIP How to Undo a Big Mistake. (See the illustrations.)

Whenever you CALL a file (1), a copy is sent to the display; the original
remains on the disk. As you make changes to the file, the changes are
made only on the copy in memory, not on the original file on disk (until
you SAVE it). Thus, if you make a gross blunder with, say, a search-and-
replace (2), then you can ABORT the document (3), and still retrieve the
original file (4).

Note #1 Abort Prompt You can disable the ABORT prompt by changing the EP
(Error Prompt) setting. For more information on the EP setting, refer to
''Default Settings" in the Customization Guide.

NOTE #2 Windows. If there is more than one file open when ABORT is executed,
the file where the cursor is located is the one which is aborted, and the
current window is closed. (See the section on Windows in Chapter 3.) If
you prefer to leave the window open after you ABORT a file, you can
change the NW setting in the default file. Refer to "Default Settings" in
the Customization Guide for more information.
Appending a File APPEND, APT

FORMAT EMfl APPEND d:filename,d: targetfile

ROTZ! APT d:filename,d: targetfile
d: (optional) is the drive where the file is stored.
filename (optional) is the file to be added to another.
targetfile is the file to which text is added.
MENU Not a menu option.

Purpose The APPEND command adds text to the end of a file on disk. The APT
(Append to Top) command adds text to the beginning of a file on disk. The
text you append can be copied from the file on screen or from another file
on disk.

If you type the APPEND or APT command with only one filename,
XyWrite looks for selected text within the file on your screen. If it finds
selected text, that text is appended to the file you named; otherwise,
XyWrite adds the entire current file to the named file.

If you list two files after the APPEND or APT command, XyWrite copies
the first into the second. The first file remains unchanged.

Action Appending the Current File to a Stored File

To append the file you have on screen (or selected text within that file) to
the end of another file, say CHAPTER on drive A, for example:
Type: [F5|append a:chapter[3

Result: The current file (or selected text) is now copied to the end of
CHAPTER. If you use the APT command instead, the current file (or
selected text) is copied to the beginning of CHAPTER.

Action Appending a Stored File to Another

To insert TIMECARD at the beginning of REPORT:
Type: [Fsjapt timecard,report®
Result: TIMECARD is inserted at the beginning of REPORT. If you use
the APPEND command, TIMECARD is added to the end of REPORT. In
both cases, TIMECARD is unchanged.

NOTE Deselect Text When adding the current file to another, it's smart to press
the [Esc] key before using APPEND or APT; otherwise, you may be adding
some off-screen selected text instead of the entire file as you intend.

2-8
ATTRIB Changing a File's Attribute

FORMAT [te! ATTRIB filename,#

filename is the name of the file whose attribute you want to change.
# (optional) is 0 (for read/write) or 1 (for read-only). If omitted, XyWrite
displays the current attribute of the file on the status line.
MENU E0 E2E33S EEB

Purpose The ATTRIB command lets you determine the status of a file's read-only
attribute. It also allows you to change the attribute from read/write to
read-only or vice versa.
When you create a new file in XyWrite, it is automatically assigned
read/write status. Once you have stored it on disk, you can protect it
from accidental editing by changing its status to read-only. When a file is
read-only, you can open it and examine it; you can even modify it, but you
cannot save the changes under the same filename. If you try to, XyWrite
displays the message "Access denied."

Action Checking the Status of a File

To determine whether the file FINAL.RPT is a read-only or read/write
file:
Type: [F5]attrib final.rpt
XyWrite displays a 0 on the status line if FINAL.RPT is read/write and a 1
if it is read-only.

Action Changing the Status of a File

To change the status of the file FINAL.RPT to read-only:
Type: [F5]attrib final.rptj
XyWrite changes the file to read-only status and displays the message
"Done" on the status line. You can display FINAL.RPT with the CALL
command, and you can modify it, but you will not be able to save the
changes unless you specify a different filename.

NOTE READ Command. Do not confuse the read-only attribute with the READ
command. You can CALL a read-only file and edit it, although you can
save the edits only under a different filename. If you use the READ
command to display a file, you cannot edit it. (Files displayed with the
READ command have a club symbol before the filename. Read-only files
that you have CALLed do not display the club symbol; you need to use
the ATTRIB command to determine the file's status.)

2-9
Calling a File to the Display CALL

FORMAT CALL/f d:filename

/f (Fast) is an optional switch that tells XyWrite to display only the size
information about an imported graphic, not the image itself.
d: (optional) is the letter you specify for the drive you want. If you omit
the drive letter, the default drive is used.
filename is the name of the file you want to display.
ABBREV EHOCA/f d:filename
MENU E3ESB

Purpose The CALL command loads a copy of the named file from the disk into
memory and the display for viewing and editing. If there is already a file
or directory displayed in the current window, XyWrite opens a new one.

CALL works by copying the file to the display. The original file remains
safely on the disk. Thus, you may edit or even ABORT the displayed file
without disturbing the original file. (Only when you SAVE or STORE the
file back to the disk does the file on the disk change.)

If you include the optional /F switch, XyWrite does not copy imported
graphic images to the display; in Graphic view, you see the space reserved
for the graphics and their names, but not the images. You can save some
time, particularly if the images are very large, by using the /F option. The
switch is especially useful if you have already reviewed the imported
images and are satisfied that they are scaled, cropped, and positioned the
way you want them.

There are two ways to call a file:

• By Typing Its Name (Option 1)
• By Pointing at Its Name (Option 2)

Action Calling a File by Typing Its Name

(Option 1) Let's say the name of the file you want to call is CHAPTER.DOC and it's
on drive B:
Type: [Fsjcall b:chapter.doc0

Result: XyWrite calls the file CHAPTER.DOC to the display from disk
drive B, opening a new window if necessary. (If "b:" were omitted,
XyWrite would look on the default drive for the file.)

2-10
(confd) CALL

NOTE #1 Saving the File. CALL loads the file into memory. The file remains in
memory while you work on it. Any changes you make to the file are not
saved on disk until you SAVE or STORE it. Because memory is lost if the
power fails, it is a good idea to save the file occasionally, say every 15
minutes.

NOTE #2 Calling with Global Filenames. You can substitute the wild cards * and ?
for characters in a filename with CALL, in the same way you use them
with the DIR command—for example: CALL *.DOC. (Refer to
'Displaying a Directory7' for information on global filenames.) When you
use a global filename with CALL, the first file is displayed on the screen.
After you have finished reviewing or editing the displayed file, press
[Ctrl] [Ah] [Shift] N to display the next file that matches the global filename you
specified. If you have edited the current file, you will see the message
S=save, A=abandon edits, C=cancel. Press "S" to store the current file and
display the next one; press "A" to abort the current file and display the
next one; press "C" to keep the current file on the screen for editing.
Repeat this procedure until you see the message zzNo more files/'

NOTE #3 Calling a File Multiple Times. If you try to call the same file into more
than one window at the same time, XyWrite displays the message "File is
already open—open again? (Yes, No, Go, Read)." Press the appropriate
response.
Y Open another copy of the file for editing. When you make this
selection, XyWrite puts square brackets around the filename so that
you know it was not the first version called to the display; you cannot
store this version under the current filename.
N Cancel the command.
G Go to the window that already contains the specified file.
R Display a second copy of the file for reviewing only, not editing.

2-11
CALL (confd)

Action Calling a File by Pointing at Its Name

If you don't quite remember the name of the file you want displayed, then
(Option 2)
use the following method:

1. Display a directory for the drive you want (e.g., drive B):
Type: [Fsldir b:[<jl

2. Using the cursor up and down keys, move the cursor onto the desired
filename. Notice that the current line is highlighted.

3. Type: (FgcallH

Result: XyWrite aborts the directory and displays the file.

NOTE #4 Automatic New Window. XyWrite automatically opens and closes

windows. If you prefer to open and close windows manually, you can
change the NW default setting. Refer to "Default Settings" in the
Customization Guide for more information on the NW setting.

NOTE #5 Binary Files. The XyWrite program includes several binary files (for
example, EDITOR.EXE and DICT.SPL). These files cannot be edited, and
you should not CALL them to the screen. If you inadvertently CALL a
binary file, you must ABORT it; never STORE a binary file—doing so will
corrupt it.

NOTE #5 RFT:DCA and L3P File Formats. The CALL command automatically
converts files from RFT:DCA and L3P formats into XyWrite format. It
does not change the original file, but converts a copy of it and displays the
copy as an untitled file.

NOTE #6 Other File Formats. You can call files from other word processors to the
display if they are strictly ASCII text. Others require a conversion that can
be accomplished using the menus. (Choose File, Open, Options, and then
highlight the format you want to convert from. Refer to the on-line help
file for more information.)

ALSO SEE Related Commands. A related command calls a special kind of file: CAF
(Call Form File). The READ command displays a file for reviewing only,
not editing.

2-12
CHDIR Changing the Current Directory

FORMAT BMflCHDIR d:path or MWdCD d:path

told MKDIR drpath
toll! RMDIR d:path
d: (optional) is the letter of the drive you want to affect.
path is as described in your DOS Manual.
MENU EE I Manaae Files I Directories... (See Note)

Purpose Three commands are covered here: MKDIR, CHDIR, and RMDIR.
These commands are useful to you only if you use subdirectories. The
general forms are:

• Making a New Directory

KWH MKDIR d:path
• Changing the Current Directory
RtHTl CHDIR drpath
• Removing a Directory
RMDIR d:path

Type these commands on the command line just as you would any other
XyWrite commands. These three commands are described further in your
DOS manual. The path is described in the Overview section earlier in this
chapter.

Action Making a New Directory

To make a new directory called, say, MEMOS:
Type: [fs] mkdir memos 53
Result: The new directory is created off the current directory of the
default drive.

2-13
CHDIR (confd)

Action Changing the Current Directory

To change the current directory on drive C to MEMOS, for example:
Type: [Fsjchdir c:memosS
Result: The subdirectory MEMOS is now the current directory on drive C.
Each drive has its own current directory, as illustrated on the previous
page.

NOTE Menu Option. There is no explicit menu option for changing directories,
but it can be accomplished through any dialog box that contains a
directories list box (for example, Open File and Manage Files). To change
directories from a dialog box, highlight the name of the directory you
want to make current and press S or double-click on the directory name. If
the directory you want does not appear in the list box, highlight or
double-click on the entry for the parent directory.

Action Removing a Directory

To remove a directory called MEMOS, first delete all of the files and
subdirectories from that directory. Then, use CHDIR to select a directory
other than MEMOS as the current directory. Finally:
Type: [fs] rmdir memos0

also See The TREE Command. The TREE command displays a diagram of all
subdirectories on a drive. You can change to or remove a subdirectory by
placing the appropriate command on the command line, pointing at the
subdirectory name in the "tree," and pressing [F9j.

2-14
COPY Copying a File

FORMAT EHZJCOPY/sw d:filename,d:targetfile

/sw is one of the following optional switches:
/nv (No Verify) allows you to override the verification message (see
Note #1).
/mv (Move) deletes the original file after the copy is made (see Note
#2).
d: (optional) is the drive letter.
filename is the name of the file to be copied.
targetfile (optional) is the name of the new file. If omitted, the file is copied
under the original name.
Menu | Manage Files [

PURPOSE The Xy Write COPY command is similar to the COPY command in DOS.
You can copy a file and give the copy a new name (Option 1), or you can
copy a file to a different drive or directory but keep the same name (Option
2).

Below, we explain these three ways to copy files:

• Copying a File to a Different Name (Option 1)
• Copying a File to a Different Location (Option 2)
• Copying Files from a Directory (Option 3)

ACTION Copying a File to a Different Name

(Option 1) Let's say we want to copy the file MEMO to REPORT:

Type: gsjcopy memo,report0

Result: Two identical files now exist with different names (in the same
directory). Note, the comma is optional—you can use a space instead.

ACTION copying a File to a Different Location

(Option 2) To copy the file REPORT from the current drive to a different directory on
drive C:
Type: [F5]copy report,c:\business0

Result: A copy of REPORT is now on drive C in directory BUSINESS

(with the same name).

2-15
COPY (confd)

By leaving off the second drive and filename, you can copy a file from
another location to your current directory. For example, to copy REPORT
from drive B:
Type: [F5]copy bireportCT

Result: REPORT is copied into your current directory. (Since a target file
isn't named, XyWrite uses the original name.)

ACTION Copying Files from a Directory

(Option 3) This procedure makes it easy to copy many files from one disk or
directory to another. To copy files from drive A to drive B:
1. Type: [F5]b:[3 (destination drive)
2. Type: [Fsldir a: CT (source drive)
3. Type: [Fslcopy (without pressing CT )
4. Type: [ShF| [F5] (puts cursor in the directory)
5. Now move the cursor down the list and stop on the first filename you
wish to copy.
Press: [F9] (to execute the COPY command)
Result: The file is copied to drive B. Note, the cursor has moved to the
next name. Repeat Step 5 until you have copied all the files you want from
drive A to B. If your disk fills up, you get the message DISK FULL and
the cursor does not move to the next name.

NOTE #1 Duplicate Filename. If the target filename you specify for the copy
already exists, XyWrite displays the message "File Exists, Overwrite It?
Y/N." Press "Y" if you want the copy you are making to supersede the
file that already exists with that filename. Press "N" to abort the COPY
command so you can reissue it with a new name.

If you include the /NV switch with the command, XyWrite automatically
supersedes an existing document with the same filename; no verification
message is displayed.

2-16
(confd) COPY

NOTE #2 Moving a File. If you want to move a file from one location to another,
include the /MV switch with the COPY command. The /MV switch
copies the file to the new location, and then deletes it from the original
location, which has the same effect as moving it from one location to
another. For example:

Type: [Fgcopy/mv chapter.doc c:\docs[3

CHAPTER.DOC is copied into the DOCS directory on drive C. It is then

deleted from the current directory.

NOTE #3 Wild Cards. XyWrite does not recognize wild cards with the COPY
command in the same way that DOS does. However, you can include an
asterisk (*) in the target file specification if you want to retain part of the
original filename. For example:

Type: [F5]copy chapl .doc *.bak[7>l

A copy of CHAP1.DOC, named CH API.BAK, is now in the current

directory.

NOTE #4 Copying the Current File. To copy a file that is currently displayed, you
must first save it to disk. COPY looks for and copies only files saved to disk
(rather than the version on your screen). (Use the SAVE and STORE
commands to copy the screen version of a file.)

2-17
Deleting a File from Disk DELETE

FORMAT PELETE/nv d:filename

/nv (No Verify) is an optional switch that allows you to override the
verification message (see Note #1).
d: (optional) is the letter you specify for the drive you want. If you omit
the drive letter, the default drive is used.
filename is the name of the file you want to delete.
ERASE is identical to DELETE. ERNV is identical to DELETE/nv.
ABBREV bEMDEL/nv d:filename
menu E2L!W'iiLiE3

PURPOSE DELETE erases the named file from the specified drive. It does not affect
the display or memory. To minimize the risk of files being deleted
accidentally, XyWrite displays the message "Do you wish to delete?
(Y/N)" when you issue the DELETE command. You can override this
prompt by adding the /NV switch to the command.

There are two ways to delete a file (the result is the same either way):

• Deleting a File by Typing Its Name (Option 1)

• Deleting a File by Pointing at Its Name (Option 2)

ACTION Deleting a File by Typing Its Name

(Option 1) To delete a file:
Type: gsjdelete chapter.doc G3
Result: XyWrite displays the message "Do you wish to delete? (Y/N)." If
you press "Y," this command erases the file CHAPTER.DOC from the
default drive.

2-18
(confd) DELETE

If you add the /NV switch to the command, the verification prompt does
not appear. For example:
Type: [F5]delete/nv chapter.docH

ACTION Deleting a File by Pointing at Its Name

(Option 2) To delete a file by pointing at its name:
1. Display the directory for the drive you want (drive B, for example):
Type: [F5]dir b:0

2. Enter the DELETE command on the command line:

Type: [Fsldelete (without pressing CT)

3. Press: [Shift] |F51

4. Now move the cursor down the list and stop on the filename you wish
to delete.
5. Press: [F9]

Result: The verification prompt appears. Press "Y" to erase the file from
disk; press "N" to cancel the command. (If you don't want to be bothered
with the verification message, add the /NV switch to the command.) You
can continue down the list and delete other files.

Do not hold down the F9 key! If you do, the autorepeat action will issue
several delete commands before you can see their effect on the screen. In
such a case, press [ctd] | Break I to stop more files from being deleted.

NOTE #1 Delete Prompt You can disable the verification prompt by changing the
EP setting in the default file. For more information on the EP setting, refer
to "Default Settings" in the Customization Guide.

NOTE #2 Recovery of a File. Once a file is deleted, it cannot be recovered by

XyWrite. The best precaution is to make backup copies often. (See Option
2 of "Setting the Default Drive.") To recover a file, you must use a DOS
utility program designed specifically for that purpose.

2-19
Displaying a Directory DIR

FORMAT BttUDIR/sw d:\path+ (Option 1)

BSD DIR/sw d:\path+\globalname (Option 2)
/sw is one of the following optional switches:
/na Display filenames and subdirectory names only.
/fi Display filenames and file information only.
/pa Display subdirectory names only.
/su Display file summary information.
d: (optional) is the letter of the disk drive you want listed. If you omit the
drive letter, XyWrite uses the default drive.
\path+ (optional) is the name of the directory you want listed. If you
include the plus sign, XyWrite lists all files in the specified directory and
its subdirectories. If you omit the path name, XyWrite uses the default
directory.
globalname (optional) is the global filename which generates the partial list
you want.
Menu E3EE3I3E3

PURPOSE DIR (Directory) displays names of files and subdirectories on the drive
and in the path you specify. For each file in the list, XyWrite also provides
the number of characters in the file, and the date and time the file was last
saved or stored (see Note #1). At the bottom of the display are the total
number of files and subdirectories in the list, the total number of
characters contained in the files, and the amount of space left on the disk.
You can use the optional switches to change the type of information that
XyWrite displays when you issue the DIR command.

You've got two options: you can display all the files or just the files you
want. The second option is very handy if your directory has more than a
screenful of files.
• Displaying a Complete Directory (Option 1)
ESQ DIR d:\path+
• Displaying a Partial Directory (Option 2)
ESZjDIR d:\path+\globalname

ACTION Displaying a Complete or Extended Directory

(Option 1) To display the names of all files and subdirectories in the current directory
on the default drive:
Type: [FsjdirCT
Result: XyWrite opens a new window, if necessary, and displays a list that
resembles that in the illustration below.

2-20
(confd) DIR

To display the names of just the files (not subdirectories) on another drive,
for example drive B (when the default is drive C), you would type the
following:
Type: [F5]dir7fi b:E]

To display an extended directory with the names of all files in the \XY4
directory and its subdirectories on the C drive:
Type: [gjdir c:\XY4+H

ACTION Displaying a Partial Directory

(Option 2) To display a partial list of files in the directory, use DIR with a global
filename. (Global filenames are described in the Detail section below.)
For example, to display all the files in the \DOCS directory on the C drive
that begin with the letters CHAP:
Type: [F5]dir c:\docs\chap
.
* EJ

To display an extended directory of all the files with the extension .TMP in
the WORKING directory or any of its subdirectories:
Type: [F5]dir \working+\
.tmpEl
*

• Directories
• Filenames
• Number of characters in
file, includina spaces, tabs
and embedded commands
• Date and time file was
last saved or stored to
disk.
• Total number of files and
characters (bytes).
•Total number of bytes
available.
• Total number of
subdirectories.

2-21
DIR (confd)

DETAIL Global Name. A global name allows you to display a partial directory of
files that meet certain criteria, such as all files that have the extension
.TMP or all files in directories that start with DOC. You create a global
filename or directory name by using wild card characters. (Just like in a
card game, wild card characters represent other characters.) The wild card
characters that can be used with a directory are:
The Asterisk (*)
• When used with DIR, an asterisk (*) means that any character(s) can
occupy the remaining positions in the filename or extension.
• If the asterisk appears alone in the filename or extension, read the
asterisk as the phrase "all files."
• If any characters precede the asterisk, read it as the phrase "all files
that begin with ..." those characters.
• The asterisk represents any number of characters, from one to eight.
For example, ESZJdir f*. lists all files that begin with the letter f.

The Question Mark (?)

While an asterisk represents any number of characters, the question mark
(?) represents only one. Use it in a file name or extension when executing
the DIR command to indicate that any character can occupy that position.
For example, ESfldir chap?.doc finds CHAP1.DOC and CHAP2.DOC but
not CHAP1O.DOC because 10 is two characters, not one.
You can mix the question mark and asterisk in a single filename (for
example, EEZJdir ch?book.
).
*

Search Wild Cards

You can use most of the same wild card characters used when searching
for text (i.e., 0 ,Q, ELD, □, 1,0, and 0 but not Q, D, 0/ or Q ). For example:
BSD dir chap CO .doc
finds CHAP11.DOC and CHAP14.DOC, but not CHAPTR.DOC because 0
stands for any number. Refer to "Searching for Text" in Chapter 3 for
more information on these wild card characters.

NOTE #1 Directory Display. If you use wild cards to build a XyWrite directory that
crosses path boundaries (by using the + option or wild cards in the
pathname), XyWrite adds the location of each file to the right side of the
directory display.

2-22
(confd) DIR

NOTE #2 Switch Combinations. You can use the following switch combinations to
display different types of directories:
/na/fi Displays a list of filenames only. No file information, no
subdirectories.
/na/pa Displays a list of subdirectories in the current directory, and
appends a list of available drives. (All entries are enclosed in
square brackets; drive letters are preceded by a hyphen.)

NOTE #3 Keeping the Directory Up-To-Date. Whenever you execute DIR, you get
a list current to that moment. That list is not automatically updated when
you rename, delete, or add files from the command line. You must execute
the DIR command again to update the list.

NOTE #4 Saving the Directory. If you want to, you can save the directory to a file
on disk. After you type DIR to display the directory, type SAVE or
STORE. The directory is saved to a file named DIRECTRY.TMP (unless
you specify a different name).

NOTE #5 Printing the Directory. You can easily print out the directory. Type DIR
to display the directory, then enter PRINT. XyWrite displays the message
"Print directory? (Y/N)." Press Y to print the directory, N to cancel the
command.

NOTE #6 Sorting the Directory. The directory defaults to listing files alphabetically
by filename. Use the DSORT command to sort by extension, date, path, or
to sort in reverse order.

NOTE #7 Date Format. You can change the format of the date in the directory
display by including the FZ setting in the default file. Refer to the
Customization Guide for more information.

NOTE #8 Read-Only Display. By default, the directory display is read-only. If you

prefer to have directory displays that you can edit, enter the following
setting in the default file:
df xd=0
Refer to "Default Settings" in the Customization Guide for more
information.

NOTE #9 Document Summary Information. The document summary information

that is displayed by adding the /SU switch to the DIR command is
established by the HI and HT default settings. Refer to "Default Settings"
in the Customization Guide for more information.

2-23
Displaying a Directory with Text DIRL

FORMAT ESZJDIRL/szp d:\path-v\globalname

l$w is one of the following optional switches:
/na Display filenames and subdirectory names only.
/f i Display filenames and file information only.
/pa Display subdirectory names only.
/su Display file summary information.
d: (optional) is the drive letter.
\path+ (optional) is the name of the directory you want listed. If you
include the plus sign, XyWrite lists all files in the specified directory and
its subdirectories. If you omit the path name, XyWrite uses the default
directory.
globalname (optional) is the global filename.
MENU Not a menu option.

PURPOSE DIRL (Long Directory) performs the same functions as the DIR command,
except that it also displays the first few lines of text in each file. DIRL
enables you to browse through your files.
Also covered here is the DI setting, which lets you modify how the long
directory is displayed.

ACTION Displaying a Directory with Lines of Text

To display a directory along with the first lines of text from each file (for
filenames ending in .DOC):
Type: [Fsldirl * .docM
Result: A list appears, showing all filenames in the current directory
ending in .DOC, and including lines of text under each filename. It might
look like the list in the illustration below.

2-24
(confd) DIRL

NOTE #1 Text Lines Displayed. The number of text lines displayed will vary from
file to file, due to program rules that attempt to cut off displayed text at a
logical point (e.g., at a period).

Action Customizing the Long Directory Display

XyWrite lets you control the following three facets of the DIRL display: (1)
showing the file size in units other than bytes; (2) changing the number of
text lines displayed; and (3) packing the lines of text—by removing
carriage returns. (Packed text lets you view more of the file in a few lines.)
To change these settings, change the DI setting in the default file. Its
format is:
df di=k,l,p
k is the number the file size is to be divided by. You could set it to 1024
to get file size in kilobytes, or set it to 60 to get an approximate line
count. The default for k is 1.
I is the approximate number of lines of text displayed. The default for I
is 6.
p packs the text. Set p to 1 to remove carriage returns, 0 to keep them.
The default for p is 0.

To display the file size in kilobytes (KB) and to display about four lines of
packed text, add the following setting to your default file. (Refer to the
Customization Guide for more information on the default file.)
df di=1024,4,1
If you apply this setting to the previous example, the display would look
like this—the text appears disordered since it is packed:

2-25
Running Programs Under XyWrite DO

Format ESZJDO/sw d:path\program filename

/sw is one or both of the following optional switches:
/nv (No Verify) is an optional switch that overrides the verification
message.
/x is an optional switch that freezes the XyWrite display while the other
program runs.
d: (optional) is the drive letter of the drive you want.
path (optional) is the sequence of path names from the current or root
directory to the program. It is further described in your DOS manual.
program is the program you want to run. The program must have an .EXE
or .COM extension. Omit the extension when entering the name.
filename (optional) is the file you want to run once the program is up and
running.
menu Not a menu option.

Purpose DO lets you run a program under XyWrite (memory permitting)—pro­

grams such as Lotus 1-2-3, DBase III, WordProof, BASIC A, and others.
When you quit the program, control returns to XyWrite, exactly as you left
it. The DO command works only with programs whose filenames have the
.COM or .EXE extensions.

Because you may encounter an error that prohibits you from returning to
XyWrite, it is a good idea to save your files before running the other
program. To reduce the chance that you might accidentally lose data,
XyWrite displays the message "Suspending XyWrite-save files to
AUTOSAV.TMP files? (Y/N)" if there are open files that have been edited
since they were last saved. Press Y to create the temporary backup files
before starting the program, or N to start the program without creating the
files. (Refer to 'Default Settings" in the Customization Guide for more
information about AUTOSAV.TMP files.) If you include the /NV switch
with the command, XyWrite runs the other program without creating the
backup files and without displaying the prompt.

Action Running DOS Programs Under XyWrite

This example would first load BASIC, then would automatically run the
BASIC program called TRAINER.
Type: [F5|do basic trainer£3
Result: If there are open files that have been modified since the last time
they were saved, XyWrite displays the message "Suspending XyWrite-
save files to AUTOSAV.TMP files? (Y/N)." If you are confident that the

2-26
(confd) DO

program you are running will not cause any errors that prevent you from
getting back to XyWrite, press N. Otherwise, press Y to create backup
copies of your files. XyWrite then runs the program BASIC. When you
are done with BASIC (that is, when you type the word SYSTEM), control
returns to XyWrite, exactly as you left it.

NOTE #1 Memory Requirements. For the DO command to work, there must be

enough memory to load the desired application in addition to XyWrite
and any open XyWrite files.

NOTE #2 Freezing the Display. When you issue the DO command, XyWrite clears
the screen before starting the specified program; when you end the
program, XyWrite restores the screen to its previous state. Depending on
the application, it may not be necessary to clear the screen, particularly if
the program you are running does not produce any on-screen messages.
In such cases, you can add the /X switch to the DO command to freeze the
screen display in its current state.

2-27
Running DOS Under XyWrite DOS

FORMAT ESZJDOS/szp (Option 1)

ESZJDOS/sw /C command (Option 2)
/sw is one or both of the following optional switches:
/nv (No Verify) is an optional switch that overrides the verification
message.
/z is an optional switch that turns off the EXIT prompt.
command (optional) is any DOS command or batch file.
MENU E3EEES

Purpose The DOS (Disk Operating System) command suspends XyWrite, then
loads and runs DOS. You have two options. With Option 1, the familiar
DOS prompt (A>, B>, or C>) appears, along with a prompt that reminds
you how to return to XyWrite. You can run any DOS commands or
programs you wish. When done, you type EXIT to return to XyWrite,
exactly as you left it. XyWrite is frozen in place while you are in DOS.
Option 2 runs just a single DOS command or batch file, and immediately
returns control to XyWrite when done. (In Option 2, DOS /C stands for
"DOS Command.") Use Option 2 when you want to run a DOS command
from a user program file.

Because you may encounter an error that prohibits you from returning to
XyWrite, it is a good idea to save your files before running DOS. To
reduce the chance that you might accidentally lose data, XyWrite displays
the message "Suspending XyWrite—save files to AUTOSAV.TMP files?
(Y/N)" if you have open files that have been edited since they were last
saved. Press Y to create the temporary backup files before loading DOS,
or N to load DOS without creating the files. (Refer to "Default Settings" in
the Customization Guide for more information about AUTOSAV.TMP files.)
If you include the /NV switch with the command, XyWrite loads DOS
without creating the backup files and without displaying the prompt.

Action Running DOS Under XyWrite

(Option 1) To suspend XyWrite and run DOS:

1. Be sure the path statement in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file includes the

location ofCOMMAND.COM.

2-28
(confd) DOS

2. Type: [F5]dos/nv/zM
Result: The display clears and the DOS prompt appears. Because the
command includes the optional switches, XyWrite does not display the
verification prompt that gives you the opportunity to create temporary
backup files, nor does it display the prompt that tells you how to get
back to XyWrite.

3. Now that you have entered DOS, you can use any commands or
programs that do not remain resident after execution. For instance,
you can copy disks, check disks (CHKDSK) or change the system date
(DATE). Or you can run application programs, such as Lotus 1-2-3,
dBase III, or BASIC, as long as there is enough memory.

4. To return to XyWrite, at the DOS prompt:

Type: exitl^M]

ACTION Running a Single DOS Command or Batch File

(Option 2) To run only a single DOS command or batch file (for example, DATE):
Type: [F5]dos /c date 12-13-91S
Result: XyWrite displays the message "Suspending XyWrite—save files to
AUTOSAV.TMP files? (Y/N)." After you respond, the display switches to
DOS, the command (DATE) is executed, and then control is immediately
returned to XyWrite. All DOS commands can be run using this method
(except those that remain resident, such as MODE, PRINT, and
GRAPHICS).

2-29
DOS (confd)

NOTE #1 XyWrite is Suspended. To demonstrate how XyWrite truly is suspended

while control is with DOS: If you are in the middle of printing a file when
you enter DOS, the printing stops; when you return to XyWrite, printing
continues exactly where it left off.

Note #2 DOS Requirement In order to execute the DOS command, XyWrite must
be able to find COMMAND.COM. It can be in the current directory, or its
location can be defined in the path statement in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
(Refer to your DOS manual or to the Overview at the beginning of this
chapter for more information about path statements.)

Another alternative, if you have extra memory, is to create a RAM drive

and copy COMMAND.COM into it. Then include a SET COMSPEC
command in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
For example:
set comspec=d:\command.com
For more information about the SET command, refer to your DOS manual.

also See Related Commands. The following DOS commands are found elsewhere
in this section, and can be executed from the command line on their own:
A:, ATTRIB, CHDIR, COPY, DEL, DIR, MKDIR, RMDIR, and RENAME.

The QUIT command also switches control to DOS, but quits XyWrite
altogether.

2-30
DSORT Sorting the Directory

FORMAT EM! DSORT order,modifier

order is based on DOS or Document Information statistics, and can be one
or two (separated by commas) of the following:
f sort by filename
e sort by extension
d sort by last saved date and time
s sort by size
p sort by path name
au sort by author (logon name)
lg sort by name of person who last saved the file
cd sort by creation date and time
pj sort by project number
rp sort by document retention period
cm sort by comment
ky sort by keyword
rv sort by revision number
modifier (optional) is either or both of:
r sort in reverse order
h add a header to top of directory
Menu escshesgei

PURPOSE DSORT (Directory Sort) sets the order in which filenames are displayed in
XyWrite directories. Once you set DSORT, it affects the listing of all
directories (on all drives) and stays in effect until you change it.

You can use the statistics maintained by DOS or by XyWrite to sort the
directory, or you can mix the two categories (see Examples below); you
can sort in forward or reverse order; and you can add a one-line header to
the directory, which shows the name of the directory.

ACTION Sorting the Directories

To set the order in which filenames are sorted, enter DSORT along with
one or two of the sort parameters F, D, E, S, and P. (When you include two
parameters, the first takes precedence over the second.) To reverse the
order, add an R. To add a header, add an H. Separate all parameters with
commas. For example:
Type: [Fsjdsort d,f,r,hE]
Result: This DSORT setting means that whenever you type DIR, the
filenames are listed by date last saved (D) in reverse order (R) from most
recent to oldest. Two files having the same date are in turn sorted by
filename (F), also in reverse order. A header (H) is included at the top of
the list.
2-31
DSORT (confd)

Examples Examples of Sorting Directories. These examples illustrate some of the

different ways you can sort directories.
[F5]dsort f 0—Sorts by filename, from A-Z.
[F5]dsort f.cd.rCT—Sorts by filename and creation date, both in reverse
order.
[F5]dsort e0—Sorts by extension, A-Z.
[EJdsort f,h0—Sorts by filename, A-Z, with a header.
[F5]dsort f,e,r0—Sorts by filename in reverse order (Z-A) and then by
extension, also in reverse order.
[F5]dsort f,e,r,h0—Same as the previous example, but with a header added.
Egdsort e.f @—Sorts by extension, then filename.
[F5]dsort auJS—Sorts by author, then filename.
[Fsldsort cd.rCT—Sorts by creation date, in reverse order.

note #1 Setting the Sort Order. STARTUP.INT contains a DSORT command that
automatically sets up the sort order as DSORT F,E (alphabetically by
filename and extension, with no header). Without the DSORT command,
the directory would be displayed as it is in DOS.

NOTE #2 Clearing the Sort Key. If you give the DSORT command without
arguments, then the directory is displayed as it would be in DOS.
Type: [FsJdsortQS

NOTE #3 How DSORT Works. DSORT sorts the filenames as they are read off the
disk—it does not rearrange the filenames as recorded on the disk.

NOTE #4 Document Information. XyWrite maintains statistics on all files you

create while Document Information is on (which is the default). See
"Default Settings" in the Customization Guide for information about the IO
(Information On/Off) default.

2-32
 EDITOR

FORMAT C>EDITOR/e# d:file,d:startup

EDITOR is entered at the DOS prompt, unlike most commands in this
manual.
/e# (optional) is the amount of expanded memory XyWrite uses in units of
1024 bytes. (See Note #1.) If omitted, XyWrite uses up to 4MB.
d: (optional) is the drive where the file is stored.
file (optional) is the name of the file you want called to the display once
XyWrite is running.
startup (optional) is the name of an alternate initialization file. If omitted,
XyWrite runs STARTUP.INT.
MENU Not a menu item.

PURPOSE EDITOR loads and runs XyWrite from DOS. You use EDITOR when you
first start up XyWrite, as the illustration shows. XyWrite, in turn, runs a
program called STARTUP.INT, which establishes starting values for a
variety of things, such as keyboard and printer files, defaults, etc.

If you want, you can type in a filename after the word EDITOR—that file
will be loaded into the display once XyWrite is running. You can also
include the name of an alternate startup file for XyWrite to run after it is
loaded. The choices are:
• Running XyWrite
A>EDITOR
• Running XyWrite and Calling a File
A> EDITOR d:filename
• Running XyWrite and a Startup File
A>EDITOR ,d:startup
• Running XyWrite, Running a Startup File, and Calling a File
A> EDITOR d:filename,d:startup

You can add the optional /E switch to any of the command options shown
above if you want to increase or decrease the amount of expanded
memory used by XyWrite (see Note #1).

|EDITOR J
f Oedltor ram
n
1P
; QUIT
L
|

DOS XYWRITE

2-33
EDITOR (confd)

ACTION Running XyWrite

Start at the DOS prompt. To run XyWrite:
Type: editorS
Result: XyWrite is loaded and displayed, the file STARTUP.INT is run,
and finally the title screen appears. The title screen clears automatically
after an instant.

ACTION Running XyWrite and Calling a File

Start at the DOS prompt. To run XyWrite and call a file:
Type: editor chapter.docCT
Result: XyWrite is loaded and displayed, the file STARTUP.INT is run,
and then file CHAPTER.DOC is loaded into the display (from the default
drive).

ACTION Running XyWrite and an Alternate Startup File

Start at the DOS prompt. To run XyWrite and an alternate startup file:
Type: editor,startup.tmp0
Result: XyWrite is loaded and displayed, and the file STARTUP.TMP is
run instead of STARTUP.INT. (Notice the comma before the name of the
startup file.

NOTE #1 Expanded Memory. If you are using a computer that has been set up
with expanded memory that conforms to LIM specification 4.0 or higher,
XyWrite automatically uses up to 4MB of it, freeing conventional memory
for other purposes. The /E switch allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of expanded memory used by XyWrite. For example, if you do
not want XyWrite to use any expanded memory, at the DOS prompt:
Type: editor/eO
If you want XyWrite to use 2MB of expanded memory, at the DOS
prompt:
Type: editor/e2000

NOTE #2 Restoring a Logged Session. The menus give you the option of saving the
current window settings, including window number and size, filename,
current view, bookmarks, and cursor position for each window. If you
logged the previous XyWrite session before quitting, you can use the
Restore Session feature to return to where you were when you exited.
After starting XyWrite with the EDITOR command, press Ictri]L to display
the Log/Restore Session dialog box, activate the Restore Session radio
button, and press CT.

2-34
EXIT Returning to XyWrite from DOS

FORMAT c>exit

EXIT is entered at the DOS prompt, unlike most commands in this

manual.
MENU Not a menu item.

Purpose EXIT returns you to XyWrite from DOS as shown in the illustration below.
You type EXIT at the DOS prompt. (EXIT is not a command you can type
at the XyWrite command line.) EXIT works only if DOS is running under
XyWrite—that is, if DOS was entered using the DOS command (described
earlier in this section).

Action Returning to XyWrite from DOS

Start at the DOS prompt. To return to XyWrite:
Type: exitCT
Result: XyWrite is displayed and control is resumed where you left off
(see the illustration).

NOTE EXIT vs. EDITOR. Notice that you use EXIT rather than EDITOR to re­
enter XyWrite. EDITOR would unnecessarily load and run a second copy
of XyWrite.

ALSO SEE The DOS Command. EXIT is used in conjunction with the XyWrite DOS
command.

2-35
Finding a File FIND, FINDL

FORMAT [^71 FIND d:filename (Option 1)

RTfl FINDL d:filename (Option 2)
d: (optional) is the drive letter.
filename is the file or group of files you want to list, and can include wild
cards.
MENU

Purpose The FIND and FINDL (Find Long) commands search through all files on a
disk for a file you specify. The FIND commands are especially useful if
you use subdirectories (such as on a hard disk)—FIND and FINDL search
through all subdirectories on the specified drive and list all occurrences of
that filename. In addition, FINDL lists the first few lines of text in each
file.

These commands fill several needs. The most obvious is to locate a file
anywhere on your disk. Since they display all files with the same name,
you will know if you've saved the same file in more than one subdirec­
tory. If you have several different files with the same or similar names,
FINDL can help you identify which one contains the information you
want.

FIND and FINDL accept wild card symbols to help you find sets of files.
For example, FIND *. displays a list of every file on the disk you specify.
Refer to "Global Filenames" under the DIR command description for
more information about wild cards.

Action Finding a File

(Option 1) To find a file on a given disk:
Type: [Fsjfind c:chapter1 g]
Result: All files named CHAPTER1 on drive C will be listed.

Action Finding a File and Displaying Text

(Option 2) To find a file on a given disk and display the first few lines of text as well
as the path and filename:
Type: [Fsjfindl c:address£3
Result: All files on drive C named ADDRESS will be listed, along with the
first few lines of text from each file.

2-36
(confd) FIND, FINDL

ACTION Finding Groups of Files

(Options 1&2) To find files with similar names, use the same wild card symbols you use
with the DIR command. For example:
Type: [Fsjfind dchapter
.
* £0
Result: A list of all files on drive D starting with CHAPTER will be
displayed. If you type the command FINDL instead, the display will also
include the first few lines of text for those files.

NOTE #1 Customizing the Display. You can use the DI setting to customize the
FINDL display, just as you do with the DIRL display. Also, the FZ
(Format Date) default setting affects the FIND and FINDL display.

Refer to the description of DIR in this chapter and "Default Settings" in

the Customization Guide for more information on the DI and FZ settings.

NOTE #2 Order of Displayed Files. FIND and FINDL display files in the order
they are stored on disk. They do not sort the files.

NOTE #3 Menu Option. FINDL is not a menu option.

ALSO SEE Directory Command. You can use the DIR and DIRL commands to
perform the same functions as FIND and FINDL. The command format
is:
DIR\+\/t7emwze
DTRL\+\/i/ename

2-37
Stopping the Printer KILPRN

FORMAT bfl'VZl KILPRN (Option 1)

R5TZ1 KILPRN O (Option 2)
Q (optional) kills all files waiting in the printer queue.
KILTYP (abbreviated KT) is identical to KILPRN.
ABBREV KP and KP Q
MENU EJEHTnES

Purpose KILPRN (Kill Print) stops the output of a file to a printer (PRINT). It also
stops the printing of a file to a file (PRINTF).

Action Stopping the Printout of the Current File

(Option 1) To kill the printing of a file:
Type: (Fsjkilprng]
Result: This causes XyWrite to immediately stop sending text to the printer.
However, the printer will continue printing until its text buffer (or the
print spooler) is empty. (Some printers have no buffer and will stop
immediately.) If you wish, you can stop the printer by turning it off and
back on; however, if you use continuous feed paper, you must adjust the
paper before turning the printer on so its top edge is in line with the print
head.

Action Clearing the Printer Queue

(Option 2) Issuing more than one PRINT command causes files to be queued
according to the order in which they were sent to the printer. To kill the
printing of the current file and clear the printer queue of all other files
waiting to be printed:
Type: [Fslkilpm q[7il

NOTE Suspending Printing. You can use the menus to suspend printing of the
current job rather than killing it. When you suspend printing, you can
resume later at the point at which you stopped. To use this menu option,
choose Manage Jobs from the File menu.

2-38
LOGON, LOGOFF Logging On and Off

FORMAT [WJ LOGON name,password

LOGOFF
name is the user name assigned to you.
password (optional) is your identification code.
MENU Not a menu option.

Purpose Before you can use XyWrite, you must log on to identify yourself to the
program. On stand-alone versions, the logon process is performed
automatically when you start up. On LAN (local area network) versions,
the LOGON command is displayed on the command line as soon as
XyWrite is loaded. Logon names are used by XyWrite's Document
Information and Redlining features to identify who created and edited
files. On LAN versions, logon names have the additional benefit of
allowing you to establish your own system preferences, which are
automatically loaded after you log on.
The LOGOFF command clears the screen and signs you off of XyWrite.
Although XyWrite is still loaded, you cannot call, create, or edit a
document without logging on again (see Note #1). LOGOFF is an optional
command: when you exit XyWrite, you are automatically logged off.
However, if you are working in an environment where several users share
a computer, you might want to develop the habit of logging off when you
leave the computer for an extended period. Otherwise, any files created or
edited by the next person who sits down at the computer will be
associated with your logon name.

Action Logging onto XyWrite with a Password

To log onto XyWrite if your user name is BLACK and your password is
WHITE:
1. Type: [g] logon black£3
Result: XyWrite prompts you for your password.
2. Type: white 0
Result: The cursor doesn't move and the password does not appear on
the screen when you type it. When you press H, XyWrite checks the
logon directory to see if there is a BLACK.LOG file that includes the
password WHITE. When it finds it, XyWrite loads the default settings
and customization files listed in the file, and then allows you to execute
any of the XyWrite commands.

2-39
LOGON, LOGOFF (confd)

TIP You can log on with one step by typing your user name, a comma, and
your password. For example:
[F5] logon black,whiteS
When you enter your password in this fashion, it appears on the screen
when you type it.

Action Logging onto XyWrite Without a Password

If your logon file does not include a password, you can log onto XyWrite
in one step. For example, to log on if your user name is WRITER:
Type: |F5] logon write rCT
Result: XyWrite checks the logon directory to see if there is a
WRITER.LOG file. When it finds it, XyWrite loads the default settings
and customization files listed in the file, and then allows you to execute
any of the XyWrite commands.

Action Logging Off XyWrite

To log off XyWrite:
1. Clear documents from the display using STORE or ABORT. (Be sure to
clear files from all windows.)
2. Type: [F5] logoff [TH
Result: You can no longer use XyWrite although it is still loaded into
memory.

NOTE #1 XyWrite Settings. When you log off of XyWrite, all of the XyWrite settings
that were in effect remain in memory. Unless you are certain that you
were the last one to use XyWrite at a particular workstation, it is a good
idea to quit and reload XyWrite, rather than just log on. That way, you
know exactly what settings are in effect. To quit XyWrite:
Type: [F5]quitCTl
To reload it, at the DOS prompt:
Type: editor CT

NOTE #2 Limited Functions. Before you log on, there are a few XyWrite commands
that you can execute. These commands include RUN, LOAD, and
DEFAULT, which are commands used to load initial XyWrite settings.

2-40
MERGE Merging One File into Another

FORMAT MMERGE d:filename

d: (optional) is the letter you specify for the drive you want. If you omit
the drive letter, the default drive is used.
filename is the file to be copied into your file.
ABBREV EE] ME d:filename
MENU Not a menu option

Purpose MERGE copies the entire text of the file you specify into the file you are
working on. The text is inserted at the cursor location. Its general form is:
m MERGE d:filename

The obvious application for MERGE is to copy one entire file into the one
you're working on. However, this command is also great for inserting so-
called boilerplate text into a file—that is, text which is used repeatedly.
Keep each boilerplate section in a separate file.

Action Merging One File into Another

To copy a file named BOILER.PLT from drive B into the file you are
working on:
1. Move the cursor to the position where you want the text to be inserted.
2. Type: [F5]merge b:boiler.pltH
Result: This command copies the contents of BOILER.PLT from drive B
into the file currently open. The text is inserted at the cursor location in
the text field. The cursor finishes up at the end of the inserted text.
BOILER.PLT is unchanged.

NOTE RFT:DCA and L3P File Formats. The MERGE command automatically
converts files from RFT:DCA and L3P formats into XyWrite format when
it copies them.

2-41
Creating a New File NEW

FORMAT EEZJNEW (Option 1)

[•2^X1 NEW d:newfile (Option 2)
taWfl NEW d:newfile,d:existingfile (Option 3)
d: (optional) is the letter you specify for the drive you want. If you omit
the drive letter, the default drive is used.
newfile (optional) is the name of the new file being created.
existingfile (optional) is the name of the existing file to be copied (merged)
into the new file.
ABBREV EE2JNE d:newfile,d:existingfile
menu ebes

Purpose NEW creates a new file in a new window so you can begin typing. (This
new file is created in memory—see Note #1.) When you create a new file,
you have three options. The formats for these three choices are:
• Creating an Untitled File
ESS new (Option 1)
• Creating a New File with an Assigned Name
ESO NEW newfile (Option 2)
• Creating a New File and Copying into It
ESQ NEW newfile,existingfile (Option 3)

ACTION Creating a New Untitled File

(Option 1) If you don't plan to save your file on disk for later reference, or if you
want to name it after you have finished it, you don't need to assign it a
name. For example, if you are writing a letter to a friend, chances are you
just want a printed copy to mail, not a copy on disk. To create an untitled
file:
Type: iFslnewfZil
Result: XyWrite opens a window for text entry.

When you are finished with the untitled file, you can ABORT it to clear
the display and close the window—your file will be gone from memory. If
you decide you want a copy of this file on disk, use either the SAVE or
STORE command rather than ABORT. XyWrite will ask you to specify a
filename for the file when it stores it.

2-42
(confd) NEW

Action Creating a New Titled File

(Option 2) If you plan to save your new file on disk, you need to assign a name to it.
One way to do that is to assign the name when you create the file.
1. Decide on a name for your new file. For example, CHAPTER.DOC.
(For rules on allowable filenames, see Note #2 which follows.)
2. Type: [F5]new chapter.docS

Result: This example allows you to begin typing a new file,

CHAPTER.DOC, into memory. XyWrite will not create the file if one with
the same name already exists on the default disk. (The new file is not
actually created on disk until you SAVE or STORE it.)

Action Creating a New File and Copying Into It

(Option 3) To create a new file and copy an existing file into it:
1. Decide on a name for your new file (for example, CHAPTER.DOC)
and decide which existing file you would like to copy into the new one
(say LESSON.ONE).
2. Type: [0new chapter.doc,lesson.oneS
Result: This example creates a new file named CHAPTER.DOC and
copies the existing file named LESSON.ONE into it.

TIP You can combine options 1 and 3 to copy an existing file into a new,
untitled file. For example:
Type: [F5]new .lesson.one0

Note #1 Saving the New File. NEW creates the new file in memory, not on the
disk. The file is not saved on disk until you SAVE or STORE it.

2-43
NEW (confd)

NOTE #2 Naming a File. The rules for naming a file in XyWrite are the same as
they are in DOS. The general format is:
filename.ext
filename is from one to eight characters in length
.ext (optional) is an extension, which can be one to three characters in
length. There are no reserved extensions in XyWrite.
Valid characters include:
Letters A-Z, numbers 0-9
! @ #$% A &()_-{} ‘ ’
Invalid characters are:.
* + = ,.?"/\[];: |<>
and ASCII characters less than 32.

Any place in this manual where a filename appears, you can preface the
name with a drive letter and path name. (If either is left off, the default
drive or path is used.) For example:
Format d:\path\filename.ext
Example c:\working\chapter.doc

Reserved Names. Certain names are reserved for special uses and cannot
be used as filenames: STARTUP. INT, FO.TMP, REVIEW.TMP,
DIRECTRY.TMP, AUX, CON, COMI, COM2, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, PRN.

NOTE #3 Checking for Filenames. If you try to use a filename that already exists in
the current directory, XyWrite displays the message "Filename already
exists" and waits for you to supply a new name and re-execute the
command.

NOTE #4 Document Summary. When you create a new file, XyWrite maintains
summary information about it. The summary information includes such
data as the name of the original author, name of the person who last
modified the file, comments, and keywords. The IO (Information On)
default setting turns the collection of this information on and off. Refer to
"Default Settings" in the Customization Guide for more information.

2-44
PRINT Printing a File

FORMAT tawdPRINT/sw d:filenamefi-b,m (Option 1)

EH3 PRINT/sw ,a-b,m (Options 2 & 3)
/sw is one of the following optional switches:
/nv (No Verify) overrides the verification option (see Note #1).
/rv (Reverse) prints the pages in reverse order (see Note #2).
/nc (Non-Collated) prints uncollated copies (see Note #3).
/# is the number of copies you want printed.
d: (optional) is the drive you want. If omitted, the default drive is used.
filename (optional) is the name of the file to be printed. If omitted, the
displayed file or selected block is printed.
a-b (optional) is the range of pages to be printed. If omitted, all pages are
printed. You can specify up to five ranges with a-b/c-d/e-flg-h/i-j.
m is a modifier:
o (print odd pages only)
e (print even pages only)
p (stop printing after each page)
p can be used with o or e in any order.
TYPE (abbreviated to TY) is identical to PRINT.
ABBREV BSZlPRN/sw dfilename,a-b,m
MENU [30 ESS

PURPOSE print sends text to your printer for printout. The text can originate from
a file stored on disk (Option 1) or from the displayed file (Options 2 and
3). You can print any number of copies or range of pages you wish, print
odd and even pages to produce two-sided copies, print uncollated copies,
print the pages in reverse order, or request the printer to pause after each
page (for sheet feeding).

The general forms are:

• Printing a Stored File (Option 1)
RH71 PRINT dfilename
• Printing the Displayed File (Option 2)
EHU PRINT
• Printing a Selected Block of Text (Option 3)
0HUPRINT

2-45
PRINT (corn'd)

Action Printing a Stored File

(Option 1) To print a file directly from a disk:
1. Make sure the printer is turned on, the On-Line (Ready) light is on, and
the proper printer file is loaded.
2. Type: £§]print chapter.doc,3-12/23-26,p0
Result: This prints one copy of pages 3 through 12 and 23 through 26 from
file CHAPTER.DOC, pausing after each page (press Q to resume). Once
printing begins, you are free to continue editing while printing continues
in the background. You are free to change default drives or change the
current directory. (However, do not remove the floppy disk while the file
is printing—doing so causes printing to stop.)

Examples Examples of Printing a Stored File. The document being printed is

named CHAPTER.DOC.
ES0pnnt/2 chapter.doc
Prints two copies of the entire file.
ES0print/3 chapter.doc,3
Prints three copies of page 3 only.
EHZJprint/rv chapter.doc,3-
Prints from page 3 to the end of file, one copy only, in reverse order.
ESI print chapter.doc,-12
Prints from the start of file to page 12, one copy only.

2-46
(cant'd) PRINT

BHOpnnt/nc/5 chapter.doc,3-12
Prints five uncollated copies of pages 3 thru 12 (see Note #3).
Ml print chapter.doc,3-12/18/23-26
Prints one copy of pages 3 thru 12,18, and 23 thru 26.
ESHprint chapter.doc,,p
Prints one copy of all pages, pausing after each page. Notice the two
commas when no pages are specified.
ESQ print chapter.doc,3-12,e
Prints one copy of even pages from 3-12 (see Note #10).

ACTION Printing the Displayed File

(Option 2) To print the file currently displayed:
Type: [F5]print/2 ,3-12,pH
Result: This prints two copies of pages 3 through 12 of the file currently
displayed, pausing after each page. Once printing begins, you are free to
continue editing while printing continues in the background.

When you issue PRINT with a displayed file, XyWrite first copies the
displayed file to a temporary file. The printer prints from the temporary
file, freeing you to return to the original file (or any other file) to continue
editing and saving the file. (The temporary file is deleted when printing is
done.)

EXAMPLES Examples of Printing the Displayed File. These examples are similar to
those on the previous page except the filename CHAPTER.DOC is
omitted. The commas must be included as shown.
rann print
Prints one copy of all pages from the display (without pausing).
ESOprint/2 ,-12
Prints two copies of the first page thru page 12.
ESO print ,,p
Prints all pages, pausing after each page.
FM print ,3-12,e
Prints one copy of even pages from 3 to 12 (see Note #10).

2-47
PRINT (confd)

Action Printing a Selected Block of Text

(Option 3) To print a block of text currently being displayed:
1. Use [F3] (or any other select key) to select the block of text you want to
print. Include any formatting commands (such as TS, IP, LM, RM) you
want to affect the printout.
2. Type: [F5]print0

Result: To verify that you want to print the selected block and not the
entire displayed file, XyWrite displays the message 'Trint the selected
block? Y/N." Press "Y" to print the block, or "N" to cancel the command.
(You can override the message by adding the /NV switch to the
command.)

When you print a selected block, all formatting commands outside the
selected block are ignored. Therefore, you might not get the format you
expect.

NOTE #1 Verification Message. You can disable the verification message by

changing the EP (Error Prompt) setting. Refer to "Default Settings" in the
Customization Guide.

NOTE #2 Reverse Option. The /RV (Reverse) switch is designed for use with laser
printers that output the pages so that the first page is on the bottom of the
stack and the last page is on the top. If you add the /RV switch to the
PRINT command, you don't have to reorganize the pages after printing.

NOTE #3 Uncollated Option. The /NC (Non-Collated) switch lets you print
multiple copies a page at a time. To use this option, you must have a
printer that can output uncollated copies (for example, one of the Hewlett
Packard LaserJet series), and you must use it in conjunction with the /#
switch.

NOTE #4 Pointing at a Filename. You can also point to the filename of the file you
want to print. Just display a directory, type PRINT (and any optional
arguments) on the command line, put the cursor on the name of the file
you want to print, and press [F9]. If you inadvertently leave the cursor on
the command line, XyWrite will display the message 'Trint the
directory? Y/N."

NOTE #5 Load Printer File. When printing, you should have the correct printer file
loaded. Look at the printer setup menu to find the name of your printer
file(s). (See the description of the SETP command in the Customization
Guide for more information.)

2-48
(confd) PRINT

NOTE #6 Set Page Number. When you use the SP (Set Page No.) command to
change page numbers, those are the numbers used by PRINT when you
print selected pages. If you prefer to have PRINT refer to the sequential
page number (e.g., the tenth page out of the printer, regardless of printed
page number) then change the SQ setting in the default file. For more
information on SP, see Chapter 4. For information on SQ, see "Default
Settings" in the Customization Guide.
NOTE #7 Print Queue. Because a printer can only process one job at a time,
XyWrite keeps track of your requests and lines them up in a print queue. If
you edit a file before it reaches the top of the print queue, XyWrite prints
the current version of the file, not the version that existed when you
issued the PRINT command. (The exception to this rule is a file that was
printed from the display rather than from disk; because the PRINT
command immediately makes a temporary copy of a displayed file, edits
made after the PRINT command was issued are not printed.)
You can review the status of the queue, change the order of files in it, or
delete a file from the queue by choosing Manage Jobs from the File menu.
NOTE #8 Formatting. When you issue the PRINT command, XyWrite
automatically formats the file before printing it. Format means to carry out
the embedded commands (represented by triangles in the text)—that is,
inserting any running headers or footers, footnotes, margin offsets, page
numbers, and widow/orphan page break decisions. PRINT also prepares
the file for the printer by inserting printer codes selected in the printer file
for typeface, type size, vertical spacing, and whatever else is specified.
NOTE #9 Pause and Prompt While Printing. You can insert the PR (Prompt) and
PA (Pause) commands anywhere in the text. These enable you to stop
printing at that point and display a message such as "Change to
letterhead." Refer to "Printer Control" in Chapter 4 for more information.
NOTE #10 Double-Sided Printing. If you want to print on both sides of the page
but your printer does not support duplex printing, use the "o" and "e"
options:
1. First print the odd-side of the pages:
[F5]print report„o£3
2. Remove the pages and reorient them as required for printing on the
other side.
3. Print the even pages:
[F5]print report„eG3
NOTE #11 Kill Printer. To stop the file currently being printed, type KILPRN (or KP)
on the command line. The printer will not stop printing until the text
stored in its internal buffer empties. Use KP Q to kill all files in the queue.
2-49
Printing to a File PRINTF

FORMAT ESOPRINTF/sw d:filename,d:targetfile,a-b,m (Option 1)

E5ZJPRINTF/SW ,d:targetfile,a-b,m (Options 2 & 3)
/sw is one of the following switches:
/nv (No Verify) is an optional switch that overrides the verification option
(see Note #1).
/as (ASCII) is an optional switch that allows you to create an ASCII file
(see Note #2).
d: (optional) is the letter you specify for the drive you want.
filename (optional) is the name of the file to be processed.
targetfile (optional) is the file to which the output is sent. If omitted, the
file is printed to FO.TMP.
a-b (optional) is the range of pages to be printed to file. If omitted, all
pages are printed. You can specify up to five ranges: a-blc-dje-flg-hli-j.
mis a modifier:
o (print odd pages only)
e (print even pages only)
TYPEF (abbreviated TYF) is identical to PRINTF.
ABBREV r^TTl PRF d:filename^: targetfile,a-b,m
MENU E3EE3

PURPOSE PRINTF (Print to File) creates a printer-ready file on disk. XyWrite

processes the file exactly as it would for the printer, but sends it to a target
file instead.
PRINTF is often referred to as FORMAT. The printer-ready file it
produces, FO.TMP, contains printer codes. It also fully incorporates any
running headers, footers, footnotes, page breaks, page numbers, etc., as
well as the contents of any files you have selected with the IN (Include)
command.
You will find PRINTF useful for diagnosing and for making other internal
checks. Specific uses include:

• Checking the character substitution table. You can view the text in
the target file to see if XyWrite is substituting characters as you expect.
•Sending files to other devices, such as a port (COMI or COM2) or
line printer (LPT1 or LPT2). Simply use the device name as the target
file.
• Diagnosing the printer file. Also, printing a file with PRINTF allows
you to see exactly which printer codes XyWrite inserts into the file.

2-50
(confd) PRINTF

Just as the PRINT command has three options, so does PRINTF.

• Printing a Stored File to Disk (Option 1)

Km PRINTF d:filename,d:targetfile
Option 1 is the most general way to print to disk. You can specify any
filename on disk and print to a target file. If you omit the name of the
target file, XyWrite will name it FO.TMP.

• Printing the Displayed File to Disk (Option 2)

RM PRINTF ,d:targetfile
Option 2 allows you to print the displayed file to disk. The general form is
the same as Option 1, except you omit the first filename. (You can omit
the target file name as well—XyWrite will name it FO.TMP.) Note the
presence of a comma, which is required if you specify a target file.

• Printing a Block of Text to Disk (Option 3)

ESZJPRINTF/nv ,d:targetfile
Option 3 lets you print to disk only the selected block of text on the screen.

With any of these options, you can add the / AS switch to create an ASCII
version of the file (see Note #2).

ACTION Printing a Stored File to Disk

(Option 1) To print a file to disk:
1. Have in mind the name of the file you want to print to disk. We'll use
CHAPTER.DOC.
2. Decide on a name for the target file. We'll use RESULT.DOC. (If you
omit this name, XyWrite will use FO.TMP.)
3. Type: [F5]printf chapter.doc,result.doc,2-50

Result: This prints pages 2 through 5 of the file CHAPTER.DOC to a file

named RESULT.DOC.

ACTION Printing the Displayed File to Disk

(Option 2) The following steps show the simplest use of the PRINTF command.
1. Display the file that you want printed to disk.
2. Type: [F5]printf0

Result: The file is printed to the target file named FO.TMP.

2-51
PRINTF (confd)

EXAMPLES You also have the ability in option 2 of naming the target file and printing
only certain pages.
ESOprintf,result.doc
Prints the displayed file to RESULT.DOC.
EHZJprintf,result.doc.2-5
Prints only pages 2 thru 5 of the displayed file to RESULT.DOC.
R5TZ1 print! „2-5
Prints only pages 2 thru 5 of the displayed file to FO.TMP.

NOTE #1 Verification Message. You can disable the verification message by

changing the EP (Error Prompt) setting. For details, refer to "Default
Settings" in the Customization Guide.

NOTE #2 ASCII File. When you add the /AS switch to the PRINTF command,
XyWrite creates a target file that is stripped of all embedded commands.
This allows you to eliminate all format commands unique to XyWrite—for
example «MDBO» and «MDUL». You might find this helpful when
sending a file to someone using a different word processor.
NOTE #3 Print Queue. You cannot issue a PRINTF command while XyWrite is
printing a document or while there are files in the print queue.

NOTE #4 What Specifically Does PRINTF Do? The following changes are made to
a file when it is processed by PRINTF.
1. All embedded triangles are removed and replaced with hard text and
spaces, exactly as with PRINTS. These changes are listed under the
PRINTS command.
2. PRINTF also processes the file through the printer file. As a result, the
target file has printer codes embedded in it. Examples of these codes
are given in the following statements.
• All character modes are converted to printer codes.
• Line Ending (LE), Paragraph Ending (PE), File Begin (FB), File End
(FE), and Page End (PG) printer codes are inserted into the target
file.
• Any default settings specified in the printer file take effect (unless
they are explicitly overwritten by settings in the text).

3. PRINTF processes the file through the character substitution table in

the printer file. This enables you to modify the way characters are
printed.

2-52
(confd) PRINTF

4. PRINTF merges into your file the contents of any files you have
specified with the IN (Include) or IG (Import Graphic) command.

NOTE #5 Printing a Target File. Once you use PRINTF to create a target file on
disk, you can print it using the DOS PRINT command. The conversion to
printer codes has already taken place with the original PRINTF.

NOTE #6 DOS Device Names. You can "print'' directly to or from DOS devices by
using the device name in place of the target file—for example, PRINTF
Chapter,LPT1. Valid devices are: COMI, COM2, LPT1, LPT2, etc. Text is
sent directly from the file or display.

2-53
Printing to the Screen PRINTS

FORMAT NM! PRINTS d:filename/a-b/m (Option 1)

E3H PRINTS ,a-b,m (Option 2)
d: (optional) is the letter you specify for the drive you want.
filename is the name of the file to be printed to screen.
a-b (optional) is the range of pages to be printed. If omitted, all pages are
printed. You can specify up to five ranges with a-b/c-d/e-flg-h/i-j.
m is a modifier:
o (print odd pages only)
e (print even pages only)
TYPES (abbreviated TYS) is identical to PRINTS.
ABBREV EfflPRS d:filename,a-b/m
MENU E3ESB

Purpose PRINTS (Print to Screen) displays a file on the screen almost as it would
be printed. It shows you all running headers, footers, footnotes, page
breaks, and page numbers. It does not display typefaces, type sizes, or
graphics, but is still a good way to preview a file to make sure it's correctly
formatted before printing it. If s much faster than printing, and you can
preview just a specific range of pages.

PRINTS is often referred to as REVIEW. The file it produces is called

REVIEW.TMP. Do not make edits to REVIEW.TMP. Return to the
original file to make changes.

Option 1 allows you to preview a file stored on a disk drive. Option 2 lets
you preview the file that is currently displayed. The general, simplified
forms are:
• Previewing a Stored File (Option 1)
bfrld PRINTS dfilename
• Previewing the Displayed File (Option 2)
prints

Action Previewing a Stored File

(Option 1) Let's say the name of the file you want to print to the screen is
CHAPTER.DOC.
Type: Sprints chapter.doc,2-5 S3
Result: This prints to the screen pages 2 through 5 of the file
CHAPTER.DOC. You can examine this file to get an idea of how
CHAPTER.DOC would print out on paper.
2-54
(confd) PRINTS

ACTION Previewing the Displayed File

(Option 2) To preview a file which is currently displayed:
1. Start with the file in the display.

2. Type: [F5]printsS

Result: The displayed file is printed to another window. (If there is a long
delay, refer to Note #2.) You can examine this file to get an idea of how it
would print out on paper.

NOTE #1 Speeding up PRINTS. When printing to the screen, a long file (over 20K)
may take over a minute. To speed this up, specify only the range of pages
you need, rather than the entire file. If you must print the entire file,
perform Option 1 with only one window open, to free up memory.

NOTE #2 Stopping PRINTS. The longer the file is, the longer it takes PRINTS to
complete its operation. If you find it is taking too long, use fctri] iBreakj. This
stops the process and displays what has been computed up to that point.

NOTE #3 What Specifically Does PRINTS Do? The following changes are made to
a file when it is processed by PRINTS. All embedded commands are
carried out by XyWrite as hard text and their triangles are removed.
Horizontal lines are inserted between pages, to indicate page breaks.
Other noticeable changes made by PRINTS include:
RH Running headers are incorporated into the text
RF Running footers are incorporated into the text
FN Footnotes are incorporated, with numbering
FD Soft page breaks are converted to hard breaks
PN Page numbers are inserted
DA Current date is inserted
TM Current time is inserted
RM Soft returns are converted to hard returns
TS Tabs are converted to series of spaces
TP Top margins are inserted as blank lines
BT Bottom margins are inserted as blank lines
OF Offset is incorporated as a shift in margins
LS Line spacing is incorporated as blank lines
WD Widow paragraph breaks take effect
OP Orphan paragraph breaks take effect
IX Index is extracted
TX Table of contents is extracted
Soft hyphens are converted to hard hyphens or are removed

2-55
PRINTS (confd)

PRINTS does not process the file through the printer file in the same way
that PRINTF does. As a result, the following statements hold true.
• All character modes remain unchanged. For instance, a word which
was originally underlined remains underlined.
• Justification is not apparent on the display.
• Printer codes are not embedded in the displayed file.

In addition, imported graphics and text merged with the IN (Include)

command are not displayed.

NOTE #4 Range of Pages. The same rules that apply to the PRINT command apply
to PRINTS for printing a specified range of pages. (See the examples
under the PRINT command.)

NOTE #5 Saving a Preview File. You can save a file created with PRINTS simply
by using SAVE with a filename. (If you don't specify a filename, XyWrite
uses REVIEW.TMP, which will be overwritten the next time you issue a
PRINTS command.)

NOTE #6 Print Queue. You cannot issue a PRINTS command while XyWrite is
printing a document, or while there are files in the print queue.

ALSO See Graphic View. If you have installed screen fonts and have the correct
hardware configuration, you can also use graphic view to preview your
file. Graphic view performs most of the functions of PRINTS, plus it
provides on-screen representation of the different fonts and point sizes in
your document, and allows you to edit text and formatting commands.
Graphic view also shows justified line endings and any graphic files you
have included in your file.

Graphic view does not work with chained files, nor does it display mail
merge fields, references, line numbering, or text macros entered with the
IS command.

2-56
PRINT @ Chain Printing

FORMAT E2]PRINT/sw ©parentfile, ,m (Option 1)

EM PRINTS ©parentfile„m (Option 2)
tawd PRINTF @parentfile,targetfile„m (Option 3)
/sw is one of the following optional switches:
/rv (Reverse) prints the pages in reverse order (see Note #1).
/nc (Non-Collated) prints uncollated copies (see Note #2).
/# is the number of copies you want printed.
parentfile is the parent file, containing just the names of the files to be
processed consecutively.
targetfile (optional) is the file to which the sequence of files is to be sent. If
this filename is omitted, the files are printed to FO.TMP.
m is a modifier:
o (print odd pages only)
e (print even pages only)
p (stop printing after each page)
p can be used with o or e in any combination.
menu ghees

PURPOSE The PRINT @ command prints a sequence of files to the printer, one after
another, automatically. One benefit is that you may group files into sets.
A set of files is treated as a single document—with a single run of page
numbers, footnote numbers, chapter numbers, a single Table of Contents
and a single Index accumulated from across all named files.

Similarly, PRINTS @ and PRINTF @ print a sequence of files to the display

and to a file, respectively.
• Chain Printing to the Printer
MM PRINT @parentfile„m
• Chain Printing to the Display
PRINTS @parentfile„m
• Chain Printing to a File
RTiZl PRINTF @parentfile,targetfile„m

2-57
PRINT @ (confd)

ACTION Chain Printing to the Printer

The following example illustrates how to print a sequence of files.
1. Create the Parent File. The parent file contains the names of the files
to be printed.
a. Open a new file to be the parent file, giving it any name you wish
(for example, EPIC):
Type: [F5]new epicfTO

b. List the names of all of the files you want printed as a set. Separate
the names by spaces. At the end of the set, press 0. (You are not
constrained as to the number of files in a set. The files may word
wrap to subsequent lines and still be considered a set.)
Type: outline proposal0

c. List as many sets as you want. Make sure you end the last set with
a carriage return.
Type: chapterl chapter2 chapter30

d. Store the file:

Type: [fs] store £3

2. Insert Page Breaks. XyWrite automatically inserts page breaks between

sets—that is, the first document of each set will start at the top of a new
page. However, if you want a document within a set to start at the top
of a new page, make sure the preceding document ends with a PG
(Page Break) command.

2-58
(confd) PRINT @

3. Print the Files. Finally, print the files:

Type: [F5]print @ epic £3

Result: This single command prints all five files as shown in the
illustration below. In our example, notice that the two lines in EPIC
produce two sets of page numbers, as follows:
• OUTLINE and PROPOSAL are printed as one document, with
pages numbered from 1 to 15 in this example.
• CHAPTER1 through CHAPTER3 are printed as one large
document, starting at page 1 (and footnote 1) with one continuous
set of page numbers, footnotes, Table of Contents, and Index.

2-59
PRINT © (unit'd)

NOTE #1 Reverse Option. The /RV (Reverse) switch is designed for use with laser
printers that output the pages face up, so that the first page is on the
bottom of the stack and the last page is on the top. If you add the /RV
switch to the PRINT command, you don't have to reorganize the pages
after printing.

NOTE #2 Uncollated Option. The /NC (Non-Collated) switch lets you print
multiple copies a page at a time. To use this option, you must have a
printer that can output uncollated copies (for example, one of the Hewlett
Packard LaserJet series).

NOTE #3 Missing File. If a filename in the parent file is not found, XyWrite
displays the message "File not found." It does not print any of the files
listed in the parent file. Correct the parent file and reissue the PRINT @
command. (Be sure the parent file includes the path of any files not in the
current directory.)

NOTE #4 Page Format The overall page format commands (such as Offset, Top
Margin, Running Header) can be placed at the beginning of the first file of
a set. Their effects carry over into the following files of that set only, but
not to following sets. (The DEFAULT conditions take over again at the
start of each new set.)

The same is true for numbering systems, including page, chapter, and
footnote numbering. You can put DC (Define Counter), FN (Footnote),
and related commands in the first file of a set—the formats and sequences
are maintained throughout that set only. This is a very powerful
capability for printing a complete book from several files. (See
"Footnotes" and "Numbering" in Chapter 4 for details.)

NOTE #5 Background Printing. Once printing begins, you may continue editing.
But wait until a particular file is completely printed before saving to it.

NOTE #6 Kill Printing. One Kill Print (KP) command is all that's necessary to stop
all the files from printing.

NOTE #7 Related Command. The Set Page Number (SP) can be used to reset the
page numbers anywhere in the text.

NOTE #8 Referencing Other Files. You can use the Reference commands to refer to
labeled text that appears in earlier files in the chain, but you cannot refer
to subsequent files in the chain. Similarly, you cannot use the Final Page
command when chain printing. (See Chapter 4 for more information on
these commands.)
2-60
QUIT Quitting XyWrite

FORMAT E33QUIT
MENU E3EJ

Purpose QUIT terminates the current editing session by clearing any open files
from the display and returning control to DOS. Its general form is:
• rm QUIT (Option 1)
• ICtfi] [Ah] [Dei] (Option 2)

Action Quitting XyWrite

(Option 1) To quit XyWrite:
Type: [FsIquitM
Result: XyWrite moves to each window that contains a file with unsaved
changes and asks "S=savez A=abandon edits, C=cancel." Unless you press
C, XyWrite clears all the windows and then returns control to DOS. All
memory used by XyWrite is freed. All temporary (.TMP) files are
automatically deleted except FO.TMP, SPELL.TMP, and QUITn.TMP files.

If you wish to re-enter XyWrite after quitting, you must enter the
following at the DOS prompt:
Type: editor^

2-61
QUIT (cont'd)

Action Quitting XyWrite

(Option 2) If your system becomes locked up for some reason and Option 1 doesn't
work, use the following method:
Press: [evil [AxlfDeil

XyWrite first asks if you want to quit. If you do:

Press: y

If you have files open, XyWrite alerts you to that fact and asks if you want
to quit anyway. If you respond with a Y (for yes), XyWrite then asks if
you want to save the open files to the disk you specify. In this way,
XyWrite allows you to save files even if your system is locked up.
However, it does not save these files using their original names. It saves
the file in window #1 as QUIT1.TMP, the file in window #2 as
QUIT2.TMP, and so on up to QUIT9.TMP.

NOTE #1 Logging the Session. The XyWrite menus include a Log Session feature
that lets you capture the status of your work before quitting. When you
activate Log Session, XyWrite saves the open files to disk and captures
your window settings, including window number and size, filename,
current view, bookmarks, and cursor position for each window. To use
this feature press [^ilL or choose Log Session from the File menu. To later
restore the session, press again or choose Restore Session from the
File menu.

also See The DOS Command. The DOS command also switches control to DOS,
but without disturbing XyWrite. XyWrite is suspended as-is. You can use
the EXIT command to return to any files left open. In contrast, QUIT
requires open files to be stored or aborted. (The DOS command can be
found earlier in this chapter.)

2-62
READ Reading a File

FORMAT EflWUREAD dfilename

d: (optional) is the letter you specify for the drive you want. If you omit
the drive letter, the default drive is used.
filename is the name of the file you want to display for reading.
ABBREV EM RE d:filename
Menu kIHEOl

Purpose The READ command loads a copy of the named file from the disk into
memory and into the display for reading only. You can scroll through the
file, select and save blocks of text, and copy selected blocks to another file,
but you cannot add, delete, or move text in the displayed file.

In a LAN environment, the READ command allows you to display files

that are open for editing at someone else's terminal. The READ command
also protects you from accidentally editing a file that you do not want to
change.

Action Displaying a File by Typing Its Name

Let's say the name of the file you want to read is CHAPTER.DOC in the
\NOVEL subdirectory on drive C:

Type: [Fsjread c:\novel\chapter.doc0

Result: This example displays the file CHAPTER.DOC for your review.
The file is loaded to the screen from the \NOVEL subdirectory on disk
drive C. To indicate that this file is open for reading only, XyWrite
displays a 4 immediately before the filename.

NOTE #1 Pointing at a Filename. You can also point to the filename of the file you
want to read. Just display a directory, type READ on the command line,
put the cursor on the name of the file you want to read, and press [F9].

NOTE #2 Global Filenames. You can use the wild cards * and ? for characters in the
filename. (See the CALL command for more information on global
filenames.)

2-63
Renaming a File RENAME

FORMAT RENAME d:oldnamefd:newname

d: (optional) is the drive where the file is stored.
oldname is the filename to be changed.
newname is the new filename.
ABBREV ESOREN d:oldname,d:newnanie
MENU

Purpose The RENAME command lets you change the name of a stored file. It is
identical to the RENAME command in EXDS.

You can use RENAME to transfer a file to a different directory on the same
drive, but you cannot transfer a document to a different drive.

Action Renaming a File

To change the name of a file on disk, use RENAME. For example, to
change the name of a file named MEMO in the DRAFT directory on drive
C to a file named REPORT in the FINAL directory:
Type: [F5] rename c:\draft\memo,c:\final\reportG3

Result: The file is changed from MEMO to REPORT. The file MEMO no
longer exists.

If you do not specify a drive, XyWrite assumes the file you are renaming is
located in the current drive and directory.

NOTE Wild Cards. XyWrite does not recognize wild cards with the RENAME
command in the same way that DOS does. However, you can include an
asterisk (*) in the target file specification if you want to retain part of the
original filename. For example:
Type: [^rename chap 1 .doc,
.old
* £3
The filename is changed from CHAP1.DOC to CH API .OLD.

2-64
SAVE Saving a File to Disk

FORMAT ESaSAVE (Option 1)

ESQ S AVE/ne d:filename (Option 2)
Mfl SAVESEL d:filename (Option 3)
/ne (optional) causes the file to be displayed under its new name.
d: (optional) is the drive letter you specify for the drive you want.
filename (optional) is the name under which you want to save the
displayed file. (If the filename is omitted, the file is saved under its own
name.)
SAVEDEF (abbreviated to SAD) is identical to SAVESEL.
ABBREV EMI SA d:filename (Option 2)
Mfl SAS d:filename (Option 3)
Menu E0 eh , >^1™^

Purpose The SAVE command saves the displayed file to a file on disk. Unlike
STORE, it does not clear the file from the display. There are two ways to
save a file, the first being the one you typically use:
• Saving a File Under Its Own Name
hflWl! SAVE (Option 1)
• Saving a File Under a Different Name
MO SAVE d:filename (Option 2)

You can save part of your file with SAVESEL (Save Selected Block).
• Saving a Block of Text
fcM SAVESEL dfilename (Option 3)

2-65
 SAVE (confd)

ACTION Saving a File Under Its Own Name

(Option 1) To save the displayed file under its own name to where it came from:
Type: [F5]save0
Result: Because you have not specified a drive, directory, or filename, the
file is saved to the current name in the directory from which it was
opened.

NOTE #1 Saving to Another Drive. If you want to save the displayed file to
another drive but keep the same name, you can save with just the drive
letter:
Type: [F5]save b:0

ACTION Saving a File Under a Different Name

(Option 2) When you want to save a file under another name, include that filename
in the command. For example:
Type: [F5]save b:exercise.docE3

This example saves the displayed file to drive B under the name
EXERCISE.DOC. If this is a new filename, XyWrite goes ahead and
creates a new file with that name. However, if this filename already exists,
XyWrite will ask if you want to write over the existing file.

If you add the optional /NE switch, XyWrite saves the displayed file to
the new name, then aborts the displayed file and redisplays it under its
new name.

ACTION Saving a Block of Text

(Option 3) You can save a block of text you have selected:
1. Select the block of text you want saved on the disk.
2. Decide on a name for the file, say, ITEM.DOC.
3. Type: [F5]savesel b:item.doc0

Result: The block of text is now copied to drive B in the file ITEM.DOC.
The original block remains highlighted in the file. This new file can be
called to the display whenever you desire for editing.

NOTE #2 Save Frequently. As a precaution, it's a good idea to SAVE your file
frequently, say every 15 minutes. Then if a power failure occurs, you lose
only the changes you made since you last saved.

2-66
(confd) SAVE

NOTE #3 Windows. If there is more than one file open when SAVE is executed, the
file where the cursor is located is the one which is saved. (See the section
on Windows in Chapter 3.)

NOTE #4 Saving All Files at Once. The SL function call lets you save all open files
with one keystroke. (See "Keyboard Files" in the Customization Guide for
information on modifying the keyboard file.)

NOTE #5 DOS Devices. You can SAVE directly to DOS devices (for example, SAVE
LPT1). The text is sent without the benefit of the printer file.

NOTE #6 SAVE %. You can save the contents of a text macro key to a file on disk
with SAVE %. For example, SAVE %A saves the contents of text macro A
to a file it names A.SAV.

NOTE #7 Automatic Save. XyWrite provides an Autosave feature that periodically

saves any open file that has been edited since the last save. For more
information, see the description of the AOP and AOT default settings in
the Default Settings section of the the Customization Guide.

NOTE #8 ASCII Format. If you want to save the file to ASCII format, use the
PRINTF command with the / AS switch. (See "Printing to a File" for more
information.)

NOTE #9 Other Formats. The menus allow you to save files to other word
processor formats. Choose Save As from the File menu for a list of
options.
Storing a File to Disk STORE

FORMAT STORE (Option 1)

ESM STORE d:filename (Option 2)
d: (optional) is the letter you specify for the drive you want. If you omit
the drive letter, the default drive is used.
filename is the name of the file where you want to store the displayed file.
If you omit the filename, the file is stored under its own name.
abbrev ST d:filename
MENU E3EE3

Purpose STORE saves the displayed file to a disk drive and clears the display. You
are then free to call another file to the display, or quit XyWrite. You have
two ways to store a file, the first being the more frequently used:
• Storing a File Under Its Own Name
few) STORE (Option 1)
• Storing a File Under a Different Name
ES3 STORE d:filename (Option 2)

Action Storing a File Under Its Own Name

(Option 1) To store the displayed file to where it came from:
Type: [fs] store CT

Result: The file is stored to the filename shown at the top of the display.

To store a file to a different directory, for example TEST:

Type: [Fg store \test0

(Note: If there were no directory named TEST, the file would be stored to
the filename TEST.)

To store it to another drive, such as drive B:

Type: [F5]store b:0

2-68
(confd) STORE

ACTION Storing a File Under a Different Name

(Option 2) To store the displayed file under another name, include that filename with
the command. For example:
Type: [Fsjstore c:\book\chapterG3

Result: This example stores the displayed file to a file named CHAPTER
in the \BOOK directory on drive C. If this is a new filename, this
command creates a new file with that name. If this filename already
exists, XyWrite will ask if you want to write over the contents of that file.

NOTE #1 Windows. If there is more than one file open when STORE is executed,
the file where the cursor is located is the one which is stored, and the
window is closed. (See the section on Windows in Chapter 3.) If you
prefer to leave the window open, you can change the NW setting in the
default file. Refer to the Customization Guide for more information.

NOTE #2 Storing All Files at Once. The SF function call lets you store all open files
with one keystroke. (See "Keyboard Files" in the Customization Guide for
information on modifying the keyboard file.)

NOTE #3 Automatic Abort. If you have not made any changes to the displayed file,
XyWrite aborts the file rather than storing it. This saves time, because the
disk does not have to be updated.

NOTE #4 Storing Under a Different Name. If you store a file under a different
name or to a different drive, the original file is not updated.

ALSO SEE Storing to Two or More Drives at Once. You can tell XyWrite to store to
two different drives each time you execute STORE (or SAVE). This is great
for keeping backup files. Refer to the procedure "Setting the Default
Drive and Save-Drives" earlier in this chapter.

2-69
Displaying Subdirectories TREE

FORMAT ESO TREE d:

d: (optional) is the drive whose subdirectories you want displayed.
MENU Not a menu option.

Purpose The TREE command displays a diagram of all the subdirectories on a

given drive. Filenames are not shown.

You can change or remove subdirectories by pointing at a name in the tree

display. You can also display a XyWrite directory from the tree display.

Action Displaying the Tree Structure of a Disk

To display the tree structure of subdirectories for drive C:
Type: [fs]tree 0:0
Result: All subdirectories are displayed. The first vertical line (which has
no name) represents the root directory. Those located immediately off the
root directory are displayed along the left margin.

Action Changing Directories

The CD (Change Directory) command appears on the command line
whenever a tree is generated. To change subdirectories:
1. Move the cursor anywhere on the line containing the subdirectory
name. (For names which are spaced away from the left margin, you
needn't move the cursor onto the name—just onto the same line.)
2. Press: O

Result: The subdirectory you selected is now the current directory. The
tree display remains on the screen.

You can use the same method to execute the DIR and RMDIR commands.

2-70
WAIT Waiting for the Printer

FORMAT MWAIT
MENU Not a menu item.

Purpose The WAIT command causes XyWrite to wait until printing jobs are
finished before the next keystroke is executed. When you execute the
WAIT command, the display freezes. XyWrite does not act on any further
keyboard or keystroke input until the PRINT or PRINTF command is
completed. Any keystrokes are saved and will be acted on when the
current PRINT or PRINTF job is finished.

You might use WAIT in a user program where you want to use the result
of PRINTF (Print to File) for further action. For example, if you were to
use PRINTF REPORT,RESULT and wanted to next call up RESULT, it
would be prudent to include a WAIT:

BC printf report,result
BC wait
BC call result

If you did not include WAIT, XyWrite would accept input (keyboard or
program) before PRINTF was complete, which means it would attempt to
call up RESULT before PRINTF was finished.

Action Type to a File and Call the Result

To demonstrate the WAIT command, we will type to a file with PRINTF,
and then call that file to the screen:
1. Type: [Fsjprintf Iong,fo.tmpg3
2. While the file LONG is being processed:
Type: [F5]waitE3
3. Now immediately CALL the formatted file:
Type: [F5]ca fo.tmpQ
Result: Notice that your keystrokes in Step 3 are not immediately
displayed—they are, however, accepted by XyWrite. WAIT prevents the
display from changing until PRINTF is finished. Then FO.TMP is called to
the screen.

Note #1 Pause While Printing. The WAIT command is incompatible with the
embedded PA (Pause) commands and with the P (Pause) modifier to the
PRINT commands. That's because both require keyboard input (0) which
XyWrite will not read until printing is complete.

2-71
XyWrite/RFT:DCA File Conversion X2R, R2X

FORMAT t*fc££] R2X d:sourcefile,d:targetfile

ESHX2R d:sourcefile,d:targetfile

d: (optional) is the letter you specify for the drive you want. If you omit
the drive letter, the default drive is used.
sourcefile is the name of the file to be converted.
targetfile is the name of the converted version of the file.

menu e3ESS,E3EH3

PURPOSE RFT:DCA (Revisable Form Text: Document Content Architecture) is a

standard format developed by IBM to allow the use of documents on
different types of word processors. The R2X and X2R commands allow
you to convert from RFT:DCA to XyWrite and from XyWrite to RFT:DCA,
respectively.

If R2X encounters a recognized DC A formatting command that has no

XyWrite equivalent, it converts that command into a special type of NT
(Note) command. The NT commands identify the type of DCA formatting
command encountered, followed by the data from the formatting
command in hexadecimal format.

The X2R command converts most XyWrite embedded commands into

DCA formatting commands. If X2R encounters an embedded XyWrite
command that has no DCA equivalent, it hides the command information
in the DCA version of the file so it can later be converted back to XyWrite
format.

ACTION Converting a DCA File into a XyWrite File

To create a XyWrite version of a file named CHAPTER.DCA that is in
RFT:DCA format:

1. Decide on a name for the target file. We'll use CHAPTER.TRN. (If you
omit this name, R2X will add the extension ".XY4" to the input
filename, e.g., CHAPTER.XY4.)

2. Issue the R2X command.

Type: [F5]r2x chapter.dca chapter.trnEO
Result: The original file, CHAPTER.DCA, remains intact. A new file,
called CHAPTER.TRN, contains XyWrite embedded commands in
place of DCA formatting commands.

2-72
(confd) X2R, R2X

ACTION Converting a XyWrite File into an RFT:DCA File

Let's create an RFT:DCA version of a file named CHAPTER.DOC.
1. Decide on a name for the target file. We'll use CHAPTER.TRN. (If you
omit this name, X2R will add the extension ".RFT" to the input
filename, e.g., CHAPTER.RFT.)
2. Issue the X2R command:
Type: |F5]x2r chapter.doc chapter.trnH
Result: The original file, CHAPTER.DOC, remains intact. A new file,
called CHAPTER.TRN, contains DCA formatting commands in place of
XyWrite embedded commands. This file is in EBCDIC (Extended Binary
Coded Decimal Interchange Code) format, so you cannot edit it in
XyWrite.

NOTE #1 Automatic Conversion. The CALL and MERGE commands automatically

convert files from RFT:DCA format into XyWrite format.

NOTE #2 Exceptions. DCA is a formatting standard, and therefore does not have
equivalents for many of the special features that are part of XyWrite.
Specifically, the following XyWrite functions are not available in DCA:
• Mail Merge
• Automatic Numbering (counters and reference commands)
• Most printer control commands (Include, Printer Insert, AutoPause)

When X2R encounters one of these commands, it hides the command

information in the DCA version of the file so it can later be converted back
to XyWrite format.

2-73
NOTES

2-74
 Editing

Intro This chapter covers basic editing. It begins with the screen and keyboard
and progresses into methods you can use to modify text. These tools are
the same whether you are writing a new document or modifying an
existing one.

Contents page section Command

3-3 Basics of the Screen, Keyboard and Mouse
3-4 Screen
3-7 Keyboard
3-16 Mouse
3-19 Editing Text
3-20 Selecting a Block of Text
3-25 Copying a Block of Text [cvilC
3-26 Moving a Block of Text gM
3-27 Protecting a Block of Text NM
3-28 Deleting Text
3-30 Undeleting Text
3-32 Transposing Text 0Cz0Wz0Sz0P
3-33 Changing Case UC, LCZ CCZ CF
3-35 Automatic Uppercase AU
3-37 Math
3-38 Header Calculations
3-38 Cursor Arithmetic
3-41 Text Macro Keys
3-42 Text Macro Procedure
3-42 Temporary Use of Text Macro Keys
3-44 Disk Use of Text Macro Keys
3-46 Save Text [Shift] [F21#

3-47 Get Text E]#

3-48 Display Text Macro Directory
3-49 Store Text Macro Keys to Disk STS GT
3-50 Load Text Macro Keys from Disk LDSGT
3-51 Clear Text Macro Keys CLRSGT, REMOVE
3-52 Insert Text Macro Text IS
3-53 Search and Replace Text
3-54 Searching for Text SEARCH
3-60 Searching Through Files SEARCH
3-62 Changing Text CHANGE
3-66 Go to Page GO
3-67 Comparing Two Files

3-1
Editing (confd)

Page Section Command

3-69 Spelling Checker and Thesaurus

3-70 Spelling Checker Procedure
3-75 Word Check @[F7]
3-76 File Check SPELL
3-79 File Correct CORRECT
3-82 Auto-Check/Correct gagE
3-84 Auto-Replace [CtrilfShtftlA
3-86 Auto-Expand H
3-87 Saving the Temporary Dictionary STSPELL
3-88 Thesaurus [Shift] [F7]

3-91 Windows
3-94 Window Menu EdJE
[F6], [Shift] [F6], ®[F6]
3-97 Switching Windows
3-98 Opening a New Window WINDOW
3-99 Removing a Window RS

3-101 Word Count WC, WCB

3-2
 Basics of the Screen, Keyboard, and Mouse

Intro The screen, keyboard, and mouse are useful topics for beginning a
description of XyWrite. The screen section is fairly elementary—you can
cover it in one reading. You may find yourself referring to the keyboard
and mouse sections several times until you're familiar with them.

Contents page Section

3-4 Screen
3-4 Cursor
3-4 Mouse Pointer
3-4 Command Line
3-5 Status Line
3-6 Ruler
3-6 Text Area
3-7 Keyboard
3-7 Typewriter Keys
3-8 Command Line Keys
3-9 Cursor Keys
3-11 Function Keys
3-13 Toggle Keys

3-16 Mouse
3-16 Toggling Between Command Line and Action Bar
3-16 Selecting Menu Options
3-16 Moving Around in a File
3-17 Moving Between Windows
3-17 Moving Around in a Dialog Box
3-17 Activating Items in a Dialog Box
3-17 Selecting Text

3-3
Screen

Purpose The display is divided into two separate areas: the header, which is the
top three lines, and the text area, which is the rest of the display. Those
features of XyWrite visible on the screen are described here.

Cursor. The cursor is the blinking square or underline on the screen. The
position of the cursor marks the "point of action" where text or commands
are entered or deleted.

The shape of the text cursor is a square in Insert Mode and an underline in
Overstrike Mode. (You switch modes with the Qns] key.)

Mouse Pointer. When the mouse is installed, there is a second "cursor"

visible on the screen, which serves as the mouse pointer. In draft,
formatted, and expanded views, the mouse pointer is a non-flashing
square; in graphic view, it is an arrow.

Command Line/Action Bar. The top line of the screen is where you "talk"
to XyWrite, either with commands or by using menus. If you press [F5] to
enter a command such as NEW or PRINT, the command line—which
begins with the current drive and path name in reverse mode—appears on
the top line of the screen. If you press [Rio] to activate menus, the action bar
appears on the top line.
6 7

1
CM CO

1 - Command Line 5 - Scroll Bars

2 - Status Line 6 - Window Number
3- Ruler Line 7 - Filename
4- Text Area 8 - Status Indicators
3-4
(confd) Screen

Status Line. This is the second line on the display. It has several parts,
and provides useful information about where you are working, and what
conditions are in effect.
Prompt area—The beginning of the line is where XyWrite displays
messages for you.

• Page-Page Depth—In formatted view, the current page number and

page depth appear near the middle of the status line. (If you are using
snaking columns, the number takes the form Page/Column-Page
Depth.)
There are three ways to turn on the page number (the second and third
options also scroll the text):
Press: [F8] (Option 1)
Press: [Alt] |PgPn] or [Aft] |Pqllp| (Option 2)
Type: [Fggo 1G3 (Option 3)
If you want page numbers to be displayed automatically when any file
is called, change the Display Type (DT) setting in the default file. (See
"Default Settings" in the Customization Guide for more information.)

• Window number and selected-text status—The current window

number and selected-text status appear to the right of the Page-Page
Depth numbers. For example, 2= indicates that you are currently in
window 2 and have selected a block of text. (See "Editing Text" later
in this chapter for more information about the selected-text status
indicator.)

• Filename—The filename of the currently open file, as well as the drive

and path from which it was called, appear after the window number
field in whatever character mode is currently in effect. When you use
SAVE or STORE (with no filename), XyWrite saves the document
under this name. When you have several files open, this field tells you
which document is currently active.

3-5
Screen (confd)

• Toggle indicators tell you the state of certain XyWrite functions. They
include:
C (Caps Lock) c (Auto-Check/Correct)
S (Scroll Lock) r (Auto-Replace)
N (Numeric Lock) A (Automatic Uppercase)
I (Insert) R (Redlining)
o (Word Overstrike) X (Temporary File)
O (Character Overstrike)
The first eight toggle indicators are associated with keys and are
described later in this section. The A and R indicators are associated
with commands; refer to the appropriate command descriptions for
more information. The X indicator appears when XyWrite is writing
information from memory out to disk.
Ruler. This is the third line on the display. The ruler has markings for
margin, tab and indent settings. It is described in detail in Chapter 4.
The Text Area. This is where you view and revise documents. This
viewing area is 20 lines long and 78 characters wide, and is surrounded
by borders. The top border displays the filename (including drive and
path) of the open file. The right and bottom borders are scroll bars,
which you can use with a mouse to move vertically and horizontally in
a file.
You can split the text area to work on two or more files at once. You can
view them side-by-side, one above the other, or staggered; in fact, you
can create any arrangement you want. Within the text area, you can
scroll a document up and down; you can also move it left and right—a
document can be as wide as 256 characters (see Note #3).
NOTE #1 Replacing the Ruler Line. If you want to change the ruler to a solid
line or remove it completely so you have an extra line of text displayed,
use the NR function call. This function call cycles between the three
possible states for the third line of the display: ruler, solid line, text.
Refer to "Keyboard Settings" in the Customization Guide for more
information on using function calls.

NOTE #2 Turning Off Borders. You can turn off borders and increase the
amount of text displayed on the screen by setting the MW default to 0.
Refer to "Default Settings" in the Customization Guide for more
information.

NOTE #3 Line Wrapping. In graphic and formatted views, XyWrite always

displays true line endings. In draft and expanded view, XyWrite
displays text within the current window borders. If you want to see
true line endings in draft view, change the WF (Wrap to Fit) setting in

3-6
 Keyboard

Purpose The keyboard, of course, is where you type text into your computer.
The keyboard has basically three sections to it, as shown below. We
will describe on the following pages those parts of the keyboard that
are unique to XyWrite.

Typewriter Keys. The center section of the keyboard contains the

typewriter keys—letters, numbers, standard punctuation and symbols.
You use the keys [Ctrl] and ® in combination with character keys to
access other functions.

Function Keys

■Typewriter Keys Cursor Keys

3-7
Command Line Keys

Purpose The command line is an important part of XyWrite. If you plan to use
the command interface rather than menus, you need to become com-
fortable with the keys associated with the command line: [F5], ishiftl |F5|,
Iral, Icirtll+l.and

COMMAND LINE KEYS

Keys Function
E) Clear the Command Line. Pressing this key clears the command line and
positions the cursor at the beginning of the command entry area. You typi­
cally use [F5] prior to typing in any command (such as NEW, CALL, SAVE).
[Shift] [F^ Moving the Cursor Between Command Line and Text Area. [Shift] [F5] is a
toggle that moves the cursor between the command line and the text area.
It does not clear the command line.
[ra] Execute. This is the Execute key. Its sole purpose is to execute whatever
command is currently on the command line. It works the same whether the
cursor is on the command line or in the text area. You typically use [F9]
after typing in a command. For example:
[F5]save[F9]
0 Enter. CT is an alternate way to execute any command you have typed at
the command line. The following command is equivalent to the previous
example, which used [F9] to execute the command:
[fs] save CT
The difference between [F9| and CT is that [F9| always executes whatever
command is currently on the command line, regardless of where the cursor
is located, while CT executes a command only when the cursor is on the
command line. (It enters a carriage return when the cursor in the text area.)
ESH Command Stack. When you issue a command of three or more charac­
[c?i][+l ters, XyWrite keeps the contents of the command in a stack with other
recently issued commands. Thus, you can recall an earlier command
without retyping it. The number of commands saved on the stack varies,
depending on their length; XyWrite saves only the last 150 or so characters
typed on the command line.
With the cursor on the command line, press |Ctri| It I to recall the previous
command. Continue pressing |Ctri| |t| until the command you want appears. If
you qo too far. press ICtrif |t| to reverse direction.

note #1 List of Commands. fCtri]fF5] displays a list of commands in the command

stack.

NOTE #2 Commands Within Programs. XyWrite does not "stack" commands that
are issued within XyWrite programs, which means it does not stack
commands that are issued from the menus.
3-8
 Cursor Keys

Cursor keys allow you to move the cursor or scroll the text. We have
listed all cursor keys in the following tables. Note that with all of these
functions, holding down the key will repeat the function.

SCROLLING UP OR DOWN
Keys Function Scroll
[PflUpI One screen up Screen
|PgDn| One screen down
®[Sup1 One line up Line
ICtrll JPgDnl One line down
[AitlfPgUpl One printed page up Printed Page
[Ait]|PgDn| One printed page down
ICtrll iHomel To top of document Document
ICtrll (End| To bottom of document

MOVING THE CURSOR

Keys Function
s Cursor right
s Cursor left
E Cursor up
E Cursor down
|cffl]F] To next word
*l
|cw|| To previous word
To next column or cell
To previous column or cell
®E To start of previous paragraph
To start of next paragraph
IHomel To beginning of line
[Ml To end of line
[Art| [Home! To top of screen
[AitllEndl To bottom of screen
[CfrilfTabl To next tab
IShiftllTabl To previous tab
Cycle forward through all open windows
[Shift] [FS] Cycle backward through all open windows
Switch between two windows
ICtrll (Shifiln Move to window n

3-9
Cursor Keys (confd)

Keys Function
EH Move to and erase command line
lSh’rftllF5l Switch between command line and text area

Eiol Toggle between text and action bar

NOTE #1 Move by Line. It is interesting to notice the difference between the

following two items:
Character Up, Character Down. These move the cursor up or down a line
without shifting the text currently visible on the screen.
Move Line Up, Move Line Down. These move the text and cursor up or
down a line on the screen, moving a new line into view. The cursor stays
on the same character.
NOTE #2 Move by Screen. The screen is another word for the display. When you
move text by screen, you move the next screenful of text into view,
without skipping over any text. In fact, there is one line of overlap.
For example, when moving down in a document, the bottom line moves to
the top of the screen. When you move by screen, you can scroll quickly
through a document, scanning all text.
NOTE #3 Move to Window. You can have up to nine different windows open at the
same time. With [Cvi][F6] (Window Menu) you can move to any specific
window by pressing the number of that window. With [F6|, you can move
to the next open window in sequence. With |Shift| [F6L you can move through
the open windows in reverse sequence. With [Ah] [F61, you can return to the
previously displayed window—use this to toggle between two windows.
(See the section on Windows for more information.)
NOTE #4 Move by Printed Page. To see where page breaks will occur before you
print a document, move the text by Printed Page (rather than by screen).
NOTE #5 Other Cursor Movement Functions. XyWrite includes many cursor
movement functions that are not pre-assigned to keys. For example, there
are functions that allow you to move to the start of the previous or next
sentence. Refer to the Keyboard File section in the Customization Guide for
a list of options and instructions on how to assign them to the keys of your
choice.
Tip Move to Start of Command Line. If you are on the command line, you
can move the cursor to the start of it without deleting any information that
it contains by pressing I Home].

3-10
 Function Keys

PURPOSE The function keys are the twelve keys EJ through [F12I on the top row of the
keyboard. (On PC and XT keyboards, there are 10 function keys on the left
side of the keyboard.) These keys provide frequently used editing
functions and commands. Once you know these functions you have a
powerful set of tools for editing your text.

FUNCTION KEY SUMMARY

eh Help Screen. Display help information.
[Shift! [Fll Close Marker. Save and close the open command marker.
(ao EH Error Message Help. Display help information on last error message.
®E2 Edit Marker. Open the marker under the cursor so it can be modified. (Same
as [Fii].)

ED# Insert Text Macro. Copy text from the specified text macro (#) to the cursor
location.
[Shift] [F21# Define Text Macro. Save the selected block of text to the text macro specified
by the next key struck.
eseh List Macros. Display a list of the defined text macro keys.
Undelete. Restore the last text deleted or display the delete stack. (Same as
eud
E] Begin/End Block Selection. Begin or end selecting a block of text of any size.
[Shift] [F31 Extend Selection. Extend selected block to current cursor location.
ICM1E21 List Selection Options. Display a list of selection options.
®Eg Begin Column Selection. Begin selecting a column of text.

E3 Select by Paragraph. Select the paragraph the cursor is on.

[Shift] [F4] Select by Sentence. Select the sentence the cursor is on.
|Ctrl||F4| Close File. Close the open file in the current window.
®E3 Exit XyWrlte. Quit the program and return to DOS.

Ei Clear Command Line. Clear the command line and move the cursor there.
[shift] [F5] Toggle Between Command Line and Text. Move the cursor between the
command line and text without clearing the command line.
[C«i]|F5| Command Stack. Display a list of commands in the command stack.

Eg Cycle Through All Windows. Move the cursor through all open windows in
sequence.
[shift] [F6] Cycle Through All Windows. Move the cursor through all open windows in
reverse sequence.

3-11
Function Keys (corn'd)

FUNCTION KEY SUMMARY (continued)

[<>ra List of Windows. Display the menu for selecting windows.
[M][F6] Switch Between Two Windows. Switch the cursor between the current and
previous windows.

Spell Check. Display a menu of spell checking options you can apply to the
open document.
[Shift] [F7] Thesaurus. Display a list of synonyms for the current word.
[cjra Spell Check Word. Check the spelling of the current word.
Auto-Check. Turn automatic spell checking on or off.

|F8) Draft View with Page Breaks. Move from current view to Draft view with
page breaks.
[Shift] [F8] Graphic View. Move from the current view to Graphic view.
[sra Expanded View. Move from the current view to Expanded view.
Draft View. Move from the current view to Draft view without page breaks.

os Execute. Execute the command currently on the command line.

[shift] [ra] Run Macro. Run the recorded keystrokes currently in memory.
EDEl List of Macros. Display a list of program macros that have the .PGM
extension.
Save Macro. Save the recorded keystrokes currently in memory.

[H0| Action Bar. Toggle between action bar and text area.
[Shift] [FiQl Most Recent Menu. Redisplay last dialog box.

EH Edit Marker. Opens the marker under the cursor so it can be modified.
(Same as fAhl [fT|.)
[shiftllFiil Show/Hide Markers. Turn the display of markers (▲ and <-) on or off.

Undelete. Restore the last text deleted or display the delete stack. (Same
as ®[g].)
[Shift) [F12] Delete Selected Text. Delete the text currently selected.
[teillF121 Delete Paragraph. Delete the current paragraph.

EEjz) Delete Sentence. Delete the current sentence.

3-12
 Toggle Keys

Purpose Toggle keys affect the way that you enter text. Each key has two states—
on and off. XyWrite's toggle keys are:
• Insert/Overstrike [ins]
• Numeric Lock iNum Lock I
• Scroll Lock I Scroll Lock !
• Caps Lock leaps Lock I
• Auto-Check [Alt] [F71
• Auto-Replace [Ctrl] [shift] A

The toggle keys are executed by pressing the key(s) shown above. The I Shift I
key is also described here.

Action Switching a Toggle Key

All five toggle keys operate similarly. For example, to switch between
Insert and Overstrike modes:
Press: [ins]
Result: Insert mode is indicated by the letter "I" (for Insert) at the top
right corner of the screen. Overstrike is indicated by an "O" or "o."
Another indicator of typing mode is the shape of the cursor: square in
Insert mode and underline in Overstrike mode.
Overstrike Modes. There are two different Overstrike modes: Character
Overstrike, which allows you to overwrite everything except carriage
returns; and Word Overstrike, which allows you to overwrite all text and
word separators except the space, tab, and carriage return. If you are in
Character Overstrike mode, an uppercase "O" appears in the top right
corner of the screen. If you are in Word Overstrike, a lowercase "o"
appears.
To activate Character Overstrike, press [ins]. To activate Word Overstrike,
press [Ait][insl.

NOTE Word Overstrike. Once you press [ah] [Ins] to turn on word overstrike mode,
that becomes the prevailing overstrike mode. When you subsequently
press [ins], XyWrite toggles between Insert and Word Overstrike. If you
want to restore the character overstrike capability, issue the following
command from the command line:

[F5]default wo=0£3

3-13
Toggle Keys (confd)

TOGGLE KEYS

Switches between Insert and Overstrike. XyWrite is always in one mode or the
other.
• Insert Mode. As you type on the keyboard, the characters are inserted into
the text without destroying any of the text already present. The new text
pushes the existing text out of its way. XyWrite starts up in Insert mode.
• Overstrike Mode. The characters you type replace the characters (or tabs)
already in the text. This is useful when you want to change text from one
thing to another.
Switches between Insert and Word Overstrike. In Word Overstrike mode, you
can type over everything except tabs, spaces, and carriage returns.
I Num Lock I Press once to turn on, and again to turn off. When on, the letter N is at the top
right of the screen.
• Numeric Lock On. The numeric keypad shifts to number keys 0-9, for use
as a calculator keypad.
• Off. The numeric keypad operates as cursor keys.

I Scroll Lock) Press once to turn on, and again to turn off. This function is used only in
program editing; refer to Chapter 5 for details. When Scroll Lock is on, the
letter S is at the top right of the screen.

|CapsLock| Press once to turn on, and again to turn off. When on, the letter C is at the top
right of the screen.
• Caps Lock On. All letters are locked in uppercase. No other keys are
affected. This contrasts with [Shift] which shifts not only letter keys, but all
keys, including number, punctuation, and cursor keys.
• Off. All keys are unshifted—letters are lowercase.

|ShSl Shift Key (momentary). Press and hold down to keep on. Release to turn off.
• Pressed In. All keys are shifted to uppercase, including letter, number,
punctuation and cursor keys. If the Caps Lock key is on, pressing |Shift| shifts
the keyboard to lowercase.
• Released. All keys are unshifted.

@0 Turns Auto-Check on or off. When on, the letter c is at the top right of the
screen.
• Auto-Check On. XyWrite checks the spelling of each word as you type. If
you misspell a word, you will hear an error beep.
• Off. XyWrite performs no spell checking as you type.

3-14
(confd) Toggle Keys

TOGGLE KEYS (continued)

|Ctri] ISh'rftl A Turns Auto-Replace on or off. When on, the letter r appears at the top right
side of the screen.
• Auto-Replace On. XyWrite checks the personal dictionary to see if the
abbreviation you typed has a replacement word or phrase associated with
it. If it does, XyWrite makes the replacement and beeps to indicate that a
change has been made.
• Off. XyWrite performs no word replacement as you type.

3-15
Mouse

Purpose if you have a mouse installed on your computer, you can use it to move
quickly around the screen and to perform some basic text editing
functions.

ACTION Using the Mouse

The mouse is useful for performing a variety of functions. Specifically,
you can use the mouse to:
• Toggle between the command line and action bar
• Select menu options
• Move around in a file or dialog box
• Move between windows when the screen is split
• Activate items in a dialog box
• Select words or blocks of text

Toggling Between Command Line and Action Bar. To change the first
line on the screen from the action bar to the command line (or vice versa),
point at it, hold down the right button and double click the left button.

Selecting Menu Options. To select a menu from the action bar, or to

select an option from a pull-down menu, point at the item you want and
click.

Moving Around in a File. If the position you want to move to is in the

current screen of text, you can reposition the cursor for typing by pointing
at the position and then clicking.

If window borders are displayed, you can use the mouse to scroll
vertically and horizontally through a file. To turn borders on, set the MW
(Maximize Windows) default to 1. Refer to "Default Settings" in the
Customization Guide for more information on the MW setting.

With borders on, use the following procedures to scroll a file horizontally:
• A line at a time: Point at the up or down arrow in the scroll bar and
click.
• A screen at a time: Point at the space between the slider box and the up
or down arrow and click.
• To a particular place: Drag the slider box up or down until you reach the
relative position you want in the file.

With borders on, use the following procedures to scroll a file vertically:
• One character at a time: Point at the left or right arrow on the horizontal
scroll bar and click.

3-16
(confd) Mouse

• Eight characters at a time: Point at the space between the slider box and
the left or right arrow and click.
• To a particular place: Drag the slider box right or left until you reach the
relative position you want on the line.

Moving Between Windows. When more than one window is visible on

the screen, you can use the mouse to move between them. Point at the
window you want and then click.

Moving Around in a Dialog Box. You move around in a dialog box just
as you do in the text window: point to the location you want and click.

Activating Items in a Dialog Box. To activate an item in a dialog box,

point at the option you want (pushbutton, radio button, check box) and
then click.

Selecting Text. You can use the mouse to select words, blocks, or
columns of text by using the following procedures:

• Words: Point at the word you want to select and double click.
• Blocks: Point at the beginning of the block you want to select; press and
hold down the button. Drag to the end of the block you want to select
and release the button.
• Columns: Point at the beginning of the column you want to select, then
drag to the end of the column.

In addition, you can use the [Shift] key in conjunction with the mouse button
to extend a selection from the anchor point (the point at which you started
the selected block) to the current position. To use this feature, press and
hold down [Shg], and click on the character or space that follows the last
character in the extension.

NOTE #1 Mouse Buttons. XyWrite supports 2- and 3-button mice, and is set up for
right-handed users. Unless otherwise noted, the instructions to click mean
to press the left button. If you prefer to reverse the functions assigned to
the left and right buttons, change the RB (Reverse Buttons) default setting.
(Refer to "Default Settings" in the Customization Guide for more
information.)

3-17
Mouse (confd)

NOTE #2 Installation. To use the mouse with XyWrite, you must load the mouse
driver before starting XyWrite. Once XyWrite is loaded, turn on the
mouse by setting the UR default to 1. (Refer to the documentation
provided with your mouse for information about loading the mouse
driver; refer to "Default Settings" in the Customization Guide for more
information on the UR setting.)

NOTE #3 Exception. You cannot use the mouse with the thesaurus dialog box.

NOTE #4 Default Settings. There are several default settings that apply to mouse
use. They are as follows:

• CR (Cursor). Allows you to change the color of the mouse pointer that
appears in Draft and Expanded views.
• R1 (Reverse Interval). Allows you to set the time interval for a click.
• R2 (Mouse Repetition Rate). Allows you to set the time interval for a
double click.
• RX and RY. Allow you to set the mouse-to-pixel ratio for horizontal
and vertical movement.
• RB (Reverse Buttons). Allows you to change the default mouse button
from the left one to the right.
• UR (Use Pointer). Turns the mouse pointer on or off.

See ""Default Settings" in the Customization Guide for more information.

3-18
 Editing Text

Intro Once you have written a document with XyWrite, you will be ready to
revise it. The following functions cover the essentials for making revisions.

Contents page Section Command

3-20 Selecting a Block of Text
3-25 Copying a Block of Text [QtrilC
3-26 Moving a Block of Text (ctdjM
3-27 Protecting a Block of Text NM
3-28 Deleting Text
Undeleting Text [F12]
3-30
3-32 Transposing Text □c,0w, bs,bp
3-33 Changing Case
3-35 Automatic Uppercase AU

3-19
Selecting a Block of Text

Purpose When you select text, you are marking it as a block to be acted on in some
way (e.g., moved, copied, deleted, saved or printed). The overall list of
possibilities is shown in the diagram below.

Practical Uses. Here are some instances when the block editing features
would be useful:
• Select a word in order to move it to another part of your document or
to another document altogether.
• Select a word in order to underline it ((ciril U).
• Select a heading in order to capitalize it (UC).
• Select a line of text in order to print out just that line (PRINT).
• Select a sentence in order to save it to a text macro key ([shift] [F2]#). You
can later recall it with a keystroke (£2]#).
• Select a block of text in order to protect it from modifications (NM).
• Select a block of text in order to indent it (IP).

3-20
(conCd) Selecting a Block of Text

SELECT KEYS

[F3] Select Any Size Block of Text Follow the procedure "Selecting a Block
of Text.” This procedure allows you to select any size block of text, from
one character to the entire document.

[Shiftl [F31 Extend Selection. Extends selected text boundary to the current cursor
position.

Select a Column of Text. Follow the procedure "Selecting a Column of

Text.” This procedure allows you to select any size column of text.

E Select by Paragraph. Selects the entire paragraph the cursor is in. It

selects all characters from the previous hard return up to and including the
next hard return (0) is the hard return). You can select successive
paragraphs by repeatedly pressing the key.

[Shift] [F4] Select by Sentence. Selects the sentence that the cursor is on. It selects
all characters from the previous sentence separator or hard return, up to
and including the next sentence separator or hard return (0] is the hard
return). To select successive sentences, hold down I Shiftl and repeatedly
press |F4].

[Esc] De-Select. Releases any selected text, so that it can no longer be acted on
as a block. Text is returned from bright to normal to indicate it is no longer
selected. You may then select a new block of text. You should release any
selected text when you finish using it.

NOTE #1 Other Select Text Keys. In addition to the keys described in the
preceding table, you can use |Shrft| in conjunction with a cursor
movement key to select the block of text associated with the cursor
movement. For example, [ctri]0 moves the cursor to the next word;
[Shift] [ctrtl 0 moves the cursor to and selects the next word.

NOTE #2 Mouse. You can also select text with the mouse. Refer to the
mouse procedures earlier in this chapter for more information.

3-21
Selecting a Block of Text (confd)

ACTION Selecting Text by Fixed Size

To select text by word, sentence, line or paragraph:

1. Press: [Esc] (Optional)

Result: This ensures that no other text is selected.

2. Move the cursor anywhere within the text you want to select.

3. Press the key(s) corresponding to the amount of text you want selected.
For example, to select a sentence:
Press: [shift] [F4]

Result: The selected text appears brighter than normal. You can now
move it, copy it, delete it, protect it, or save it as you wish.

ACTION Selecting a Block of Text of Any Size

To select a block of characters of any size:
1. Release any currently selected block.
Press: [Esc] (Optional)
Result; This ensures that no other text is still selected (so that Step 2
sets the first of the two end-points).

2. Begin the block select Move the cursor to the first character of the
text you want to select.
Press: [F3|

3. Select the size of the block. Now move the cursor to the other end of
the text you want to select. Notice that as you move, the area of text
between the cursor and where you started is highlighted.

4. End the block. To set the end of the selected block:

Press: [F3]

Result: The block of text is now selected (see Notes #2 and #3). Now you
can move it, copy it, delete it, protect it, or save it as you wish.

3-22
(confd) Selecting a Block of Text

Action Selecting a Column of Text

To select a column of text:
1. Release any currently selected text.
Press: [Esc] (Optional)
2. Move the cursor to the upper left (or lower right) comer of the column
you want to select (see Note #4).
3. Establish the first corner point:
Press: [Alt] [F3]
4. Move to the opposite comer of the column.
5. When you reach the second comer, end the selected column:
Press: [F3]
Result: The column of text is now selected. You can act on it as you wish
(see Note #4).

Note #1 Releasing Selected Text. It is a good habit to release any selected text
with [Esc] when you are through using it, as there are a number of functions
that do not work while a block of text is selected.

NOTE #2 Automatically Ending a Block. Unless you are going to move the selected
block or copy it to a different location in the document, you don't need to
press [F3] to end the selection. Simply move the cursor to the end of the
block you want to select and execute the action you want (delete, save,
print, change case, etc.). XyWrite assumes you have completed the
selection process when you issue instructions to act on the block.

NOTE #3 Extending Selected Text If you end a selected block and then realize that
you want to include more text, you don't have to start the selection
process all over. Just move the cursor to the point where you now want to
start or end the block and press [Shift] [F3]. XyWrite automatically extends the
selected block to the current cursor position. Press [F3] to complete the
selection at the new point.

NOTE #4 Requirements for Column Selection. You can select columns only for
copying or moving. You cannot print, protect, or change the character
mode or case of a selected column. In addition, the lines to which you are
copying or moving the column of text must end in hard returns. Column
selection applies to text that is tabbed or spaced; it does not apply to
columns that were set up with the CT (Create Table command).
If you use column selection on word-wrapped lines, XyWrite highlights
the text in the first line of a paragraph only. This allows you to select a
column from a table in which another column wraps to several lines.

3-23
Selecting a Block of Text (confd)

NOTE #5 Selected Status Indicator. You can track the status of the selection
process by referring to your header. Normally the window field consists
of the window number followed by a blank space. When you start
selecting a block of text by pressing [F3], a hyphen appears after the
number. When you complete the selection by pressing [F3] again or when
you press one of the select unit keys (e.g., [F4]), the hyphen becomes an
equals sign. And when you release the selected block by pressing [Escl. the
equals sign disappears and there is again a space after the window
number.

NOTE #6 Storing or Aborting. Whenever you STORE or ABORT a document, any

selected block of text in that document is automatically released.

NOTE #7 Selecting Blocks in Tables. To select a block of text within a table, refer to
the section on tables in Chapter 5.

3-24
[CtrilC Copying a Block of Text

FORMAT @C
menu emesi

PURPOSE allows you to copy a selected block of text to another part of the
document, or to another document altogether (in another window). It
leaves the original text unchanged.

ACTION copying Text

To copy a block of text takes basically three steps:
1. Select a Block. Select the block of text you want to move. For details,
see the section "Selecting a Block of Text" earlier.
2. Locate the Insertion Point Move the cursor to the point in the text
where you want to insert the selected text. (The text will be inserted to
the left of the cursor.)
3. Copy the Text To copy the selected block of text:
Press: [CtrilC
Result: A copy is made of the text selected in Step 1, and that copy is
inserted at the cursor location.
4. Repeat Copy. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to insert more copies, if you wish.
5. Release Selected Text:
Press: [Esc]
Result: This releases the selected text, completing the operation.

NOTE #1 Copying to Clipboard. XyWrite includes a clipboard, which is a

temporary storage area in memory. You can copy selected text to the
clipboard by pressing |Ctri] fins]. Once you have stored the selected block to
the clipboard, you can insert it (a procedure referred to as "pasting") by
pressing [Shift] [ins]. Note, however, that [shift] [ins] inserts only the text most
recently copied or cut to the clipboard. Press [F12I if you want to insert text
previously copied or cut to the clipboard.

NOTE #2 Copying Text Between Windows. When you press @C, XyWrite first
looks within the current document for the selected block of text. If it can't
find a selected block there, it looks in the previous window for a selected
block to move. You can move blocks only between the current and
previous windows.

3-25
Moving a Block of Text JcTrtlM

FORMAT [CtrilM

MENU E3 C33

Purpose IcirilM moves a selected block of text to another part of the document, or to
another document altogether.

Action Moving Text

To move a block of text takes basically three steps:
1. Select the block of text you want to move. For details, see the section
''Selecting a Block of Text."
2. Move the cursor to the point in the document where you want to insert
the text. (The text will be inserted to the left of the cursor.)
3. To move the block of text:
Press: [CtrflM

Result: The text selected in Step 1 is inserted at the cursor location and
deleted from its original location. This completes the operation. [Esc] is not
necessary after Step 3 since the text is automatically released when you
move it (but not when you copy it).

Note #1 Cutting to Clipboard. XyWrite includes a clipboard, which is a

temporary storage area in memory. You can cut selected text to the
clipboard bv pressing I Shift 11 Dell. Once you have moved the selected block to
the clipboard, you can insert it (a procedure referred to as "pasting") by
pressing iShift] [ins|. Note, however, that I Shift] |lns| inserts only the text most
recently copied or cut to the clipboard. Press [F12] if you want to insert text
previously copied or cut to the clipboard.

NOTE #2 Moving Text Between Windows. When you press [ctrii]M, XyWrite first
looks within the current document for the selected block of text. If it can't
find a selected block there, it looks in the previous window for a selected
block to move. You can move blocks only between the current and
previous windows.

3-26
NM Protecting a Block of Text

FORMAT MNM
MENU

Purpose The NM (No Modifications) command marks a block of text that you do
not want modified. When you issue the command, an embedded
command triangle appears at the beginning and end of the block. You
cannot edit text between these triangles, although you can move the
cursor through text so you can review it. You can also define and save
protected blocks, or copy them to another part of the document, but you
cannot add or delete text within a protected block, nor can you move it
from its current location.
You might use NM to protect the formatting commands at the beginning
of a document, or to protect standard blocks of text, such as addresses,
that never change.

Action Protecting a Block of Text

To make a block of text unchangeable:
1. Select the block of text you want to protect. For details, see the section
"Selecting a Block of Text."
2. Type: |F5]nm[2]
Result: An embedded triangle appears at the beginning of the protected
block and at the end. You cannot modify the text that appears between
them (see Note #1).
3. Restore the selected text.
Press: [Esc]

NOTE #1 Embedded Command Triangles. The two triangles that mark the
beginning and end of a protected block of text represent the commands
NM 1 and NM 0. These commands always appear as a pair. The only way
you can delete the triangles is to switch to Expanded view.
Deleting Text

PURPOSE XyWrite offers many different ways to delete text, as listed on the next
page. There is also an undelete function, which is described in the next
section.

ACTION Deleting Text

To delete text by the character, word, sentence or paragraph:
1. Move the cursor onto (or next to, as appropriate) the text to be deleted.
2. Press the appropriate delete key(s)—for example, [Dei]. If you wish, hold
down the key(s) to repeat the delete.

Important: If you hold a key down too long, characters may continue to be
deleted after you release the key. If that happens, use [ciril |Break! to stop it.

ACTION Deleting a Selected Block of Text

Use this procedure to delete any amount of text—a single character,
paragraph or column, or the entire document. This action takes two steps:

1. Select the block of text you want deleted. (For more details refer to the
section "Selecting a Block of Text" earlier in this chapter.)
2. Press: [shift] [H21

Result: The text selected in Step 1 is deleted.

3-28
(confd) Deleting Text

DELETE KEYS
IS] Delete Character. This key deletes the character at the cursor location.

1 Backspace1 Delete Character to Left (Backspace). Deletes the character to the left
of the cursor.

[Ctrl] [Del] Delete Word. This deletes the word the cursor is on. If the cursor is not
on a word, it deletes the word which follows. (When held: Delete
Words to Right.) (See Notes #1 & #2.)

1 Ctrl | [Backspace I Delete Previous Word. This deletes the word to the left of the word the
cursor is on.

[Ait] [Dei] Delete to End of Line. This deletes the characters from the cursor
position to the right end of the line (see Note #1).

[Shiftl [F121 Delete Selected Block. This deletes whatever block of text is currently
selected. Follow the procedure “Deleting a Selected Block of Text.” This
procedure allows you to delete any size block of text, from one
character to the entire document (same as |Alt| |Shift| |F2|).

[s»in Delete Row. This deletes the table row that contains the cursor. (Use
the □ on the numeric keypad.)

EHJEH Delete Paragraph. This deletes the paragraph that contains the cursor.

SI EH Delete Sentence. This deletes the sentence that contains the cursor.

NOTE #1 Error Beep. The delete word, delete line, and delete paragraph
functions beep if any text is already selected. To avoid the beep,
press [Esc] (to release any selected text) prior to executing the
function. For example, press [Escl before [Ait] [Dei]. (These functions
do not work if any text is already selected, because they
themselves must use the feature of selected text.)

NOTE #2 Other Delete Functions. XyWrite includes many delete

functions that are not pre-assigned to keys. Refer to the
Keyboard File section in the Customization Guide for a list of
options and instructions on how to assign these options to the
keys of your choice.

3-29
Undeleting Text [F121

[F121
FORMAT
MENU E3 C3E33

Purpose The Undelete function allows you to retrieve recently deleted text from
memory and insert it into your documents. In order to understand how
Undelete works, you need to understand how XyWrite saves deleted text.

XyWrite stores deleted text on an undelete stack. When you do a series of

deletions without moving the cursor or performing any other operation,
the successive deletions are saved as a single entry on the stack. For
example, if you press IctHl [DeH three times to delete three consecutive words,
all of the words are saved as one deletion. When you use undelete, you
can retrieve the deleted text a unit at a time or as a block. Using the same
example, you can undelete word 3, then word 2, and finally word 1 or you
can undelete all three words with one keystroke.

Action Undeleting Text

To copy text from the undelete stack into your document:

1. Position the cursor where you want the deleted text to reappear.

2. Press [F12].
Result: The Undelete/Clipboard Text dialog box appears, displaying
the first 50 or 60 characters in each entry.

3. Highlight the entry containing the text you want to undelete.

4. To undelete text a unit at a time (see Note #1):

a. Activate the Play Back pushbutton.
Result: The last unit of the deleted entry is inserted in the text.
b. Press |Soace Bar| for each subsequent unit in the entry you want to
undelete.

5. To undelete the entire entry, activate the Entire Block pushbutton.

3-30
ED Undeleting Text

NOTE #1 Multiple Unit Delete. As explained earlier, XyWrite treats all text deleted
between cursor movements as a single entry, so one undelete stack entry
could be made up of several smaller units. In other words, if you press
two or more delete keys without moving the cursor, XyWrite makes one
entry on the stack. You can undelete text in the same increments that you
deleted it by activating the Play Back pushbutton.

NOTE #2 Shortcut Deletions do not get added to the undelete stack until you move
the cursor. Therefore, if you delete text and immediately realize you made
a mistake, you can bypass the undelete stack and reinsert the text by
pressing [F12].

NOTE #3 Clipboard. The undelete stack also saves text that was deleted with the
Cut to Clipboard option. You can retrieve the most recently cut text either
by pasting from the clipboard (iShiftl Rnsl) or by activating the Undelete
function (IF121). Text that has been previously cut to the clipboard can be
retrieved by activating the Undelete function. (Text that has been copied to
the clipboard is not saved to the undelete stack.)

NOTE #4 Default Settings. The DI setting controls two undelete stack features: (1)
the number of entries on the undelete stack and (2) the minimum number
of characters it recognizes as a delete unit. By default, XyWrite saves up to
30 separate entries on the undelete stack, but it does not save units of less
than three characters. You can increase or decrease both values by
changing the DI setting in the Default File. Refer to the Customization
Guide for more information.

NOTE #5 Disabling the Undelete Stack. Setting the DI default to 0 disables the
undelete stack. When it is disabled, XyWrite saves only the most recently
deleted text in memory. You can retrieve it by pressing [F12].

NOTE #6 Saved Sessions. When you save an editing session, the contents of the
undelete stack are saved along with the file and window settings.

3-31
Transposing Text EJC, EJW, 0S, QP

FORMAT □C Transpose Characters

0W Transpose Words
□S Transpose Sentences
□P Transpose Paragraphs
MENU Not a menu option

Purpose XyWrite's Transpose Text feature allows you to swap the positions of text
units. It offers you four options:
• Transpose the current character and the previous character (see Note
#1)
• Transpose the current word and the previous word
• Transpose the current sentence and the previous sentence
• Transpose the current paragraph and the previous paragraph

Action Transposing Text

To transpose text:
1. Place the cursor within the second unit of text you want to transpose.
2. Transpose the text. For example:
Press: 0S
Result: XyWrite transposes the current sentence and the previous
sentence.

NOTE #1 Transposing Characters. XyWrite's response to the transpose character

function (0C) depends on the character under the cursor. If the cursor is
on a text character, XyWrite transposes the character under the cursor and
the preceding character. If the cursor is on a separator (space, period,
comma, etc.), XyWrite transposes the two characters that precede the
cursor.

NOTE #2 Alternative Keys. The Transpose Text functions are also assigned to
number keys 1-4:
Transpose Characters 01
Transpose Words 02
Transpose Sentences 03
Transpose Paragraphs 04

3-32
UC, LC, CC, CF Changing Case

FORMAT MUC
IW1LC
imcc
EH3CF
MENU

Purpose The case commands allow you to change letters to uppercase or lowercase.
You can change the character at the cursor location or change an entire
block of selected text. The following four commands are at your disposal:
• UC (Uppercase)—Changes text to uppercase (capital letters)
• LC (Lowercase)—Changes text to lowercase
• CC (Change Case)—Changes uppercase to lower and lowercase to
upper
• CF (Capitalize First)—Changes the first letter in a word from lower to
uppercase

The following procedures provide two different ways to change the case
of text:
• Changing the Case of Individual Letters (Option 1)
• Changing the Case of Selected Text (Option 2)

Action Changing the Case of Individual Letters

(Option 1) To change the case of individual letters:

1. Move the cursor to the character whose case you want to change.
2. Enter UC, UL, CCzorCF(seeNote#l). For example, to change the
character to uppercase:
Type: [F5]uc[F9]
3. Press [F9] once for each character you want to make uppercase.
Result: The lowercase characters are changed to uppercase. Uppercase
letters remain uppercase.

3-33
UC, LC, CC, CF (confd)

Action Changing the Case of Selected Text

(Option 2) To change a block of selected text:
1. Move the cursor to the start of the block of text you want to change.
2. Press: (F3)
3. Move the cursor to the end of the block you want to change.
4. Enter UC, LC, CC, or CF (see Note #1). For example, to change the
case:
Type: [F5]cc[F9]
5. Press: [Esc] (to release the selected block of text)

Result: The selected text changes case in Step 4. Notice that by pressing
(F9) repeatedly, you can toggle the case back and forth, from upper- to
lower- to uppercase.

NOTE #1 Capitalize First Letter. Unlike other case commands, the CF (Capitalize
First) command only affects the first letter in a word. If you select a block
of text and issue the CF command, the first letter of each word will be
capitalized, but the other letters will be unchanged. If you issue the CF
command when the cursor is not on the first letter of a word, the
command has no effect.

NOTE #2 Keyboard Shortcuts. The Change Case command is assigned to [CtrilN and
[CtrflH. In addition, if you select text and press [ctri]H, XyWrite cycles through
the commands LC, CF, and UC.

3-34
AU Automatic Uppercase

FORMAT EMAU
MENU E3J EfflEEEl

Purpose The AU (Automatic Uppercase) command automatically capitalizes the

first letter of each sentence as you type, reducing the need to use the Shift
key.

Action Typing with Automatic Uppercase

The Automatic Uppercase command is a toggle—you issue it once to turn
it on and again to turn it off. To use the Automatic Uppercase feature:
1. Move the cursor where you want to start using Automatic Uppercase.
2. Press: [F5]auf7»l (to turn on AU)
Result: The letter A appears at the top right comer of the screen, to
indicate Automatic Uppercase is turned on.
3. Press: [Shift][F5] (to move cursor to text area)
4. Begin typing. The first letter following a period (.), question mark
(?), exclamation mark (1) or carriage return (<-) is automatically typed
uppercase without your having to use the Shift key.
5. When finished typing:
Press: [FslauCT (to turn off AU)

NOTE #1 How AU Works. The AU command capitalizes the first letter following a
period, regardless of what the period is used for—including abbreviations
and numbers (as a decimal point). If you have a lot of abbreviations or
numbers, this mode may not be for you. However, if you are typing
straight text, this mode can save you time.

NOTE #2 Keyboard Shortcut You can turn Automatic Uppercase on and off by
pressing [Ctril [Shift]U,

3-35
 notes

3-36
 Math

Intro If you need to make calculations, you don't need to leave XyWrite for
some other program—you can perform calculations right on the command
line. And in the text area, you can add, subtract, multiply, or divide
numbers one-by-one, total a selected block of numbers in your document,
or evaluate a math expression with just a few keystrokes.

Contents Eage Section

3-38 Header Calculations
3-38 Cursor Arithmetic

3-37
Math + -*
/ =

FORMAT + Addition
Subtraction
Multiplication
/ Division
= Equals
MENU WUW Calculate..

Purpose The math functions enable you to perform math calculations in two ways:
• Header Calculations. You can perform addition, subtraction,
multiplication and division on the command line.
• Cursor Arithmetic. You can add, subtract, multiply, or divide
numbers one at a time. You can total a column of numbers. And you
can evaluate any type of math expression by using block select.

Action Header Calculations

To perform calculations on the command line, you can use addition (+),
subtraction (-), multiplication (*), and division (/). End the calculation
with an equals sign (=) and CT. For example:
Type: [F5]3
*4-1 =£3
Result: The answer is 11. You may use parentheses to group parts of a
calculation, such as (l+2)
*
3=.

Action Cursor Arithmetic

There are several methods for evaluating numbers that are already present
in the text. To perform these evaluations, use the Q, EL □, and 0 keys on
the numeric keypad.

Evaluating Numbers One-By-One.

1. To enter the first number into memory, move the cursor onto it and
press [Aft] EL
2. Move the cursor onto the next number and press [Aft] El (to add), [Aft] EJ (to
subtract), [AftlH (to multiply), or @0 (to divide).
Result: The intermediate answer appears on the status line.
3. Repeat step 2 until you have completed the calculation.
4. Then move the cursor to where you want the final answer placed, and
press [Aft] □ to place the result in the text. (This also clears the internal
sum—sets it to zero.)

3-38
(confd) Math

Evaluating an Expression in the Text

1. In the text area, use [g] to select a block around any math expression
*
44/2).
(such as 3 There must be no spaces in the expression. You are
allowed to use parentheses. (An equals sign is not required.)
2. Use [Aft] 0 to calculate the result and add it to the internal sum, or use
to subtract it.
3. Then move the cursor to where you want the final answer placed, and
press [Ait] 0 to place the result in the text. This also clears the internal
sum—setting it to zero. Be sure to release the selected numbers by
pressing [Escl.

Totaling a Block of Numbers in the Text

1. Select a block of existingnumbers (such as a row or column). To select
the block use [F3] or [Aft] [F3] as you would select any text.
2. Press [Ah] 0 to add or @0] to subtract. This sums the selected numbers
and adds the total to (or subtracts it from) the internal sum.
3. Then move the cursor to where you want the final answer placed, and
press @0 to place the result in the text. This also clears the internal
sum—sets it to zero. Be sure to release the selected numbers with [Escl.

Tip Clearing Selected Text. Prior to using any math functions, it is a good
idea to do two things:
1. Press [Esc] (to release any selected numbers or text).
2. Clear the internal sum with the CLRSUM command (see Note #1).

This will ensure you are summing only the numbers you have explicitly
selected.

NOTE #1 Clearing the Sum. To set the internal sum to zero:

Type: [F5]clrsum[±j]
Result: This clears the calculator to zero. The abbreviation for CLRSUM is
CS.

NOTE #2 Negative Numbers. When you are totaling a column of numbers,

numbers in parentheses are treated as negative numbers.

NOTE #3 Decimal Precision. The result of any calculation involving division is one
decimal position greater than the number of decimal positions used by the
most precise input number. For example, 2/3=.6 but 2.0/3=.66.

3-39
 NOTES

3-40
 Text Macro Keys

Intro This section describes the capability to store and recall frequently used
text. The first section, Text Macro Procedure, covers the overall process.
Individual commands are described in the second part.

Contents page section Command

3-42 Text Macro Procedure

3-42 Temporary Use of Text Macro Keys
3-44 Disk Use of Text Macro Keys

Commands
3-46 Save Text [Shiftl[F21#
3-47 Get Text E3#
3-48 Display Text Macro Directory
3-49 Store Text Macro Keys to Disk STSGT
3-50 Load Text Macro Keys from Disk LDSGT
3-51 Clear Text Macro Keys CLRSGT, REMOVE
3-52 Insert Text Macro Text IS

3-41
Text Macro Procedure

Purpose Text macro keys allow you to save information for later recall. You do this
by defining a block of text and saving it to any one of 36 keys (A-Z, 0-9)
which, when preceded by F2, will reproduce the text macro. Text macro
keys are often called save)get keys because you can save text on them and
later get that text back. You can recall the saved information as many
times as you want, whenever you want.

Text macro keys have many uses, including:

1. Boilerplate Text. Keep often-used blocks of text at hand to insert into a
document whenever you wish.
2. Cut and Paste. Save blocks of text to insert at other locations in any
window.
3. Embedded Commands. You can save embedded commands (such as
LM, RM, TS, IP, MDBO) to a text macro key exactly the same way you
save text. Then you can switch formats with a single keystroke.

The process is quite simple. For example, to save a sentence to the A key,
position the cursor within the sentence and select it using the |Shift|[F4] (Select
Sentence) function. Next, press [Shift] [g] and then press A to create the text
macro on key A.

To recall the block you just saved, press 0 A. You can recall the block as
many times as you want (until the key is cleared or its contents modified).

The following procedure runs through the entire sequence of (1) saving
text temporarily to text macro keys, and (2) saving a set of text macro keys
to disk.

ACTION Temporary Use of Text Macro Keys

This procedure saves text to memory but not to disk. Refer to the
illustration on the next page for an overview of the following commands,
which are to be carried out with a document open.
1. Save the Text Select the text you want to save. For example, to select
a paragraph of text, move the cursor to the paragraph and press [F4j.
To save the paragraph to one of the 36 possible text macro keys, press
I Shift] [gj followed by any letter or number key. To save to letter X, for
example:
Press: [Shift! [F2|
Press: X
Press: [Esc] (to release the selected block)
If you want to save new text to key X, repeat this procedure. The new
text replaces the previous text.

3-42
(confd) Text Macro Procedure

3-43
Text Macro Procedure (confd)

2. Get the Text To insert the text from one of the keys (say, text macro X)
into the file:
Press: [F2]x
You can repeat Step 2 to insert the text in this or other documents as
many times as you wish.

Action Disk Use of Text Macro Keys

This procedure shows you (1) how to store the current set of text macro
keys to disk, and (2) how to recall the set for use at a future editing session.
(Refer to the previous illustration.)
1. Store Text Macro Keys to Disk. First view the current set of text
macro keys (this is the set you will store):
Press: |Ctri|fF21
To return to the document, after viewing, press [Esc]. To save the
current set of text macro keys:
Type; gsjstsgt tmacros.sgtS
You can save to any filename you wish, but we recommend that you
use the SGT extension, and store the file in the same directory as
ED1TOR.EXE. If you follow those conventions, XyWrite will include
the new text macro file when it creates a list of text macros.

2. Loading Text Macro Keys from Disk. Once the text macro keys have
been saved to disk, they can be loaded back into use at other editing
sessions as follows.
Enter LDSGT along with the name of the text macro set you stored in
Step 1.
Type: [F5]ldsgt tmacros.sgtH
When this new set of keys is loaded, it overlays the previous set.
Unassigned keys in the new set do not disturb previously assigned keys.
(If you prefer to clear the old text macro keys before loading a new set,
enter CLRSGT at the command line.)
(Optional) To check that the text macro keys were indeed loaded, view
them by pressing [Ctri][F2]. When done viewing the text macro keys, press
[E3-

3-44
(confd) Text Macro Procedure

NOTE #1 Pre-Defined Text Macro Files. XyWrite includes several pre-defined text
macro files. Most define special characters. Another text macro file,
SAVEGET.SGT, includes several useful command shortcuts; for example,
SAVEGET.SGT assigns the command to insert a date to text macro D. To
review a list of all the text macros defined in SAVEGET.SGT, load it and
then press [ciri][F2].

NOTE #2 Automatic Loading. By default, SAVEGET.SGT is loaded at startup. If

you prefer to load a different set of text macros at startup, you can modify
the LDSGT command in STARTUP.INT.

NOTE #3 Removing a Text Macro. The process of storing new text to a text macro
key clears the previous text from that key. You can also use the REMOVE
command to clear text from a key (see "CLRSGT, REMOVE" section in
this chapter).
NOTE #4 Attention! A text macro file is not an ordinary file. Just as you don't store
it with the usual STORE command, you cannot call it for editing with
CALL. If displayed with CALL it is not readable; and if it is stored with
STORE, the file will be ruined. This file cannot be edited directly. Instead,
put the text to be edited into a regular file (e.g., using |F2|x), edit it and
SAVE the new version to the same key (using fshift] [F2jx). Then store the set
of text macros back to disk with STSGT.
NOTE #5 PRINT % and SAVE %. You can print the contents of a single text macro
using the PRINT % command. For example, use PRINT %A to print the
contents of text macro A. Similarly, use SAVE %A to save the contents of
text macro A to disk in its own file (saved as A.SAV).

3-45
Save Text tShiit1[F21#

FORMAT [Shih|[F21#
# is a letter (A-Z) or number (0-9) key.
MENU eeii Text bom i Macro 11

Purpose |Shift||F2|# copies the selected block of text to the text macro key you specify.
(This is a short-term save—that is, the text is saved until you overwrite
that key or quit XyWrite.) You can recall the text at any time by pressing
[F2] and that same letter or number key. You can save as much text as
memory allows. For an overview of the text macro key procedure and
what it's used for, see the previous section, "Text Macro Procedure."

If text is already present on the text macro key, this command erases that
text when saving the new text.

Action Temporary Save to a Text Macro Key

To save text only until you quit XyWrite:
1. Select the Text. Select the text you want to save.
2. Save the Text. Choose which key you want to assign to the selected
block: A-Z or 0-9. To save to the X key, for example:
Press: |Shft|[F2|
Press: x

Result: Any text previously saved to text macro key X (if any) is erased
from memory, and the text selected in Step 1 is saved to that key. The
status line then says "Done."

NOTE Appending to a Text Macro. The AD function call allows you to append
the currently selected text to the end of a previously defined text macro
key. Refer to "Keyboard Files" in the Customization Guide for information
on assigning this function call to the key of your choice.

346
EH# Get Text

FORMAT EH#
# is a letter (A-Z) or number (0-9) key.
Menu rt | Text from a MacroT

Purpose £2]# copies text from the text macro key to the cursor location. You can
recall the text at any time (as many times as you wish).

£2] # inserts text into the text area only. No text will be inserted on the
command line (unless the text macro contains a program).

Action Getting Text from a Text Macro Key

Use this procedure to insert text which has been previously saved to a text
macro key.
1. Move the cursor to the spot in the document where you want to insert
the text macro text.
2. Press £3 along with the key you want. For example, to get the text
from text macro A:
Press: £H A

Result: This gets the text from text macro A and inserts it into the
document at the cursor location.

3-47
Display Text Macro Directory ISDEI

FORMAT [sSEH
MENU CEU SSEEU2ES

PURPOSE ISjJED displays the entire set of text macro keys. This enables you to check
which text macro keys are currently available, and reminds you what text
is saved to each key.

ACTION Displaying the Text Macro Directory

To display the currently loaded set of text macro keys:
1. Press: [CvillF21

Result: The Text Macro dialog box appears, displaying a list of text
macro keys. Each entry begins with its identifying letter or number.
There is one line per text macro—only the first 35 characters of each
text macro are displayed (see Note).

2. When done viewing:

Press: [Esc]

Result: This returns you to your document.

NOTE Viewing a Single Key. The SK function call allows you to view up to one
screenful of text for a macro key. Refer to "Keyboard File" in the
Customization Guide for information on assigning this function call to a
key.

3-48
 Store Text Macro Keys to Disk

FORMAT to il! STS GT filename

filename identifies the file on disk to which the text macro keys will be
stored.
MENU eh EnnrHnEH

Purpose STSGT stores the set of current text macro keys to the specified file on
disk. This enables you to reload the keys for use at a later editing session.
You can also save several sets of text macro keys and load each one for a
different purpose.

Action Storing Text Macro Keys to Disk

This procedure saves text macro keys to disk. Refer to the illustration in
the section "Text Macro Procedure."
1. View the Text Macro Keys (optional). To view the text which will be
saved to disk:
Press: |CtrlI|F2|

After viewing the text, return to the document by pressing [Esc].

2. Disk Save (Long-Term Save). To save to disk all of the keys viewed in
Step 1:
Type: [F5]stsgt proposal.sgtS

In this case, PROPOSAL.SGT is the filename to which the keys are stored.
You can save to any filename you wish, but we recommend that you use
the SGT extension, and store the file in the same directory as
EDITOR.EXE. If you follow those conventions, XyWrite will include the
new text macro file when it creates a list of text macros.

3-49
Load Text Macro Keys from Disk LDSGT

FORMAT LDSGT filename

filename is the file from which the text macro keys will be recalled.
MENU EED E3JEH2EH E33S8

Purpose LDSGT loads all of the text macro keys from the specified file on disk.
This enables you to use the keys saved in a previous editing session. To
see how this complements the STSGT command, refer to the illustration in
the earlier section "Text Macro Procedure."

Action Loading Text Macro Keys from Disk

To load a set of the text macro keys from the disk and restore them to use,
enter the LDSGT command along with the name of the text macro file you
want to load. For example:
Type: [Fsjldsgt proposal, sqtfcj]

You may now insert the text from any of these keys into any file you call
up.

NOTE #1 Overlaying Sets of Text Macro Keys. Loading a set of text macro keys
replaces only those keys contained in the loaded set. The content of all
other keys remains unchanged. For example, if keys A,B,C and D are
originally defined, and you load a new set containing C,D,E and F, you
will end up with the old A, old B, new C, new D, new E and new F.

NOTE #2 Clearing Text Macros. If you would prefer to clear the text macro keys
before loading a new set, use CLRSGT.

TIP Starting XyWrite with Text Macros Loaded. When you start XyWrite, the
file SAVEGET.SGT is automatically loaded. You can edit the LDSGT
command in STARTUP.INT to load the text macro file you want. If the
text macro file is not in the same directory as EDITOR.EXE, be sure to
include the path to it as part of the filename, or in the path statement in
AUTOEXEC.BAT.

3-50
CLRSGT, REMOVE Clear Text Macros

FORMAT rm CLRSGT (Option 1)

ROTT! REMOVE # (Option 2)
# is the text macro key—any single letter (A-Z) or single number (0-9).
MENU IBB! I Text from a Macro ( JISH

PURPOSE CLRSGT clears all of the current text macro keys from memory. You
might do this before loading in a new set of text macro keys.
REMOVE clears any single text macro key (or user program) from
memory.
CLRSGT and REMOVE have no effect on any text macro files stored on
disk.

ACTION Clearing All Text Macro Keys

To eliminate all current text macro keys from memory:
Type: [F5]clrsgt[5]
Result: All text macro keys are now cleared from memory. This
operation does not affect any text macro files on disk.

ACTION Clearing a Single Text Macro Key

To clear a single text macro key from memory, enter REMOVE followed
by the name of the text macro (A-Z, 0-9). For example, to clear text macro
X:
Type: [fsI remove xCT
Result: Text macro X is now cleared from memory.

3-51
Insert Text Macro Text

FORMAT EBZJiS #
# is any letter or number.
MENU Not a menu option.

Purpose The IS (Insert) command allows you to insert any text macro block into
the text at printout. IS performs the same function as |F2]A except that AIS:A
is displayed on-screen instead of the actual text.

The IS command gives you the ability, for example, to make up a form
letter using the text from various text macro keys. To do this, save each
block you want inserted in the letter to a text macro, insert an IS command
at each point in the letter where you want text macro text inserted, and
then print the letter.

Action Entering an Insert Text Macro Command

To enter an IS (Insert) command into your text:
1. Position the cursor where you want to insert the text macro.
2. Enter the IS command along with the text macro letter or number key.
For example, to insert text macro X:
Type: [Fsjis xCT

Result: The IS command appears in formatted and draft views as:

▲ISX

When you use the PRINT or PRINTF command, information in the text
macros is printed. You can also use PRINTS with the file stored.

NOTE Graphic View. The content of an IS command is not displayed in graphic

view; only the marker appears.

3-52
 Search and Replace Text

Rather than scrolling screen-by-screen through the text hunting for a

word, you can learn to make the computer work for you. The Search and
Change commands can help you improve the speed at which you revise
text.

The GO command takes you quickly to the point in the file you specify,
while the Compare commands locate the likenesses and differences
between two versions of the same document.

Some time spent learning these commands can pay off well.

Contents page section Command

3-54 Searching for Text SEARCH

3-60 Searching Through Files SEARCH
3-62 Changing Text CHANGE
3-66 Go to Page GO
3-67 Comparing Two Files @0,013

3-53
Searching for Text SEARCH

FORMAT EM!SEARCH/sw } string} Search forward

EMJSEARCHA/sw } string} Search forward, absolute
BWflSEARCHB/szo !string} Search back
ESOSEARCHBA/sw } string} Search back, absolute
ABBREV [WlSE/sw }string}
L^\71SEA/sw }string}
EM! SEB/szo I string}
EM! SEB A/sw I string I
/sw is one or more of the following switches:
/f (put cursor on first character in string)
/s (search within selected block)
/w (search for word)
/t (start search at top of file)

string (optional) is the text you want to find. If omitted, XyWrite searches
for the last search string entered.
MENU EM

Purpose The SEARCH command and its variations allow you to search through a
document or selected block to find the text you specify (string). You have
the four search choices listed above. You can search in either
direction—the search continues until it finds the string or reaches the end
of the document. To search through more than one file, refer to the next
section "Searching Through Files."
Absolute Case Match. The "A" (Absolute) at the end of SEARCHA and
SE ARCHB A means absolute case match: The search stops only for text
that has exactly the same uppercase and lowercase letters that you
specify—they must match letter-for-letter. (See the examples that follow.)
String. The string shown above in the format statements includes all
characters that appear between the separators, shown here as vertical bars
(I), including spaces, punctuation and symbols (see Note #1). If omitted,
XyWrite searches for the string specified in the previous search command.
Switches. The Search command accepts four optional switches (or
modifiers), which are separated from the Search command by a slash. Use
a separate slash for each switch.
The /F (First Character) switch tells XyWrite to put the cursor on the first
character of the string whenever a match is found. (The default is to put
the cursor immediately after the string.)
The /S (Selected Text) switch tells XyWrite to search the currently selected
block. The default is to search from the cursor location to the end of the
document (see Note #2).

3-54
(confd) Searching for Text

The /W (Word) switch tells XyWrite to treat string as a word. That means
XyWrite does not stop on string if it is part of a word.

The /T (Top of File) switch tells XyWrite to start the search at the
beginning of the file. (The default is to start at the current cursor location.)
It finds only the first occurrence of string. The /T switch is useful if your
cursor is in the middle of a long document, and you want to check to see if
a word or phrase appears anywhere within the document. If no match is
found, the cursor remains where it was when you first issued the
command.

Wild Card Search Characters. At the end of this section is a list of wild
card characters that are veiy useful in searches (see Note #3).

ACTION Search for Text

To search for text in a document:
1. Move the cursor to the point where you want the search to begin.
2. Enter the SEARCH command or variation, along with the text you're
looking for. For example, to search forward for the word "orange":
Type: [Fgsearch I orange I £3
Result: The search begins at the cursor location and searches forward,
stopping at the first occurrence of "orange."
3. To search for the next occurrence of "orange":
Press: [F9|

EXAMPLES ESBsearch iorange!

Starts at the cursor location, and searches forward, stopping at the first
occurrence of "orange" (or "Orange" or "ORANGE," accepting upper-
or lowercase letters).
EEJse/f .orangeI
Same as above, but the cursor stops on the "o" in "orange" rather than
after the "e."
EBZJse/s iorange I
Searches the selected block for "orange," accepting upper- or lowercase
letters.
[Wlse/s/f iorange I
Searches the selected block for "orange," accepting upper- or lowercase
letters. When a match is found, the cursor stops on the "o."
search a iorange i
Begins at cursor location and stops only for "orange" (skips over
"Orange" and ORANGE").

3-55
Searching for Text (confd)

KEJseba I orange!
Searches backward only for "orange" (skipping over "Orange" and
"ORANGE").
rBTZlse
Searches for the string defined in the previously executed Search
command (in this case "orange"). Enters the string, with delimiters, on
the command line, but it does not enter any command switches.

NOTE #1 The Vertical Bar (!) Separator. You are not required to use the vertical bar
(I) to begin and end the string. You can use any character that does not
appear in the string. In fact, you must not use a vertical bar if it appears in
the string. You can even use the single space as the separator as long as
the space is not included in the string—this is why the shortcut in Note #4
works. (The command line is initially a row of spaces. Therefore, you get
a space at the end of the word automatically.)

NOTE #2 Searching a Selected Block. If the cursor is within the selected block
when you issue an SE/S command, the search starts at the current cursor
location and continues to the end of the selected block. If the cursor is
outside the selected block, the search starts at the beginning of the block.

NOTE #3 Wild Card Characters. The following wild card characters can be used in
searches. We call these wild card characters because (like joker cards in
poker) they can represent other values. They provide you with powerful
search capabilities.

More Than One String: 0 Press: [Aft]lShift|O

You can read this wild card as OR. It allows you to search for more than
one string at a time.

Any But Next Single Character: B Press: |Aftl IShlftl-

You can read this wild card as NOT. It allows you to search for a string
that does not include the character after the B-

Any Single Letter (A-Z): fl Press: |Aitl |Shift|L

This wild card represents any letter. It allows any of the 26 letters of the
alphabet to take its position in the text.

Any Single Number (0-9): El Press: [AftlfShiftlN

You can read this wild card as any number. It allows any of the 10
numbers to take its position in the text.

Any Single Number or Letter: Q Press: ® ESA

You can read this wild card as any number or letter. It represents any of
the 26 letters or 10 numbers when the search is executed.
3-56
(confd) Searching for Text

Any Single Character: □ Press: [Altl[ShiftlX

You can read this wild card as any character. It represents any character,
letter, number, punctuation, space, symbol, or other graphic mark of the
255 characters of the ASCII set when the search is executed.

Any String of Characters: El Press: [Aitl |Shift|W

You can read this wild card as any string up to 80 characters in length. It
can include any characters from the XyWrite character set. This wild card
must be used with at least one other character.

Any Single Sentence Separator: | Press: [Alt] [Shift].

This wild card allows any of the sentence separators to take its position in
the text. The sentence separators are:

Refer to the description of the SE (Separator) table in the Default File

section of the Customization Guide for information on how to define
different sentence separators.

Any Single Separator: 0 Press: @[shg]S

You can read this wild card as any separator character. The most common
word separator is the single space. The other separators are:
+ = ()[]{) <>:;"’,. I A£fx+°s±-"l§
plus the line draw and fill characters.

Repeat Next Character: fl to EH Press: ® [sjgt]O thru

[Alt][Shift]9
This wild card defines the maximum number of times the next character
can appear in the string.

Line Feed Character: D Press: [Ait] [shift] F

This wild card represents a line feed character. It allows you to search for
isolated line feeds, as might be found in files you import from other
programs. (XyWrite uses a carriage return-line feed combination for
paragraph endings.)

3-57
Searching for Text (confd)

Carriage Return Character: fl Press: [Ahl [Shift] R

This wild card represents a carriage return character. It allows you to
search for isolated carriage returns, as might be found in files you import
from other programs. (XyWrite uses a carriage return-line feed combina­
tion for paragraph endings.)

EXAMPLES EHDse 'judiQjudyEJjudeel

Finds all occurrences of the three different spellings.
EHflse SkeHyl
Finds "joke" and "ketchup" but not "donkey" or "keystroke
ESZJse itestj!
Finds "test." "test!" "test?" "tesQ" and "test," but not "test,"
"testimony," or "test "
[Wise JtestHl’
Exact opposite of above. Does not find "test" when it is followed by a
sentence separator, but does find all other occurrences.
[Wise icomputefl!
Finds "computer," "computed," and "computerized," but does not
find "compute."
[Wise I chapter di
Finds "Chapter 1" and "Chapter 2."
[Wise ![J Q6-8964!
Finds "386-8964" and "EU6-8964."
[Wise 18023086!
Finds "8-23-86" and "8/23/86."
[Wise !0rose0!
Finds "rose" when it stands alone—it would not stop at "primrose" or
"rosemary."
[Wise 1 AlexEJBell *
Finds "Alex Bell," "Alexander Bell," and "Alexander Graham Bell."
[Wise loh nflo!!
Finds "oh no!," "oh noo!," "oh nooo!," "oh noooo!," and "oh
nooooo!" but not "oh noooooo!"
[Wise SAIexEJBell!
Finds "Alex Bell," "Alexander Bell," and "Alexander G. Bell," but
does not find "Alexander Graham Bell" because there is a limit of 10
characters between the "x" and the "B."

3-58
(confd) Searching for Text

NOTE #4 Shortcut To search for just one word, you can use:
EKflse orange
Note there are two spaces between "se" and "orange." This does not work
when searching for more than one word (see Note #1).
NOTE #5 Spaces are Characters Too. Spaces are counted in the search the same as
any printable character. For example:
ESZJse I babysit'
would not stop at "baby sit."
NOTE #6 Special Characters. All characters that appear between the vertical bars
(I) are searched for, including the following special characters:
Tab Press: [Tab] (in the Search dialog
boxes, press [Ait] [shift] [Tab] to enter a
Tab character).
Space Press: |space8ar|
Carriage return Press: [ctrf] H
Left double-angle bracket («) Press: [ctrfl [<]
Right double-angle bracket (») Press: [Ctrl] 0
NOTE #7 Character Modes. A search will not match text that is partially bold,
underline, or reverse. For instance, SEARCH I fulltime I will stop on
"fulltime," but will not stop on "fulltime." This is because the latter has
«MDUL» embedded in it, which is seen as characters in the search. In
expanded view, you would see:
full«MDUL»time

NOTE #8 Searching for a Function Call. To search for a function call that is
mapped to a key, type the search command up to where you want to in­
sert the function call; press (Scroll Lockl; press the key associated with the
function call you are searching for; press I Scroll Lock] again; complete the search
command.
If you want to search for a function call that is not assigned to a key, or if
you want to put the search command within a program, you have to use
the following format:
EDse/fn [string cfmnstring'
where string (optional) is text that precedes or follows the function call
and mn is the two-character function call. The /FN switch tells XyWrite
that the search contains a function call and the d* (ASCII 11) instructs
XyWrite to interpret the next two characters as a function call.

3-59
Searching Through Files SEARCH

FORMAT ES3 SEARCH/c range! string! (Option 1)

ES3 SEARCHA/c range! string' (Option 2)
ABBREV EH3 SE/c range! string!
ECT SEA/c range 'string!
/c is an optional switch that tells XyWrite to count the number of times it
finds a match (see Note #1).
range is globalnain el,global7iame2,globalname3,...
globalname is described below.
string is the text you want to find.
MENU

Purpose When you specify a range along with the SEARCH command, you can
search across multiple files to find the string of text you want. XyWrite
searches all the directories you specify in range. You would use this
procedure when you are looking for text but are not sure what file it may
be in. The other forms of the command (SEB, SEBA, CH, CV) do not work
across multiple files.

When you search through more than one file, you must start with an empty
window. XyWrite allows you to browse quickly through the files, one at a
time. Files are displayed in expanded view—this is what allows it to work
quickly.

Range. The range is the series of filenames you want to search through,
separated by commas (but no spaces following the commas).

Globalname. The globalname can be any filename, such as

CHAPTER.DOC. It can also be any global filename using * or ?, such as
*.
A: or CHAPTER7.DOC or B: *.TXT. You can include a drive letter and
path. Globalnames are described further under the DIR command in
Chapter 2.

String. The string is the same as defined earlier for the Search command.
It can include any wild card characters, as described in the previous pages.

3-60
(confd) Searching Through Files

ACTION Search for Text

To search across multiple files for text:
1. Move to an empty screen (where no file or directory is open). For
example, to open window 6:
Press: [Ctrl] [F6|
Type: 6
2. Enter the SEARCH or SEARCHA command followed by the filenames.
Follow this with the string you want to search for. For example:
Type: [F5]search *.a:
,b:
doc ! orange! S
Result: The search looks for the first occurrence of "orange," first
searching through the files on drive A and then through the files with
the extension DOC on drive B.
3. Select your response. Type C, O, N or S:
C Continue searching for the next occurrence.
O Open the file that is shown on the screen.
N Next file—skip to the next file and continue the search.
S Stop the search and clear the screen.

Result: If you type "C" or "N," the search continues until the next
occurrence of "orange." If you type "O" or "S," the search stops. When
the search is over, XyWrite displays on the status line the number of times
the specified string was found.

NOTE #1 Using Search as a Counter. The optional /C (Count) switch is useful if

you simply want to count the number of times that string appears within a
range of documents. When you add the /C switch, XyWrite doesn't stop
when it finds a match, so there is no need for you to respond. When the
search is over, XyWrite displays the number of times it found string.

NOTE #2 Searching Binary Files. The Search command is not designed for use
within binary files. If you encounter a binary file (e.g., EDITOR.EXE)
when you are searching a range of files, press "N." XyWrite will abort it
and continue the search in the next file.

3-61
Changing Text CH, CV

FORMAT EJflCV/sw'stringl'string2l Change verify

IffTJ CVA/sw ! string! ! string! I Change verify, absolute
EH3 CH/sw ; string!.! string2! Change
ESOCHA/sw \string! !string21 Change, absolute
A means absolute case match (described below).
/sw is one or more of the following switches:
/s (change within selected block)
/w (treat string as a word)
/t (start change at top of file)
/# (make change # times, where # is a number)
string! is the text being searched for.
string2 is the text which is inserted into the text, replacing string!.
MENU EJE2ES

PURPOSE Each of the Change commands searches forward through the document to
find the text you specify, in order to replace it. The search ends when
XyWrite completes the number of changes you requested (with /#) or at
the bottom of the document. The changes are not displayed until they are
all done.

Verify means that when XyWrite finds the string, it asks you whether or
not to make the change. You must respond before it looks for the next
occurrence.

Absolute Case Match. The "A" (Absolute) at the end of CVA and CHA
means absolute case match: The search looks only for text that has exactly
the same uppercase and lowercase letters that you specified in string!.
They must match letter-for-letter.

Replacement Text. string2 is always inserted into the text "as is," with its
letters uppercase or lowercase exactly as you typed them.

Wild Card Search Characters. The Change commands allow the use of
the same wild cards as the Search commands. You can use the wild cards
in string! and string2. (See Note #1 for details.)

Switches. The Change command accepts four optional switches, which are
separated from the Change command by a slash. Use a separate slash for
each switch.

The /S (Selected Text) switch tells XyWrite to change the selected block.
(The default is to search from the cursor position to the end of the file.)
3-62
CH, CV Changing Text

The /W (Word) switch tells XyWrite to treat string as a word. That means
XyWrite does not stop on string if it is part of a word.

The /T (Top of File) switch tells XyWrite to start the change at the
beginning of the file. (The default is to start at the current cursor location.)
If no match is found, the cursor remains where it was when you first
issued the command.

The /# (Number) switch tells XyWrite how many times you want the
specified change to be made. (The default is to continue to the end of the
file.)

EXAMPLES EHUcv Iorangelgrape!

Starting at the current cursor position, changes every instance of
"orange," "Orange" and "ORANGE" to "grape," allowing you to
verify each change.
EHOcva/t/10 'orange'grape!
Starting at the top of the file, changes ten instances of "orange" to
"grape," allowing you to verify the change. Skips over "Orange" and
"ORANGE."
EHOch/2 I orange! grape!
Starting at the current cursor position, changes two occurrences of
"orange," "Orange" or "ORANGE" to grape, without verifying.
Effljcha !orange!grape!
Starting at the current cursor position, changes "orange" to "grape."
Skips over "Orange" and "ORANGE." Runs without verifying.

ACTION Changing Text with Verifying

To search for text and have XyWrite stop to ask you to verify each change:
1. Move the cursor to the point in text where you want to begin the
search.
2. Enter CV or CVA. For example, to search for the word "orange" and
replace with "grape":
Type: [f^cv ! orange! grape! S
Result: The search begins at the cursor location and continues forward,
stops at the first occurrence of "orange" and asks you to verify the
change. Since we specified CV (and not CVA), the search stops for
"Orange" or "ORANGE" or any other combination of upper- and
lowercase letters.

3-63
Changing Text (confd)

3. Verify the change. Type Y, N, S (stop here), O (one more):

Y Yes, change the text and continue the search.
N No, do not replace the text; continue the search.
S Stop the search (without replacing the text) and leave the cursor
at the current point.
O Stop after replacing the text.
[Esc] Abandon the search (without replacing the text) and return the
cursor to the initial starting point.

Result: If you type "Y" or "N," the search continues for the next
occurrence of "orange." If you type "S," "O," or [Esc], the search stops.

ACTION Changing Text Without Verifying

To search for text and change it without it stopping for verification:
1. Save the Document As a precaution, before making changes, it is a
good idea to SAVE your document. This saves the current version of
the document on disk, allowing you to recover the original should you
mistakenly change text you did not intend to change.

2. Enter CH or CHA. For example, let's use CH to search for the word
"orange" and replace it with "grape":
Type: [F5]ch I orange 'grape 1 £0
Result: The search begins at the cursor location and continues forward;
at each occurrence of "orange" it removes the word and replaces it
with "grape." Since we specified CH (and not CHA), the command
changes "Orange" or "ORANGE" or any other combination of
lowercase and uppercase letters. The changes continue non-stop until
the end of the document is reached, at which point the status line says
DONE.
3. Emergency Stop. If you need to stop a search before it reaches the end:
Press: [ctri] |Break|

NOTE #1 Wild Cards. Like the Search commands, the Change commands allow you
to use wild cards to represent other values. You can use them as part of
stringl only, or you can use them in both strings of the Change command.
For a list of valid wild cards, refer to the description of "Searching for
Text" earlier in this chapter.

When you use wild cards in stringl and string2, XyWrite looks at what the
match was in stringl and inserts that value in string?. Therefore, the wild
cards in stringl must correspond to the wild cards in string2.

3-64
(confd) Changing Text

EXAMPLES EEZJch I ringd I ring'

Changes "rings," "Ringer," and "RINGING" to "ring."
ESOcva ! testCJ lexamQ I
Changes "testl" to "examl," "test2" to "exam2," etc., stopping each
time to allow you to verify the change. Skips "Testn" and "TESTn."
EH3ch/5 IJBQEJIJan 11
Changes five of "Jun 1" "Jul 2," "Jan 8," etc. to "Jan 1."

NOTE #2 Verify Option. You can have XyWrite verify that you really want to
execute the CH command by prompting you with the question: "Cannot
recover changes-proceed anyway? (Y/N)" If you press "Y," XyWrite
carries out the instructions in your CH command. If you press "N,"
XyWrite waits for further instructions.
To enable this prompt, add the following setting to the default file:
df cv=1
To turn off the prompt, change the setting to df cv=0 (this is the initial
default setting).

NOTE #3 Deleting Text. You can use the Change command to delete text. You
simply omit string! from the command (but keep the three separators).
For example, to delete the word "orange" from your document, use:
ch iorange 11

NOTE #4 Completion Message. When XyWrite completes a CH or CV command, it

displays a message on the status line telling you how many changes were
made.

ALSO SEE Related Commands. Refer to the Search commands to search without
replacing text. The notes in that section also apply for these Change
commands with one exception: All Change commands search in a forward
direction—you cannot search and replace backwards.

3-65
Go to Page GO

FORMAT ErraGOm-n
m is the page number. (If m is omitted, GO uses the current page.)
n is the page depth. (If n is omitted, GO uses 1 inch.)
MENU

Purpose The GO command allows you to go directly to the page and depth you
specify. This page and depth correspond to the page-page depth numbers
that appear on the status line.

Action Moving to a Page and Page Depth

To move to a certain page and page depth in your document, enter the GO
command with the page and depth. For example, to go to page 4,3 inches
down:
Type: [F5]go 4-30

Result: The page-page depth display turns on (if not already on) and the
cursor moves to the line that is 3 inches from the top of page 4.

Note #1 Options. You can move to a specific depth on the current page by
omitting the page number. You must precede the page depth with a
hyphen. For example, GO -3 moves the cursor to the line that is 3 inches
from the top of the current page.

To move to the top of any page, as a shortcut, specify only the page
number. For example, GO 11 moves the cursor to the top of page 11.

NOTE #2 Jump Command. The JMP (Jump) command allows you to jump to a
specific character position within the current file. Use the form JMP n,
where n is the number of characters from the start of the file. For example,
JMP 9885 positions the cursor on the 9885th character of the file. Each «-
counts as two characters: carriage retum/line feed. The characters within
embedded commands (that appear in the expanded view) also count—
thus, «RM7IN» counts as 7 characters.

3-66
isdmjb Comparing Two Files

FORMAT
SB
MENU EEOEnSlEEH

Purpose The Compare function allows you to examine two similar files character-
by-character to find likenesses and differences. You might use this
function to compare an edited version of a file against die original.

Compare uses two commands: Find Difference (@ □) and Find Match

® 0). You may start the comparison with either command, but you must
use them alternately to find matches and differences between the two files.

XyWrite defines a match as 40 consecutive matching characters (see Note

#1). This means that Compare does not stop at insignificant matches such
as the word "the." A single character that does not match defines a file
difference.

Action Comparing Two Files

To compare two files, say, your draft version of a document with an
edited version:

1. Call the first file to the screen.

Type: [Fsjcall drat®

2. Switch to expanded view.

Press: [Ctrl] [ra]

3. Place the cursor at the point where you want the comparison to begin.

4. Call the second file to the screen.

Type: [F5]call finalES

5. Repeat steps 2 and 3.

6. Search for the first difference between the files:

Press: [CtrilFl

Result: Compare searches through both files until it finds a difference.

The cursor stops at that point in both files. Use ® [F6] to toggle between
the two files to see exactly what the difference is. You can edit either
file or proceed to the next step.
3-67
Comparing Two Files (confd)

7. Search for the next match between the files.

Press :rciriin

Result: Compare searches through both files until it finds a match. The
cursor stops at that point in both files.

8. Continue alternating the Find Difference (Step 6) and Find Match (Step
7) commands until you have finished the comparison.

NOTE #1 Length of Match String. You can change the number of characters
XyWrite uses to find a match. The default is 40. To redefine it, change the
MA setting in the default file.

NOTE #2 Cursor Location. The Compare function starts its search at the current
cursor location in both files. Be sure that the cursor starts at the same point
in both files or Compare will not find where the files match.

3-68
 Spelling Checker and Thesaurus

XyWrite's spelling checker proofreads your documents for you, saving

you from the embarrassment of distributing material with typographical
errors. You can check the spelling of a word, a selected block, a file, or a
series of files. You can even have the spelling checker correct your errors
automatically, and you can extend the Auto-Correct feature to give you a
very powerful "shorthand" phrase expansion. This section describes the
procedures for running and modifying the spelling checker.

An on-line thesaurus is also available. To help you find just the right
word, XyWrite quickly displays a list of words that have a similar
meaning.

Contents page section Command

3-70 Spelling Checker Procedure
3-71 Using the Spelling Checker
3-72 Editing a Personal Dictionary
3-74 Loading a Dictionary

Spelling Commands
3-75 Word Check
3-76 File Check SPELL
3-79 File Correct CORRECT
3-82 Auto-Check/Correct
3-84 Auto-Replace fCtrll [Shiftl A
3-86 Auto-Expand
3-87 Saving the Temporary Dictionary STSPELL

3-88 Thesaurus [CtrflT

3-69
Spelling Checker Procedure

Purpose The spelling checker compares the words in your document with one or
more dictionaries. If it does not find a match, the spelling checker notifies
you that it has found a questionable word, and suggests several
alternative spellings.

There are three ways to check words with the spelling checker:
• Auto-Check. Check each word as you type it in. A beep notifies you
that a word is questionable.
• Word Check. Check the current word.
• File Check. Check a block of selected text, a file, or a list of files with
the SPELL command.

There are three ways to correct words with the spelling checker:
• Auto-Correct Correct your misspellings as you type. (You can also use
this feature to expand an abbreviation into the word or phrase it
represents.)
• Word Correct Correct by selecting from a list of alternatives that the
spelling checker presents.
• File Correct. Correct the list of questionable words found by the SPELL
command by supplying replacements. You update the file(s) in one
pass by issuing the CORRECT command.

The spelling checker uses three types of dictionaries: main, personal, and
temporary. The main dictionary is named DICT.SPL; it is a large
(approximately 100,000 words), built-in dictionary that is in binary format
and cannot be directly edited.

The personal dictionaries contain specialized words that you use often.
They include such things as proper names, product names, technical terms
relating to your line of work, etc. You can have several different personal
dictionaries. Your program disks contain some examples: LEGAL.SPL,
which contains common Latin and other foreign terms; BUSINESS.SPL,
which contains standard business and political terms; and PERS.SPL,
which contains general supplemental words as well as some very common
misspellings and their corrections to support automatic correction.

The temporary dictionary is created as you use the spelling checker; it

contains words that you do not wish to save for future editing sessions.

3-70
(cont'd) Spelling Checker Procedure

ACTION Using the Spelling Checker

To check spelling of an existing document:
1. Display the file you want to check.

2. Type: [FslspellCT
Result: XyWrite checks to see if the main spelling dictionary,
DICT.SPL, is loaded into memory. If it is not, XyWrite automatically
loads it. The cursor moves to the first questionable word in your file
and displays the spelling dialog box.

3. If you want to replace the questionable word, type the replacement

word after the question mark in the dialog box or highlight it in the list
of suggested alternatives.

4. Activate the option you want.

• Exit spell checking. Press [Esc] to turn off the spelling checker.
• Replace the Word. Press Rj] to replace the word under the cursor
with the highlighted word in the dialog box.
• Ignore Once. Press E] or I Spacebar I to skip this occurrence of the
questionable word. (Note: The cursor must be on on the first
character of the questionable word for the I spacebar I option to work; if it
is within the word, XyWrite inserts a space.)
• Suspend CORRECTing. Press [F2] to return to the text file without
making a change. This is similar to [Esc], but XyWrite leaves the
SPELL command in the header so you can restart the spelling
checker by pressing [F9].
• Add Word Temporarily. Press [F3] to add the questionable word to
the temporary dictionary. (Words in the temporary dictionary will
be ignored for the current editing session.)
• Add Word Permanently. Press [F5] to add the questionable word to
your personal dictionary (see Note #2).
• Add Pair Temporarily. Press [g] to replace the questionable word
with the highlighted replacement and add the replacement word to
the temporary dictionary as an alternate spelling.
• Add Pair Permanently. Press [F6] to replace the questionable word
with the highlighted replacement and add the replacement word to
the personal dictionary as an alternate spelling (see Note #2).
Result: XyWrite performs the specified action and moves to the next
questionable word in the file.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you have finished spell checking.

3-71
Spelling Checker Procedure (confd)

NOTE #1 Memory Requirements. DICT.SPL requires a minimum of 108KB of

memory. This is in addition to the memory required to run XyWrite with
DOS.

NOTE #2 Multiple Dictionaries. If you use the LOAD command to load more than
one personal dictionary, [F5] and [F6] add words only to the first personal
dictionary you loaded. If you use the menus to load more than one
personal dictionary, [fs] and [F6] add words only to the last personal
dictionary you loaded.

NOTE #3 Numbers and Punctuation. The spelling checker ignores punctuation

marks, embedded commands, and symbols. It also ignores numbers when
they are the only characters in a word (e.g., 1987). If you want the spelling
checker to ignore numbers when they start a word (e.g., 12th, 1920s),
change the CK (Spelling Checker) setting in the default file. For more
information, refer to "Default Settings" in the Customization Guide.

ACTION Editing a Personal Dictionary

You can use the personal dictionaries just as they are provided on the
program disks, you can add words to them using the spelling dialog box,
or, since they are just text files, you can edit them directly. You can also
create your own personal dictionary to handle the spelling of names,
cities, and other specialized words that you use regularly but are not in
DICT.SPL.
1. Select a name for your dictionary. Lets call it MINE.SPL.
2. Enter the NEW command, just as you would for any text file.
Type: [F5]new mine.spl[7>l
Result: The new (empty) file called MINE.SPL appears on the screen.
3. On the first line, enter the label that tells XyWrite that this file is a
personal spelling dictionary file.
Type: ;SP;«-
Be sure to type the label in uppercase letters and follow it with a
carriage return.
4. Enter the information you want into the dictionary.
a. Adding Words. Type the words you want to store in the dictionary,
putting a carriage return after each word. If the word is a proper
name, use the correct combination of upper- and lowercase letters
(see Note #5). For example:
Type: Chelsea0

3-72
(confd) Spelling Checker Procedure

b. Setting Up Automatic Replacement If there are words that you

frequently misspell in a certain way, you can enter those
misspellings along with their corrections into a personal dictionary.
Then, whenever you are using Auto-Check/Correct or Auto­
Replace, the spelling checker corrects the word for you. When you
use the File Check or Word Check functions, the spelling checker
lists the correction you enter in the dictionary as the first alternate
spelling.
For example, let's say that you often type "receive" as "recieve."
Type: recieve receiver
You can also use the spelling checker's automatic replacement
feature to create your own shorthand typing. Type the following
line into your personal dictionary.
Type: xyw XyWrite<-
Result: When you execute Auto-Expand or have Auto-Check/
Correct or Auto-Replace on and type "xyw" into your text file, the
spelling checker automatically changes it to "XyWrite." You can use
the same method to change one word into a phrase. For example,
type the following line into your personal dictionary:
Type: p1 party of the first part<-
Every time you type "pl," Auto-Expand, Auto-Correct and Auto­
Replace substitute the phrase "party of the first part."
If you want to use a multi-line phrase as the replacement, end each
line with an ASCII 13 (J3).

c. Ignoring Entries in DICT.SPL. Occasionally, you may want to have

the spelling checker ignore a word that is in DICT.SPL. Enter the
standard spelling followed by a space, a question mark, and a
carriage return. For example:
Type: witty ?«-
Result: The spelling checker will flag "witty" as a misspelled word.

5. Store your new dictionary and then load it into memory. (See "Loading
the Dictionary" in this section.)

NOTE #4 Multiple Entries. A word cannot appear more than once in a personal
dictionary. That means you cannot have two different capitalizations of
the same word (e.g., corp, and Corp.), nor can you have a word and then
use it again with an expanded form (e.g., "corp." and "corp,
corporation").

3-73
Spelling Checker Procedure (cont'd)

NOTE #5 Upper- and Lowercase. In addition to verifying the spelling of a word,

XyWrite's spelling checker also checks that you have used the right
combination of upper- and lowercase letters, according to the way you
enter words into the dictionaries. The following rules apply:
• If the word in the dictionary is all lowercase, the spelling checker will
accept any of the following combinations of the word as proper
spellings: all lowercase, all uppercase, or with the first letter
capitalized. Any other combinations will be flagged as questionable.
For example, startup, STARTUP, and Startup are all acceptable, but if
you type Startup, the spelling checker will beep.
• If the word in the dictionary is all uppercase, you must always type it
in all uppercase to avoid getting beeped.
• If the word in the dictionary is a combination of upper- and lowercase,
you must type that word exactly as it appears in the dictionary or in all
uppercase. Any other combination is beeped.

NOTE #6 Adding Abbreviations. You can add abbreviations that end in a period
(such as "Blvd.") to the personal dictionary by calling up the dictionary
and typing the word and the period, followed by a carriage return. (Don't
forget that you have to reload the dictionary into memory every time you
edit the file.) You cannot add an abbreviation ending in a period to a
dictionary by using the spelling dialog box.

ACTION Loading the Dictionary

The spelling checker uses dictionaries loaded in memory to verify the
spelling of your document. When you use the File Check, Word Check, or
Auto-Check/Correct functions, XyWrite automatically loads DICT.SPL. If
you want the spelling checker to also be aware of the specialized words
you use, use the LOAD command to load one or more personal
dictionaries.
Let's load PERS.SPL and LEGAL.SPL.
Type: [Fsjload pe rs. spl+legal. spO

Result: Both the personal dictionaries are loaded into memory from this
single command. You can now use any of the spelling checker options. For
more information about the LOAD command, refer to the Customization
Guide.

NOTE #7 Location. When XyWrite loads DICT.SPL, it looks first for the file in the
current subdirectory; if the dictionary is not there, it searches the
subdirectories defined in the DOS path statement.

3-74
edezi Word Check

@EzI
FORMAT
MENU [2E3 eeh

Purpose [ciri] [F7] is a quick way to check the spelling of a single word. After you check
the word, the cursor moves to the start of the next word, so you can
quickly continue checking additional words if you want.

[ctd] [F7] checks to see if DICT.SPL is loaded into memory. If it is not, it

automatically loads it for you.

Action Checking the Spelling of a Single Word

To check the spelling of a single word:

1. Move the cursor to the word in question.

2. Press: [ctd1|F7|

Result: If the word is correctly spelled, the message OK appears on the

status line and the cursor moves to the next word in the file. Otherwise,
the spelling checker displays the spelling dialog box with a list of options.
For an explanation of the dialog box, see "Using the Spelling Checker" at
the beginning of this section.

NOTE Reassigning Word Check. The function call for Word Check is SO (Spell
One Word). You can reassign this function to another key in your
keyboard file. (See "Keyboard File" in the Customization Guide for more
information.)

3-75
File Check SPELL

FORMAT E33 SPELL (OptionV

SPELL filename,targetfile (Option2)
SPELL ©parentfile,targetfile (Option3)
filename is the name of the file being searched.
targetfile (optional) is the name of the file where you want questionable
words stored. If you omit this name, XyWrite assigns the name
SPELL.TMP.
parentfile contains the names of the files to be searched.
Menu eeh eem and eee

Purpose The SPELL command lets you search existing text for words that don't
appear in one of the dictionaries that you loaded into memory. SPELL also
automatically loads DICT.SPL into memory if it is not already there.

There are four ways you can use the SPELL command:
• Ona selected block
• Ona displayed file
• On a single stored file
• On a list of stored files

If you use SPELL on a selected block or a displayed file, it displays the

spelling dialog box when it finds a questionable word. Additionally, this
use of the SPELL command gives a count of the total number of words in
the file and the total number of questionable words found.

You can also use the SPELL command to search one or more stored files
and make a list of questionable words. When SPELL finishes, you can
review the list at your convenience and make corrections. The CORRECT
command can then be used to update your file(s). (See "File Correct.")

ACTION Using the SPELL Command with a Displayed File

(Option 1) To check a displayed file (or a selected block) for questionable words:

1. Move the cursor to the point in the file where you want the check to
begin (or select the block of text you want to check).

2. If you want the check to include the text in running headers, footers,
footnotes, and index entries, switch to expanded mode.

Press: ®[F8]

3-76
(confd) SPELL

3. Enter the SPELL command.

Type: [F5]spellH

Result: If there are no questionable words, the cursor moves to the end of
the file or selected block, and the message "n words, 0 questionable"
appears on the status line (n is the total number of words in the file or
selected block). If there is a questionable word, the cursor moves to that
word and the spelling dialog box appears on the screen.

This process continues until the SPELL program reaches the end of the file
or selected block. At that point, the message "n words, p questionable"
appears on the status line (n is the total number of words found during the
search, and p is the number of questionable words found).

Action Using the SPELL Command with a Stored File

(Option 2) To check a file that is stored on disk and list the questionable words in a
separate file:
Type: [Fgspell chapter.doc,spell.errH
Result: The file CHAPTER.DOC (including footnotes, running headers,
etc.) is checked for spelling accuracy, and any questionable words are
listed in the file SPELL.ERR. (If no target file is named, XyWrite assigns
the name SPELL.TMP.) When the search is complete, the message "Done"
appears on the status line. You can call the target file right away or wait
until later to review SPELL's findings. (See "File Correct" later in this
section.)

Action Using the SPELL Command with Multiple Files

(Option 3) To check a group of files for spelling accuracy:

1. Create the parent file.

Type: [F5]ne chapters. all0

2. List the names of all the files that you want XyWrite to spell check.
Type each filename on a line by itself.
chapter! <-
chapter2«-
chapter3<-

3. Store the parent file.

3-77
SPELL (confd)

4. Enter the SPELL command.

Type: {F5]spell ©chapters, all G3
Result: XyWrite checks the words in each file listed in CHAPTERS.ALL
and compiles a list of those words that it does not find in one of the
spelling dictionaries. Because we did not specify a target file, the
questionable words are stored in the file SPELL.TMP.

NOTE #1 Double Words. In addition to finding words of unknown spelling, the

spelling checker also flags double words (e.g., "the the") when you run
SPELL on a displayed file.

NOTE #2 Embedded Commands. If you run the spelling checker on a stored

file, XyWrite checks the spelling of text in all embedded commands.
When you check the spelling of a displayed file, XyWrite checks the
contents of command markers that contain footnotes, running
headers/footers, and index/table of contents markers. When XyWrite
finds a misspelled word embedded in one of these commands, it places
the cursor on the marker and displays the Spelling dialog box.
Although you can't see the unknown word inside the marker, you can
replace it using the normal spelling checker procedures.

3-78
CORRECT File Correct

FORMAT feffMl CORRECT filename,string

filename (optional) is the name of the file created by the SPELL command.
(If the name is omitted, SPELL.TMP is assumed.)
string (optional) is text to be appended. (See Note #1.)
MENU EEJ] EEJE3B

Purpose CORRECT is a companion command to the SPELL command. When you

use the SPELL command to check the spelling in a stored file or files, the
program creates a separate file that contains the names of these files and a
list of questionable words. You can then use the CORRECT command and
this list to fix the misspellings in your original documents.

Before running the CORRECT command, you have the option of editing
the list of questionable words created by the SPELL command. You can:
delete a word from the list, which means that CORRECT will ignore it and
the word will remain in your files as you originally typed it; provide a
replacement for a word, which CORRECT will insert into your files; use
Word Check on a word to display the spelling dialog box with a list of
alternates; or leave it as it appears in the list.

CORRECT can also be used to append an optional string of text to all

occurrences of the words listed in the correction file (see Note #1).

Action Editing the Correction File

If you want to, you can edit the correction file created by the SPELL
command before you run CORRECT.
1. Call the file created by the SPELL command. For example:
Type: [F5]ca spell.tmpE3
Result: The file appears on the screen. The first line is the name of the
file you spell checked; the filename is in bold. After the filename is a
list of words that do not appear in one of the spelling dictionaries. If
you asked SPELL to review more than one file, each filename is listed
in bold mode, followed by a list of questionable words. For example:
CHAPTER1
mispell
occurance
committment
CHAPTER2
recieve

3-79
CORRECT (confd)

2. Move the cursor to the first questionable word. You now have several
options:
• If the word is correct and you do not want to add it to a dictionary,
delete it from the list.
• If the word is correct and you want to add it to a dictionary, display
the spelling dialog box and select the option you want.
Press: [evil [f7]
Press: [F3] or [F5]
• If the word is incorrect and you know how to fix it, type a space and
the correct spelling of the word. For example:
Type: mi spell misspell
• If you are not sure of the spelling of a word, display the spelling
dialog box (press [Ctril[F71) for a list of alternates or leave it alone.
3. Repeat step 2 for each word on the list.
4. Store the file.
Type: [FslstCT
Result: The correction list is ready to use with the CORRECT command.

ACTION Running the CORRECT Command

To run the CORRECT command:
1. Type: [F5]correctE]
Result: The CORRECT command uses the information in SPELL.TMP
to revise your document. (If your file has any other name, be sure to
specify it when you type the CORRECT command.) If you deleted a
word from SPELL.TMP, the CORRECT command skips over that
word in your document. If you typed a replacement word next to the
questionable word, it inserts the replacement for you. For all other
words in the list, CORRECT displays the spelling dialog box.

2. Select the option you want from the spelling dialog box. For example,
to add the word you originally typed to the temporary dictionary:
Type: [F3j

3. When CORRECT reaches the end of the document, it displays the

message "File corrected, save it? (Y/N)/'
To save the changes and store the document to disk:
Press: Y
To discard the changes:
Press: N
3-80
(corn'd) CORRECT

NOTE #1 Automatic Index Creation. A special option of the CORRECT command

allows you to compile a list of words and append a string to each
occurrence of those words in your document. For example, you could
compile a list of words you want to index and have the CORRECT
command append an index marker every time it finds a word from your
list in the document.

To use this function to create an index, you must create a new file. On the
first line of the file, type, in bold, the filename of the document you want
to index, followed by a carriage return in normal mode. On succeeding
lines, enter the single-word index entries in normal mode, ending each
entry with a carriage return. Store the file and then issue the CORRECT
command. For example, if the file of index entries is named LIST:
Type: gs]correct list,«x1»0

Result: The CORRECT command goes into your document and appends
an index marker to the words that you typed in the file LIST. When you
extract the index with the IX command, all occurrences of these words will
be included in the index. (For more information on indexes, see "Table of
Contents and Index" in Chapter 5.)

3-81
Auto-Check/Correct EEL [CtrtJE

FORMAT
ICtrilE
MENU AutoCheck

Purpose Auto-Check/Correct verifies your spelling as you type. If a replacement

word has been stored in the temporary dictionary or in one of the personal
dictionaries currently in memory, it will automatically correct as well.

With Auto-Check/Correct ON, whenever you type a tab, space, or

carriage return, XyWrite checks the spelling of the word immediately
preceding the cursor. It looks in DICT.SPL and in any personal
dictionaries that you loaded. If the word does not appear in one of these
dictionaries, you will hear an error beep.

If the word appears in the personal or temporary dictionary with a

replacement spelling, you will hear a correction beep, which is easily
distinguishable from the error beep. The correction beep indicates that
Auto-Check/Correct has automatically corrected the error.

When you hear the error beep, you have several choices:
• You can keep on typing to complete your train of thought, and then
return to the word in question.
• You can stop immediately to correct the word by using either
XyWrite's normal editing functions or the spelling dialog box.
• You can ignore the beep entirely. (You might choose this option if you
have correctly typed a name or specialized term that does not appear in
one of the dictionaries and if you don't wish to add it to your personal
dictionary.)

Action Using Auto-Check/Correct

To use Auto-Check/Correct to check your work as you type:

1. Turn on Auto-Check/Correct.
Press: [Ctrl]A
Result: A lowercase "c" appears in bold mode at the top right comer of
the screen. Auto-Check/Correct is now active.

2. Call your file to the screen or create a new one.

3. Type in the text of your document until you hear an error beep.

3-82
(confd) Auto-Check/Correct

4. Move the cursor to the word that caused the error.

Press: [CtrilE
Result: The spelling dialog box appears.

5. From the dialog box, choose the option you want.

6. Continue creating or editing your document. Each time Auto-Check/

Correct corrects an error for you, you will hear the correction beep, and
each time you type a word that does not appear in one of XyWrite's
dictionaries, you will hear an error beep. Repeat step 3 whenever you
want to see a list of alternate spellings or add a word to the dictionary.

7. When you are finished, you can store your file and call another one.
Auto-Check/Correct remains on until you turn it off. To turn it off:
Press: [Ctrl] (fTJ

NOTE #1 Using Multiple Windows. When you turn Auto-Check/Correct on, it is

on in all nine windows and remains on until you cancel it.

NOTE #2 Previous Error. Pressing [ctri]E returns the cursor to the last word that
Auto-Check/Correct detected as questionable. If you correct that error
and then press [cifi] E again, the cursor will not move to another word.
Auto-Check/Correct remembers only the one position.

NOTE #3 Reassigning Keys. You can reassign these functions to other keys in your
keyboard file. (See "Keyboard File" in the Customization Guide.) The
function call for Auto-Check/Correct is AC, and the function call to move
the cursor to the previous error is FS (Fix Spelling).

NOTE #4 Automatic Correction. For information on how to set up your personal

dictionary to automatically correct your misspelled words or to expand
abbreviations that you type into your file, refer to the section "Editing a
Personal Dictionary."

NOTE #5 Changing the Beeps. You can change the tone of or even completely turn
off the error and correction beeps by changing the EB and CB settings,
respectively. (See"Default Settings" in the Customization Guide for more
information.)

NOTE #6 Turning Auto-Check/Correct on at Startup. If you always run with Auto-

Check/Correct on, you can add the AC function call to STARTUP.INT to
turn it on automatically when you start XyWrite. (See "Startup File" in
the Customization Guide for more information.)

3-83
Auto-Replace [CtrilfShiftlA

FORMAT E3®A
MENU Auto-Replace

PURPOSE Auto-Replace lets you use the automatic replacment feature of the spelling
checker without having XyWrite load the main spelling dictionary into
memory.

Whenever you type a tab, space, or carriage return, XyWrite checks the
personal dictionaries in memory to see if the word you typed appears with
a replacement word or phrase. If it does, XyWrite makes the replacement
and beeps to indicate that a change has been made. It does not check the
spelling of the word.

ACTION Using Auto-Replace

To use the Auto-Replace command:

1. Load the personal dictionaries that contain the replacement words and
phrases you want inserted into your text. For example:
Type: [FsJIoad pers.splS
2. Turn on Auto-Replace.
Press: [Ctrl] [Shtft] A
Result: A lowercase "r" appears in bold mode at the top right comer of
the screen. Auto-Replace is now active.

3. Call your file to the screen or create a new one.

4. Type in the text of your document.

Result: Every time you hear a correction beep, it means XyWrite has
replaced the word you just typed with the word or phrase associated
with it in your personal dictionary.

5. When you are finished, you can store your file and call another one.
Auto-Replace remains on until you turn it off. To turn it off:
Press: [Ctrf| [ShF|A

NOTE #1 Using Multiple Windows. When you turn Auto-Replace on, it is on in all
nine windows and remains on until you cancel it.

3-84
(confd) Auto-Replace

NOTE #2 Reassigning the Key. You can reassign this function to another key in
your keyboard file. (See "Keyboard File" in the Customization Guide for
more information.)

NOTE #3 Automatic Correction. For information on how to set up your personal

dictionary to automatically correct your misspelled words or to expand
abbreviations that you type into your file, refer to the section "Editing a
Personal Dictionary."

NOTE #4 Audible Signals. You can change the tone of or even completely turn off
the correction beep by using the DEFAULT command to change the CB
setting. Refer to "Default Settings" in the Customization Guide.

NOTE #5 Turning Auto-Replace on at Startup. If you always run with Auto­

Replace on, you can add the AZ function call to STARTUP.INT to turn it
on automatically when you start XyWrite. (See "Startup File" in the
Customization Guide for more information.)

3-85
Auto-Expand

FORMAT [fid]

MENU RW1 AutoExnand

Purpose fcuil executes the Auto-Expand function, which replaces an abbreviation

with the word or phrase associated with it in the personal dictionary.

Auto-Expand is similar to the Auto-Replace and Auto-Correct features,

but has a distinct advantage: because the expansion only occurs when you
explicitly request it, you can assign replacement words and phrases to
abbreviations that you want to expand some of the time, but that you
want to use in their abbreviated form at other times. For example, you can
assign replacement text to single-letter words such as "a" and "I." If you
press [Ctri| after typing the letter, XyWrite replaces the letter with its
expanded form. If you type a space or other word separator, XyWrite does
not expand it.

ACTION Using Auto-Expand

To use the Auto-Expand command:

1. Load the personal dictionaries that contain the replacement words and
phrases you want inserted into your text. For example:
Type: [Fsjload pers.spl£3

2. Call your file to the screen or create a new one.

3. Type in the text of your document. When you get to a point where you
want to expand an abbreviation that is defined in the personal
dictionary:

a. Type the abbreviation.

b. Press: [ctri]
Do not type a space between steps a and b.

NOTE #1 Defining Abbreviations. When you are entering abbreviations and their
expanded forms in the personal dictionary, think about how you plan to
work with them. If the Auto-Replace feature, which offers automatic
expansion of all abbreviations, appeals to you, then you should avoid
using abbreviations that you might want to enter as text. For example, if
you enter NY New York in the dictionary and turn on Auto-Replace, every
occurrence of NY will be expanded. However, if you prefer the Auto-
Expand feature which requires you to request expansion each time you
want it, you are free to define abbreviations to letters that you may want
to expand only some of the time.
3-86
STSPELL Saving the Temporary Dictionary

FORMAT STSPELL filename

MENU Not a menu option

Purpose The STSPELL command lets you save the words stored in the temporary
dictionary to a text file. The temporary dictionary contains all of the
words from the personal dictionaries that you loaded into memory, plus
any words you added through the spelling dialog box.

Once you have saved the contents of the temporary dictionary, you can
delete a word that you have entered incorrectly and then reload the
dictionary. You can also quit XyWrite and later reload the words you
added to the temporary dictionary during the current editing session.

ACTION Correcting a Word in the Temporary Dictionary

Suppose you mistakenly entered a capitalized word into the temporary
dictionary when you really wanted it to be all lowercase. To correct that
word without losing the contents of your temporary dictionary:

1. Decide on a name for the temporary dictionary. Let's call it TEMP.SPL.

2. Enter the STSPELL command.

Type: [F5| stspell temp.spl0
Result: The contents of the temporary dictionary are copied from
memory into the file named TEMP.SPL. The temporary dictionary
remains in memory as well until you quit XyWrite, unload the spelling
checker, or load another dictionary into memory.

3. Call the file to the screen and fix the incorrect entry.

4. Store the file and then reload it.

Type: [F5]stCT
Type: [fU load temp.sp@
Result: You can return to work on your document and use the spelling
checker without having to reload the personal dictionary and without
having to reenter the specialized words that you put in the temporary
dictionary.

3-87
Thesaurus

FORMAT
MENU Ml Thesaurus.-

PURPOSE XyWrite's thesaurus displays a list of synonyms. To use it, you simply put
the cursor on the word for which you want a synonym and press iShiftl fF7|.
XyWrite looks in its thesaurus for words with a similar meaning. When it
finds them, it displays a list organized by parts of speech and by meaning.
You can review the list and take one of the following three actions:
• Select one of the synonyms listed and insert it in your document with
the same capitalization and in the same display mode as the original
word
• Leave your original word intact
• Display a new list of synonyms based on one of the words in the
original list

The thesaurus uses the files WORD.OVR and WFBG.SYN, both of which
are installed in the \XY4 directory by default. WORD.OVR is a program
file that XyWrite needs to execute the thesaurus function and WFBG.SYN
is the dictionary of synonyms. These files are not loaded into memory, so
XyWrite goes to disk each time you use the thesaurus.

ACTION Using the Thesaurus to Select a Synonym

To use XyWrite's thesaurus:
1. Place the cursor on the word for which you want a synonym. As an
example, let's find a synonym for the word "tool."

3-88
(confd) Thesaurus

2. Press: [Shiftl [F71

Result: A dialog box appears, displaying a list of synonyms.

c ’ 1'\

loo J:
noun • MhfeHt-Ii1. front, instrument, pawn, peon, puppot, stooge;
* apparatus, appliance, contraption, contrivance, device, doodad,
doohickey, gadget, gimmick, gizmo, implement, instrument, Invention,
machine, meclianism, thingumajig, utensil, widget.
verb • auger, bore, drill, pierce, ream.

fl<->:point RTNireplace ESC:oxit CTL-PGDN:look up

\__________________________________________ 7

The first thing in the menu is the word you are looking up (in this case,
"tool"). Next are all the synonyms for the word "tool" if you are using
it as a noun. Notice that there are two sets of noun synonyms, which
means there are two different definitions for "tool." After the nouns,
there are several verb synonyms. (Depending on the word you are
looking up, you may see a list of adverbs, adjectives, and other parts of
speech in addition to—or instead of—the nouns and verbs.)

3. Choose the option you want. For example, to replace the word "tool"
with the word "utensil."
a. Highlight "utensil."
b. Press &
Result: The word "utensil" appears in your file, replacing the word
"tool," and the dialog box is cleared from the screen.

Action Building Another Level of Synonyms

Suppose you are reviewing a list of synonyms and you see a word that is
close to being what you want. You can select that word and, instead of
inserting it in your document file, have XyWrite build a new list of
synonyms. For example:
1. Place the cursor on a word and press [ctH] [ft] to display a list of
synonyms.
2. Highlight one of the synonyms.

3-89
Thesaurus (corn'd)

3. Press [ctri]|PgDn|.

Result: A new dialog box appears on the screen, displaying a list of

synonyms for the word you highlighted in step 2.
4. To redisplay the original dialog box, press [ctril|PqUp|.

5. To exit from the thesaurus, press [Esc|.

Note #1 When There Are No Synonyms. Occasionally, you may ask XyWrite to
give you a synonym for a word that doesn't have one. When that happens,
XyWrite displays the message "No alternates" on the command line and
clears the dialog box from the screen.

NOTE #2 Mouse. You cannot use the mouse with the thesaurus dialog box.

NOTE #2 Word Forms. The thesaurus contains only the root form of many words.
For example, when you look up the word "dictionaries," XyWrite displays
a list of synonyms for the word "dictionary." If you activate the Replace
option, you have to edit the replacement to make it plural. You have to
make similar adjustments for different tenses and parts of speech.

NOTE #3 Reassigning the Key. You can assign this function to another key. The
function call for the thesaurus is SY. (See "Keyboard File" in the
Customization Guide for more information.

3-90
 Windows

Intro XyWrite gives you access to more than one document at a time. In fact,
you can view as many as nine documents at once. XyWrite does this by
displaying each document in a separate window. These rectangular
windows can be any size you want and they can overlap. You control the
manner in which the windows are displayed.

Contents page section Command

3-92 Windows
3-94 Window Menu @[F6)
3-97 Switching Windows E], [Shift] El, ®[F6]

3-98 Opening a New Window WINDOW

3-99 Removing a Window RS

3-91
Windows (confd)

Purpose It's often handy to work on two files at the same time, or maybe even
three or more. The windows feature allows you to do just that. With
windows you can switch between documents with one or two keystrokes.
You can access as many as nine documents this way. You can arrange
these files inside windows that overlap or are side by side. For example,
you may want to refer to several different note files quickly and easily as
you are working on a chapter of your novel.

A window is a rectangular area on the screen through which you can view
a document, as in the illustrations on the next page. Each document
requires its own window. XyWrite starts with a single full-screen
window, and automatically opens more windows as they are needed so
you can view other documents without storing the documents that are
already open. You can move or copy text directly from one window to
another.

Open Window. When you are using more than one window, the windows
that you are using are called open windows. These windows can have
documents in them or not. A window which is not open is labeled
CLOSED in the window menu. Once you open a window, it remains open
until you store or abort the file that is in it.

Active Window. When you have more than one window open, only one is
active at a time; the others are suspended. The top of the screen tells you
which window and file are active. You can type into the active document,
modify it, scroll it, and save it.

The keys [F61, |Shfft|[F61 and [Ah][F61 control the movement of the cursor from
window to window. The cursor remembers its position in each document,
so that it can return to where you last left it.

3-92
(confd) Windows

Procedures. Refer to the sections that follow:

Window Menu ([Ctri|[F61)

• Displaying the Window Menu
• Opening a Window
• Changing the Size of a Window
• Restoring a Window to Full Screen Size
• Removing the Borders from All Windows

Switching Windows ([F6]z [siiift][F6], ® [F6])

• Switching Between Two Windows

• Cycling Through Windows

WINDOW Command
• Opening a Window with the Window Command

RMVSCR Command
• Closing a Window

C:\XY4\DOCSca addendua.doc
1-1.13IN 3 C:\XY4\DOCS\ADDENDUM.DOC X I
....... ► •••• 2- •• ► ..3... 4- 5* .6--..
r2-C:\XY4\DOCS\ARTICLE.DOC
XYWRITE 4.0 DEBUT
-
*
<-
As most of you have noticed by now, we have a new word processing
program in-house. XyWrite 4.0 made its debut a month ago at the
home office to rave reviews. Managers, engineers, salespeople,
and secretarial staff have all agreed on how easy the program is
*-
to learn and use — and how powerful it is!
«-
This article outlines a few of the special functions of XyWrite
4.0, r3-C:\XY4\DOCS\ADDXMDUM.DOC-----------, them for yourself.
It al In two weeks, vou will see tvou may be unfamiliar
with. rl-C:\XY4\DOCS\----
<DIR>
Starr <DIR>
ADDENDUM DOC
XyWriU ADDRESS FRM
capabilities, like cutting, pasting, copying, ch ARTICLE DOC
highlighting text, setting page breaks, and prin FAX TPL
also provides you with some interesting and powe GRID
you may not have used before.
-
* LETTER DOC

3-93
Window Menu ®[F6]

fCtrt|[F6]
FORMAT
MENU EGE ESB/ E3EESE

Purpose XyWrite automatically opens new windows as you need them, and closes
them when you STORE or ABORT your files. If you change the NW (New
Window) setting in the default file, opening and closing of windows is no
longer automatic. In that case, vou use Ictri] |F6| to handle all of the options
that are available for controlling windows within XyWrite. You can:
• Open and close windows.
• Change the size of windows.
• View the contents of the nine windows.
• Conceal or display the window borders.

Action Displaying the Window Menu

When you want to open another window, move to another window or re­
size the current window:

1. Press: [Ctrfl [F61

Result: This gives you a full screen menu that explains the options that
are available. Notice that the active window is highlighted.
2. If you have no selection to make, press A to abandon the menu.

ACTION Opening a New Window

When you open a new window, the next available window number is
used (unless you specify a number 1-9 to open it). To open a new
window:
1. Press: [ctri]|F6]
2. Select how you want the new window to appear. Type H, V, N, or a
window number.
H Splits the active window in half horizontally and opens a new
window in the lower half of screen.
V Splits the active window in half vertically and opens a new window
in the right half of screen.
N Opens the next available window as a full screen.

If you want to open a particular window, such as window 3, simply

type that number. (However, it is usually more convenient to use "N"
above, since it automatically chooses the next available window for
you.) Select a window number (1-9) from any of those not in use. For
example:
3 Opens window 3 as a full screen.

3-94
(confd) Window Menu

ACTION Changing the Size of a Window

To change the size of a window (see Note #1):
1. Move the cursor to the window whose size you want to change.
2. Press: [ctrfl |F61
3. Select T, B, L, or R:
T to move the top border.
B to move the bottom border.
L to move the left border.
R to move the right border.
4. Use the cursor keys to move the selected border. Move the top and
bottom borders with the cursor up or down keys. Move the left and
right borders with the cursor left or right keys. You can move a border
beyond the edge of the screen, to make more room for the text.
5. Continue selecting the borders and moving them with the cursor keys
until you are satisfied. Notice that you can set all four borders without
returning to the window menu, by selecting T, B, L and R one after
another.
6. Press 0 to complete the selection.

You can accomplish the same thing with the WINDOW command. See the
description later in this section.

ACTION Restoring a Window to Full Screen Size

To enlarge a window to full screen size:
1. Move the cursor to the window that you want to devote a full screen
to.
2. Press: [Ctri] [F6]
3. Press: F

ACTION Removing the Borders from All Windows

The borders are the lines that define the window boundaries. You can hide
the borders at any time:
1. Press: [Ctrl] [F6]

2. Press: C

Result: The borders are concealed. By repeating the procedure, you can
display them again.

3-95
Window Menu (coat'd)

NOTE #1 Saving Size Changes. When you close a window, any sizing changes
associated with it are lost. If you want to keep the size changes for the
current editing session (or until you modify them), change the MW setting
in the default file. (See "Default Settings" in the Customization Guide for
more information.)

NOTE #2 Disk Drive and Memory. The window menu displays the amount of
memory being used by each displayed file, as well as the amount of
memory still available for other uses. In addition, whenever XyWrite
creates a temporary overflow file, the window menu displays the letter of
the drive that contains the overflow file.

NOTE #3 Staggered Windows. You can stagger windows so that the top and right
borders of the previous window remain displayed when you open a new
window. Because the top border displays the window number and
filename, this is an easy way to keep track of exactly what is open. If you
want to turn on this option, set the MW (Maximize Window) default to 2.
(See "Default Settings" in the Customization Guide for more information.)

3-96
[rel, IshittHrel.lAitlfral Switching Windows

FORMAT ED Cycle Forward Through Open Windows

[stiitt] ED Cycle Backward Through Open Windows
(3 ED Switch Between Windows
MENU BMW Next Window

Purpose You use [F6] to cycle forward through all open windows (up to nine), and
I Shift | [F6] to cycle backward through all open windows. (Forward and backward
refer to the order in which windows are opened, which is not necessarily
numerical order.)

The main use for ® [F6] is to move back and forth between two
windows—that is, between the currently displayed window and the one
displayed previously. (If a second window is not open, ®[F6] automatically
opens one.)

Action Switching Between Two Windows

To move the cursor back to the window it was in prior to the current
window:
Press:

To return to the window you just left, press the same keys again:
Press: ®[F6)

Result: By successively pressing [m][F6], you can switch back and forth
between the same two windows. To select a new pair of windows, select
them one at a time from the Window Menu.

Action Cycling Through Windows

To cycle forward through the open windows:
Press: |F6]

To cycle backward through the open windows:

Press: [Shift] [F6]

TIP Shortcut If you know the number of the window you want to make
active, press [ctif]Ishiftl and that number.

3-97
Opening a New Window WINDOW

FORMAT tSJXj WINDOW #,left,top,width,length

it is the window number you are defining (1-9 or n for next available
window)
left is the column number of the left border (0-80)
top is the line number of the top border (0-22)
width is the number of columns wide for text (1-80)
length is the number of lines of text (1-22)
MENU E2E3ES3

Purpose The WINDOW command lets you define a window from the command
line without going through the window menu. It defines the size of the
window and makes that window active (see Note #1).

Action Opening a Window with the Window Command

To open another window, enter WINDOW with the parameters as defined
above in Format. For example:
Type: [^window 3,40,1,35,100
Result: This opens window 3 (if it was not already open) in the top right
section of the screen—starting at column 40, line 1, with a width of 35
columns and a length of 10 rows.

NOTE #1 Saving Size Changes. When you close a window, any sizing changes
associated with it are lost. If you want to keep the size changes for the
current editing session (or until you modify them), change the MW setting
in the default file. (See "Default Settings" in the Customization Guide for
more information.)

NOTE #2 Setting the Windows at Startup. By adding a WINDOW command as a

line in your STARTUP.INT file, you can have XyWrite automatically set
up your windows when it loads.

NOTE #3 Window Size. It is interesting to note that the parameters corresponding

to a full display are: WINDOW 2,0,0,80,22

NOTE #4 Restoring Full Size. You can reset a window to full size with the
following command:
l^vZl window nf<J]
where n is the number of the window being restored to full size.

3-98
RMVSCR Removing a Window

FORMAT 033 RMVSCR

ABBREV RHlRS
MENU Not a menu item.

Purpose XyWrite automatically closes the window when you store or abort a file.
If you change the NW setting in the default file so that the closing of
windows is no longer automatic, you need the RMVSCR (Remove Screen)
command. RMVSCR closes the window that the cursor is located in and
returns the display to the previously displayed window. In general, we
use the terms window and screen interchangeably.

Action Closing a Window

To close a window:
1. Move the cursor to the window you want to close (see Note #1 below).
2. Clear the window you want to close of any document:
Type: [F5]store[2] or [FsJabortH
3. Reset the window:
Type: [Fgrmvscrgj]

Result: The window closes and the display returns to the previously
displayed windows (if any).

NOTE #1 Identifying the Active Document In the case of a split screen, there are
two ways to tell which window is currently active:
• The filename of the active document appears at the top of the screen.
• The cursor is located in the active window. (If necessary, press [Shift] [fs]
to move cursor off the command line and into the window.)

3-99
 NOTES

3-100
 Word Count

Intro XyWrite's word counting commands let you know exactly how many
words you have written so far. This function is very useful whether you
have been asked to write a 1,000-word magazine article or a 10,000-word
term paper.

Contents page section Command

3-102 Word Count WC

3-102 Word Count Back WCB

3-101
Word Count WC, WCB

FORMAT Esawc
ESO WCB
MENU EJ3 I Word Count..

Purpose The WC and WCB commands count the number of words in your file or
the number of words in a selected block. They then display the exact
number of words on the status line of the header.

A word is a string of characters followed by a word separator (space,

comma, colon, semicolon, etc.).

Action Counting Words from Current Cursor Position to End

To count the number of words in a displayed file (or in a selected block):
1. Move the cursor to the point in the file where you want the count to
begin (or select the block of text in which you want to count words).
2. If you want the Word Count to include the text in running headers and
footers, footnotes, and index markers, switch to expanded view.
Press: [Ctrfl [F8]
3. Enter the Word Count command.
Type: [F5]wcCT

Result: XyWrite counts the number of words from the current cursor
position to the end of the file (or the entire selected block) and displays the
total number on the status line.

Action Counting Words from Cursor Position to Start of File

To count the number of words you have written up to a certain point in
your file:
1. Be sure the cursor is at the point where you want the count to start.
2. If you want the Word Count to include the text in running headers and
footers, footnotes, and index markers, switch to expanded mode.
Press: [Ctril [F8]
3. Enter the Word Count Back command.
Type: [F5]wcb[2|

Result: XyWrite counts the number of words from the current cursor
position (or in the displayed block) to the beginning of the file and
displays the total number on the status line.

3-102
 Formatting

Intro Formatting is the manner in which text is arranged on a page. Common

examples include margins, indents, justification, use of running headers,
footnotes, and character modes. Formatting also encompasses the more
sophisticated page layout options of incorporating graphics and drawing
boxes and rules. The power of XyWrite is that all of these controls are
embedded in the text, so you can go back and change them at will.

With XyWrite's system of embedded commands, you have tremendous

versatility at revising text. For example, you can change a single indent
command to alter the way all paragraphs are indented. This versatility
extends to every formatting command represented by a marker (A) on the
display — for margins, tabs, indents, page length, and so on.

CONTENTS This chapter is divided into 14 major sections arranged alphabetically.

Each section stands on its own, making it easy for you to read only the
sections of interest. Thus, if you are interested in how to control the
margins and tabs, you would do well to read the Page Width section from
start to finish.

The Table of Contents appears on the next three pages.

4-1
Formatting (conCd)

Contents page Description Command

4-5 Overview
4-5 Embedded Commands
4-8 Units of Measure
4-9 Draft/Graphic/Expanded Views [F81, [Shiftl [F81. [Ctril [F8|, ZOOM
4-13 Alignment
4-14 Flush Lett / Center / Right FL, FC, FR, LJ
4-16 Justification JU, NJ
4-17 Non-Breaking Space [Ctrl] [Shift] | Space Bar]

4-18 Automatic Hyphenation

4-20 Show Hyphenation SHOHYP
4-21 Hyphenation On/Off HY
4-22 Manual Hyphenation
4-25 Date & Time
4-26 Date DA, TODAY
4-29 Time TM,NOW, SEC
4-31 Footnotes
4-32 Basic Footnote Procedures
4-37 Footnote Command FN
4-38 Footnote Separator FS
4-39 Footnote Wrap Separator FW
4-41 Bottom Footnote BF
4-42 Dump Footnotes DF
4-43 No Footnotes NF
4-44 Set Footnote Number SF
4-48 Footnote Format FM
4-51 Graphic Design Commands
4-42 Graphic Design Procedure
4-55 Framing an Area FA
4-61 Drawing a Border BO, UP, UB
4-68 Line Drawing BOX
4-71 Headers and Footers
4-72 Running Header & Footer RH,RF
4-75 Importing Files
4-76 Import Graphic IG
4-82 Including Printer-Ready Files IN
4-84 Linking Text LINKTX
4-90 Updating Linked Text UPDATETX
4-91 Numbering
4-92 Numbered Lists
4-100 Define Counter DC

4-2
(confd) Formatting

4-102 Counter Command CO to C14

4-104 Line Numbering LN
4-106 Page Number PN,FP
4-108 Set Page Number SP
4-111 Reference Commands REF, REP, REC
4-117 Page Length
4-118 Overview
4-123 Form Depth FD
4-124 Top Margin TP
4-125 Bottom Margin BT
4-127 Element Top, Element End ET, EE
4-129 Page Break PG
4-131 Non-Breakable Blocks NB, BB
4-133 Widow & Orphan WD, OP
4-135 Blank Lines BL

4-137 Page Width

4-138 Ruler
4-139 Left & Right Margins LM, RM
4-140 Offset OF
4-142 Gutter GU
4-143 Page Width PW
4-144 Indent Paragraph IP
4-147 Tab Settings TS,TR,RT
4-152 Leadering LD
4-153 Printer Control
4-154 Pause & Prompt PA, PR
4-155 AutoPause, No Pause AP,NP
4-156 One-Sided OS
4-157 Print in Color DY
4-158 Special Effects EF
4-160 Letter-Quality LQ
4-161 Orientation OR
4-162 Printer Insert PI
4-163 Styles
4-164 Save Style SS
4-167 Use Style US, NS, PS
4-169 Type Style
4-170 Mode Commands
4-174 Type Size sz
4-175 Symbol Set SY
4-176 Type Face UF
4-177 Language LA

4-3
Formatting (confd)

4-179 Vertical Spacing

4-180 Automatic Leading AL
4-181 Extra Leading EL
4-182 Line Leading LL
4-183 Line Spacing LS

4-4
Embedded Commands Overview

Embedded Commands. An embedded command is a command that is

inserted into the text. It is normally hidden so as not to interfere with the
text. Examples are:

Mode Bold «MDBO»

Flush Center «FC»
Tab Set «TS.5IN,1.0INl1.5IN»

Generally, embedded commands affect the format of a document and not

its content. Although hidden, an embedded command is actually present
in the file — for example, you could search for «MDBO». In expanded
view, you can edit embedded commands.

Characteristics. Let's cover some of the characteristics common to all

embedded commands.

1. How Embedded Commands Are Normally Displayed. Most

embedded commands appear in formatted and draft views as a
triangle and in graphic view as a curved, vertical line. If the cursor is
placed on the marker, the command itself appears on the status line of
the header.

2. Where Embedded Commands Take Effect. In general, embedded

commands take effect starting at the point they arc placed in the text
and continue until the end of the document or until they are overridden
(whichever occurs first).
For example, FC centers text from its marker to the end of the
document — or until a flush left, flush right, or justify command is
encountered.
You can change the boundaries (or scope) of commands by changing
the setting of the ES (Enable Scoping) default. Refer to "Default
Settings" in the Customization Guide for more information.

3. How Embedded Commands Can Be Expanded for Viewing.

Embedded commands can be viewed by pressing [Ctri][F81 to switch to the
expanded view. They can be edited in this mode just like any other
text.

4. How Embedded Commands Can Be Edited. You can switch to

expanded view to edit commands; in formatted and draft views, you
can simply delete and re-enter them. You can also select and copy or
move them as you would any text.

4-5
Embedded Commands (confd)

Another option is to open the embedded command by placing the

cursor on the command marker and pressing [fTT] (or [Art] [f7|). The content
of the command appears in a window in the text area, where you can
edit it; press I Shift | [mJ again to close the window.

5. What Values Mean in Embedded Commands. By default, horizontal

and vertical values are measured in inches. Thus, IP .5 means first line
indent of half an inch, and TP 1 means top margin of 1 inch. However,
you can use different units of measure when you issue formatting
commands. For example, the command SZ 10PT means type size of 10
points. You can also change the default unit of measure. For more
information, refer to "Units of Measure" in the next section.

6. How Embedded Commands Can Use Relative Values. Generally, the

values you specify in formatting commands are absolute. That means
that when you issue a formatting command, you override any previous
version of the command that is already in the document. For example,
the command IP 1 cancels any previous IP command, and sets the first
line indent at 1 inch.
Sometimes, however, you may prefer to use relative values, which
means adding to (or subtracting from) existing values rather than
overriding them. You can do this by including a plus or minus sign
immediately before the value in the embedded command. For example,
the command IP +.5 adds half an inch to the current value of the first
line indent; the command IP -.5 subtracts half an inch from the current
value of the first line indent.
You can use the relative command option with most formatting com­
mands that define horizontal or vertical measurements. If you are
using the relative command option within a style or running header
command, keep in mind that the relative value is based on the values
in effect when the commands are initially defined, not when they are
issued.

7. How Embedded Commands Affect Printing. While an embedded

marker occupies a space on the screen, it occupies no such space on the
printout. Instead, it is stripped out, and its effect is printed (FC would
center the text).
For example, the first of the following two lines shows how an
embedded marker appears on the screen in formatted and draft views,
while the second line shows how that line is printed — the marker is
removed and the sentence is shifted to the left.
▲Embedded triangles are displayed but not printed.
Embedded triangles are displayed but not printed.
(confd) Embedded Commands

8. Hiding Embedded Commands from View. If you prefer not to have

the embedded commands visible on the screen, you can hide them by
pressing [shift| |F7i].
The markers re-appear when you press [Shih] [FiTI again. You can
customize XyWrite to display files without markers by including the
DT=9 setting in your default file. (See "Default Settings" in the
Customization Guide.)

9. Applying Embedded Commands to a Selected Block. When the

cursor is in or immediately to the right of a selected block, you can
apply the following formatting commands to the block:
Alignment commands FL, FR, FC, JU, NJ, HY
Page width commands LM, RM, IP, TS, RT
Type style commands MD, SZ, UF, SY, UL
Vertical spacing commands AL, LS
When you apply one of these commands to a selected block, XyWrite
restores the original formatting values at the end of the selected block.
For example, suppose you want to indent a paragraph of text one-half
inch. Select the paragraph and issue the command IP .5,5,0. XyWrite
inserts the embedded command «IP.5IN,.5IN,01N» at the beginning of
the selected block and the command «IP0,0,0» at the end of the selected
block.

4-7
Units of Measure

Units of Measure. In XyWrite, the default unit of measure is inches.

When you issue a measurement command without specifying a unit,
XyWrite adds the unit IN (for inches) to the value when it embeds the
command. For example, if you issue the command OF 1, XyWrite embeds
the command «OF11N». You can override the default unit by specifying a
different unit as part of the command. XyWrite recognizes the following
measurement units:
• IN (inches)
• TW (twelfths of an inch)
• DI (deci-inches, or tenths of an inch)
• PI (picas)
• PT (points)
• CM (centimeters)
• MM (millimeters)
• CI (ciceros)
• DD (didots)
• LI (lines) — for vertical measurements only

For example, the following command sets a left indent 3 picas, 6 points:
Type: [F5]ip 3pi6pt,3pi6pt0

As another example, the following command sets a form depth of 66 lines:

Type: [F5]fd 66li[3

NOTE #1 Default Measurement Units. You can use the UV (Unit Vertical) and the
UH (Unit Horizontal) settings to change the default unit of measure. See
"Default Settings" in the Customization Guide for more information.

NOTE #2 No Measurement Unit You can enter commands directly into your file by
switching to expanded view and typing, for example, «lml.5in». (Press
Ictrfl E] and [Cui] [>) to enter the « and ».) Be careful to include the unit of
measure if you are embedding commands directly into your file in this
way; XyWrite does not append them to the command as it does when you
enter a command from the command line. If you embed a command in
the file without a unit of measure, the value is interpreted as tenths of an
inch if it applies to horizontal measures and as lines if it applies to vertical
measures. For example, if the command «TS1» is embedded in a file, it
means a tab stop at 1/10 inch, not 1 inch as you might expect.

4-8
 Formatted/Draft/Graphic/Expanded Views

Purpose Formatted view, draft view, graphic view, and expanded view are four
different ways to display a document.
• Formatted view shows the line endings as they will be printed and also
shows page breaks as a solid line. Embedded commands appear as
triangles, keeping the screen uncluttered, and text is displayed in a
monospaced screen font.
• Draft view also shows the embedded commands as triangles and
displays text in a monospaced screen font. Unlike formatted view,
however, draft view does not show page breaks, and it may not show
true line endings (see Note #3).
• Graphic view approximates how the document will look when it is
printed. That includes justification, graphics, lines and borders,
typeface and point size changes, margins, and indents. Embedded
commands are shown as curved lines.
When you are in graphic view, you can use the ZOOM command to
enlarge or reduce the view of a page. (The ZOOM command is
described in detail in the next section.)
• Expanded view reveals all embedded commands within double-angle
brackets — that is, they are expanded for viewing. You can then move
the cursor into the embedded commands and change them. Line
endings are not shown as they will be printed, but instead wrap to fit
the size of the window (see Note #3).

ACTION Switching to a Different View

To switch to expanded view, for example:
Press: fctril fF81

To switch to other views, press the appropriate key:

[F8] Switches from the current view to formatted view
I Shift | [F8] Switches from the current view to graphic view
® [F8] Switches from the current view to draft view

NOTE #1 Page Break Indicators. There are two page break indicators: page-page
depth numbers at the top of the screen and horizontal lines between
pages. Both these indicators are turned off in draft and expanded views.
To turn them on, press |F8] to return to formatted view.

NOTE #2 Default Settings. In expanded view, the built-in default settings are used
in place of the document's own settings. Therefore, the ruler line looks
different in formatted and expanded views.

4-9
Formatted/Draft/Graphic/Expanded Views (confd)

NOTE #3 Wrap to Fit In draft and expanded views, XyWrite breaks lines at the end
of the window so you don't have to horizontally scroll text. If you prefer,
you can change the WF (Wrap to Fit) setting in the default file so that draft
view displays line endings as they will print and expanded view displays
lines that are 80 characters wide. Refer to "Default Settings" in the
Customization Guide for more information.

4-10
(confd) Formatted/Draft/Graphic/Expanded Views

/----

Q
||- •»•!........ > 2 >• -31 > > 5.......► b >....... 71-. •
l-« ■ M MT-------------------------------------- r
•UI.SW^Wb.SIflM. T
Thia la a evaparisoa of the aaae text ia Expaadcd, kraft, tad Graphic aleea.
Tou cat svltch aodcs at a ay tlae by prmlag the appropriate tey- re for
Bratt, Shift, re for Graphic, a ad Ctrl-n for Cxpaaded,.
«lr.3IR,.3I!W
•raft Ulev. [sledded coaaiada appear as triaagles.
*

tepaaded Vie
*. btedded cveMadi appear expanded vithia faille eagle
Expanded
hrachcte. 5oae o( these coaaaads aoraally “ aarkrrs, telle others
appear aa display aodre. Itotlce that the iadeit does sot »trc
* r '• Lrfeaded
• lev. fteltbcr do the Ute or aarjlao — all screes foraattlag appears It the
default set tlags.»

^cmiBMnzinnfuuiiiHnnriuTuiiiinnumnmuoannigHF
k /
/ ■x

Formatted

Draft View. Eebedded ccaundo appear as trlanglea.

*
-

Graphic

k y
4-11
Zoom Graphic View ZOOM

FORMAT EE] zoom#

EE] ZOOM +#
Ed ZOOM -#
# is the percentage (from 5 to 400) that you want to enlarge or reduce the
page.
Menu EH EES]

Purpose The ZOOM command lets you enlarge or reduce the graphic view of a
page: you can zoom in to get a close-up of a section of a page, or zoom out
to get a snapshot of an entire page.

Because you are still in graphic view after you issue the ZOOM command,
you can make edits to the text or format, and XyWrite automatically
adjusts the display to reflect those edits.

You can use relative values with the ZOOM command by adding a plus
(+) or minus (-) sign before the percentage. When XyWrite sees a plus
sign before the percentage, it adds that value to the current percentage;
similarly, when XyWrite sees a minus sign before the percentage, it
subtracts that value from the current percentage.

Action Using the ZOOM Command

Suppose you want to display the whole page on the screen at the same
time, and you aren't sure what the correct percentage would be to fit the
entire image, but want to keep it as large as possible.

1. Call a file to the screen and switch to graphic view.

2. Issue the ZOOM command to reduce the size of the page to 50% of its
current size.
Type: [F5]zoom 50[Z]

3. If that isn't enough to fit the bottom of the page on the screen, reduce it
an additional amount. For example:
Type: [F5]zoom -200
Result: The current page is now displayed at 30% of its original size.

4. If you went too far, enlarge it by adding a value. For example:

Type: [Fslzoom +50
Result: The current page is now displayed at 35% of its original size.

4-12
 Alignment

You may want to modify the appearance of text by changing its alignment.
The four alignments available are shown in the figure below. This section
covers these alignments and explains how to apply them to a single line or
to the whole document. Also described in this section are two related
topics — Non-Breaking Space and Hyphenation.

Contents page Section Command

4-14 Flush Left / Center / Right

Flush Left FL
Flush Right FR
Force Center FC
Line Justify LJ

4-16 Justification
Justify JU
No Justify NJ

4-17 Non-Breaking Space |Ctrl| |Shift| |Space Bar|

4-18 Hyphenation
4-18 Automatic Hyphenation
4-20 Show Hyphenation SHOHYP
4-21 Hyphenation On/Off HY
4-22 Manual Hyphenation

4-13
Flush Left/Center/Right FL, FC, FR, LJ

FORMAT ESZJFL Flush Left

RH71FR Flush Right
ROTO FC Force Center
EE2JLJ n Line Justify
n is a number (0-2) that specifies the alignment style (O=left, l=center,
2=right)
MENU EEDEHSHBS1, EE3JES5S1E35, EHEEDE&3 (see Note #2)

PURPOSE The alignment commands control the horizontal alignment of text. You
can align text to the left (the most common alignment), to the right, or
center it between the margins. You can freely switch from one alignment
to another by typing the command for the new alignment.
XyWrite offers two sets of alignment commands: one set controls the
alignment of the current line and the other controls the alignment of the
document. The commands are:
Line Document
Left LJO FL
Center LJ1 FC
Right LJ2 FR

ACTION Setting the Alignment for a Document

To set all the text following the command to one of the three alignments:
1. Move the cursor to the beginning of the line where you want the
alignment change to start.
2. Enter FL, FC or FR. To center the text, for example:
Type: [F5]fc0
Result: The text following the embedded marker is centered. All lines are
centered up to the point where a counteracting command (either FL or FR)
is encountered.

ACTION Setting the Alignment for a Line

To set the current line to one of the three alignments:
1. Move the cursor to the line whose alignment you want to change.
2. Enter the appropriate LJ command. To center the line, for example:
Type: [F5)lj 1El
Result: The current line is centered. The text following the current line
retains its original alignment.

4-14
FL, FC, FR, LJ (confd)

NOTE #1 Keyboard Shortcuts. You can use the following keys to change the
alignment of a document:
Flush Left [ciri] [Shift] L
Flush Right @ IshiftlR
Force Center [Ctrl] [Shift] C

NOTE #2 Menu Option. The Line Justification (LJ) commands are not available
through the menus.

4-15
Justification JU NJ

FORMAT E3ZJJU Justify On

LSLijJNJ No Justify
MENU I2niE/iE3)EE3Jl

Purpose The JU (Justify On) command causes the text to be printed justified — that
is, the text is even along both its left and right edges. JU and NJ are
complementary — you use JU to turn justification on and NJ to turn it off.

Action Selecting Text to be Justified

To turn on justification:

1. Move the cursor to the start of the line you want justified.

2. Type: [F5]ju|7i]

Result: The text following the JU embedded marker will be justified when
it is printed. Justification stays in effect throughout the remainder of the
document unless NJ is encountered to turn it off. To turn off justification:

1. Move the cursor to the line whose alignment you want to change.

2. Type: [F5]niCT

Result: The text following the NJ is flush left (or flush center or flush right
if it was last in effect).

NOTE #1 Keyboard Shortcut The JU command is assigned to [Ctrl] [Shift] J.

NOTE #2 Hard Retums/Soft Returns. Justification operates only on lines ending

with a soft return (wordwrap) — it does not operate on lines that end with
a hard return (carriage return).

NOTE #3 Combinations of Alignments. If you use FL, FR, or FC with JU, the body
of text is justified; however, short lines — lines which end with hard
returns — are pushed left, right, or center, according to whether FL, FR, or
FC preceded JU.

NOTE #4 Display of Justification. To view justified text on screen, press [Shg] [F8] to
switch to graphic view.

4-16
|Ctri] IShiftl [Space Bar| Non-Breaking Space

FORMAT [cirtltshiitlfs^tol
MENU Not a menu item.

PURPOSE S dES I space Bari inserts a space that will not break at the end of a line. This
is useful when you want to prevent two words from ever being separated.
The non-breaking space is displayed in formatted, draft and expanded
views as a ▼ ; in graphic view, it is displayed as a space.

ACTION Inserting a Non-Breaking Space

To insert a non-breaking space between the words Route and 66:

Type: Route

Type: [Ctrl] [Shift] [Spa^Bar]

Type: 66

Result: Now "Route 66" will always appear on one line.

4-17
Automatic Hyphenation

PURPOSE Hyphenation can be automatic or manual. In automatic hyphenation,

XyWrite breaks the words as it calculates line endings. It uses an internal
set of hyphenation rules; exceptions to rules are handled by a dictionary.
You can turn automatic hyphenation on and off in different areas of text
with the embedded command HY.

ACTION Using the Hyphenation Dictionary

To use the hyphenation dictionary, you must complete two steps:
1. Load the hyphenation dictionary.
Type: EH Io ad diet, hyp H

2. Turn hyphenation on by using the HY command described in the next

section.

ACTION Modifying the Dictionary

If you do not like the way XyWrite is hyphenating a word, add it to the
hyphenation dictionary.

1. Call DICT.HYP.

2. Move the cursor to the point where you want to add the word (see
Note #4) and type the word you want to change.
a. If you want to change where the hyphens appear, type the word
with the hyphens in place. For example, you may prefer to
hyphenate "dictionary" before the "n" rather than after it.
Type: dic-tio-nary
b. If XyWrite hyphenates a word that you do not want hyphenated,
type the word with no hyphens. For example:
Type: Harold
*
c. If your word is seven characters or longer, you might want to
include an asterisk (*) at (or near) the end of the word. (See Note
#2.)

3. Store and load DICT.HYP.

NOTE #1 Manual Hyphenation. You can override the automatic hyphenation of a

word by inserting a soft hyphen within the word in your document. If you
place the soft hyphen in front of the first letter of the word, the word will
not be broken. Refer to the section "Manual Hyphenation" for more
information.

4-18
(confd) Automatic Hyphenation

NOTE #2 The Asterisk. When an asterisk (*) is not present in a word, XyWrite loads
only the first seven characters of that word into memory — only these
characters are compared to the text. To load more than seven, insert an
asterisk after all the letters you want included. Only the letters ahead of
the asterisk are loaded into memory.

NOTE #3 Saving Dictionary Space. The dictionary memory buffer is 64K; to save
space, you can place the asterisk so one root word represents several
forms. This is because the part of a word after the first seven letters (or
after the asterisk) is handled by the same internal rules that hyphenate
most words.

For example, lef s look at the root word "approximate." The dictionary
contains "ap-prox-i-m
*
ate." Here's how other forms will be broken:
approximately is treated as ap-prox-i-mate-ly
approximation is treated as ap-prox-i-ma-tion
approximating is treated as ap-prox-i-mat-ing
Before you enter a word and place the asterisk in it, jot down all the
alternate forms you want covered. Then put the asterisk where it correctly
handles all or most of them. Save and load the dictionary and try each
form. If one doesn't break correctly, switch back to the dictionary and
experiment with the placement of the asterisk, or list the errant form
separately.

NOTE #4 Ordering the Words. You don't need to order the words alphabetically in
the dictionary. However, we recommend that you insert them
alphabetically to help you locate words easier.

NOTE #5 Loading Dictionary on Startup. To automatically load the dictionary on

entering XyWrite, enter the LOAD command into the STARTUP.INT file.
(See STARTUP.INT later in the Customization Guide for this procedure.)

ALSO SEE Related Command. The HV (Hyphenation Variable) setting controls the
minimum size of hyphenated words. Refer to "Default Settings" in the
Customization Guide for more information.

4-19
Show Hyphenation SHOHYP

FORMAT bgAd SHOHYP filename

filename is the name of the file you want to check
MENU This is not a menu option.

Purpose The SHOHYP (Show Hyphenation) command enables you to see all of the
hyphenation points in a list of words. It does this by creating a new file
(HY.TMP) which lists the words with all hyphens showing.

You would use SHOHYP, for instance, if you were a lawyer and wanted
to check the hyphenation on a set of words peculiar to your profession.
You would type up a list of these words, store the file, and execute
SHOHYP on that file. You would then look over the hyphenated
words—if any were exceptions to the rules and did not break properly,
you could single them out and add them to the DICT.HYP file along with
the proper hyphenation.

The file you check should not contain embedded commands—thus,

SHOHYP is not a command you would run on just any file. (See the note
below.)

Action Viewing Your File's Hyphenation Points

To view all of the hyphenation points in a list of words:
1. Create a file with the list of words whose hyphenation you want to
check. Be sure there are no embedded commands in the file.
2. Store (or save) this file.
3. Type SHOHYP along with the name of this new file:
Type: [F5]shohyp listS
Result: XyWrite creates a file HY.TMP containing the words as they are
hyphenated by XyWrite. Short words are omitted. Call up HY.TMP and
view this file. If any words are improperly hyphenated, correct them and
add them to the hyphenation dictionary DICT.HYP.

NOTE Omitting Embedded Commands. You should omit any embedded

commands from the file you are checking — they are likely to cause
problems. This includes character modes (such as «MDBO») and format
commands («IP1 IN»).

4-20
HY Hyphenation On/Off

FORMAT EJZJHY1
ESUHYO
MENU imil Hyphenation I rjffn ilt. pti

Purpose The HY command lets you turn automatic hyphenation on and off within
a document. When hyphenation is on, XyWrite hyphenates only words of
six characters or more, with a minimum of three characters before the
hyphen and three characters after the hyphen (see Note #1).

Action Switching Hyphenation On and Off

By default, HY is q/jf at startup. To turn on automatic hyphenation:
1. Position the cursor where you want to enable hyphenation.
2. Type: [F5]hy 10
Result: The embedded command tells XyWrite to automatically
hyphenate any text that follows.
To again turn off automatic hyphenation:
1. Position the cursor where you want to disable automatic hyphenation.
2. Type: [F5]hy 00]

NOTE #1 Hyphenation Parameters. You can control the minimum size of

hyphenated words and the number of letters before and after a hyphen.
(See the description of the HV setting under "Default Settings" in the
Customization Guide for more information.)

NOTE #2 Default Hyphenation Setting. The default at startup is HY 0 (off). If you

prefer to turn hyphenation on, change the HY setting in the default file.
See "Default Settings" in the Customization Guide for more information.

4-21
Manual Hyphenation

PURPOSE XyWrite has three different hyphens: A non-breaking hard hyphen, a

breaking hard hyphen, and a soft hyphen. Examples of each are shown in
the illustration below.

ACTION Inserting Hyphens

To insert the three different hyphens, refer to the following chart.

Type of Hyphen Action

• Non-Breaking Hard Hyphen Press E) on the numeric keypad.

• Breaking Hard Hyphen Press (3 located in the top row

next to the "0."

• Soft Hyphen Press [Shift] □ (The tilde key is

immediately left of the "1" on
an extended IBM keyboard.)

O TI
OI
A hard hyphen is always
visible, no matter where
Hyphenations
word falls on the line.
Use a non-breaking hard
hyphen for a minus sign, Hard Hyphen
such as -2 _____ ______
Always visible
You would use a breaking
• Non-Breaking
hard hyphen for words Breaking
as pre-empt “ana self---
evident. These are words
which require a hyphen.
Soft Hyphen
• Visible only when
A soft hyphen is used to the word breaks
break long words at the end at the end of a
of a line, such as inalien­ line; not visible
able. A soft hyphen dis­ otherwise.
appears if the entire word
fits on the line.

4-22
(edit'd) Manual Hyphenation

Action Deleting a Soft Hyphen

If a soft hyphen is visible at the end of a line, you can delete it as you
would any other character. However, if that word is moved to the middle
of the line, the soft hyphen will not be visible. To delete a soft hyphen (in
either case), do the following:

1. Switch to expanded view with [cifil [F8]. The soft hyphen will show as a
tilde (~).

2. Type: [fs]search /~/G3

3. Press: I Backspace!

Result: Step 3 deletes the tilde found in Step 2.

NOTE #1 Hard Hyphen. A hard hyphen is always visible, whether the word appears
in the middle or at the end of a line. XyWrite has two kinds of hard
hyphens.

• Breaking Hard Hyphen. Use this hyphen in words where the hyphen
is a normal part of the word (words such as self-evident, pre-empt),
and where you want to allow the word to break at the hyphen at the
end of a line.

• Non-Breaking Hard Hyphen. Use this hyphen for the minus sign (-2),
and for hyphenated words which you don't want to break at line
endings — perhaps company or product names, like Lotus 1-2-3.

NOTE #2 Soft Hyphen. Use a soft hyphen to break a long word between syllables
when the word falls at the end of a line. Use the soft hyphen only for
words which would otherwise not be hyphenated, or to override the
hyphenation points determined by XyWrite.

The soft hyphen is visible only when the word breaks at the end of a line
(except in expanded view).

NOTE #3 Preventing Hyphenation. If you do not want a word to hyphenate, place

the soft hyphen in front of the first letter of the word. If it is word you use
often, you may want to add it to the dictionary as described in the section
"Automatic Hyphenation."

TIP Positioning the Cursor to Insert a Soft Hyphen. Throughout XyWrite it

is the left edge of the cursor rectangle that indicates where characters are
inserted (in Insert mode). Thus, you place the cursor on the character to
the right of where you want to insert the soft hyphen.
4-23
 NOTES

4-24
 Date and Time

Intro XyWrite will enter the correct date and time into your document for you
in either of two ways: with the current date and time (with DA and TM)
that continually update or as a time stamp (with TODAY and NOW or
SEC) which does not update.

Contents page section Command

4-26 Date DA, TODAY

4-29 Time TM, NOW, SEC

4-25
Date DA, TODAY

FORMAT E3ZJDA form

TODAY form
form (optional) is any combination of m (month), d (day) and y (year) listed
later in options, such as mm/dd/yy.
MENU Due Time.

Purpose The DA (Date) and TODAY commands both insert the current date into
your text. DA inserts a soft date — it is continually updated, always
displaying the current day, month and year. TODAY inserts a hard date,
as permanent text, never updated. The clock internal to your computer
automatically provides the current month, day and year.
You have great flexibility in how you display the date. See the examples
later in this section. If you don't specify a form, the date format default's
to "letterhead" style (full month, day, full year), such as:
April 1,1993
However, you can change that default by placing a DA setting in the
default file; see the note "Changing the Default Date Format."

Action Inserting the Soft Date

To insert a date which is continually updated:
1. Move the cursor to where you want the first character of the date to be
located.
2. Type DA followed by any of the formats described under "Options"
later in this section. To give one example:
Type: [F5]da MMMM ’vyCT
Result: The date appears in text after an embedded marker.
AAPRIL ’90 as displayed
APRIL ’90 as printed
This command would appear in expanded view as: « DAMMMM ’yy»

4-26
(confd) DA, TODAY

Action Inserting the Fixed Date

To insert a date as permanent text:
Type: [F5] today CT
Result: The date will be placed at the cursor location in your text. The
default format will be used. The date is fixed text — it will not be updated
when the file is used later.

NOTE Changing the Default Date Format When you use the TODAY or DA
command without a form, the date appears in 'Tetterhead" form. But you
can change that default form with a DA setting in your default file.

For a European-style format (day, month, year), for example, call up your
default file and insert the following line:
DF DA=d Mmm yy
Once the default file is saved and loaded, any TODAY or DA command
without a form will yield a date with the form:
1 Apr 90
(See "Default Settings" in the Customization Guide for more on how to put
settings in the default file.)

Options Month. Note below that you use uppercase Ms where you want
uppercase letters to appear in the month.

Format Examples

• Complete name of month: MMMM APRIL

Use four Ms (no matter how Mmmm April
long the name is).

• Three-letter abbreviation: MMM APR

Use three Ms. Mmm Apr

• Two-digit months 01-12: mm 04

Use two Ms.

• Months 1-12 (No leading zero): m 4

Use one M.

4-27
DA, TODAY (confd)

Day. The day of the month can be expressed any of three ways:

• Leading space for days 1-9: ddd 1

Use three Ds.

• Leading zero for days 1-9: dd 01

Use two Ds.

• No leading zero or space: d 1

Use one D.

Year. The year can be expressed in either of two ways:

• Complete four-digit year: yyyy 1993

Use four Ys.

• Two-digit yean yy 93
Use two Ys.

EXAMPLES Combinations of Month, Day and Year. You can combine the month, day
and year in any order. You can also insert any punctuation you want
printed. If the current date were April 1,1993, the following combinations
would yield the dates shown:

Mmmm d, yyyy April 1,1993

d Mmm yy 1 Apr 93
m/d/yy 4/1/93
mm/dd/yy 04/01/93
MMMM ’yy APRIL '93

4-28
TM, NOW, SEC Time

FORMAT EEZJtm Soft Time

TO NOW Fixed Time
MSEC Fixed Time
MENU EEI Date/Time...

Purpose The TM, NOW, and SEC commands insert the current time into your text,
as provided by the clock internal to your computer. TM enters the soft
time — it's continually updated (like a clock). It shows the new, current
time whenever it appears on the screen or is printed. NOW and SEC insert
the current time as non-changing text. The only difference between NOW
and SEC is that SEC includes seconds in its format (for example, 10:24:52).

Action Inserting the Soft Time

To insert the soft time into your text:
1. Move the cursor where you want the first character of the time to be
located.
2. Type: (FgtmH

Result: The time appears in the text along with an embedded marker. TM
appears in expanded view as «TM».

Action Inserting the Fixed Time

To insert the current time so it will not change:

1. Move the cursor where you want the first character of the time to be
located.
2. Type: [F5]nowH or [FsJsecH
Result: The current time is inserted, fixed as ordinary text.

NOTE #1 Updating. The time inserted by the TM command does not automatically
update on the screen. You must change a character on that line, or move
the TM command off the screen and back on for it to update.

NOTE #2 Time Format. XyWrite displays time in AM/PM format (e.g., 10:30 PM). If
you prefer, you can display time in 24-hour format (e.g., 22:30). To do this,
change the MT (Military Time) setting in the default file to MT=1. Refer to
'Default Settings" in the Customization Guide for information on changing
the default file.

4-29
TM, NOW, SEC (confd)

NOTE #3 Measuring Elapsed Time. If you want to keep track of how long it takes
you to complete a task, you can use the ZT (Zero Time) and ET (Elapsed
Time) function calls like a stopwatch. The ZT function call resets the
stopwatch to zero and starts the time; the ET function call records the
amount of time that has elapsed since you issued ZT and inserts it in the
text. Time is recorded in hours, minutes, and seconds. Refer to "Keyboard
Files" in the Customization Guide for information on using function calls.

4-30
 Footnotes

INTRO If y°u use footnotes, you'll find XyWrite gives you a great deal of control
over how they appear. You can easily place all footnotes at the bottom of
the page, as basic footnotes, or at the end of your document, as endnotes.
In either case, as you add or delete footnotes, XyWrite handles the
numbering and placement of footnotes for you.

CONTENTS section begins with an overview and then describes each command
individually:

Page Section Command

4-32 Basic Footnote Procedures

4-34 Creating a Basic Footnote
4-35 Creating Endnotes
4-36 Variations on a Footnote

Commands
4-37 Footnote Command FN
4-38 Footnote Separator FS
4-39 Footnote Wrap Separator FW
4-41 Bottom Footnote BF
4-42 Dump Footnotes DF
4-43 No Footnotes NF
4-44 Set Footnote Number SF
4-48 Footnote Format FM

4-31
Basic Footnote Procedures

A footnote is text that appears at the bottom of a page, referenced by

number to a point above in the text. You can create footnotes at any time
— either at the initial writing, or later when you return to edit the
document. There is no limit to the size of a footnote.
XyWrite keeps track of all footnotes, numbering them automatically for
you. When you print the document, XyWrite puts each footnote at the
bottom of its page.

Footnote Sets. XyWrite allows you to create up to three sets of footnotes in

one document. You can make decisions about the style and format of each
set independently — you can even elect to print one set at the bottom of
the page and another set at the end of the document.

Creating a Basic Footnote is the first procedure described. To create the

simplest footnotes, you need only three commands:
• FN - Footnote
• FS - Footnote Separator
• FM - Footnote Format

Creating Endnotes is the second procedure described. Endnotes are

footnotes placed at the end of a chapter or document. Once you write
your footnotes, endnotes are easy to produce, needing only two
commands:
• NF - No Footnotes
• DF - Dump Footnotes

Variations on a Footnote describes other commands you can use to

modify the appearance of footnotes:
• FW - Footnote Wrap Separator
• BF - Bottom Footnote
• SF - Set Footnote Number

4-32
(confd) Basic Footnote Procedures

DISPLAY OF « FS » Foot note Sepa rator

FOOTNOTES « FW » Footnote Wrap Separator
« SF» Set Footnote Number

▲▲▲
When you create foot­
notes, XyWrite handles
« FN This is a very long the numbering automat­
footnote—in fact, so iong that it ically. You can freely
wraps to the next page, to add or delete footnotes
demonstrate Footnote Wrap without chinking about
Separator» ^how they are numbered

PRINTOUT OF
FOOTNOTES
I R
l i::
I When you create foot- . .
1 notes, XyWrite handles I '
| the numbering automat- 'S
■ ically. You can freely R
1 add or delete footnotes J ;
I without thinking about < '
how they are numbered. Iz
J If you care to, you | ?
■ can take charge of the . ■

Footnote Separator'
2 This is a very long 1 -
| footnote — in face, so I
Footnote
f long that it wraps co the .- I
I
|
I
{
i
Footnote Wrap Separator (cont'd)
i
next page, to demonstrate
Footnote Wrap Separator.
i

4-33
Basic Footnote Procedures (confd)

ACTION Creating a Basic Footnote

This procedure requires only the three basic footnote commands: FN
(Footnote), FS (Footnote Separator), and FM (Footnote Format). To enter a
footnote:

Creating the Footnote (FN)

1. Move the cursor to the point in the body of text you want marked for a
footnote (that is, where you want the superscripted number).

2. Type: [F5]fnS3
Result: The footnote window opens in the middle of the screen.

3. Type the footnote text, for example:

This is the footnote; it is numbered automatically. When this page is
printed, this footnote will automatically be printed at the bottom of
the page.
Be aware that you can use selected text or text macros to help you enter
text.

4. Press: [Shihl [fT|

Result: The footnote window closes. The footnote number 1 appears at
the cursor position. This footnote number actually represents an
embedded command; you can return to edit this footnote text at any
time. (See Note #1 for more information on editing footnotes.)

Creating the Footnote Format and Separator

5. Move the cursor to anywhere ahead of the first footnote (usually the
top of your document), in preparation for entering the footnote format.

6. Enter the format for your footnotes using the FM (Footnote Format)
command. While this step is not always necessary, we strongly
recommend using FM. For example:
Type: [F5]fm uf=times,lm=.8,rm=5.5S
If you omit FM, XyWrite uses the program's default values to format
the footnotes.

4-34
(confd) Basic Footnote Procedures

7. Next enter the FS (Footnote Separator) command:

Type: [F5]fs[5]
Result: This opens the Footnote Separator command window. Type in
the footnote separator — the line which separates the body text from
the footnotes. For example, we'll use a series of underlines:
Type: ______________ 00
The second CT inserts a blank line between the Footnote Separator and
the footnote.

8. Press: [Shift] [Fl]

Result: This closes the command window and completes the

procedure.

NOTE #1 Editing Footnotes. There are two ways you can edit the text in a footnote:
(1) by switching to expanded view with [Ctril [fb] or (2) by opening the
footnote command. To open the footnote, place the cursor on the footnote
number and press [Fill (or ® [fT]). The footnote window opens up and
displays the stored text so you can make edits. Close the footnote window
by pressing [Shift] [A].
Although you can see the footnotes in graphic view, you cannot edit them.

NOTE #2 Previewing the Footnotes. Footnote text is visible in expanded and

graphic views. You can also view the footnotes with PRINTS. Graphic
view and PRINTS show the footnotes on-screen, positioned properly at
the bottom of each page.

NOTE #3 Printing the Footnotes. After following the procedure "Creating a Basic
Footnote," you can use PRINT to print your document with footnotes.
The footnotes will automatically be printed just below the text on each
page, separated from the text by the footnote separator.

ACTION Creating Endnotes

Endnotes are footnotes that are collected and printed all together at the end
of the document, rather than sprinkled throughout the document. At the
start of the document you tell XyWrite to hold all footnotes (NF — No
Footnotes); at the end you tell XyWrite to print them (DF — Dump
Footnotes).
To enter endnotes, you first create footnotes throughout the document
exactly as in the procedure "Creating a Basic Footnote." Then:
1. Move the cursor to the start of the document.
Type: [F5]nf1[7il (1 is optional)

4-35
Basic Footnote Procedures (confd)

2. Move the cursor to the end of the document, where you want to print
all of the footnotes (in other words, where you want to dump the
footnotes).
(1 is optional)
Result: The NF1 command (No Footnotes) suppresses the printing of
footnotes from that point forward (up to DF1). However, the footnotes are
still accumulated internally by XyWrite. The DF1 command dumps, or
unloads, all of the footnotes at its location in the text (see Note #4).

NOTE #4 Exact Location of the Endnotes. The endnotes are not necessarily inserted
at the exact location of the DF embedded marker, but rather start at the
bottom of that page. The endnotes are positioned higher or lower on the
page, according to the setting of BF (Bottom Footnote), which is described
later in this section.

NOTE #5 Printing Only the Endnotes. If you want to print out only the endnotes,
use the previous procedure, placing the DF command on its own page at
the end of the document. Then print from that page forward (for example:
PRINT ,12-). To view the endnotes, use Print-to-Screen (PRINTS ,12-).
This would print all endnotes to the screen rather than to the printer.

Action Variations on a Footnote

Beyond the basic footnote procedure are the following variations. For
more information, refer to the separate explanations given later on each of
these commands.

Selecting a Footnote Wrap Separator. You can specify a different footnote

separator to appear in footnotes that continue to a second page. Refer to
FW—Footnote Wrap Separator.

Setting the Footnote Number. Set the footnote number with SF — all
subsequent footnotes renumber automatically. Refer to SF—Set Footnote
Number.

Positioning the Footnotes Up or Down. Set BF, the Bottom Footnote

setting, to 1 or 0. This affects the placement of footnotes on a page. Refer to
BF—Bottom Footnote.

Setting the Format for Footnotes. Set margins, tabs, line spacing and any
other format settings with FM. You also use the FM command to specify
the style in which footnote numbers print and the amount of space
between footnotes. Refer to FM—Footnote Format.

4-36
FN Footnote Command

FORMAT EEEJFNs
s (optional) is the number of the footnote set (1,2 or 3).
FN1 is the same as FN.
MENUS

Purpose The FN (Footnote) command lets you enter footnotes in text. You type in
the text of the footnote as part of the FN command, then end it by pressing
[Shift] [FjJ. When you print the document, XyWrite automatically inserts the
footnotes at the bottom of the pages on which they are referenced.
XyWrite lets you create as many as three independent sets of footnotes in
the same document. If you need just a single set, use FN, which is the
same as FN1. The other sets are FN2 and FN3.
When you're done entering the FN command, the footnote text is not
normally visible. You can view the text in a footnote in four ways:
• Press [Shift] [fs] to switch to graphic view; the footnote appears in position
on the page.
• In draft or formatted view, move the cursor onto the footnote number;
the first part of the footnote appears on the status line.
• With the cursor on the footnote number, press |fT7] (or [Ait] [fT|); a
command window opens, displaying the contents of the footnote.
• Press [Ctrl] [fs] to switch to expanded view; the FN command is expanded
to display the text of the footnote.

The last two options also allow you to edit the footnote text.

Action Creating a Basic Footnote

To enter a footnote, follow the procedure given a few pages back,
"Creating a Basic Footnote."

NOTE #1 Footnote Format. To create footnote margins (or tabs or line spacing)
different from the program defaults, use the FM (Footnote Format)
command. FM1 (or FM) affects all footnotes in its set uniformly, as do
FM2 and FM3.

NOTE #2 Shortcut. If the footnote text is short, you can type it all on the command
line as follows:
Type: [F5jfn This is a one-line footnote. 0

4-37
Footnote Separator FS

FORMAT ESZJFSs
s (optional) is the number of the footnote set (1,2 or 3).
FS1 is the same as FS.
MENUS ESJES3ES33

Purpose The FS (Footnote Separator) command allows you to specify lines which
separate the footnotes from the body text. The lines (which can contain
text or can be blank) are located immediately above the footnote. An
example of a Footnote Separator is illustrated at the start of the Footnote
section. Very often people choose the footnote separator to be three lines:
• A blank line
• A row of hyphens, underlines or asterisks
• Another blank line
A Footnote Separator can be specified for each of three independent sets of
footnotes as: FS1, FS2 and FS3. FS1 is the same as FS alone (with no
number).

Action Creating a Footnote Separator

To create a Footnote Separator, follow the procedure given a few pages
back, "Creating a Basic Footnote." Be aware of the following note.

NOTE #1 Location of FS. Any Footnote Separator commands you use (FS1, FS2 or
FS3) must be placed ahead of any footnotes they affect. It is a good practice
to place the commands at the top of the document, where they are easy to
find.

NOTE #2 First Footnote Separator. To ensure a uniform appearance, the separator

associated with footnote set 1 (FS1) is always printed at the bottom of any
page that contains footnotes. This is true even if there is no footnote
associated with set 1 on that page.

If you prefer to print only the separators associated with footnote sets that
actually appear on the page, you can change the CF (Change Footnote
Separator) setting in the default file to CF=1. (The default is CF=0.) See
"Default Settings" in the Customization Guide for more information.

4-38
FW Footnote Wrap Separator

FORMAT ESZJFWs
s (optional) is the footnote set number (1 to 3).
FW1 is the same as FW.
M E NU S EEH E3E3

Purpose XyWrite tries to put the entire footnote on the page where it belongs. If it
won't fit, the footnote will automatically continue (wrap) on the next page.
This next page is where the Footnote Wrap Separator is used.

The FW (Footnote Wrap Separator) command is very similar to the regular

Footnote Separator command, FS, but with one difference: FW defines
footnote separators only for footnotes that wrap, or continue, from the
previous page. Very often people define the Footnote Wrap Separator to
be three lines:

• A blank line
• A row of hyphens, underlines or asterisks, followed by the text:
(continued)
• Another blank line

The word (continued) refers to the fact that the footnote is continued from
the previous page.

A Footnote Wrap Separator can be specified for each of the three sets of
footnote separators. The footnote wrap separators correspond directly to
the three commands FS1 (or FS), FS2 and FS3.

ACTION Creating a Footnote Wrap Separator

To create a footnote wrap separator:

1. Move the cursor to anywhere before the first footnote in the set. (It's a
good practice to use the top line.)

2. Enter any FW command in addition to any FS command.

Type: [F5]fw10 (the 1 is optional)

Result: A command window opens on the screen.

4-39
FW (confd)

3. Now type the lines you want to define as the wrap separator.
Important: Make the Footnote Wrap Separator the same number of
lines as the Footnote Separator you are already using. For example:

Type: ___________ (continued) £3 E3

4. Press: fShiftl [fT|

Result: This closes the command window and completes the

procedure.

NOTE #1 If FW is Left Unspecified. If you don't specify a Footnote Wrap

Separator, XyWrite uses the regular Footnote Separator for footnotes that
continue to another page.

NOTE #2 What Causes a Footnote to Wrap. Two conditions combine to cause a

footnote to wrap to the next page: (1) The footnote reference in the body
of text is located near the end of the page, and (2) the footnote is lengthy.

Before causing a footnote to wrap, XyWrite first attempts to move the text
containing the footnote (along with the footnote itself) to the next page.
However, it will not allow the text and footnote to fall short of the
minimum page length (set by BTmax).

4-40
BF Bottom Footnote

FORMAT ESZJbfh
n is 0 or 1
MENUS IE! E3SES! E3EM

Purpose The BF (Bottom Footnote) command allows you to specify whether

footnotes (and footnote separators) are placed immediately after the last
line of text or at the bottom of the page.
• BF 0 means footnotes are pushed up against the last line of text.
• BF 1 means footnotes are pushed down against the last line of PL (as
defined by PLmax).
The default is to place footnotes at the bottom of the page. Of course, BF
only has a noticeable effect on pages that are not filled with text.

Action Positioning the Footnotes Up or Down

To enter the BF command:

1. Move the cursor anywhere before the footnotes you want to affect.
(We recommend the top line of your document.)

2. To set the BF command to 0:

Type: [F5]bf OCT

Result: When you print the document, the footnotes will be positioned
against the last line of text.

NOTE #1 Footnote Sets. There is only one BF command, and it applies to all three
footnote sets.

NOTE #2 Default If you want footnotes to print against the text in all your
documents, you can change the BF setting to 0 in the default file. (See
"Default Settings" in the Customization Guide for information on
modifying the default file.)

4-41
Dump Footnotes DF

FORMAT
s (optional) is the footnote set number (1 to 3).
DF1 is the same as DF.
MENUS

Purpose The DF (Dump Footnotes) command is used with the NF (No

Footnotes) command to place all footnotes together at the end of the
document, as endnotes, rather than on the pages where they are
referenced.
To dump means to output the footnotes as text to the screen, file, or
printer. DF and NF are complementary commands — DF instructs
XyWrite to output the footnotes, while NF instructs XyWrite to hold off
outputting them. To produce endnotes, you do the following:
• NF Command. Place the NF command at the top of your document.
NF suppresses the printing of footnotes until a later DF command is
encountered in the text.
• DF Command. Place the DF command at the end of your
document. DF causes the printing of footnotes that have
accumulated since the NF command. The footnotes start printing at
the bottom of the page containing the DF embedded marker.
You can specify a DF command for each of the three sets of footnotes.
Whenever you use a DF command (DF1, DF2, or DF3), you must use
the corresponding NF command (NF1, NF2, or NF3).
XyWrite tries to position all the footnotes on the page that contains the
DF embedded marker. If they won't all fit, they continue onto the next
page.

Action Entering the DF Command

To enter the DF command, follow the procedure given earlier,
"Creating Endnotes."

Note #1 Text After the DF Command. If you have text after the DF command
(e.g., if you are dumping footnotes at the end of every chapter), insert a
PG (Page Break) command between the DF command and the text that
follows it. Otherwise, XyWrite will fill the page that contains the DF
command with text before dumping the footnotes, possibly moving up
text that follows the DF command.

NOTE #2 Graphic View. Endnotes are not displayed in graphic view.

4-42
NF No Footnotes

FORMAT MlNFs
s (optional) is the number of the footnote set (1,2 or 3).
NF1 is the same as NF.
MENUS

Purpose The NF (No Footnotes) command turns off the printing of footnotes at
the bottom of each page. (The footnote numbers still appear in the text,
though.)

Using NF in conjunction with the DF (Dump Footnote) command, you

can place all the footnotes at the end of a chapter or document.

NF and DF are complementary commands. NF turns off the printing

of footnotes, while DF turns on the printing of footnotes.

You can have an NF command for each of the three sets of footnotes.
Whenever you use an NF command (NF1, NF2, or NFS) you must use
the corresponding DF command (DF1, DF2, or DF3).

NF takes effect at the point it is placed in the document, and affects the
remainder of the document — that is, until a DF command is
encountered. Thus, you would place NF at the tap of a document in
order to inhibit the printing of all footnotes.

Action Entering the NF Command

To enter the NF command, follow the procedure given earlier,
"Creating Endnotes."

NOTE Graphic View. Endnotes are not displayed in graphic view.

ALSO SEE Related Command. See the DF (Dump Footnotes) command.

4-43
Set Footnote Number SF

FORMAT ESflSFs n
s (optional) is the number of the footnote set (1,2 or 3).
n (optional) is the footnote style and starting value.
SF1 is the same as SF.
Menus

PURPOSE 'The SF (Set Footnote Number) command sets the style (numbers, letters,
symbols) and the starting value of footnotes. You place the SF command
ahead of the first Footnote (FN) command that you want to affect.
Since XyWrite supports up to three separate sets of footnotes, you can
designate a footnote style and starting value for each set with SF1, SF2,
and SF3.
There are six different styles from which you can choose:
Decimal numbers SF 1
Uppercase roman numerals SF I
Lowercase roman numerals SF i
Uppercase letters SFA
Lowercase letters SF a
Defined string SF *n or SF #n
If you want to start the sequence with a different value, use that value in
the command. For example, the command SF iii tells XyWrite to number
the footnotes in lowercase roman numerals and to start the sequence at iii.
If you do not specify an SF command, XyWrite uses decimal numbers
starting at 1.
This section includes the following procedures:
• Selecting the Style and Starting Value
• Restarting the Sequence
• Setting Unnumbered Footnotes
• Defining Footnote Symbols

4-44
(confd) SF

ACTION Selecting the Style and Starting Value

To define the style and starting value for footnotes:
1. Move the cursor to anywhere ahead of the footnotes you want to affect.

2. Decide what style and starting point you want to use. For illustration
purposes, let's use lowercase letters starting with "e" for footnote set 2:
Type: [F5]sf2 eM
Result: Footnote set 2 is assigned lowercase letters e, f, g, and so on.

ACTION Restarting the Sequence

To restart the selected sequence at the beginning of each page:
1. Move the cursor to the beginning of the file.
2. Select the footnote set number, style and starting value. Insert a
hyphen (-) before the starting value to make the sequence restart at
each new page:
Type: [F5]sf2 -10

Result: Footnote set 2 is assigned decimal numbers starting at number 1

on each page (see Note #3).

ACTION Setting Unnumbered Footnotes

Unnumbered footnotes are useful in several places (for example, for an
author's credit on the front page of a document, when you have only one
footnote per page or when you are making reference to a registered
trademark). To print a footnote that is unnumbered (has no identification
symbol):

1. Move the cursor ahead of the footnotes you want to affect.

2. Select the footnote set that you want to be unnumbered (for example,
set 3). Enter the SF command without a style:
Type: fFsIsOCT
Result: Footnotes in set 3 are printed without numbers or symbols of any
kind. The footnote numbers are represented on-screen by a superscript n
which does not print.

4-45
SF (cont'd)

ACTION Defining Footnote Symbols

You can create your own sequence of footnote symbols (for example, *, +,
t, §/ H) by entering a Counter String table (CS:) in the default file (see Note
#1.) When it reaches the end of the defined sequence, XyWrite recycles
it.
To use the symbols defined in the CS table:
1. Move the cursor to the top of the page you want to affect.
2. Select the footnote set that you want to use, and select the number of
the string from the Counter String table you want to start with. For
example:
Type: [F5]sf3 *20 or [g]sf3 #20
Result: For footnote set 3, XyWrite uses the symbols that are defined in
the Counter String table, starting with the second string in that list, and
proceeding to the third, fourth, and so on.
If there are more footnotes in your file than there are symbols in the CS
table, XyWrite returns to the beginning of the CS table and starts over. If
you used an asterisk in the SF command, XyWrite prints the first string
twice, then the second one twice, etc. If you used a pound sign in the SF
command, XyWrite simply starts at the beginning of the list without
doubling the entries.
, etc.)
(If there is no Counter String table defined, XyWrite uses: *, ", ***

NOTE #1 Entering the CS (Counter String) Table. The CS table in the default file
defines the strings that can be used as footnote symbols. The format of the
CS table is:
cs:#
string 1

string#
where # is the number of strings. For example:
cs:5
*

%
&
§
1
The strings in the Counter String table can also be used as counters and
page numbers. You can have only one Counter String table per default
file.
4-46
(confd) SF

NOTE #2 Recycling Symbols. If you choose a footnote style with a limited number
of symbols (e.g., lowercase letters or the Counter String table), you may
run out of symbols before you run out of footnotes. When that happens,
XyWrite returns to the beginning of the list of possible symbols and inserts
the first one twice, then the second one twice, etc. The list is repeated as
many times as necessary.

NOTE #3 Draft and Formatted Views. If you restart the sequence of footnote
symbols on each page, the actual symbol is not displayed in draft or
formatted view. Instead, a superscript 2 appears on the screen.

NOTE #4 Footnote Numbers in Chained Files. Footnote numbers continue through

a chained set of files, unless they are reset with an SF command in one of
the files. If you work with an individual file without SF commands in it,
all the footnotes take on the 1,2,3 format.

If you want an individual file to use a different footnote style but still
increment properly in a chain file, you can use a modified SF command.
Simply put a question mark before the SF format in all but the first file.

For example, assume that the first file in the chain contains the command
SF A to label footnotes with uppercase letters. In the subsequent files,
enter the following command:

Type: [F5]sf ?A0

Result: Subsequent files, displayed or printed separately, will have

footnote labels starting with "A"; when chain printed, the footnotes will
be consecutively labeled from file to file.

NOTE #5 Initial Values for Letters. The initial value of any letter definition is the
letter you specify. However, if that letter can also mean a roman numeral
then it is taken as a roman numeral. Letters used as roman numerals are I,
V,X, L, C, Dand M.
If you want to start footnote numbers with the letter L (rather than the
roman numeral fifty, which is also L), then you precede the letter with a
double quote mark:
EJsf 1 MLS
Footnote Format FM

FORMAT ESZJFMs .
s (optional) is the number of the footnote set (1, 2 or 3).
nm is a format command (UF, SZ, LM, RM, TS,IP, LS, FLZ FCZ FRZ JU, NJ,
FT, or SC).
= (equals sign) separates the name from the value.
n is the value of the format setting.
, (comma) separates the settings.
MENUS E^ESSS3E3B3

Purpose The FM command defines the format for footnotes. If you don't use the
FM command, all footnotes use XyWrite's default format (as opposed to
the current format) for text.
In addition to the standard text formatting commands (margins,
paragraph indent, line spacing, offset, etc.), you can define the following
footnote styles with FM:
• Footnote Transition (FT) — Allows you to specify how much extra
space appears between footnotes.
• Superscript Numbers (SC) — Allows you to change the mode for
printing footnote numbers.
XyWrite supports up to 3 independent footnote sets. You can create a
separate format for each set by putting the set number into the FM
command, i.e., FM1, FM2 or FM3. Any set of footnotes that does not have an
FM command takes the program's default format.

Action Defining the Space Between Footnotes

When more than one footnote in a set appears on a page, XyWrite allows
you to define the amount of extra space between them. You do this by
including the FT setting as part of the FM command. For example:
1. Place the cursor before the first footnote you want to affect. Typically,
you would move to the top of the file:
Press: |Ctri| I Home I

2. Decide which footnote set you want to use. Let's use set 3:
Type: [F5]fm3 sz=9pt,lm=.8,rm=5.5,ft=.20
Result: Footnotes in set 3 are 9 point, and have a left margin of .8 inch and
a right margin of 5.5 inches. When more than one footnote appears on a
page, there is 2 inch between each one.

4-48
(confd) FM

ACTION Changing the Printing Style of Footnote Numbers

By default, footnote numbers in the text print in superscript mode (MD
SU) and footnote numbers at the bottom of the page print in normal mode
(MD NM). For some applications, you may wish to print the footnote
numbers at the bottom of the page in superscript. You can do this by
including the SC command as part of the FM command. SC has the
following format:
SC=nm
where nm is the type style in which you want to print footnote numbers at
the bottom of the page. Refer to "Mode Commands" later in this chapter
for a list of type style mnemonics.

To print footnote numbers at the bottom of the page in superscript mode,

include the SC=SU setting in the FM command. For example:
Type: [F5]fm sc=su,sz=9pt,lm=.8,rm=5.5,ft=.2H

NOTE #1 Opening a Window. If you issue the FM command without arguments,

XyWrite opens a command window. You can then type the values you
want into the window, and press [Shift] E] to close it. For example:

1. Type: [F5]fml 0 to open the command window

2. Enter the formatting commands you want to apply to footnote set 1.

Type: sz=9pt,uf=times

3. Press: |Shift] [fT| to close the command window

NOTE #2 Effect of FM on Footnote Separators. The FM command sets the format

for the footnote text only; it does not affect the format of the footnote
separators.

NOTE #3 Default Settings. You can also change the settings of SC and FT in the
default file. You might prefer this method if you use the same values for
every document. See "Default Settings" in the Customization Guide for
more information.

4-49
 NOTES

4-50
 Graphic Design Commands

Intro XyWrite gives you the tools you need to produce any type of document,
including those that are highly designed, like newsletters and brochures.
This section describes some commands that let you apply graphic design
techniques, such as wrap-around text and borders, to your documents.

Contents page section Command

4-52 Graphic Design Procedures

4-55 Framing an Area FA
4-61 Drawing a Border BO, UP, UB
4-68 Line Drawing BOX

4-51
Graphic Design Procedures

Purpose This section gives you an overview of the steps involved in creating a
page that incorporates a frame and a border. Keep in mind as you review
the procedure that the example represents the simplest application of two
powerful commands. Detailed descriptions and more complex examples
of the commands follow the overview.

There are three parts involved in producing a page with a reserved frame
of white space and a border. To summarize:
• Type the text. Enter the body text of the page, and use the appropriate
formatting commands to define the margins, point size, typeface, etc.

• Reserve the space for the illustration. Use the FA (Frame Area)
command to reserve space for an illustration (see Note).

• Define and insert the border. Use the BO command to define the type
of border and line weight.

NOTE Importing Graphics. XyWrite allows you to import many types of

graphics so you can display and print them with your text. (See
"Importing Graphics" for information on the types of graphics you can
import.) The procedure described in this overview assumes you are not
importing the graphic, but are simply reserving space for it.

Plan for Growth

A Report from Creative Strategies, Inc.

Creative Strategies Helps Growth does not just happen. Since the demands of the market
You Build on Your The seeds that are the germ of arc well-documented phenomena
your product must be planted in and we all have to work with
Strengths
soil that will nourish its growth. limited resources, we would like
to concentrate on the second item.

The initial thrust into a market by

any company is often a result of
the company founders’ labor of
love-the element of the job which
makes them willing to spend long
hours and every last dollar to
make sure the product is right.
Companies live and die by the
demands of their market and the
If you can identify what purpose
resources they have to meet those
makes your people work hard, be
demands. The creation of a
creative, and assert their energy,
company, or a product, is always
then you have the key. Use it as
the result of tw o forces: the loud
the cornerstone for building an
cry of market demands and the
environment that will make your
resources that the company can
company grow.
muster to meet those demands.

4-52
(confd) Graphic Design Procedures

Action Type the Text

To begin, create a new file. We'll use the name FLYER.

Type: EU new flyerS

Write the text you want, as in the illustration, and add the appropriate
formatting commands.

Action Reserve Space for the Illustration

The FA (Frame Area) command reserves a space on the page so you can
later paste in an illustration. As an example, let's create a frame that is 2.3
inches wide and 1.3 inches deep, and place it 2.5 inches from the left edge
of the page and 3.2 inches from the top.

1. Move the cursor to the page on which you want the frame to appear.

2. Issue the FA command.

Type: [FslfaCT

Result: A command window opens.

3. Type the size and position arguments. Be sure to put a semicolon at

the end of the arguments.

Type: si=2.3x1.3,po=2.5x3.2;

4. Close the command window.

Press: |Shrft||Fl]

Result: XyWrite reformats the text on the page so that it flows around
the reserved frame. (Every time you change the size or position of the
frame, XyWrite adjusts the text to accommodate it.)

5. (Optional) To review the format of the document, switch to graphic

view.

Press: |Shift]|F8|

4-53
Graphic Design Procedures (conCd)

ACTION Define and Insert the Border

You use the BO command to define the border. Once it is defined, XyWrite
automatically places it around all associated page elements on the page
until you cancel it or override it.

To insert a border that has a line weight of 2 points around the frame you
created in the previous procedure:

1. Move to the beginning of the file.

2. Type: [F5]bo lb=fa,wt=2ptG3

Result: When you print your document or display it in graphic view, a

border appears around the framed area.

4-54
FA Framing an Area

FORMAT told FA SI=WxD,PO=XxY;strzng

SI=WxD (optional) is the size of the area being reserved. If you omit SI,
XyWrite automatically calculates the size based on the contents of string.
(See Note #1.)
PO=XxY is the place on the page where you want the reserved area to fall.
You can use keywords or specific page coordinates. (See Note #2.)
; is a required group argument separator. It must follow the preceding
arguments, even if string is omitted.
string (optional) is text or embedded commands that define what goes into
the reserved area. (See Note #3.)
MENU EEsDEffl®

Purpose The FA (Framed Area) command allows you to define and reserve
"boxes" of space on a page. You can leave these reserved areas blank,
enter text into them, or merge graphic files into them (see the illustrations
on the following page).

When the framed area is narrower than the width of the text, text flows
around the frame in one of the following ways:

• If the framed area is placed between

columns, text flows around both sides
of the area.

• If the framed area is placed against the

left edge of the text area, text flows
around the right side of the frame.
(Note: To achieve this effect, set the
LM (Left Margin) command to 0 and
use the OF (Offset) command to
establish the left edge of the text area.

• If the framed area is placed in the

middle of a page, text flows around
the left side of the area.

4-55
FA (confd)

Plan for Growth

Blank Framed
Area

Plan for Growth

rr^lnc Mrah-ir^ Hrip* i'
ua on V our
.J ■

Framed Area i
with Text I
L

Plan for Growth

Framed Area
with Graphic

4-56
(confd) FA

ACTION Using the FA Command

Before you issue the FA command, you must decide how large you want
the framed area to be, where on the page you want it to fall, and what you
want to include in it. There are many options for specifying each
argument, and these options are discussed in the notes at the end of this
section. For illustration purposes, let's build on the example presented in
the overview section by inserting text into the frame.

1. Move the cursor to the beginning of the file.

2. Issue the FA command.

Type: [F5]fa0

Result: A command window opens.

3. Type the size and position arguments. Be sure to put a semicolon at

the end of the arguments.

Type: si=2.3x1.3,po=2.5x3.2;

4. Enter the appropriate formatting commands for the text you are
inserting (see Note #4). Margin and indent values are measured from
the edge of the area, not from the edge of the page. For example:
Type: £5] sz 11 pt 0
Type: [F5]mdit0
Type: [F5]rm 2.20
Type: [F5)uf times0
Type: EOgu .50
5. Enter the text that you want to appear in the reserved area.
6. Close the window.
Press: fShittl[FT|

Result: When you print your document (or when you display it in graphic
view), the text you entered in step 5 appears in the reserved area.

4-57
FA (conCd)

NOTE #1 Size Options. There are three options for defining the size of the framed
area:
• You can specify the actual dimensions, as shown in the previous
example.
• You can omit the SI setting and let XyWrite define the size
automatically for you, based on the size of string. If string does not
include an IG (Import Graphic) or IN (Import Printer-Ready File)
command, XyWrite uses the width of the current page as the area's
width (see Note #4). If string does include an IG or IN command,
XyWrite gets the width information from the file being imported.
• You can specify one dimension and let XyWrite automatically calculate
the other by substituting the letter "A" for the dimension (e.g.,
SI=Ax4).
NOTE #2 Position Options. There are three options for specifying the position on a
page of the framed area:
• You can specify the actual coordinates, as shown in the previous
example. To do this, measure from the top left comer of the page (not
from margins) to the upper left comer of where you want XyWrite to
place the framed area.
• You can use keywords to specify a horizontal or vertical area of the
page. XyWrite accepts the following keywords for the horizontal
position:
PC Position of command
LP Left of page
TM Text margin
CP Center of page
RP Right of page
LC Left of column
CC Center of column
RC Right of column
XyWrite accepts the following keywords for the vertical position:
PC Position of command
TP Top of page
CP Center of page
BP Bottom of page
TC Top of column
CC Center of column
BC Bottom of column

It is recommended that you use PC to define only one value of the PO

argument.

4-58
(confd) FA

• You can combine the first two options by using the specific coordinate
for one value and a keyword for the other (for example, PO=LPx2).

XyWrite also allows you to define different positions for odd- and even-
numbered pages. If you do that, XyWrite positions the framed area one
way if it falls on an even page and another way if it falls on an odd page.
For example, suppose you want the framed area to be on the outside
corner of the page. On an even page, that would be the left corner, while
on an odd page it would be on the right corner.

To apply this option, use the POO (Position Odd) and POE (Position Even)
arguments instead of PO. You must include both arguments in the FA
command; otherwise, XyWrite treats the single argument as if it were
simply a PO argument.

NOTE #3 String Options. There are three options for defining the contents of the
reserved area:

• Leave it blank, so that you can manually paste in a graphic or halftone.

• Enter text and appropriate formatting commands as part of the FA

command to create a sidebar or highlight a quotation.

• Enter an IG (Import Graphic) or IN (Include Printer-Ready File)

command as part of the FA command.

You can combine the last two options to add a title or caption to the
imported information. Text that appears before the IG or IN command is
placed over the imported information; text that appears after the IG
command is placed after the imported information.

NOTE #4 Inserting Text. The size of the reserved area does not restrict the width of
the text you are inserting. If you insert text in an FA command, be sure to
include an RM (Right Margin) command with that text. Otherwise, the
text may print beyond the edge of the reserved area.

NOTE #5 Line Endings. On pages that include an FA command, XyWrite displays

accurate line endings in both graphic view and formatted view. In draft
view, line endings may no longer be accurate.

ALSO SEE Related Commands. The following commands are often used in
combination with the FA command: BO (Border); IG (Import Graphic);
and IN (Import Printer-Ready File).

4-59
FA (confd)

EXAMPLES The following examples of the FA command are shown in expanded view.

« FASI=3INx4IN,PO=CPxCP;« IGSALES.PCX» « UFTIMES» «SZ9PT»

« RM2.8IN» «FC» 1992 Sales Projections
*-
»
This command creates a framed area that is 3 inches wide by 4 inches
high, centered on the page. Inside the frame is the imported graphic
SALES.PCX, with the caption "1992 Sales Projections" centered under it.

« FASI=AxA,PO=LPxPC;« IGFLOW.TIF» »
This command creates a framed area that is left on the page and is
vertically placed at the position of the cursor when the command is issued.
If you add or delete text before the marker that represents the command,
the vertical position of the frame will change. XyWrite automatically
calculates the size of the framed area based on the contents of the
imported graphic.

« FASI=2INx3IN,POO=RPxBP,POE=LPxBP;« UFHELVETICA» « SZ8PT»

«RM1.8IN» «GU.2IN»Shaker Styling«-
«IGCHAIR.TIF» »
This command creates a framed area that is 2 inches wide by 3 inches
high. If the framed area falls on an odd page, XyWrite positions it in the
bottom right comer; if it falls on an even page, XyWrite positions it in the
bottom left comer. The frame contains the imported graphic CHAIR.TIF,
with the title "Shaker Styling" immediately over it.

4-60
BO, UP, UB Drawing a Border

FORMAT Iffil’flBO LB=name/WT=/zr,f,b,IN=/,r,f,MS=%,RS=/,r,f,b,AB=/,r,f,b

LMUB name
EE1UP name
W=name is the border name or label. It can be a keyword (described
below) or a name you select (up to 8 characters). (See Note #1.)
WT=/,r,f,h is the line weight or thickness. The default is 0. (See Note #2.)
IN=/,r,f,b (optional) is the amount of inset between the border and the
page element boundaries. The default is 0. (See Note #3.)
IS=% (optional) is the percentage of black you want inside the border. The
default is 0. (See Note #4.)
RS=/,r,t,b (optional) is the percentage of black you want the border to print
in. The default is 100. (See Note #5.)
AB=/,r,f,b (optional) defines the way in which you want adjacent borders
handled. The default is 0. (See Note #6.)
Menus iteatoa

PURPOSE The BO (Border) command allows you to put a border around the
following page elements: table cells; snaked columns; and framed areas
created by an FA command. In addition, you can put a border around an
entire page. The BO command also allows you to put lines between
columns or table cells and to create shaded areas behind your text or
graphic.

When you define a border, you can use a keyword as the border name or
you can give it a custom name. The type of border name you use affects
the way that you apply borders: if the name is a keyword, XyWrite
automatically applies the border to all page elements that correspond to
that keyword; if the name is a custom one, you use either the UB (Use
Border) or UP (Use Page Border) command to apply it.

UB applies the named border to all table cells, reserved areas, and snaked
columns. It overrides any borders that were defined with keywords. UP
tells XyWrite to insert the border around the page; it does not override
borders that were defined with keywords.

The UP and UB commands can also be used to turn off borders:

• UP NO turns off page borders (those applied with a UP command).

• UB NO turns off all borders except page borders (in other words, it
turns off borders activated by a BO or UB command).
• UB ST turns off custom borders (those applied with a UB command)
and turns on standard borders (those applied with a BO command)

4-61
BO, UP, UB (confd)

ACTION Creating a Border for Snaked Columns

To automatically insert a border around snaked columns:

1. Move the cursor to the beginning of the file.

2. Enter the BO command using the keyword SN. As an example, we'll

use a line weight of 2 points.

Type: [F5]bo lb=sn,wt=2ptS

Result: XyWrite applies this border to all snaked columns in the file,
unless you supersede it with a UB command or turn it off with a UB NO
command.

ACTION Creating a Page Border

To create a border that goes around the text of your page:

1. Move the cursor to the beginning of the file.

2. Issue a PW (Page Width) command. (See Note #7.) For example:

Type: [Fslpw 8CT

Result: XyWrite uses the page width of 8 inches to draw the border.

2. Define the border with the BO command. Page borders use a custom
label rather than a keyword. In addition to specifying the weight, page
borders generally look better if you establish an inset. For example:

Type: [F5]bo Ib=pg,wt=1pt,in=.5ing3

3. Turn on the border by issuing the UP command. For example:

Type: [g]up pgS

Result: When you print the file, all pages will have a border around
them. The UP command has no effect on other borders. It remains in
effect until you issue a UP command with another name or turn page
borders off with a UP NO command.

4-62
(confd) BO, UP, UB

NOTE #1 (Label). The label argument defines the name of the border, or the type
of page element to which this border is to apply. The format is:

where name is a keyword or a name you select (up to 8 characters). You

can only use a border label once per file. That means that you can define a
border for columns using the keyword CT, but you cannot redefine it later
in your file. (This rule does not apply to BO commands that are nested
inside other commands.)
Allowable keywords are:
FA (Framed Area)
CT (Column)
SN (Snaked Column)
NOTE #2 WT (Weight). This argument defines the line weight (or thickness) of the
border. The format for this argument is:
WT=/,r,f,b
where l,r,t,b refer to the left, right, top, and bottom borders. If you omit
one or more values, XyWrite substitutes the last specified value. For
example, WT=3PT defines a line weight of 3 points for all four borders;
WT=3PT„1PT defines a line weight of 3 points for the left and right
borders and 1 point for the top and bottom borders.
NOTE #3 IN (Inset). This argument defines the amount of inset (space) between the
edge of the page element and the border. The IN argument is typically
used for borders around a framed area and around a page; it is not
necessary for columns and tables. The format for this argument is:
IN=/,r,f,b
where l,r,t,b refer to the inset at the left, right, top, and bottom of the
border. If you specify only the value for /, XyWrite assumes you want the
same size inset all the way around the border.
When you specify an inset value for a framed area border, XyWrite places
the border around the edge of the framed area, then measures from the
border outward to create the gutter of white space. If you change the
value of the inset, it affects the text that surrounds the framed area; the
size of the area and the placement of the border are not affected.
When you specify an inset value for a page border, XyWrite measures
from the edge of the paper for the left, top, and bottom borders; for the
right border, it measures from the point established by the PW (Page
Width) command.
The IN argument is ignored when two borders are combined (see the AB
argument in Note #6). In such cases, XyWrite inserts a single line,
centered between the two elements.
4-63
BO, UP, UB (confd)

NOTE #4 IS (Inside Shading). This argument defines the shading within the box
created by the border. The format for this argument is:
IS=%
where % is the percentage of black you want the shading to be. A value of
0 means no shading; a value of 100 produces solid black. Typical values
for IS are 5 and 10.
NOTE #5 RS (Rule Shading). This argument defines the shading for the lines (or
rules) that make up the border. The format for this argument is:
RS=Z,r,f,fe
where lfr,t,b define the percentage of black you want the shading to be. A
value of 0 means that the lines are invisible; a value of 100 means that the
lines are solid black. If you omit one or more values, XyWrite substitutes
the last specified value.
NOTE #6 AB (Adjacent Borders). XyWrite defines adjacent borders as borders of
the same height (or length) that fall side by side on the page. The most
common occurrence of adjacent borders is between columns or rows in a
table or between snaked columns. AB does not apply to framed areas.
By default, XyWrite combines adjacent borders into one border, using the
line weight of the left border. For example, instead of two lines between
snaked columns, one forming the right border of column 1 and one
forming the left border of column 2, XyWrite prints one border, centered
between the two columns.
The AB argument lets you maintain adjacent borders as separate lines. It
also lets you turn printing of borders on or off, depending on whether
they are combined borders or not. For example, you can choose to print
only those borders that are combined (e.g., between columns and rows) or
only those borders that are not combined (e.g., around the outside of a
table). You can even choose to print none of the borders, or to apply
different rules to the top, bottom, left, and right borders.
The format of the AB argument is:
AB=/,r,f,b
where l,r,t,b define the way XyWrite treats adjacent left, right, top, and
bottom borders. If you omit one or more values, XyWrite substitutes the
last specified value. The AB argument uses the following values:
0 Adjacent borders are combined. (This is the default.)
1 Border is invisible when combined with another border.
2 Border is invisible unless combined with another border.
3 Border is always invisible.
4 Adjacent borders are not combined.

4-64
(confd) BO, UP, UB
BO, UP, UB (confd)

NOTE #7 Page Width. XyWrite uses the value established for PW (Page Width) as
the outer right boundary of page borders. The default value for PW is 8.5
inches.
NOTE #8 White Space. You can use the ET (Element Top) and EE (Element End)
commands to insert space between the top and bottom borders and the
text of a cell, column or frame.
NOTE #9 Nesting Commands. You can insert the BO and UB commands inside
certain formatting commands. For example, you can put them inside an
RH or RF command to create a border around a running header or footer.
You can also put the BO command inside an FA command so that it
applies only to the framed area being defined, rather than to all framed
areas. This rule applies only to formatting commands that open a
command window so you can embed other commands. You cannot nest a
BO command inside an SN (Snaked Columns) command, for example,
because SN does not open a command window when you issue it.
NOTE #10 Printer Requirements. Your printer must support graphic mode for
borders to work.
ALSO SEE Related Commands. The BO command interacts closely with the FA, CT,
and SN commands. You should also be familiar with the effects of the ET
(Element Top), EE (Element End), and PW (Page Width) commands before
using the BO command.

EXAMPLES BO lb=FA,is=10
Defines and applies a border for framed areas (as defined by an FA
command). This command fills all areas with a gray screen, 10% of black.
There are no lines around the framed area because there is no WT
argument.

BO lb=SN,wt=1pt,rs=25,is=20
Defines and applies a border for snaked columns; the lines of the border
are 1 point thick and are 25% of black. The area inside the border is 20% of
black. This command puts lines around every snaked column in the file.

BO lb=THICK,wt=3pt,rs=50„100,is=25
Defines a border named THICK, with a line weight of 3 points. The left
and right borders print in 50% of black, while the top and bottom borders
are solid black. The area inside the border is 25% of black.
This border is not applied until you issue a UB THICK command; after
that, it is applied to all columns, tables, and frames in the file until it is
superseded by another UB command.

4-66
(confd) BO, UP, UB

BO lb=SOLID,wt=2pt„3pt
Defines a border named SOLID. The left and right borders have a line
weight of 2 points, while the top and bottom borders have a weight of 3
points.
This border is not applied until you issue a UB SOLID command; after
that, it is applied to all columns, tables, and frames in the file, until it is
superseded by another UB command.

BO lb=CT,wt=2pt,ab=2„3,rs=75
Defines and applies a border for column tables. The line weight for all four
borders is 2 points, and the lines print in 75% of black. The left and right
borders are visible only when they are adjacent to another border; the top
and bottom borders are always invisible.

The effect of the AB setting in this command is to put vertical rules

between columns in the table, but not between rows or around the outside
of the table.

BO lb=CT,wt=1pt,ab=1
Defines and invokes a border for column tables. The line weight is 1 point.
The borders are only visible if they are not adjacent to another border.

The effect of this AB setting is to put borders around the outside of the
table, but not between columns or rows.

BO lb=FA,wt=2pt1in=.4„.2
Defines a border for all framed areas. The line weight is 2 points. The
border insets from the left and right boundaries by 4/10 inch, and from
the top and bottom boundaries by 2/10 inch.

4-67
Line Drawing BOX

FORMAT IS2JBOX
MENUS

Purpose The BOX command puts you in line drawing mode, which allows you to
draw horizontal and vertical lines to separate columns or rows of data,
create boxes or borders around your text (see Note #1), even create simple
illustrations. You can draw with a single or double rule, or you can specify
any other character as your line drawing character. Unlike most
commands in this chapter, the BOX command is an immediate command;
it is not embedded in text as a command marker.

There are several rules that you need to follow when you are in line
drawing mode:
• Use a monospaced font (see Note #1).
• End every line with a hard return.
• Put extra space around your text to allow for the lines to be
inserted—otherwise, the line drawing characters will overwrite the
text.
• Be sure your printer supports the line drawing characters.

Also keep in mind that you cannot enter text while you are in line drawing
mode, although you can erase characters by overwriting them with the
line drawing character or with a space.

Action Drawing a Border

Let's say you have just written a poem and you want to draw a border
around it.
1. Put a carriage return at the end of each line.
2. Be sure there is enough space around your text to insert the border.
3. Move the cursor to the point where you want the upper left comer of
the border.
4. Type: [Fgbox0
Result: You are now in line drawing mode. The only active keys are the
arrow keys, number keys 1-6, and fee].

4-68
(confd) BOX

5. Select your response.

Esc Return to text mode.

1, ! Draw a single rule when an arrow key is pressed.
2, ! I Draw a double rule when an arrow key is pressed.

3, * Draw with the special character selected in 6. (The default is

an *.)

4, Move Move the cursor in the direction of the arrow without

drawing or deleting text.

5, Del Delete the character under the cursor when the arrow key is
pressed. (The character is actually replaced by a space.)

6, New Select a new line drawing character to be used with option

3.

6. For this example, let's use a single rule, option 1.

Type: 1

7. Press the right arrow key until you reach the point where you want the
upper right corner of the border.

8. Press the down arrow key until you reach the point where you want
the lower right comer of the border.

Result: XyWrite automatically creates the comer when you change

cursor direction.

9. Use the left and up arrow keys to complete the border.

Result: Your poem now has a single line border around it.

10. Press fEscI to return to text mode.

Result: You can now enter text in your document. You can also delete
and add line drawing characters in the border you created.

NOTE #1 Monospaced Fonts. You can only use the line drawing function with
monospaced fonts (e.g., Courier, Pica, Elite). If you use a proportionally
spaced font, the lines will be skewed when you print the document.

4-69
 NOTES

4-70
 Headers and Footers

Intro The term running header refers to text that appears at the top of a page and
repeats on successive pages. Similarly, running footer refers to text that
repeats at the bottom of pages. You can create headers and footers that:

• Number your pages for you

• Title your pages repeatedly on each page

Contents rage section Command

Running Header & Footer

Running Header, All Pages RH
Running Header, Even Pages RHE
Running Header, Odd Pages RHO
Running Footer, All Pages RF
Running Footer, Even Pages RFE
Running Footer, Odd Pages RFO

4-71
Running Header & Footer RH,RF

FORMAT ESEJRH Running Header, All Pages

BOTH RHE Even Pages
ESZJRHO Odd Pages
RWRF Running Footer, All Pages
ESflRFE Even Pages
ESDRFO Odd Pages
MENUS GE3 Header/Footer

Purpose The RH (Running Header) command inserts at the top of every page a
block of text that you specify. Similarly, the RF (Running Footer)
command inserts text at the bottom of every page. As text you can include
chapter title, page number, date, time, even a graphic. (XyWrite can
automatically update the date and time.)
You specify the running text once and it automatically repeats page after
page. You can start the text on any page and change or remove it on any
successive page.
To have the same text on every page you would use the commands RH or
RF. In order to alternate text on odd and even pages, you use pairs of
commands: both RHE and RHO or RFE and RFO.

Action Inserting a Running Header or Footer

Running Headers and Running Footers are both inserted the same way.
As an example, we will enter the same Running Header for all pages —
the text includes a chapter title and page number:
1. Move the cursor to the beginning of the page where you want the
Running Header to start, ahead of all text and spaces. (See Notes #3
and #4.)
2. Type: [FslrhCT
Result: A window opens in the middle of the screen.
3. Enter any formatting commands that you want for the Running
Header. These formatting commands will not affect the body of the
document. For example, to print the running header in Times Roman:
Type: [F5]uf timesCT
4. Now enter the Running Header text — for example, the chapter title
and page number:
Type: Chapter 1 (without pressing 0)

Tab, space, or leader over to near the right margin and then type in the
page number command (PN):
Type: [FslpnCT
4-72
(confd) RH, RF

5. Enter a carriage return to end the line.

6. Enter a carriage return for each blank line you want between the text of
the Running Header and the text of the document. Let's say you want
two blank lines:
Type: 0 EO

7. Close the window.

Press: [Shift] [Fi]
Result: "Chapter 1" and the page number are printed on the same line,
followed by two blank lines, at the top of this page and all succeeding
pages.

NOTE #1 Other Page Number Formats. The PN command alone puts in normal
page numbers, starting at 1,2, etc. But XyWrite can start at any number
and create many formats. (See the "Numbering" section later in this
chapter.)

NOTE #2 Embedded Commands. If you are using the RH (or RF) command to
specify the same running text on all pages, the expanded view appears as
RHA (or RFA). If you edit while in the expanded view, never omit the
third letter of the command — XyWrite understands «RHA» and «RFA»,
but «RH» or «RF» will generate an error.

NOTE #3 Where Running Headers Take Effect The Running Header (RH)
command takes effect on the current page only if it is on the first line of
that page, ahead of any text, returns, or spaces. (It can be preceded by
other embedded commands.) If the command is anywhere else on the
page, it will take effect at the top of the next and subsequent pages.

There may be times that you want to define a running header at the top of
the document so that all the initial formatting commands are together, but
you don't want the header to print until page 2. The IC command allows
you to do that; when inserted before an RH command, IC has the same
effect as a text character, forcing the running header to start printing on
the next page. The format of the IC command is:
IC

NOTE #4 Where Running Footers Take Effect. The Running Footer (RF) command
takes effect on the current page only if it is on the first line of that page,
ahead of any text, returns, or spaces. (It can be preceded by other
embedded commands.) If the command is anywhere else on the page, it
will take effect at the bottom of the next and subsequent pages.
4-73
RH, RF (confd)

NOTE #5 Preventing an Extra Blank Page with a Running Header From Being
Printed. Symptom: At the end of your document your printer prints an
extra page with only a running header or footer (and no other text) on it.
Cause: You are probably ending your document with extra carriage
returns which are forcing a new page, or with a PG (Page Break)
command followed by more than one carriage return. Remedy: Remove
the last PG command and any unnecessary carriage returns from the end
of the file. You can also turn on the page-line indicator (with [F8p to
preview the page numbers.

NOTE #6 Counters in the Header/Footer. XyWrite has an automatic numbering

capability (called a counter), which is described later in this chapter. You
can insert the number currently stored in a counter into the text of a
Running Header or Footer without increasing the value of the counter.
See "Counter Command."

NOTE #7 Entering a Short Header or Footer. You can type in a short, unformatted
header by typing the text on the command line after the command. This is
a shortcut for the method shown under Action. For example:
Type: [fs]rh This is a running header^]

NOTE #8 Borders. You can put a border around the running header or footer by
embedding the BO command inside the RH or RF command. Refer to
'Thawing a Border" for information about the BO command.

NOTE #9 Editing Headers and Footers. You can edit the text of headers and footers
by switching to expanded view ([Ctrl] [fs]) or by moving the cursor to the
embedded command marker and pressing [Fii] (or [AftllFil).

You cannot edit headers or footers in graphic view.

NOTE #10 Previewing Headers and Footers. Running headers and footers are
visible in expanded and graphic views. You can also view the footnotes
with PRINTS. Graphic view and PRINTS show the headers/footers
positioned properly on each page.

NOTE #11 Canceling a Running Header or Footer. To cancel a running header

before the end of the document, issue an empty RH or RF command.

ALSO SEE Page Format To see how the Running Header and Footer interact with
other page format commands such as BT (Bottom Margin) and FN
(Footnotes), refer to the section "Page Length Procedures."

4-74
 Importing Files

Intro One of the more powerful features of XyWrite is its ability to import files
from other software programs. Your final documents can include
graphics, spreadsheets, database records, even text generated on other
word processor programs. XyWrite performs the necessary file
conversions, and reformats your document to accommodate the imported
information.

Contents page Section Command

4-76 Import Graphic

4-82 Including Printer-Ready Files
4-84 Linking Text
4-90 Updating Linked Text UPDATETX

4-75
Import Graphic IG

FORMAT ESZIIG filenamefTY=fmtfCR=XxY WxD,SC=XxY,DE=d,IM=type,RV=n

filename is the name of the file you want included.
TY=FMT is the type of format (PCL, PCX, TIFF) used to create filename. If
the format is included as the filename's extension, you can omit this
argument.
CR=XxY WxD (optional) is the cropped size of the graphic.
SC=XxY (optional) is the scaling factor that lets you reduce and enlarge
the graphic.
DE=d (optional) is the depth of the graphic (see Note #5).
IM=type (optional) is the image type, either "L" for line art or "G" for gray
tone (or textured) art. The default is L.
RV=n (optional) lets you reverse the color imaging scheme of the graphic
from black on white to white on black or vice versa. 0 uses the graphic's
original color scheme; 1 reverses it. The default is 0.
menu ejesiesh

PURPOSE The IG (Import Graphic) command allows you to merge graphics from
many different sources into your document. You can also use the IG
command to crop or scale a graphic so that it better fits into your page
layout.

When you import a graphic, XyWrite doesn't merge the contents of the
graphic file into your document. Instead, it saves the filename and
instructions for how you want to modify it in the embedded command.
When you print or switch to graphic view, the data from the imported file
is merged in memory with the data from the XyWrite file.

Compatible graphic formats are:

• PCL (Printer Control Language) — generated by Freelance and Gem
among others.
• TIFF (Tagged Image File Format) — generated by HP Graphics
Gallery, SlideWrite Plus, and others.
• PCX (PC Paintbrush Format) — generated by PC Paintbrush,
PicturePak, HP Scanning Gallery, etc.

In addition, you can use the XyWrite menus to convert from other formats
into TIFF. (See Note #1.)
XyWrite provides several sample graphic files that you can use to simply
learn about the IG command or to incorporate into your finished
documents. By default, the sample graphic files are stored in the
\XY4\PICTURES directory.

4-76
(conCd) IG

ACTION Importing a Graphic

To import a graphic named DOG.TIF:
1. Move the cursor to where you want the graphic to appear (see Note
#2).
2. Issue the IG command. It is not necessary to include the TY argument
because the file's extension specifies the type.
Type: [F5]ig dog.tifGS
Result: An embedded command marker appears at the cursor position.
XyWrite reformats the document to accommodate the vertical space
required by DOG.TIF. If you add or delete text before the marker, the
position of DOG.TIF changes; if you want to anchor it to a fixed
position on the page, include the IG command inside an FA (Frame
Area) command (see Note #2).
3. (Optional) Switch to graphic view to see the imported graphic.

ACTION Scaling the Graphic

By default, XyWrite reproduces the graphic at full size, or 100%. However,
you can enlarge or reduce the size of the graphic when you import it. For
example, suppose you want to enlarge the graphic to 125% of its original
size.
1. Move the cursor to where you want the graphic to appear.
2. Issue the IG command.
Type: |F5]ig dog.tif,sc=125x1250
Result: XyWrite reformats the document to accommodate the vertical
space required by DOG.TIF. When you print the document or switch
to graphic view, XyWrite scales the image to 125% of its original size.
(See Note #3.)

ACTION Cropping the Graphic

By default, XyWrite incorporates the entire image area of the graphic into
your document. However, you can eliminate portions of the graphic by
specifying crop size in the CR argument (see Note #4). For example:
1. Move the cursor to where you want the graphic to appear.
2. Issue the IG command.
Type: [F5]ig dog.tif,cr=.375inx.375in 1.25inx1.25in0
Result: XyWrite reformats the document to accommodate the vertical
space required by DOG.TIF. When you print the document or switch
to graphic view, XyWrite crops the image to eliminate everything
outside the cropped area.

4-77
IG (cant'd)

4-78
(cont'd) IG

NOTE #1 Other Graphic Formats. You can use XyWrite's menus to convert a
graphic file from other graphic formats into TIFF. Once it is in TIFF, you
can import it with the IG command. The formats you can convert are:
CGM (Computer Graphics Metafile) MSP (Microsoft Paint)
CUT (Dr. Halo) PGL (HP Plotters)
DXF (Auto CAD) PIC (Lotus 1-2-3)
GCA (GOCA) SBP (IBM Storyboard)
ICA (IOCA) WMF (Windows Metafile)
IMG (GEM Paint) WPG (WordPerfect Graphics)
This conversion cannot be performed from the command line.
NOTE #2 Using IG with the FA (Framed Area) Command. You can nest the IG
command inside an FA command. This approach has several advantages:
(1) you can define a specific page placement for the graphic; (2) you can
put a border around it; and (3) you can include a caption or title. Refer to
the description of the FA command for more information.
NOTE #3 Scaling a Graphic. You can specify different percentages for the horizon­
tal and vertical scaling; when you do, the shape of the graphic changes.
NOTE #4 Cropping a Graphic. The format of the cropping argument is:
CR=XxY WxD
Crop points are based on the original size of the graphic; scaling is
applied after cropping. The first set of values (XxY) defines the upper left
corner of the image area you want to incorporate. To determine these
values, measure from the upper left comer of the entire graphic to the
upper left corner of the part of the graphic you want to use. For example:

4-79
IG (cont'd)

In this example, 0x0 defines the upper left comer of the entire graphic, and
.375inx.375in defines the starting point of the cropped image.

The second set of values in the CR argument defines the size of the image
area you want to incorporate. You determine these values by measuring
the width and height of the desired image area, starting at the XxY
coordinates you established for the upper left corner. For example:

0 in. X 0 in. \ y-------- .375 in. X .375 in.

5
/
. •_............. ■
■ 'A

• t '*

<
• ■
' ** . - -y >

C'
>
/ x z* ••• -■

\ /
V 1.25 in. X 1.25 in.

\ \

In this example, 0x0 and .375inx.375in are as explained above, while

1.25inx1.25in defines the lower right comer of the cropped image area.
Remember, this value is relative to the upper left corner of the cropped
area, not the upper left comer of the entire image. (If you are including the
entire right side of a graphic, you don't have to be too precise about the
last set of measurements; just be sure they are large enough to encompass
the entire image.)

NOTE #5 Printing Text over the Graphic. If you specify a DE (Depth) of 0, XyWrite
prints text over the graphic. If you use this option to create a background
for text, the graphic will not appear in graphic view.

4-80
(confd) IG

NOTE #6 Determining Image Borders. To determine crop points, you need to

know where the edges of the image are. If the image is irregular, or if you
aren't sure how much margin was added by the graphics program, you
can print out a reversed copy of the graphic (using the RV argument). The
background will print in black, so you can see the image's edges clearly.

NOTE #7 File Location. When you include a graphic file, it is not actually saved in
your document—only its filename is saved. The graphic file must be
accessible when displaying or printing the file. XyWrite first looks for the
graphic file in the current directory, then in the directory of the parent file
(the file that contains the IG command), and finally in the directory
specified in GP (Graphics Path) default setting in SETTINGS.DFL.

If your graphic files are located in several different directories, it is a good

idea to include the path with the filename when you issue the IG
command. For example:

Type: [F5]ig c:\docs\dog.tit0

NOTE #8 Fast Display. If you do not want the graphic to display when you are in
graphic view, you can do a "fast call" by adding the /F switch to the
CALL command. The format is:

ESUcall/f filename

This option will save you time if you are working in graphic view. Instead
of the graphic, XyWrite displays the name of the graphic file, and shows
the space reserved for it.

NOTE #9 Original Graphic File. XyWrite does not modify the original graphic file;
instead it applies the modifications you request to a copy of the file in
memory.

NOTE #10 Bi-Level Images. Imported images must be bi-level (i.e., 2-color like black
and white); multiple levels of gray are not supported.

NOTE #11 Printer-Ready Files. You can also use the IG command to import a
printer-ready file. To use this option, specify PRF as the file type. For
example:
Type: [F5]ig c:\docs\adv.ps,ty=prf,de=4in(3
When you specify the PRF file type, the IG command acts like the IN
(Include) command. Refer to the description of the IN command on the
next page for more information.

4-81
Including Printer-Ready Files IN

FORMAT ESZJIN filenamedepth

filename is the name of the file you want included.
depth is the vertical space required by filename
MENU Not a menu option.

Purpose The IN (Include) command allows you to have the contents of a printer­
ready file incorporated into your document when you send it to the
printer. (A printer-ready file is a file that can be output directly to the
printer from DOS.) Many programs, including XyWrite, allow you to
create printer-ready files.
For XyWrite to maintain the proper page count, you must specify the
amount of vertical space required by the file you are including (see Note
#1).
Files imported with the IN command cannot be viewed on screen, even in
graphic view. They are merged with your XyWrite file during printing
only.

Action Including a File

To incorporate a printer-ready file into a XyWrite file for printing:
1. Create the printer-ready file.
2. Call your XyWrite text file.
3. Move the cursor to the point where you want the printer-ready file to
be inserted.
4. Issue the IN command with the name of the printer-ready file created
in Step 1 and the number of inches in that file. As an example, we'll use
the name ADV.PS.
Type: [F5]in adv.ps,2[3
Result: An embedded command marker appears in your file, indicating
the point where ADV.PS will be inserted when you print your
document. The page depth indicator in the header reflects the 2 inches
reserved for ADV.PS.

NOTE Graphic View. As mentioned above, the files you are including are not
displayed. However, in graphic view, XyWrite displays the name of the
file being included and a box that shows the space being reserved for it.

4-82
(confd) IN

NOTE #1 Calculating Depth. When you are calculating the depth of the file you are
including in your document, you must be sure to take into consideration
all commands within the file being included that will have an impact on
that depth.
To measure the depth, create a simple document that contains a line of
text, the IN command for the printer-ready file you want to measure, and
another line of text. Output that document and use the lines of text as
markers to determine how much space you need to specify in the IN
command.

NOTE #2 File Availability. When you include a printer-ready file, it is not actually
saved in your document—only its filename is saved. The printer-ready file
must be accessible when you display or print the file. XyWrite looks for it
first in the specified directory (if any) and then in the current directory.

NOTE #3 Printer Compatibility. When you create the printer-ready version of the
file you want to include in your XyWrite document, be sure you are
preparing it for output to the same printer you will be using for your
XyWrite document.

NOTE #4 ASCII Files. If the file you want to include in your XyWrite document is
an ASCII file, you may want to use the MERGE command to copy the
contents of that file into your XyWrite document. Choose the method that
best suits your needs.

NOTE #5 Printer Settings. It is possible that your printer-ready file could change a
printer setting without XyWrite knowing about it. In those cases, you may
have to reset the printer to its original state. For example, if your printer­
ready file switches to expanded (wide) character mode for a graph and
does not switch back to normal character mode, you will have to insert an
MD (Mode) command after the IN command. If your printer prints a
graphic and then returns to the point where it started, you need to embed
an EL (Extra Leading) command in your XyWrite file. (In the latter case,
specify a depth of 0 in the IN command.)

NOTE #6 File-End Markers. Files that contain a file-end marker are not printer­
ready.

NOTE #7 Printer-Ready Graphics. Some graphic programs embed form feed

characters when they create printer-ready files. You need to use a DOS
utility to remove these form-feed characters before including them in your
XyWrite file.

4-83
Linking Text LINKTX, LT, IE

FORMAT ROTHLINKTX/sw d:\path\filename, format /switch/switch

jsw is one or more of the following command switches:
/RL identifies filename as an RFT:DCA file. (When using this switch, do
not specify format.)
/XY identifies filename as a XyWrite file. (When using this switch, do
not specify format.)
/AC identifies filename as a text file that was created in a code page
other than the one DOS is using. This switch is used with the NCP2X
format.
/NL turns off the links to filename.
\path is the location of the file you want to link.
filename is the name of the file you want to link.
format is the identifier for the program used to create the file (see Note #1).
/switch is one or more of the following format switches:
/V specifies the version number of the program used to create the file
(see Note #1).
/R specifies the range of cells you want to link from a spreadsheet file
(see Note #2).
/NR specifies the named range of cells you want to link from a Lotus
1-2-3 spreadsheet (see Note #2).
/X specifies the records you want to extract from a database file (see
Note #3).
/C specifies the name of the command file that contains your
instructions (see Note #4).
MENUS

PURPOSE The LINKTX command filters and imports text that is in other file formats
into a XyWrite file. Supported formats include Lotus 1-2-3, dBase III,
Excel, and many word processor formats. (For a list of supported formats,
see Note #1.) In addition, the LINKTX command establishes a link to the
source file, so that you can easily update your XyWrite file if the source
file changes. (If you do not want this link established, use the /NL
switch.)

When you issue the LINKTX command, XyWrite converts the file you are
linking into a XyWrite-compatible temporary file. XyWrite then performs
the following operations:
• Saves the current formatting information (of the displayed XyWrite
file) in a style named TXLNK.

4-84
(confd) LINKTX, LT, IE

• Merges the temporary file into the displayed file at the current cursor
location. The information from the temporary file is enclosed between
two embedded commands: «LrTd:\path\filname,format /switch», which
marks the beginning of the linked text; and «IE», which marks the end
of the linked text.
• Inserts a «USTXLNK» command to restore the formatting in effect
before you linked.
• Deletes the temporary file.

Once text has been imported, you can edit it just like any other text. If the
source file changes, you can easily replace the linked text in the XyWrite
file with the UPDATETX command.

Action Linking a Database File

To use the LINKTX command to import a dBase III file, use the following
procedure:
1. Place the cursor where you want the imported text to appear.
2. Issue the LINKTX command. For example:
Type: [Fsjlinktx c:\db\ordent1 .dbf,w4w770f /vO0
Result: The information in ORDENT1.DBF is converted from dBase III
format into XyWrite format and imported into the current file. You can
extract selected records from a database file by using the /X switch (see
Note #3).

NOTE #1 Supported Formats. The formats currently supported are listed below,
with their identifier:
Format Identifier
ASCII NCP2X
(native code page)
XyWrite III W4W17F / VO
XyWrite III Plus W4W17F/V1
Signature W4W17F /V2
WordPerfect 4.1 W4W06F /VO
WordPerfect 4.2 W4W06F /VI
WordPerfect 5.0 W4W07F /VO
WordPerfect 5.1 W4W07F /VI
WordPerfect for Windows W4W07F /VI
Microsoft Word 3.0,3.1 W4W05F /VO
Microsoft Word 4.0 W4W05F /VI
Microsoft Word 5.0,5.5 W4W05F /V2
4-85
LINKTX, LT, IE (corn'd)

Word for Windows 1.0 W4W44F /V0

Word for Windows 2.0 W4W44F /VI
WordStar 3.30,3.31 W4W04F /V0
WordStar 3.45 W4WO4F /VI
WordStar 4.00 W4W04F /V2
WordStar 5.00 W4W04F /V3
WordStar 5.50 W4W04F /V4
WordStar 6.00 W4W04F /V5
WordStar 7.00 W4W04F /V6
Ami Professional 1.1,1.2 W4W33F /V0
Ami Professional 2.0 W4W33F /VI
MultiMate 3.3 W4W10F/V0
MultiMate Advantage W4W10F /VI
MultiMate Advantage II W4W10F /V2
MultiMate 4 W4W10F/V3
Final Form Text W4W32F /V0
GSANavy DIF W4W18F /V0
Q&A Write 1.02 W4W23F /V0
Microsoft Rich Text W4W19F /V0
Excel 2.1,3.1 W4W21F /V0 (with tabs)
Excel 2.1,3.0 W4W21F /VOS (with spaces)
Lotus 1-2-3 1A W4W20F /V0 (with tabs, PC char, set)
Lotus 1-2-3 1A W4W20F /VOS (with spaces, PC char, set)
Lotus 1-2-3 2.0 W4W20F /V0 (with tabs, PC char, set)
Lotus 1-2-3 2.0,3.0 W4W20F /VOS (with spaces, PC char, set)
Lotus 1-2-3 2.0,3.0 W4W20F /VI (with tabs, LICS char, set)
Lotus 1-2-3 2.0,3.0 W4W20F /VIS (with spaces, LICS char, set)
Lotus 1-2-3 2.0,3.0 W4W20F /VIC (with columns, LICS char,
set)
(For more information about Lotus 1-2-3 conversions, see Note #5.)
dBase in, 111+ W4W770F /V0
dBase IV W4W770F /V0

NOTE #2 Linking Part of a Spreadsheet By default, LINKTX converts the entire

spreadsheet you specify. If you want to extract only certain cells, you can
add the /R (Range) switch to the command. The /R switch lets you define
the range of cells you want to extract; you use letters to define the column
and numbers to define the row. For example, the command:
[fs] linktx c:\ss\calendar.wfw20f /vO Zrc2..f6CT

4-86
(confd) LINKTX, LT, IE

tells LINKTX to link the cells between column C, row 2 and column F, row
6 from the spreadsheet file CALENDAR into the currently displayed file.

The /NR switch lets you use use Lotus 1-2-3's range naming feature. For
example, if you have named a range in your spreadsheet MYRANGE, you
can import only that range with the following command:
[fsJ li nktx c:\ss\calendar.wfw20f /vO /nrmyrangeH
The /NR switch does not apply to Excel spreadsheets.

NOTE #3 Linking Part of a Database. By default, LINKTX converts the entire

database file you specify. If you want to extract only certain records, you
can add the /X (Extract) switch to the command. /X lets you define the
criteria you want a record to meet before it is converted and merged into
the XyWrite file.
The /X switch, which you append to the end of the LINKTX command,
has the following form:
"/Xfield operator variable
field is the field number (specified as F#) or field name.
operator defines the condition you want met. You can select from the
following:
= field equals variable
> field is greater than variable
< field is less than variable
>= field is greater than or equal to variable
<= field is less than or equal to variable
<> field is not identical to variable
variable is what you are comparing field to.
Examples:
"/xstate = AZ" Extract records that have a STATE field
equal to AZ
7xzip >= 85000" Extract records that have a ZIP field
equal to or greater than 85000
You can also test for more than one condition by using the AND (&) and
OR (I) operators. For example:
7XSTATE = AZ & ZIP >= 85000 & ZIP < 86000"
Because the command line only accepts 78 characters, you may need to
use a command file if your extraction criteria are lengthy (see Note #4).

4-87
LINKTX, LT, IE (confd)

NOTE #4 Using a Command File. The command line accepts up to 78 characters. If

your database extraction switch exceeds that limit, you can create a
command file to hold the instructions in the /V and /X switches. To create
a command file:

1. Turn off document information.

Type: [F5]default io=O0

2. Open a new file.

3. Type each switch on a line by itself. For example:

/v0<-
/xstate = AZ I STATE = CA I STATE = CO<-

Omit the quotation marks (”) that normally surround the /X statement.

4. Close the file.

5. Turn document information back on.

Type: EUdefault io=1 G3

To use the command file, you use the /C switch with the LINKTX
command. For example, if the command file is named EXTRACT, and the
database file is named DATA.DBF:

Type: [F5] Jinktx c:\db\data.dbf,w4w770F /cextractS

4-88
(confd) LINKTX, LT, IE

NOTE #5 International Lotus 1-2-3 Support When you are converting Lotus 1-2-3
files, the /V switch can contain any of the following optional data:

/Vabcde

a is the version of Lotus (0 for version 1 A, 1 for version 2.0 or 3.0).

b specifies whether tabs, spaces or columns were used (S for spaces; T for
tabs; C for columns)
c is the character set (0 for PC; 1 for LICS — Lotus International Character
Set)
d defines the location of the currency symbol and decimal point
representation
0 = currency symbol precedes the number and periods are used for
decimal points
1 = currency symbol follows the number and periods are used for
decimal points
2 = currency symbol precedes the number and commas are used for
decimal points
3 = currency symbol follows the number and commas are used for
decimal points.
e defines the currency symbol (e.g., £, $, Fr, Yen).

NOTE #6 Location of Filters. Each conversion format has its own .EXE program
that is run by the LINKTX command. Xy Write looks for these programs
in the path defined by the WW default setting. This location is typically
C:\XY4\FILTERS. Refer to "Default Settings" in the Customiztaion Guide
for more information on the WW setting.

4-89
Updating Linked Text UPDATETX

FORMAT UPDATETX d:\path\filename

d:\path is the location of the linked file.
filename is the name of the linked file.
menus EsraiwuiES

PURPOSE The UPDATETX command allows you to replace the information that was
previously imported with the LINKTX command. UPDATETX uses the
arguments embedded in your document by the LINKTX command, so
you don't need to redefine the conversion format, extraction criteria, etc.

Unlike most commands in this chapter, the UPDATETX command is an

immediate command; it is not embedded in text as a command marker.

ACTION Updating Linked Text

To use the UPDATETX command:

1. Call the file that contains the previously linked text that you want to
update.

2. Be sure command markers are visible.

3. Issue the UPDATETX command. For example:

Type: [F5]updatetx c:\db\data.dbfG3

Result: XyWrite searches the displayed file for an LT (Link Text)

command that contains the filename DATA.DBF, deletes the
information between the LT and IE (Import End) commands, and
inserts the data from the current version of DATA.DBF.

4-90
 Numbering

Intro XyWrite's automatic numbering system, described in this section, lets you
number your document in virtually any format found in print.

You can number chapters, paragraphs, sections, lists, outlines, lines, and
pages — all at the same time, if need be. All numbers stay in order, even
when material is added, deleted or switched around.

Automatic numbering can use numbers (1,2,3), upper- or lowercase

roman numerals (I, II, III, i, ii, iii), letters (A, B, C, a, b, c), or even special
numbering sequences that you create in advance.

You also can create references within your text, such as "Refer to Graph 6,
Chapter 3, p. 112." While not precisely numbering, this function is
intimately involved with automatic numbering; that is, you can link it to a
counter or footnote. And it works the same way — as you move the
referenced passage around during editing, XyWrite always keeps the
reference accurate regarding counter or footnote number, page and
chapter.

Even if you do only one kind of numbering, you might read this section
just to discover how powerful the system is.

Like other sections, this one takes you through procedures in the first part,
and then covers commands individually.

Contents z^e Section Command

4-92 Numbered Lists

4-100 Define Counter DC
4-102 Counter Command C
4-104 Line Numbering LN
4-106 Page Number PN,FP
4-108 Set Page Number SP
4-111 Reference Commands REF, REP, REC, LB

4-91
Numbered Lists

PURPOSE DC (Define Counter) and C (Counter) allow you to automatically number

blocks of text — outlines, lists, chapters, sections, and paragraphs.

Numbering is a two-step process. First you use the DC command at the

start of your document to establish the style and starting value of the
numbers that you want to use. Then you use the C counter where you
want to place the automatic numbers. Several examples of how you use
these commands are shown in this section.

A special C counter, CO, is designated for numbering chapters, and two

commands — SR CH (Set Record Chapter) and REC (Reference Chapter)
— give the chapter numbers of text marked with CO counters. Two other
commands, REF (Reference) and REP (Reference Page), also track the
location of reference ("Refer to...") text, which you mark with a C counter
or with LB (Label).

ACTION Making a Simple Numbered List

Let's start with the assumption that you have typed out a list and are
ready to number it. To number the items with uppercase letters enclosed
in parentheses:

1. Move the cursor ahead of the list.

2. Type: [F5]dc 1 =(A) [Z»]

Result: This embeds a command marker in the document and defines

counter 1 to start with the value A enclosed in parentheses.

3. Now insert the Cl counter in the text at each place you want the
automatic numbers to occur.

Type: [F5]c10

Result: Cl takes (A) as its first value, (B) as its second value, etc., as
shown in Example #2 on the example pages. Each of the letters is
generated automatically by XyWrite.

ACTION Automatic Numbering of Paragraphs

As an example, we will choose a style found in many legal and
government reports — numbers separated by periods. Example #4 on the
example page illustrates the point.

1. Move the cursor ahead of the list.

4-92
(confd) Numbered Lists

2. Define the numbering scheme that you want to use:

Type: [F5]dc 1=1.1.10
Result: This defines three-level numbering; each level starts at 1. The 1
on the left side of the equal sign means you begin with Cl.

ACTION Making an Outline

By giving a DC (Define Counter) command for each counter, you can
create an automatically numbered outline with many levels (I, A, 1, a,. ..).
For example, to create a three-level outline:

1. Move the cursor to the top of the document.

2. Type: |F5]dc 1 =l A 10
Result: This defines the top level.

3. Enter each of the following DC commands to ensure that each level of

the outline resets all lower levels.
Type: [F5]dc 2=A 1 0
Type: [F5]dc3=10

4. Now enter the Cl, C2 and C3 counters in the list, indented as shown in
Example #5.

You can simplify the outlining process further by defining a style for each
outline level with the SS (Save Style) command and then applying the
appropriate style with the US (Use Style command). To use styles for the
three outline levels:

1. Repeat steps 1 through 3 of the previous procedure.

2. Enter an SS command for each level. The following examples show

typical outline style commands as they would appear in expanded
view (Refer to the description of the Save Style command for more
information.)
«sslevel1 ,ts=0.8inr,1 in,ip=0,1in;0«c1».0»
«sslevel2,ts=1.2inr,1.4in,ip=0l1.4in^«c2».0»
«sslevel3,ts=1.6inr>1.8in,ip=0,1.8in;0«c3».0»

3. To enter an outline level:

Position the cursor where you want the outline level to appear.
Issue the appropriate US command. For example:
Type: [g]us levell 0
4-93
Numbered Lists (confd)

NUMBERING

PRINTOUT EXPANDED DISPLAY

EXAMPLE #1 (No DC statement)

1 Illinois «C1» Illinois

2 Massachusetts «C1» Massachusetts
3 Washington «C1» Washington
4 California «C1» California
5 Michigan «C1» Michigan
6 Florida «C1» Florida

EXAMPLE #2 «DC1=(A)»

(A) Illinois «C1» Illinois

(B) Massachusetts «C1» Massachusetts
(C) Washington «C1» Washington
(D) California «C1» California
(E) Michigan «C1» Michigan
(F) Florida «C1» Florida

EXAMPLE #3 «DC1=(A-1)»

A Illinois «C1» Illinois

A-l Chicago «C2» Chicago
A-2 Springfield «C2» Springfield
B Massachusetts <cCl» Massachusetts
B-l Boston «C2» Boston
B-2 Cambridge «C2» Cambridge

EXAMPLE #4 «DC1=1-1 -15!>

1 Animals *
<<01 Animals
1.1 Birds «C2» Birds
1.1.1 Albatross «C3» Albatross
1.1.2 Penguin «C3» Penguin
1.2 Mammals «C2» Mammals
1.2.1 Monkey «C3» Monkey
1.2.2 Lion «C3» Lion
2 Plants «C1» Plants
2.1 Trees <«C2» Trees
2.1.1 Oak «C3» Oak
«C3» Magnolia
2.1.2 Magnolia
2.2 Flowers <cC2» Flowers
«C3» Daisy
2.2.1 Daisy «C3» Rose
2.2.2 Rose

4-94
(confd) Numbered Lists

NUMBERING

PRINTOUT EXPANDED DISPLAY

EXAMPLE #5 «DC1=I A 1»
(Property «DC2=A 1»
constructed «DC3=1»
DC command)
I Animals «C1» Animals
A Birds «C2» Birds
1 Albatross «C3» Albatross
2 Penguin «C3» Penguin
B Mammals «C2» Mammals
1 Monkey «C3» Monkey
2 Lion «C3» Lion
II Plants «C1» Plants
A Trees «C2» Trees
1 Oak «C3» Oak
2 Magnolia «C3» Magnolia
B Flowers «C2» Flowers
1 Daisy «C3» Daisy
2 Rose «C3» Rose

EXAMPLE #6 «DC1=I»
(Improperly «DC2-A»
constructed «DC3=1»
DC command)
I Animals «C1» Animals
A Birds «C2» Birds
1 Albatross «C3» Albatross
2 Penguin «C3» Penguin
B Mammals «C2» Mammals
3 Monkey «C3» Monkey
4 Lion «C3» Lion
II Plants «C1» Plants
C Trees «C2» Trees
5 Oak «C3» Oak
6 Magnolia «C3» Magnolia
D Flowers «C2» Flowers
7 Daisy «C3» Daisy
8 Rose «C3» Rose

EXAMPLE #7 «DCO=I»
(Chapter-Page No.)
11-13 «R FA«C 0»-« PN»»

4-95
Numbered Lists (confd)

Refer to the previous two pages of examples. These should give you a
good idea of how to use the DC commands and C counters.

Example #1. This is the simplest numbering scheme. If you give no DC

command, all counters assume the simple numbers 1,2,3,...

Example #2. With DC 1=(A), the Cl counter numbers the items alpha­
betically. The parentheses specified in the DC command appear in the
numbering.

Example #3. With DC 1=A-1, the Cl counters increment with A, B, C, and

the C2 (second-level counters) take on two-part numbers (such as A-l).
Notice the hyphen specified in the DC command appears in the
numbering.

Example #4. With DC 1=1.1.1, the Cl counters are one-part, the C2

counters are two-part and the C3 counters are three-part. Notice how the
DC command specifies the form for the lowest-level number — three
numbers separated by periods. Also notice that a period appears only
when the number to its right appears.

Example #5. The three DC commands are necessary here to produce the
result shown. The first DC command ensures that Cl resets the C2 and C3
levels. The second DC command ensures that C2 resets the C3 level.
(Compare with Example #6.)

Example #6. These DC commands are improperly constructed. Notice

how the numbering is A, B, C, D — the second Cl did not cause C2 to
reset to A. This demonstrates why it is necessary to follow the DC
command in Example #5.

Example #7. Use of the CO counter to create a chapter-page number

(described in Note #1) is shown in this footer. This example assumes a DC
0=1 command has been put at the top of the document, as described in the
following section, and that a CO counter precedes each chapter title.

4-96
(confd) Numbered Lists

ACTION Automatic Numbering of Chapters

Only one C counter, CO, is used for automatic numbering of chapters,
although it also can be used for other numbering. Commands to display
the current chapter number look specifically for CO. To initiate automatic
roman numeral chapter numbers, for example:

1. Move the cursor to the top of the document.

2. Type: [F5]dc 0=10

3. Move the cursor to the beginning of the chapter title.

Type: [F5]cO0

4. Repeat Step 3 for each chapter title.

Result: The first chapter will be numbered I, the second II, and so on.

NOTE #1 Page Numbering in Chapter-Page Format The CO counter enables you to

do automatic page numbering in the popular chapter-page format, as is
done in this manual. If you wanted to combine roman numeral chapter
numbers (shown above) with page numbers, you would first define the CO
counter, then create a running header or footer (see "Inserting a Running
Header or Footer" earlier in this chapter). In place of the PN (Page
Number) command in a header or footer, do the following:

1. Type: [F5]cO0

2. Enter a hard hyphen.

Type: 3 (on the numeric keypad)

3. Type: [F5]pn0

Result: Your finished document will contain page numbers that look
something like this: 11-43. (A counter in a header or footer will not throw
off the count. It merely reads the current value of the counter in text.)

NOTE #2 Chapter Numbering in More than One File. Chapter numbering works
even if your chapters are in several files. When you link files for chain
printing with PRINT @ (or for display with PRINTS @), chapters are
numbered consecutively — as if they all were in one file. (See Chapter 2
for more on PRINT @ and PRINTS @.)
Using the example from Note #1, to number chapters consecutively in a
set of files:
1. Put DC 0=1 only in the first chapter file displayed or chain printed.
4-97
Numbered Lists (confd)

2. When you create the parent file containing filenames to be displayed or

printed, be sure to list them as a set; that is, without a S between the
filenames. In this form, they are treated as one document.

NOTE #3 Counter Format for Chain Files. All counters continue through a chained
set of files, unless they are reset with a DC command in one of the files.
But if you work with an individual file without DC commands in it, all its
counters take on the 1,2,3 format.
To solve this, you can put a modified DC command in each file for each
counter — one that will show the desired format, yet increment properly
in a chain file. Simply place a question mark (?) before the DC format in
all but the first file. (The means the final value is currently unknown.)
For example, we've already put the DC 0=1 in the first of our chain files to
count chapters in roman numerals (see Note #1). Now, at subsequent
chapter titles,
Type: [F5]dc 0=?l [Z>1
Result: Subsequent files, displayed separately, will increment starting at
roman numeral one (I); when chain printed, they will be consecutively
numbered: I, II, III, IV, and so on.

NOTE #4 Chapter-Page Numbering in the Index. XyWrite provides a command,

SR CH, that captures in your index the chapter-page number format of
your document. It is covered in "Table of Contents & Index," Chapter 5.
NOTE #5 Default Counter Definitions. If you leave a counter undefined, it
defaults to a starting number of 1.
NOTE #6 Count Sequence for Letters. Letters increment from A through Z. After Z
comes AA, BB, and CC through ZZ. The sequence continues with AAA,
BBB, CCC, etc. If you prefer to have the second series print as AA, AB,
AC, etc., put the setting AZ=1 in your default file. (The default is AZ=0.)
The same patterns hold for lowercase letters.
NOTE #7 Range of Roman Numerals. The sequence of roman numerals starts with
I (the value 1) and goes to 64,000.
NOTE #8 Initial Values for Letters. The initial value of any letter definition is the
letter you specify. However, if that letter can also mean a roman numeral
then it is taken as a roman numeral. Letters used as roman numerals are I,
V, X, L, C, D and M.
If you want to start a list with the letter L (rather than the roman numeral
fifty, which is also L), then you precede the letter with a double quote
mark:
[F5jdc 1=”LCT

4-98
(confd) Numbered Lists

NOTE #9 Leading Zeros. You can define counters to have leading zeros which will
print out. For example, the command [F5]dc 1=.01 CT produces numbers .01,
.02, etc. The command [F5]dc 1 =.001 CT produces numbers .001 to .010 to .100,
etc.
NOTE #10 Numbering Within Numbered Sections. You may want to run an
independent numbered list within a section that is numbered — say, a
numbered outline within a section which is already numbered. There are
15 counters, starting with 0 and ending with 14. If you use the lower
counters, say 0 through 7, for your automatic chapter and section
numbering, you can use counters 8 through 14 for numbering within a
section.
NOTE #11 Punctuation. Punctuation you specify in the DC command does not
appear at the end of the numbers (except as noted below) — it appears
only between numbers. In Example #4, if you wanted a period to follow
the numbers on both of the Cl lines (such as 1. and 2.), you would insert
them manually after the Cl markers, or use styles as described in the
procedure "Making an Outline."
Every rule has an exception. Four characters are permitted to be printed
immediately after a number: The closing parenthesis ')', square bracket']'/
curly brace'}' and angle bracket This lets you make definitions that
include numbers or letters in parentheses.
Any punctuation can appear ahead of the first number (nl). Example #2
demonstrates an open parenthesis being used in the DC command ahead
of the A. You are not limited to only one character of punctuation
between nl and n2 — there is no limit.

NOTT #12 Unnumbered Counters. You can set up an unnumbered counter which
will reset higher numbered counters. Simply insert an exclamation point
in the command string at the point you want unnumbered entries. For
example, the commands:
[F5]dc 1=1 ! 1 CT
[F5]dc 2=! 1 CT
[F5]dc 3=1 CT
produce numbered entries for Cl and C3 counters, but unnumbered
entries for C2 counters.

NOTE #13 Resetting Counters. You can reset a counter and its subordinates to the
lowest value for the numbering style in effect (e.g., A or 1) by issuing the
DC command with just the counter number (for example, [F5|dc 1).

NOTE #14 Creating References. The "Reference Commands" section which follows
describes how to set up references.

4-99
Define Counter DC

FORMAT rW!DC #=n

RG71DC #=h!.h2. .. nl5
# is the level you are defining (0-14).
n determines the style and starting value for the counter.
nl determines the style and starting value for the first level (#) of a nested
numbering system.
n2 determines the style and starting value for the second level (# + 1) of a
nested numbering system.
...and so on up to the last counter used (15 levels max).
. (period) represents any punctuation (one or more characters) you want to
appear between the numbers.
MENUS Ert | Numbered LisTj [33, BED EBES

PURPOSE UC (Define Counter) and C (Counter) allow you to automatically number

blocks of text — chapters, paragraphs, sections, lists, and outlines. Using
counters is a two-step process. First you use the DC command at the start
of your document to establish the style of the numbers that you want to
use. Then you use the C counter where you want to place the automatic
numbers.

ACTION Using the DC Command

Refer to the earlier section "Numbered Lists" for the procedures on how
to use the DC command.

NOTE #1 Defining the Styles for Numbers. You can use DC to define up to 15
levels; you define a style for each level. The five basic styles (with their
typical starting values shown) are:
Numeric 1
Uppercase roman numerals I
Lowercase roman numerals i
Uppercase letters A
Lowercase letters a
A sixth style, which lets you create your own sequence, also is available.
(See Note #3).

4-100
(confd) DC

NOTE #2 A Closer Look. When you're setting up a nested numbering scheme, such
as an outline or sub-paragraphs (i.e., 1.2.2), the values you give with the
DC command (# and nl, n2, n3,...) correspond to the counters as follows:
DC0=nI Defines CO
DC0=nl.n2 Defines CO and Cl
DC 0=nl.n2.n3 Defines CO, Cl, and C2
and so on.
DCl=nl Defines Cl
DCl=nl.n2 Defines Cl and C2
DC I=nl.n2.n3 Defines Cl, C2, and C3
and so on.
DC13=nl Defines Cl3
DC 13=nLn2 Defines C13 and Cl4
No other levels can specified with DC 13.
If any level is left unspecified, it takes on the default value of 1, as the
earlier Example #1 demonstrates.
NOTE #3 Creating Your Own Set of Counters. You can create a totally original
numbering set with XyWrite by entering a Counter String table in the
default file. (This is the same table used for custom footnote labels.) The
table has the following format:
cs:#
string!

string#
# is the number of strings in the table. Then, when you set the number in
the document, use the appropriate number-setting command with an
asterisk or a pound sign. For example:
de 1=
*1 or dc1=#1 (to define a counter)
If you don't want numbers to start with the first symbol in the string, add a
number for how far down to start. For instance, use de 1= *2 (or de 1=#2)
to start with the second string. When it reaches the end of the list,
XyWrite recycles it. If you used an asterisk in the DC command, XyWrite
prints the first string twice, then the second one twice, etc. If you used a
pound sign in the DC command, XyWrite simply starts at the beginning of
the list without doubling the entries.

The strings in the Counter String table can also be used as footnotes or
page numbers. You can have only one Counter String table per default
file.

4-101
Counter Command CO to C14

FORMAT K3ZIC# -
# is the counter number (0-14).
CO is used for chapter numbering.
- (optional) lets you use the current counter value without incrementing
the counter.
MENUS EEt Numbered Lisi Insert Number„ Insert Level.

Purpose The CO through C14 (Counter) commands increment and insert the
current value of the counter into the text.
The DC (Define Counter) command defines a set of counters CO through
C14. Through proper selection, you can do paragraph, section, chapter
and outline numbering as well as the simple numbering of lists.
In its simplest use, numbering a list of things, you can use CO through C14
without giving a DC command. Refer to Example #1 in the previous
section"Numbered Lists."

ACTION Using the Counter Command

Refer to the earlier section "Numbered Lists" for procedures on how to
use the C0-C14 commands.

NOTE #1 Using the Current Count Twice. Sometimes you need to make use of the
same automatic number in more than one place. For instance, you might
want to refer to the section number in the text itself:
Section 3. In Section 3 we discuss ...
Let's say you're numbering sections with counter Cl. To repeat the
section number in the text, use the hyphen (-) option of the C counter
(note the space between the counter number and the hyphen):
Press: [F5]c1 -CT

In expanded view, the line appears:

Section «C1». In Section «C1-» we discuss ...

NOTE #2 Using the Current Count in Headers, Footers and Footnotes. You can
refer to the current count in headers, footers, and footnotes using the
normal C0-C14 commands. They will be printed without incrementing
the automatic numbering in the text.

4-102
(confd) CO to C14

NOTE #3 Chapter Counter. Always use counter CO to do automatic chapter

numbering. CO is the counter referenced by the REC (Reference Chapter)
command, described later in this chapter, and tracked for indexing by the
SR CH (Set Record Chapter) command, described in "Table of Contents &
Index," Chapter 5. If you are not doing chapter numbering, you can use
CO for any other purpose—numbering paragraphs, lists, etc.

4-103
Line Numbering LN

FORMAT ESQ LN mlm2m3...mn (Option 1)

ESQ LN n (Option 2)
ml...mn are the modifiers you can use to define the line numbering style
(see below).
n is either 0 or 1.
MENUS | Line Numbe/in;

PURPOSE The LN (Line Number) command allows you to print the number of each
line of text in the margin. You use the LN command to define the line
numbering specifications and to turn line numbering on and off.

When you define the line numbering specifications, you automatically

activate the numbering. But you can turn line numbering on and off
within a document without redefining the specifications by using Option 2
of the LN command.

Line numbers print in the typeface, size, and mode that were in effect
when you issued the command. You can specify the following options
with the LN command.

Modifier Description
o#e# Offset. How far from the edge of the paper you want the
numbers to print for odd and even pages (where # is the
amount of the offset). You must specify a value for o#. If you
omit the e# modifier, XyWrite uses the value defined for o#.
i# Initial Value. Starting line number (where # is the number). The
default is 1.
d# Divisor. Allows you to print every other line number, every -
fifth number, every tenth number, etc. by specifying a divisor
(#). The default is 1, which means that every number is
printed.
c Continuous Numbers. Count numbers continuously from page
to page. The default is to restart on every page.
b Blank Lines. Do not count blank lines. The default is to number
blank lines. (A blank line is one that contains a carriage return
but no text; it may contain formatting commands.)
h Headers. Include running headers in the count. The default is to
omit running headers from the line count.
f Footers. Include running footers in the count. The default is to
omit running footers from the line count.

4-104
(confd) LN

ACTION Defining Line Numbers

(Option 1) Let's define line numbers that print .5 inch from the edge on odd-
numbered pages and .3 inch from the edge on even-numbered pages.

1. Move the cursor to the start of the first line you want to number.

2. Enter the LN command.

Type: [F5]ln o.5e.3CT
Result: When you print the document, line numbers will automatically
print. By default, the numbers start at 1 on each page, and every line of
text is numbered, including blank lines. Running headers and footers
are not numbered.

ACTION Toggling Line Numbering On and Off

(Option 2) Once you have defined line numbering in a file, you can turn it off and on
without redefining it. To stop line numbering before the end of your file:
Type: [F5]ln OCT
To turn it back on:
Type: [F5]ln 1CT
Result: Line numbering resumes, starting with the next number.

NOTE Line Number Display. XyWrite does not display line numbers on screen
unless you issue a PRINTS (Print to Screen) command.

EXAMPLES Examples of LN Commands. These examples illustrate some of the ways

you can use the LN command.

[F5]ln o.5e.3d10fCT
Numbers print 0.5 inch from the edge on odd pages and 0.3 inch from the
edge on even pages. Only every 10th line number is printed, and running
footers are included in the count.

[F5]ln o.5i5d5£3
The numbers print 0.5 inch from the edge of the paper for both odd and
even pages. The numbers start at 5 and only every 5th line number prints.

4-105
Page Number PN,FP

FORMAT gmpN
ESOfp

MENUS EE31E3EJ3 Number..

Purpose The PN (Page Number) command inserts the page number in the text.
The page number starts at 1 with the first page of a document and
automatically increments for successive pages. You can use SP (Set Page
Number) to change the starting page number and the numbering style
(i.e., i, ii, iii... or a, b, c...).

FP (Final Page) inserts the number of the last page — useful for a 'Tage 5
of 7" format.

To automatically number the pages, insert the PN command in a running

header or footer. The procedure "Inserting a Running Header or Footer"
described earlier in this chapter shows how. When you place PN (or FP)
directly in the text (rather than in a running header or footer), it displays
the current (or final) page number just once, at that point.

ACTION Numbering the Pages

The procedure to insert page numbering in a document is given in
"Inserting a Running Header or Footer/' You can also refer to the
procedure below; just eliminate the second and third parts of step 3.

ACTION Numbering the Pages in "Page ... of..." Format

To insert 'Tage ... of..." style in a header, you must insert an RH (Running
Header) command:

1. Move the cursor to the top of the page where you want the running
header to start.
2. Type: [Fgrhgj]
3. Type: Page Es]pn[7j]
Type: of (include a space before and after "of")
Type: [F5]fpSSS
(The two extra returns separate the RH from the text.)
4. Type: [ShFl EJ (to close the header)
Result: Printed page numbers look like 'Tage 1 of 8," 'Tage 2 of 8" and
so on.

4-106
(confd) PN,FP

NOTE #1 Changing the Starting Number. If you want pages in your document to
start at a number other than 1, use the SP command described on the next
page.

NOTE #2 Determining the Page Number. To tell what the current page number is:
Press: [F8]
Result: The current page number shows at the top of the screen. This
number adjusts for any change of page numbers due to an SP command in
the text.

NOTE #3 Chained Files. XyWrite automatically continues page sequences across a

series of files when you use PRINT @ to do chain printing. However, you
cannot use the FP (Final Page) command across a series of files.

4-107
Set Page Number

FORMAT FTOlSPn
n is the starting page number.
MENUS EE5J EE3

Purpose The SP (Set Page Number) command sets the starting page number and
defines the series as numbers, letters or symbols. You place the SP
command on the page you want to affect. We recommend that you put it
on the first line of the page, ahead of the embedded PN (Page Number)
command.
There are six different styles from which you can choose:
Decimal numbers SP 1
Uppercase roman numerals SP I
Lowercase roman numerals SP i
Uppercase letters SP A
Lowercase letters SP a
Defined string SP *n or SP #n
If you do not specify an SP command, XyWrite uses decimal numbers
starting at 1. If you want to start the sequence with another number, or in
another of the styles shown above, use that value in the command. For
example, the command "SP iii" tells XyWrite to number the pages in
lowercase roman numerals and to start the sequence at "iii."

Action Setting the Starting Page Number

To define the kind of page number and/or the starting page number:
1. Move the cursor to the page you want to affect.
2. Decide what style and what starting point you want to use. Let's use
decimal numbers starting with number 5:
3. Type: gsjsp 50
Result: When printed, this page will be numbered page 5, the next page
will be page 6, and so on. The PN command reflects this change of page
numbering.

4-108
(confd) SP

Action Using Your Own Numbering Strings

You can enter a table in the default file that lists strings you want to use as
page numbers (see Note #2). To use these strings in your document issue
the SP command with an asterisk (*) or a pound sign (#):
1. Move the cursor to the top of the page you want to affect.
2. Enter the SP command with an asterisk or a pound sign:
Type: |F5]sp *10 or [Fslsp #10
Result: XyWrite uses the strings defined in the Counter String table of the
default file as page numbers, starting with the first string on the first page,
the second string on the second page, and so on.
When it reaches the end of the list, XyWrite recycles it. If you used an
asterisk in the SP command, XyWrite prints the first string twice, then the
second one twice, etc. If you used a pound sign in the SP command,
XyWrite starts at the beginning of the list without doubling the entries. (If
there is no Counter String table defined, XyWrite uses: *, ** , etc.)
, ***

NOTE #1 Initial Values for Letters. The initial value of any letter definition is the
letter you specify. However, if that letter can also mean a roman numeral
then it is taken as a roman numeral. Letters used as roman numerals are I,
V, X, L, C, D and M.
If you want to start page numbers with the letter L (rather than the roman
numeral fifty, which is also L), then you precede the letter with a double
quote mark:
[F5]sp "L0

NOTE #2 Entering the Counter String Table. The Counter String Table you put in
the default file defines the strings that can be used as page numbers. (You
can have only one Counter String Table.) See "Define Counter" for a de­
scription of the Counter String Table or refer to "Default Settings" in the
Customization Guide.

NOTE #3 Count Sequence for Letters. Letters increment from A through Z. After Z
comes AA, BB, and CC through ZZ. The sequence continues with AAA,
BBB, CCC, etc. If you prefer to have the second series print as AA, AB,
AC, etc., put the setting AZ=1 in your default file. (The default is AZ=0.)
The same patterns hold for lowercase letters.

4-109
SP (confd)

NOTE #4 Page Numbers in Chained Files. Page numbers continue through a

chained set of files, unless they are reset with an SP command in one of
the files. If you work with an individual file without SP commands in it,
page numbers take on the 1,2,3 format.

If you want an individual file to use a different page number style but still
increment properly in a chain file, you can use a modified SP command.
Simply put a question mark before the SP format in all but the first file.

For example, assume that the first file in the chain contains the command
SP i to label page numbers with lowercase roman numerals. In the
subsequent files, enter the following command:

Type: [F5]sp ?i0

Result: Subsequent files, displayed or printed separately, will have page

numbers starting with "i"; when chain printed, the pages will be
consecutively labeled from file to file.

4-110
REP, REC, REF, LB Reference Commands

FORMAT ES3REP label Reference to Page Number

EM REC label Reference to Chapter Number
faW'll REF label Reference to Counter Number
EE2JLB label Label
label is the name given to identify the reference text.
MENUS EE I Cross-Reference

PURPOSE Suppose you want to write "See Chapter 7, Section 4, The War Years/ p.
361"; but you aren't sure The War Years will stay on page 361 — or will
even stay in Chapter 7. With XyWrite you label the part called The War
Years, then use the REP, REC and REF commands to refer to the label.
You can use these commands to automatically update all references to
page numbers, chapter numbers, paragraph numbers, footnote numbers,
heading numbers, or any other counters CO - C14.
Each procedure for creating references has two parts:
• Part I. Label the Text — The label is a unique name that tags the
passage so you can track its page, chapter, footnote and counter
number.
• Part II. Use the Reference Commands — The REF, REP and REC
commands are placed in your referral statement. They indicate where
the reference text is.
We use the term referral statement to mean any statement such as "See page
6" which refers to labeled text.
We illustrate referencing with the following options, each of which
requires Parts I and II listed above.
• Referring to the Page Number of Any Text
(Option la) You mark the text with an LB (Label) command and use
REP (page) to refer to that text.
• Referring to Chapter & Page Numbers of Any Text
(Option lb) You mark the text with LB, and use REC (chapter) and REP
(page) in the referral statement.
• Referring to a Counter.
(Option 2) You can attach a label to a counter, such as an illustration
number or section number. REF in the referral statement will yield the
current counter number, REP the page number and REC the chapter
number (if chapter counter CO is used).

4-111
REP, REC, REF, LB (confd)

• Referring to a Footnote Number.

(Option 3) You can put the LB command in a footnote. You then put
REF in the referral statement to produce the footnote number, REP its
page number and REC the chapter number (if a chapter counter CO is
used).
Each option is discussed below as an action, divided into Parts I and II.

ACTION Referring to the Page Number of Any Text

(Option la) The simplest reference is to a page; to track it, you put an LB (Label)
command in the text you are referring to and an REP command at the
referral statement ("See page ..."):

PART I Label the Text — Use the LB command.

1. Go to the page which contains the text you're referring to, say page 6.
2. Put the cursor at the beginning of the reference text.
3. Let's say this paragraph you want to refer to pertains to travel, so we'll
use that as a label.
Type: [F5]lb travel[Zi]
Result: The text is now labeled; a superscript "n" and the first four
characters of the label name appear in reverse mode in the text. This label
does not print, nor does it affect line breaks.

PART II Use the Reference Command — Elsewhere in your text, create the referral
statement "See page
1. Move to the page where you want to refer to the text.
2. Type: See page (add a space after "page")
3. Type: [F5] rep travel S
Result: The referral statement includes a marker where the page number
goes.
See page «REPtravel» (Expanded view)
See page ▲ (Draft, formatted, or graphic view)
See page 6 (printed out)

4-112
(confd) REP, REC, REF, LB

ACTION Referring to the Chapter & Page Numbers of any Text

(Option lb) If you are numbering pages with a chapter-page format (as this manual
does), you need referral statements that track the chapter number as well
as page number.

To begin with, you must have a chapter counter (CO) inserted at each
chapter title ("Counter Command" earlier tells how to use the Chapter
Counter).

PART I Label the Text — Use the LB command exactly like Option la.

PART II Use the Reference Commands — Use the REC (chapter) and REP (page)
commands:

1. Move to the page where you want to refer to the text.

2. Type: See page (add a space after "page")

3. Type: [F5] rec travelS (chapter no.)

4. Type: 0 (on numeric keypad) (hard hyphen)

5. Type: [F5]rep travels (page no.)

Result: The referral statement includes markers where the page number
and chapter number go:

See page « RECtravel» -« REPtravel» (Expanded view)

See page (Draft, formatted, or graphic view)
See page 4-16 (printed out)

ACTION Referring to a Counter

(Option 2) Let's say you want to refer the reader to a title "Section D, Five-Year
Plan." You've used counter C2 for the section letter (which may not stay
section "D").

PART I Label the Counter — Add a unique name to the existing counter
command, in this case C2 (rather than using the LB command).

1. Move the cursor to the marker representing the counter command C2.
2. You'll replace the counter command, so delete it:
Press: [Dell

4-113
REP, REC, REF, LB (cant'd)

3. Let's label this text "plan." (Note: The first character of a counter label
cannot be a number.)
Type: [F5]c2 plan[7>]
Result: The text with the counter command would look like:

Section «C2plan». Five-Year Plan (Expanded view)

Section ▲. Five-Year Plan (E>raft, formatted, or graphic view)
Section D. Five-Year Plan (printed out)

PART II Use the Reference Commands — To write a phrase like "See Section D,
Five-Year Plan" elsewhere, with the current section letter, you use REF to
track the labeled counter "C2plan."

1. Move to the page where you want to refer to the text.

2. Type: See Section (add space after section)
3. Type: [fs] ref plan0
4. Finish the statement:
Type: , Five-Year Plan (note the comma)

Result: The referral statement includes a marker where the section letter
goes:

See Section «REFplan», Five-Year Plan (Expanded view)

See Section ▲, Five-Year Plan (Draft, formatted or graphic view)
See Section D, Five-Year Plan (printed out)

Action Referring to a Footnote Number

(Option 3) To refer to a footnote number, such as "Refer to footnote 4," do the
following:

PARTI Label the Footnote — Use an LB command to label the footnote, and REF
to track the labeled footnotes.

1. Place the cursor where you want the footnote number to appear in
your text.
2. Create the footnote with the FN command:
Type: [F5]fnH
3. The first thing in your footnote must be a unique label — for example,
"authors":
Type: [Fsjlb authors£3

4-114
(confd) REP, REC, REF, LB

4. Now write your footnote and close the screen:

Type: Th© great American authors include Thoreau, Twain and
Hemingway.
Type: [ShiftUFTI
Result: A footnote number appears in your text. In expanded view, it
appears like:

«FN1 «LBauthors»The great American authors...»

PART II Use the Reference Commands — You use the same procedure for the
REP, REF, and REC commands. In this case, we will refer to only the
footnote number.

1. Move to the page where you want to refer to the text.

2. Type: Refer to footnote (add space at end)
3. Type: [fs] ref authors CT. (include the period)

Result: The referral statement has a marker where the footnote number
goes. In expanded view, it looks like this:

Refer to footnote «REFauthors».

NOTE #1 Combining Commands. We started this section with the example, "See
Chapter 7, Section 4, 'The War Years/ p. 361." See if you can create this
reference by combining all three commands as described above. (The an­
swer is given in the next paragraph.) In addition to the referral statement,
1) you need a CO counter at chapter titles; and 2) the label itself goes with
the section title, "The War Years" — either with an LB command or inside
a C counter if you're using counters on section titles.

If your label is "war," the referral statement in expanded view should

look like this:

See Chapter «RECwar», Section «REFwar», ‘The War Years,’ p. «REPwar».

NOTE #2 Labeling Existing Counters or Footnotes. The previous examples

inserted labels as you created the counter or footnote commands. You
could simply insert a label within an existing counter or footnote
command by movingthe cursor to the embedded command (A) and
pressing [Fill (or [Ah] |M]). This lets you edit the command quickly, without
switching to expanded view.

4-115
REP, REC, REF, LB (confd)

NOTE #3 Chain Printing. XyWrite allows you to print multiple files as one file with
its chain printing command (see PRINT @ in Chapter 2). When you are
chain printing a series of files, you can use Reference commands to refer to
labeled text that appears in earlier files in the chain. You cannot use the
Reference commands to refer to subsequent files.

NOTE #4 Line Endings. Because the number stored in the Reference commands is
not displayed on the screen, XyWrite must estimate its width in order to
calculate line endings. If the reference number is more than five digits
long, the line containing the reference may extend beyond the right
margin when you print the document. To increase or decrease the space
allotted for reference values, change the FU setting in the default file.
(Refer to "Default Settings" in the Customization Guide for more
information.)

4-116
 Page Length

Intro In this section we have grouped together commands which affect the
length of the printed page. Because these commands interact, we begin
with an overview that describes all of the essential settings.

Contents page Section Command

4-118 Overview
4-123 Form Depth FD
4-124 Top Margin TP
4-125 Bottom Margin BT
4-127 Element Top, Element End ET, EE
4-129 Page Break PG
4-131 Non-Breakable Blocks NB, BB
4-133 Widow and Orphan WD, OP
4-135 Blank Lines BL

4-117
Overview

DEFAULT PAGE LENGTH SETTINGS

o■ ;o
TOP o: :o
MARGIN
o: :: °
o
o: ;o
O' ’Curiouser and curiouser!-1 cried Alice (she •o
o: was so much surprised, that for the moment :o
O' she quite forgot how to speak good English). ’o
o: ’Now I’m opening out like the largest
telescope that ever was! Good-bye feet!’ :o
o; (for when she looked down at her feet, they !O
o> seemed to be almost out of sight, they were ■o
o: getting so far off). ’Oh, my poor little
feet, I wonder who will put on your shoes and :o
o: stockings for you now, dear? I’m sure I !°
TEXT
shan’t be able! I shall be a great deal too !O
AREA
o; far off to trouble myself about you: you
must manage the best way you can -- but I ;o
11 o• must be kind to them,’ thought Alice, "or 1o
inches o: perhaps they won't walk the way I want to go!
Let me see. I’ll give them a new pair of
:o
Si
Oi
boots every Christmas."
!O
o: :o
o- •o
o: :o
o: :o
o. .O
o: :o
BOTTOM °:
o: :°
:o
MARGIN
o; ;o
o• ■0

4-118
(confd) Overview

PURPOSE XyWrite is preset for the simple format shown in the illustration on the
facing page. The default settings allow you to set up a page quickly and
simply for printing. The default settings include:
• 11 -inch sheet of paper
• 1-inch top and bottom margins
• Single-spaced text

ACTION Using the Default Page Length Settings

You don't need to enter any commands to use the default page length
settings. Just type the text of your document and enter the PRINT
command.

The next three pages illustrate the page length settings at your control.
The first two pages compare how a document displays with how it prints
out.

4-119
Overview (confd)

DISPLAY SHOWING PAGE LENGTH COMMANDS

TP Top Margin
RH Running Header
FS Footnote Separator
RF Running Footer
BT Bottom Margin

FN Footnote

▲▲▲▲▲
•Curiouser and curiouser!’El cried Alice (she
was so much surprised, that for the moment
she quite forgot how to speak good English).
"Now I’m opening out like the largest
telescope that ever was! Good-bye feet!
*
(for when she looked down at her feet, they
seemed to be almost out of sight, they were
getting so far off). *0h, my poor little
feet, I wonder who will put on your shoes and
stockings for you now, dear? I'm sure I
shan’t be able! I shall be a great deal too
far off to trouble myself about you: you
must manage the best way you can -- but I
must be kind to them,’ thought Alice, *or
perhaps they won't walk the way I want to go!
Let me see. I’ll give them a new pair of
*
boots every Christmas.

4-120
(confd) Overview

PRINTOUT SHOWING PAGE LENGTH COMMANDS

Chapter 2 Alice in Wonderland

•Curiouser and curiouser!"1 cried Alice (she

was so much surprised, that for the moment
she quite forgot how to 6peak good English).
•Now I’m opening out like the largest
telescope that ever was! Good-bye feet!
*
(for when 6he looked down at her feet, they
seemed to be almost out of sight, they were
getting so far off). *0h, my poor little
feet, I wonder who will put on your shoes and
stockings for you now, dear? I'm sure I
shan't be able! I shall be a great deal too
far off to trouble myself about you: you
must manage the best way you can -- but I
must be kind to them," thought Alice, ‘or
perhaps they won't walk the way I want to go!
Let me see. I'll give them a new pair of
boots every Christmas.’

1 Taken from Alice's Adventurs in

Wonderland, by Lewis Carroll, 1865.

Page 10

4-121
Overview (confd)

PAGE LENGTH SUMMARY

FD — Form Depth. The number of inches in the overall length of the sheet of paper. The
default is set to 11 inches.

TP — Top Margin. The amount of space left blank as a top margin on the page.

BT — Bottom Margin. The amount of space left blank as a bottom margin on the page.

RH — Running Header. Text repeated at the top of each page — can include page number,
date, title, even the time of day. You can make the header the same on all pages, or different on
even (left-hand) and odd (right-hand) pages.

Text Area. The main part of the page, where the body text appears. The size of the text area is
determined by subtracting the top and bottom margins from the form depth.

FS — Footnote Separator. Indicates the characters and blank lines that you want to appear
between the body text and the footnotes. In this case, a row of underlines is used.

FN — Footnote. Footnotes for the page are inserted after the footnote separator. XyWrite will
put the entire footnote on the page, if possible.

Slack. If the text is less than a full page in length, the blank lines appear between the text and
the footnote. (This is the default setting for the BF (Bottom Footnote) command.)

RF — Running Footer. Text repeated at the bottom of each page. Running footers have all the
features of running headers listed above. (Odd or even is optional.) Falls below the text area.

4-122
 FD Form Depth

FORMAT EffijFD n
n is the total number of inches on a sheet of paper.
MENU E0EJE0I

Purpose Form depth is our term for the length of the sheet of paper you print on.
You use the FD (Form Depth) command to establish the total number of
inches on a sheet of paper.

Action Setting the Form Depth

To set the form depth within a document:
1. Move the cursor to the top of the document whose sheet length you
want to set.
2. For example, if you are printing on paper which is 14" long, you would
set the form depth as follows:
Type: [F5]fd 140
Result: The document is now set for a sheet of paper that is 14 inches in
length.

A Matter of Convenience. You may find that the most convenient way to
set the form depth is to set it once for all documents, rather than setting it
separately within each document as shown above. You can set a global
form depth by adding the FD command to SETTINGS.DFL. (The initial
default is 11 inches.)

4-123
Top Margin TP

FORMAT EJSElTP m,n

m is the distance from the edge of the page to the beginning of the running
header.
n is the distance from the edge of the page to the beginning of the body
text.
MENUS

Purpose The TP (Top Margin) command defines the space that XyWrite
automatically inserts between the top of a page and the first line of the
running header and body text.

The first value of the TP command specifies the point where you want the
running header to start; the second value specifies the point where you
want the body text to start. If there is no running header, then XyWrite
ignores the first value of TP. If the running header is too large to fit in the
space between m and n, then XyWrite ignores the second value of TP, and
starts the body text immediately after the running header.

Action Setting the Top Margin

To set the top margins:
1. Move the cursor to the top line of the document, ahead of any text or
spaces. (Only embedded command markers can precede it on the top
line.)
2. Type: fFsltp .5.1.5CT
Result: The running header starts at .5 inch from the top of the page and
the body text starts 1.5 inches from the top of the page. If there is no
running header, the first value of the TP command is ignored, but the
body text still starts 15 inches from the top of the page. If the running
header does not fit in the 1 inch reserved for it (1.5 - .5), then the second
value of the TP command is ignored, and the body text starts immediately
after the running header.

note #1 Default Margin Settings. The defaults are TP UN,UN unless you change
the values in the default file.

NOTE #2 Printable Area. Some printers do not allow you to print on the entire
page, but instead reserve a small margin of white space. The margins
established for your documents must be larger than this reserved space.
Otherwise, XyWrite will automatically reposition your text when it prints.

4-124
BT Bottom Margin

FORMAT ^VflBT foot,nom, min,max

foot is the distance from the bottom of the page to the bottom of the
running footer.
nom is the nominal distance from the bottom of the page to the bottom of
the text area.
min is the minimum distance from the bottom of the page to the bottom of
the text area.
max is the maximum distance from the bottom of the page to the bottom of
the text area.
MENUS EMI Page Mamins..

PURPOSE The BT (Bottom Margin) command sets the ideal length from the bottom
edge of the paper up to the last line of the footnotes (if any). It also moves
the running footer up on the page.

The maximum and minimum values allow the body text to vary in length,
to accommodate non-breakable blocks, widows and orphans. The BT
values have the following meanings:

• BTnom — This is the size of the bottom margin, barring breaks due to
widows, orphans, non-breakable blocks, or forced page breaks.
• BTmin — This is the minimum size of the bottom margin. Only
running footers can appear below this point. A value for BTmin is
necessary for widow control and can be important for placement of
footnotes.
• BTmax — This is the maximum size of the bottom margin. It allows
the text area to be shorter when using orphan control or placing
footnotes.

ACTION Setting the Bottom Margin

To set the bottom margin:

1. Move the cursor to the top line of the document, ahead of any text or
spaces. (Only embedded command markers can precede it on the top
line.)

2. Type: [F5]bt .5,1,.833,1.330

Result: The bottom of the running footer is positioned .5 inch from the
bottom edge of the page. The distance from the bottom edge of the page
to the bottom of the text area ranges from .833 inch to 1.33 inch.

4-125
BT (confd)

NOTE #1 Default Margin Settings. The defaults are BT 1IN,1IN,.75IN,1.25IN

unless you change the values in the default file. Assuming the top margin
is 1 inch, this setting allows for a text area of anywhere between 8.75
inches and 9.25 inches deep.

NOTE #2 Printable Area. Some printers do not allow you to print on the entire
page, but instead reserve a small margin of white space. The bottom
margin must be larger than this reserved space. Otherwise, XyWrite will
automatically reposition your text when it prints.

NOTE #3 Page Length Command. Previous versions of XyWrite used a PL (Page

Length) command to specify the size of the text area. While that
command is still supported, we recommend that you use the BT command
instead of the PL command. If you use both, the most recently issued
command takes precedence.

4-126
ET, EE Element Top, Element End

FORMAT toi'dET m,n or toyfl EE m,n Baseline Alignment (Option 1)

MET +m.+n or toMEE +m,+n Cap Height Alignment (Option 2)
m is the amount of vertical offset that is applied to the top and bottom of
page elements.
n (optional) is the amount of vertical offset between table rows (see Note
#1).____
MENU EHDEB33, EDGE, E3SHE53 (see Note)

Purpose The ET (Element Top) and EE (Element End) commands create a vertical
offset. The offset can be measured from the margin or from the edge of a
page element. The primary function of these commands is to separate text
in a page element (such as a frame, table, or snaked column) from the top
and bottom borders, but they can also be used to separate page elements.

There are two options for establishing the offset:

• Option 1. Baseline Alignment. Measure the offset from the margin (or
edge of the page element) to the bottom of the first line of text. Choose
this option if you are using the same point size throughout your
document, or if you want text of different point sizes to align on the
same baseline.

• Option 2. Cap Height Alignment. Measure the offset from the margin to
the top of a capital letter in the first line of text. You may prefer this
method if you are mixing point sizes and want the text in different
columns to align along the top edge of the text rather than along the
baseline.

The values in the ET and EE commands are applied to every snaked

column and framed area unless they are cancelled or superseded. To apply
ET and EE to a column, see Note #1.

Action Establishing the Vertical Offset

Let's say the document you are preparing contains snaked columns with a
border. In graphic view, you can see that the border abuts the text at the
top and bottom of each column. To insert one blank line between the
border and the text;
1. Move the cursor to the beginning of the file.
2. Enter the ET command.
Type: (F5]et 1li(2]

4-127
EE, ET (confd)

3. Enter the EE command.

Type: fF5]ee 1li[7i)
Result: When you print your document (or display it in graphic view),
there will be one line between the top and bottom borders and the text of
the columns.

NOTE #1 Tables. If you want the vertical offset to apply to a table, issue the EE and
ET commands immediately after the CT (Create Table) command, and
include both values (m and n) for the commands. If you omit the second
value, XyWrite applies the vertical offsets only to the top of the first row
and the bottom of the last row.

NOTE #2 Menu Option. You cannot use the menus to enter the EE and ET
commands independently. Instead, they are entered as part of the column
and frame definitions if you have also applied borders to these elements.

4-128
Page Break PG

Format esopg „ (Optionv

EQ3 PG ODD (Option2)
EQZJPG EVEN (Option3)
n is the number of inches needed on a page before it breaks to a new page
(optional).
ABBREV ESZJPG O
E3ZJPG E

MENU Insert Pace Break

Purpose When you are printing a document, a PG (Page) command embedded in

your document advances the paper to the top of the next page. This
command is similar to giving a form feed to the printer. It serves several
purposes:
• Starting a New Page
Unconditional Page Break (Option la)
When you insert PG in text with no value, it always causes the next line
to be the first line of a new page.
• Conditional Page Break (Option lb)
If you use the value PG 5, the page will break only if the current page
has 5 inches or more of text on it. In other words, PG 5 prevents the
current page from printing with fewer than 5 inches.
• Breaking Odd-Numbered Pages (Option 2)
If you use the PG ODD command, the page will break only if the
current page is an odd-numbered one; otherwise, the command is
ignored.
• Breaking Even-Numbered Page (Option 3)
If you use the PG EVEN command, the page will break only if the
current page is an even-numbered one; otherwise, the command is
ignored.
In all cases, the PG command has no effect on the line in which it is
embedded. It causes the next line to be the start of a new page.
If you don't use the PG command to break a page, XyWrite creates a page
break for you, after the number of text lines determined by the FD (form
Depth) and TP and BT (Top and Bottom Margins) commands.

4-129
PG (confd)

Action Starting a New Page — Unconditional Page Break

(Option la) To create a hard page break in text:
1. Move the cursor to one line above where you want the new page to
begin.
2. Enter the PG command.
Type: [F5]pqCT

Action Starting a New Page — Conditional Page Break

(Option lb) To conditionally break a page:
1. Move the cursor to one line above where you want the new page to
begin.
2. Enter PG along with the minimum amount of text, in inches, you want
to appear on the page before the page breaks. For example:
Type: [F5]pg 6.50
Result: If the current page reached 6.5 or more inches, a new page starts at
the line following the PG command. If the current page did not reach 6.5
inches, the page does not break at the PG command.

Action Breaking Odd-Numbered Pages

(Options 2) Suppose you are at the end of a chapter, and you want the next chapter to
start on an odd-numbered page. You can ensure this by issuing the PG
ODD command followed by a PG command.
1. Move the cursor to the last page of the current chapter.
2. Type: [F5]pq odd CT
3. Type: [FSlpgCT
Result: If the last page of the current chapter is odd, you will get two page
breaks, forcing the next chapter to start on an odd page. If the last page of
the current chapter is even, you will only get one page break (because the
PG ODD command will be ignored), and the next chapter will
automatically start on an odd page.

NOTE #1 Page Number. Press [F8] to turn on the page-page depth numbers at the
top of the screen.

NOTE #2 Positioning the PG Command. We recommend you place the PG

command at the end of a line of text, rather than on a line of its own.

4-130
NB, BB Non-Breakable Blocks

FORMAT ESflNB n
RH71BB
n (optional) is the number of lines of text you want kept together.
MENU : | Keep Together

Purpose The commands NB (Non-Breakable Block) and BB (Breakable Block) allow

you to keep a block of text on one page. You might select a paragraph,
table, column of figures, or any other text as a non-breakable block. If you
specify a number of lines with the NB command, you don't need the BB
command. Otherwise, NB and BB appear in pairs:
• NB begins the non-breakable block.
• BB ends the non-breakable block.

Action Setting an Unbreakable Block of Text

To make a block of text unbreakable:
1. Select the text you want kept unbroken.

2. Type: |F5]nb0

3. Press: [Esc] to release the selected text

Result: XyWrite inserts the NB command at the beginning of the selected

block and a BB command at the end of the selected block. Text between
the two commands cannot be split between two pages.

Action Defining the Size of an Unbreakable Block

To define the size of an unbreakable block to be, for example, 4 lines:
1. Move the cursor to the start of the text you want kept unbroken.

2. Type: [F5]nb 40

Result: XyWrite inserts the NB 4 command at the beginning of the selected

block. The current line plus the next 4 lines of text cannot be split between
two pages.

4-131
NB, BB (cant'd)

NOTE #1 Units of Measure. Unlike most formatting commands, you cannot specify
a unit of measure with the NB command. Its value is always interpreted
as lines of text.

NOTE #2 Allowing to Break. If you add or delete text after creating unbreakable
blocks, you may not get the results you expect. The menus provide an
Allow to Break option ([fio], M, K, A) that is useful for changing unbreakable
blocks to breakable ones.

ALSO SEE Related Commands. Refer to the Bottom Margin command, BT, which has
an effect on determining which page the non-breakable block is assigned
to. The entire block must fit above the minimum bottom margin;
otherwise, it is moved to the next page. Experiment to find which values
for BT yield the best results for your application.

The conditional page break command (PG n) can serve a function similar
to NB and BB. Refer to PG on the previous pages.

4-132
WD, OP Widow & Orphan

FORMAT ESflOP m
WD n
m is the minimum number of lines of a paragraph allowed at the bottom of
a page.
n is the minimum number of lines of a paragraph allowed at the top of a
page.
Menu EHJEJSSni

Purpose A widow is the last line of a paragraph carried over to the top of the next
page. An orphan is the first line of a paragraph at the bottom of a page.
Widows and orphans are generally frowned upon because the lines appear
estranged from their paragraphs. The WD and OP settings tell XyWrite the
minimum number of lines that you want to appear at the top and bottom
of the page.
The default values are WD 2 and OP 2. This means that only two or more
lines of a paragraph can break away to another page.
WD and OP count only lines of text. If you are double-spacing a
document, they do not count the blank lines.

Action Setting Up Orphan Control

XyWrite has the default value of OP 2. To set OP to another value:
1. Move the cursor to the top line of the document.
2. Enter the OP command. For example, to allow the first 3 lines of a
paragraph to fall at the bottom of a page, set OP to 3. (This prevents
the paragraph from breaking at the first 1 or 2 lines.)
Type: fF5lop 3CT
Result: This embeds the orphan command in the text, visible as a
triangle.

4-133
WD, OP (confd)

ACTION Setting Up Widow Control

XyWrite has the default value of WD 2. To set WD to another value:
1. Move the cursor to the top line of the document.
2. To allow the last 3 lines of a paragraph to fall at the top of a page, set
WD to 3. (This prevents the paragraph from breaking at the last 1 or 2
lines.)
Type: [F5]wd 30
Result: This embeds the widow command in the text, visible as a
triangle.

NOTE #1 Bottom Margin. Widow and orphan control are affected by the settings of
the BT (Bottom Margin) command. Widow control will not work unless
the value of BTmin is less than or equal to BTnom. Orphan control will
not work unless the value of BTmax is greater than or equal to BTnom.
Refer to the description of the BT command for more information.

NOTE #2 Default Orphan and Widow Settings. When you embed OP and WD in a
file, the values only affect that file. If you wish to change the OP and WD
defaults, change the values in the default file. See "Default Settings" in
the Customization Guide for more information.

4-134
BL Blank Lines

FORMAT E3UBL o
r^TlBLl

MENU See Note #1.

PURPOSE The BL (Blank Line) command lets you print or suppress blank lines that
appear at the top of a page or column. A blank line is a line with just a
carriage return on it—no formatting commands or text. When you
suppress the printing of blank lines, all your pages start at the same
position. When blank lines are printed, the first line of text may actually
appear on the second (or third) line of the text area.

BL also affects the way files are displayed in graphic and formatted views.

ACTION Suppressing Blank Lines at the Top of the Page

To suppress the display and printing of blank lines that fall at the top of a
page or column:

1. Position the cursor on the page before you want to start suppressing
the blank lines.

2. Type: [F5]bl 10

Result: Starting on the next page, blank lines are suppressed if they
appear at the top of a new page or a column.

To restore the display and printing of blank lines:

1. Position the cursor on the page before you want to start honoring the
blank lines.

2. Type: [F5]b! 00

Result: Starting on the next page, blank lines are printed when they
appear at the top of a new page or a column.

NOTE #1 Menu Option. When you use the menus to create columns, BL is
automatically set to 1.

NOTE #2 Default Setting. The default setting for BL is 0 unless you change it in the
default file. For more information, refer to "Default Settings" in the
Customization Guide.
4-135
Notes

4-136
 Page Width

Intro In this section we cover the commands which affect the width of your
document. Most of these commands make themselves apparent as
symbols on the ruler, so we start with a description of the ruler and then
proceed to individual discussion of each page width command.

Contents page Section Command

4-138 Ruler
4-139 Left & Right Margin RM, LM
4-140 Offset OF
4-142 Gutter GU
4-143 Page Width PW
4-144 Indent Paragraph IP
4-147 Tab Settings TS,TR,RT
4-152 Leadering LD

4-137
Ruler

The ruler is the third line from the top of the screen. The marks in the
ruler are as follows. (You can change these markers in the default file if
you wish, with the RL setting.)

Marker Example of Command

l_ Left Margin LM .5
Right Margin RM 7
Normal Tab TS 1
4 Flush Right Tab TS1R
v Flush Center Tab TS 1C
Decimal Tab TS 1D
l_ 1st Indent IP .5,1,0 (first number)
2nd Indent IP .5,1,0 (second number)
The cursor marker is the mark on the ruler that moves as the cursor moves
through text. (The ruler symbols show through it.)
By default, XyWrite calculates horizontal measurements (margins,
indents, tab stops) in inches, and the ruler reflects that unit of
measurement. The numbers 1 through 8 in the ruler represent 1 inch
through 8 inches on your printed page.
In expanded view, the ruler line reflects the system default settings for
LM, RM, TS, and IP rather than the values in effect for the displayed file.

In formatted, draft and graphic views, the ruler indicates the tabs, indents
and margins in effect at the location of the cursor. As you move the cursor
down the screen, each time you pass a format change (visible as an
embedded triangle or curved line), the ruler changes to indicate the new
settings.

NOTE Overriding the Ruler Line. You can replace the ruler with a straight line
or eliminate it so you can display an extra line of text. The NR function
call toggles between the three states. Refer to the Customization Guide for
information on using function calls.

4-138
LM, RM Left & Right Margin

FORMAT ffiZJLM n
kh’d RM n
n is the number of inches for the margin.
Menus Not a menu option.

Purpose The LM (Left Margin) and RM (Right Margin) commands adjust the
margins on a page. Both values are measured from the left offset
established by the OF command. In general, LM and RM are not
recommended for establishing the overall document margins (see Note
#1), but they are convenient for certain purposes. For example, if you
want to change the left margin in the middle of a page, you could use the
LM command. And if you are trying to establish a particular text width
(to fit the width of a business card design, for example), you may prefer to
use the RM command to establish it.

Action Setting the Left or Right Margin

To set a margin:
1. Move the cursor to the start of the line whose margin you want to
change, or to a previous line. (See Note #2.)
2. Enter LM or RM. For example, to set the left margin to position 1.5
inches:
Type: [F5]lm 1.50
Result: The LM command is embedded in the text as a triangle. The left
margin remains in effect until another LM command is encountered.

NOTE #1 Offset Command. The OF (Offset) command, which is described in the

next section, is recommended for establishing document margins.

NOTE #2 Immediate Effect. To make the LM or RM command take effect on the

same line on which it rests, make sure there is no text or spaces ahead of it
on that line. (You may place other embedded triangles ahead of it.)

NOTE #3 Right Margin vs Page Width. The value of the right margin cannot be
greater than the page width established by the PW command minus the
document margins established by the OF command. If you try to set a
right margin that exceeds the page width, XyWrite ignores it.

NOTE #3 Default Margins. The default margins are LM 0, RM 20 (unless you

change the values in the default file). Because XyWrite ignores a right
margin that exceeds the page width, this default value effectively disables
the right margin, giving precedence to the margin established by the OF
command.
4-139
Offset OF

FORMAT E0ZJOF l,r

I and r are the size of the left and right offset
MENU EEH1EB3BE3

Purpose The OF (Offset) command establishes overall document margins by

offsetting the text from the left and right edges of the paper. Tabs,
indents, and margins established by the RM and LM commands are
measured from the left offset (see Notes #1 and #2).

If you are preparing a document for 2-sided printing, XyWrite flips the
values of I and r on even-numbered pages, allowing you to create an extra
margin for the binding edge (see Note #3).

Action Setting the Same Left and Right Margins for All Pages
For example, to create a 1" left and right offset:
1. Move the cursor to the top of the document.
2. Type: [F5]of 1.1 CT

Action Setting Inside and Outside Margins

To create a 1-1/2" margin for inside margins (those on the binding edge)
and a 1” margin for outside margins, you would set the offset to 1.5 and 1,
respectively:
1. Move the cursor to the top of the document.
2. Type: [Fslof 1.5.1 CT
Result: When the document is printed, pages will have a 1-inch outside
margin and a 1-1/2" inside margin. On even pages, the inside margin is
on the right, while on odd pages, the inside margin is on the left (see Note
#3).

NOTE #1 Using Indents to Modify Text Width. Once you have established overall
page margins, you can control the width of paragraphs with the IP (Indent
Paragraph) command.

NOTE #2 Page Width. The right offset is measured from the right edge of the paper,
which is established by the PW (Page Width) command. The default
value of PW is 8.5 inches.

4-140
(confd) OF

NOTE #3 Overriding Inside and Outside Margins. If you have prepared your
document for 2-sided printing by specifying different values for I and r,
you can output a single-sided version by setting the OS command to 1.
The OS 1 command tells XyWrite to use the value of I for both odd and
even pages. Refer to "Printer Controls" later in this chapter for more
information about the OS command.

NOTE #4 Changing the Offset The offset in effect at the beginning of a page is
applied to the entire page. If you issue another OF command, it will not
take effect until the next page.

NOTE #5 Default Offset Settings. The default is OF 1IN,1IN (unless you change it
in the default file.) Refer to "Default Settings" in the Customization Guide
for more information.

NOTE #6 Screen Display. If you want to display the offset in formatted view, you
can change the value of the OD (Offset Display) default setting to 1. For
more information, refer to "Default Settings" in the Customization Guide
for more information.

4-141
Gutter GU

FORMAT ES3GU i,o

i is the size of the gutter for inside element edges.
o is the size of the gutter for outside element edges (see Note #1).
Menu Note #2-

PURPOSE The GU (Gutter) command inserts white space on the left and right sides
of columns, table cells, frames, and pages. Half the value of i is applied to
the left side of an element and half to the right side. If you omit o, a value
of 0 is assumed.
For example, if GU is set to .2,0, XyWrite applies it to a 3-column format as
follows. The inside columns (the right side of column 1, both sides of
column 2, and the left side of column 3) are each offset by .1 inch, creating
a .2 inch gutter between columns. Since the value of o is 0, the outside
columns (the left side of column 1 and the right side of column 3) use the
horizontal positions defined by the OF command. Borders, if any, occupy
the gutter space. A very wide border requires a large gutter.

ACTION Creating a Gutter

To create a gutter:
1. Move the cursor to the start of the line whose gutters you want to
change.
2. Enter the GU command. For example, to insert .2" of white space on
both the inside and outside edges of elements:
Type: [F5]gu .2,.20
Result: The gutters are applied to all frames, columns, and tables that
follow the command, until another GU command is encountered.

NOTE #1 Framed Areas. Only the first value of GU is applied to framed areas. That
value is divided between the left and right sides of the framed text and
any border being applied to the frame. Space between a frame's border
and its surrounding text is determined by the IN argument to the BO
(Border) command.
NOTE #2 Menu Option. When you use to menus to create columns, frames, or
tables, gutters are automatically established.
NOTE #3 Relative Tabs. Tab settings will not move along with GU settings unless
RT (Relative Tabs) is set to 1. Refer to "Default Settings" in the
« Customization Guide for more information.
NOTE #4 Default Gutter Settings. The default is GU .2IN,0IN unless you change it
in the default file.

4-142
PW Page Width

FORMAT MPWn
n is the width of the page.
MENU

Purpose The PW (Page Width) command establishes the width of the sheet of
paper you print on. XyWrite measures the right offset from this value. It
also uses this value to determine where to draw the lines when you issue a
UP command to put a border around a page.

Action Setting the Page Width

Suppose you are printing a document in landscape orientation, where the
11” dimension of the page becomes its width. You would set the page
width to 11 as follows:

1. Move the cursor to the top of the file whose page width you want to
set.

2. Enter the PW command:

Type: [F5]pw 110

Result: The PW command is embedded in the text as a triangle. It remains

in effect for this file until you issue another PW command.

Note #1 Page Width vs Right Margin. If a file contains both an RM (Right

Margin) and a PW (Page Width) command, XyWrite uses the smaller one
to determine the text width.

NOTE #2 Default Page Width. The default value for PW is 8.5 inches. You can
change this value in the default file.

4-143
Indent Paragraph IP

FORMAT EE3IP f,s,r

/is the size of the left indent for the first line of a paragraph,
s (optional) is the size of the left indent for subsequent lines in a
paragraph. If omitted, a value of 0 is assumed.
r (optional) is the size of the right indent. If omitted, a value of 0 is
assumed.
MENU Itnden&Tibs...

PURPOSE The IP (Indent Paragraph) command gives you an easy way to indent
paragraphs. Tab stops do not change position when you insert an IP
command. The left indents are measured from the left offset plus any
other horizontal position command (gutter, left margin) and the right
indent is measured from the right offset (see Note #1).

IP offers you several ways to style a paragraph, as shown in the

illustration on the next page.

ACTION Setting a Paragraph Indent

To set a paragraph indent:

1. Move the cursor to the start of the line you want indented, or to the
previous line (see Note #2).

2. For example, to indent the first line 1 inch and the rest of the paragraph
5 inch:
Type: [FsliD 1..5.01^1
Result: The IP command is embedded in the text as a triangle. All
paragraphs which follow are indented, until another IP command is
encountered.

3. To discontinue paragraph indenting:

Type: [FSlipM
Result: All subsequent lines are not indented.

NOTE #1 Right Margin. If the right margin (as established by the RM command) is
set so that lines fall short of the right offset, the right indent is measured
from the right margin.

4-144
(confd) IP

COMPARISON OF PARAGRAPH INDENTS

▲
Example of IP .5,0. This is a paragraph with a normal
indent; the first line is indented 1/2 inch while the remaining
lines are not indented. The IP command is embedded in the above
triangle.
▲
Example of IP 1,1. You can also indent entire
paragraphs from the left margin like this using
the IP command.
▲
Example of IP .5,1. Similarly, you can do a hanging
indent, where each paragraph hangs down from the
first line. Some people call this a negative
indent.
▲
Example of IP .5,.5,.5. And finally, you can
indent all the lines of the paragraph on both
sides. This is called a block indent.
▲▲
Be Inventive! Example of IP 0,1.5 with TS 1.5. You can use
hanging indents in novel ways such as this,
where the title sits out in the left margin.
After typing the title, you tab over to the
start of the paragraph. Each line in this
paragraph word-wraps back to column 2. When
writing the manuscript for this Command
Reference Guide, we used these two commands
to achieve the hanging indents you see.
▲
Example of IP 0,0. this paragraph is an example of text without
indents. Notice the paragraph is up against the.left margin of
text.

4-145
IP (confd)

NOTE #2 Immediate Effect To make the IP command take effect on the same line
on which it rests, make sure there is no text or spaces ahead of it on that
line. (Only other embedded triangles can be placed ahead of it.)

NOTE #3 Technical Description. The way IP f,s,r works is:

• /determines the amount of left indent for a line which is preceded by a
hard return.
• s determines the amount of left indent for a line which is not preceded
by a hard return (a line which is word-wrapped).
• r determines the amount of right indent for all lines.

NOTE #4 Omitting a Value. If you do not specify one or the other value in the IP
command, the missing value is interpreted as a zero. Thus, IP .5 is equiv­
alent to IP 5,0,0; and IP ,1 is equivalent to IP 0,1,0.

NOTE #5 Default Indent Paragraph Settings. The default is IP 0,0,0 (unless you
change the value in the default file).

NOTE #6 Paragraph Endings. XyWrite interprets a carriage return as the end of

paragraph, and applies the settings in the IP command to what follows. If
you prefer, you can end a line with a soft carriage return (I Shift | gi], displayed
as 4), which does not signal XyWrite that you are starting a new
paragraph. This is useful if, for example, you want the first line in every
paragraph indented, but you don't want paragraph headings to be
indented. You could achieve this format easily by ending the line before
the heading with the soft carriage return.

4-146
TS, TR, RT Tab Settings

FORMAT E33TS nl,n2,n3,... Tab Set

E^iflTR Tab Reset
fcSMlRT x Relative Tabs
hI,h2,h3 are locations for tab stops. A maximum of 21 tab stops is allowed.
xisOor 1.
MENU Inden&Tabi..

PURPOSE The TS (Tab Set) command sets tab stops in your text. A tab stop is a pre­
set position to which the cursor moves when you press the tab key.
Four kinds of tabs are available: Left, Right, Center, and Decimal. See
Note #3 for a complete description of each kind of tab.
The TR (Tab Reset) command resets tab stops to the default settings —
that is, .5,1.5,2.5, and so on (unless you change the value in the default
file).
The RT (Relative Tabs) command lets you specify whether the tabs are
relative to the left margin and gutter (RT 1) or not (RT 0). The default is
RT 1. To turn off relative tabs for all files, change the value in the default
file to RT=0.
We'll cover the following three procedures:
• Creating Tab Stops (TS)
• Changing the Tab Stops
• Resetting the Tab Stops (TR)

ACTION Creating Tab Stops (TS)

To create a new set of tabs:
1. Move the cursor to the point in the text where you want the tab
settings to begin.
2. Enter the TS command. For example, to set left tabs at .3, .6 and .9 inch
from the left margin:
Type: [F5]tS .3..6..9S
Important — don't insert spaces after the commas.
Result: The TS command is embedded in the text, displayed as a
triangle. The tabs take effect from that point forward, until another TS
triangle is encountered or until the end of the document.

4-147
TS, TR, RT (corn'd)

NOTE #1 The Ruler. The ruler indicates the tabs (and margins) which are in effect
at the location of the cursor. As you move the cursor down the screen, each
time you pass a Tab Setting, the ruler changes to indicate the new tab
settings.

ACTION Changing the Tab Stops

To add, delete or move tab stops in an existing TS triangle:
1. Move the cursor to the TS embedded triangle which contains the tabs
you want to change.
2. Press: [Ftfl or fAhlfFil
Result: This opens the triangle for editing.
3. Add, delete or change the tab numbers to the new tab settings you
want.
4. Press: [Shift] [fT|
Result: This closes the command window. The new tab settings are
now in effect following the command.

ACTION Resetting the Tab Stops (TR)

To reset the tab stops to their default settings:

1. Move the cursor to the point in the text where you want the default tab
settings to begin.

2. Type: [gltrS

Result: The TR command is embedded in the text. The default tab

settings take effect at this point. (See Note #2.)

NOTE #2 Default Tab Settings. You can also set up TS using the default file. The
initial default is TS 5,1.5,2.5,3.5,... and so on, to 9.5. You can change these
settings in the default file.

4-148
(cont'd) TS, TR, RT

NOTE #3 Tab Styles. XyWrite provides you with the following four kinds of tab
stops (illustrated on the following page).

► Left Tab — Aligns text flush left against the specified tab stop. (Also
known as a flush left tab.) Example: TS 1

▼ Center Tab — Centers text on the specified tab stop.

Example: TS2C

◄ Right Tab — Aligns text flush right against the specified tab stop.
Example: TS3R

0 Decimal Tab — Lines up a column of numbers on their decimal points.

Example: TS2D

If you are not using the default unit of measure, include the abbreviation
for the unit immediately after the number (for example, TS 6PTR sets a
right tab at 6 points).

NOTE #4 Tab Set Zero. By default, the first column of tabular material starts at zero,
so you never need to include 0 in your TS command. In fact, a tab setting
of 0 (TS 0) cancels all tabs.

NOTE #5 The Tab Key. The tab key on the keyboard gives you control over
movement of the cursor and text:

[Tab] If you press the tab key in the middle of text, the text and
cursor move one tab to the right. (A tab character is entered
invisibly into the text.) In Overstrike mode, a character is
deleted.

[Ctrl] [Tab] Moves the cursor to the next tab without moving the text
along with it. (A tab character is not entered into the text.)

[Shift] [Tab] Moves the cursor to the previous tab without moving text.

To move text back one tab space, use the [Backspace! key to delete the tab
character.

Once you have tabbed the cursor over to the last tab, pressing the tab key
moves the cursor only one space at a time.

4-149
TSZ TR, RT (confd)

4-150
(confd) TS, TR, RT

NOTE #6 The Tab Character. When you press [Tab], the tab character is entered
invisibly into the text. Even though you can't see the character, you can
treat it like any ordinary character — for instance, you can delete it and
search for it. To execute the search:
Type: [F5]se I
Press: (Tab!
Type: 10-
The tab character is visible in expanded view, displayed as 0. If you prefer,
you can make the tab character visible in formatted and draft views as
well, displayed as •>, by changing the value of the ST (Show Tabs) setting
to 2 in the default file.

NOTE #7 Related Commands. XyWrite also provides the flush commands FL

(Flush Left), FR (Flush Right) and FC (Force Center); they position all the
text between the margins on all lines following the command. They
should not be confused with the tab settings.

4-151
Leadering LD

FORMAT [fl'i'flLD n
n is any character you specify.
MENU

Purpose The LD (Leadering) command provides a quick means of inserting a row

of characters on a line. You might use LD in a Table of Contents or Index
to generate a row of periods or dashes between the name on the left and
the page number on the right.
The LD command does two things:
• It pushes all text which follows it (on that line) flush against the right
margin.
• It repeats the character given with the LD command (n) across the line.

Action Inserting a Leader

To insert a leader, say a row of periods, between two items:
1. Type the text that you want to have against the left margin.
2. Issue the LD command.
Type: [F5]ld .0
3. Type the text that you want to have against the right margin.
Result: The text on the left of the leader command is pushed against
the left margin, and the text after the leader command is pushed
against the right margin. A row of periods (or dots) appears between
the left and right text. For example:
Emergency................................................................................................... 911

Note #1 Spaces as a Leader. If you enter LD with no character, it produces text

flush left and flush right on the same line with spaces as the leadering
character.

Note #2 Multiple Leaders. You can enter more than one leader on a line, inserting
equal leadering between text areas.

4-152
 Printer Control

When you print documents, you often want special control over your
printer. With XyWrite you can cause your printer to stop on a given line
or at the end of specified pages and have it prompt you when it has
completed its job. You can also request special features from your printer,
such as color printing or landscape orientations. Most of the features
described in this section are not available on all printers. Review the
documentation supplied with your printer if you are not sure what
options it offers.

Contents page section Command

4-154 Pause & Prompt PA, PR

4-155 AutoPause, No Pause AP, NP
4-156 One-Sided Format OS
4-157 Print in Color DY
4-158 Special Effects EF
4-160 Letter-Quality LQ
4-161 Orientation OR
4-162 Printer Insert PI

4-153
Pause & Prompt PA, PR

FORMAT fWlPA message Pause

frEMIPR message Prompt
MENU Not a menu item.

Purpose PA (Pause) stops the printing of a file at the point the PA command is
embedded in the text, and displays the defined message on the status line.
You press 0 to continue printing. You may want to use this command to
provide a reminder of what should be done when the printer stops — to
change a printwheel, insert a different kind of paper (such as letterhead),
or change a ribbon.

PR (Prompt) displays the defined message on the status line during the
printing of a file without stopping the printer. When XyWrite encounters
PR during printing, it displays the message and continues to output to the
printer. The message is removed when you strike the next key (or when
the next PR or PA message is encountered). You can insert PR in your
document to monitor the progress of a remote printer. For example, you
can include a message such as "Printing is complete" at the very end of
your document.

Action Causing the Printer to Pause

To cause your printer to stop and display a message:
1. Move the cursor to the point in text where you want the printer to stop.
2. Type: [F5]pa Install Italic PrintwheelEO
Result: When you print this document, it automatically stops at the point
where the PA command is embedded in the text — the message "Install
Italic Printwheel" appears on the status line. Press Q to restart the
printer.
You enter PR in the same way you entered PA in Step 2 above. The only
difference is that the printer will not stop printing when it displays its
message.

ALSO SEE Related Commands. The P option in PRINT filename,? stops the printer
after each page.

4-154
AP,NP AutoPause, No Pause

FORMAT IW1AP AutoPause

ES3NP No Pause
MENU Not a menu item.

Purpose AP (AutoPause) causes a document to pause at the end of each page. You
resume printing with 0. You can embed the AP command wherever you
want the pause to begin.

NP (No Pause) cancels AutoPause. You use it after an AP command to

allow the document to once again print continuously without pausing.

Action Inserting Page Pausing

To cause a document to pause at the end of certain pages:
1. Move the cursor to the page where you want pausing to begin.
2. Type: [F5]apS
3. Move the cursor to the page where you want continuous printing to
resume.
4. Type: [FSjnpH

Result: When you print your document, it prints without stopping until it
reaches the page containing the AP command. When the printer stops,
press Q to resume printing. Printing stops after every page until it
reaches the NP command — it then continues printing without stopping.

NOTE #1 Related Commands. The AP command causes the printer to pause

exactly the same way as the P option with the PRINT command. The
difference is that AP is embedded in the document, while the P option is
not. With AP you can cause some pages to pause and others not to pause.

4-155
One-Sided Format OS

FORMAT LM1QS 0 Two-Sided Format

toMOS 1 One-Sided Format
MENU

Purpose The OS command lets you change the format of your document
temporarily, so only the formatting commands designed for odd-
numbered pages are applied. This is particularly useful if you have
defined an inside and outside margin with the OF (Offset) command and
now want to produce a copy that has the same left margin on all pages.

There are several XyWrite formatting commands that allow different

values for odd and even pages. These commands include the RH
(Running Header), RF (Running Footer), OF (Offset), and FA (Frame Area)
commands. The OS command tells XyWrite whether to honor or ignore
the even-page values for these commands.

Action Setting One-Sided Format

To apply only odd-page formatting commands to your document:

1. Move the cursor to the top of the file.

2. Type: [fs] os 1 CT

Result: When you print your document, XyWrite applies the odd-page
formatting values to all pages.

Note #1 Default Value. The default value for OS is 0 unless you change it in the
default file. In any XyWrite session, the OS default may be changed by
the menu routines. For example, when you select one-sided or facing
pages in the Page Margins dialog box, you change the default setting of
OS. You can also change the default setting via the Print menu. Both of
these menus show the current state of the OS default setting.

NOTE #2 Two-Sided Printing. Do not confuse the OS command with the

commands for simplex (one-sided) and duplex (two-sided) printing. The
OS command only affects the way the pages are formatted. PC (Printer
Control) commands, which are explained in the Customization Guide,
control one- and two-sided printing.

4-156
DY Print in Color

FORMAT EHZIDY m,n

m is the foreground color.
n (optional) is the background color. The default is white.
Menu ejeietsestseeb

PURPOSE DY (Dye) allows you to print in color on printers that support this feature.
(Check your printer documentation to determine which colors, if any, are
supported.) The values for the colors are:

1 black 9 neutral
2 blue 10 olive
3 brown 11 orange
4 charcoal 12 red
5 green 13 violet
6 cyan 14 white
7 magenta 15 yellow
8 maroon

ACTION Printing in Color

To use the DY command:
1. Move the cursor to where you want to start printing in color.

2. Enter the DY command. For example, to print in green on a white

background:

Type: [Fsjdy 5,14(3

Result: The DY command is embedded in the text as a triangle. From this

point forward, the text will be printed in green on a white background.

NOTE Screen Display. The DY command has no effect on the screen display.

4-157
Special Effects EF

FORMAT E53EFn
n is the number of the desired effect(s).
MENU EEHJBEEnESSl

PURPOSE EF (Effect) allows you to turn on one or more special printing effects for
printers that support them. (Check your printer documentation to
determine which effects, if any, are supported.) The values for the special
effects you can activate with XyWrite are:
1 Reverse
2 Outline
4 Shadow
8 Inverse
16 User Set
256 Script Up
512 Script Down
1024 Double Underline
2048 Overscore
4096 Floating Underline
8192 Outline/Shadow
16384 Shading
The EF command turns off any special effect whose value is not included
in the command. For example, if you previously turned on double
underline, and then issue an EF command that turns on overscore, double
underlining is turned off.
If you want to turn on two or more special effects, combine their values
(e.g., 1 + 2 for Reverse and Outline) when you issue the command.

ACTION Turning on a Special Effect

To use the EF command to turn on a special effect:
1. Move the cursor to where you want to start the special effect.
2. Enter the EF command. For example, to print text in outline/shadow:
Type: [F5]ef 81920
Result: EF command is embedded in the text as a triangle. From this
point forward, the text will be printed in outline/shadow format. All
other special effects are turned off.

To use the EF command to turn on multiple special effects:

1. Move the cursor to where you want to start the special effects.

4-158
(confd) EF

2. Calculate the total value of the effects you want to turn on. For
example, to turn on reverse plus outline, the total value is 3.
3. Enter the EF command using the value calculated in step 2.
Type: [F5|ef 30
Result: The EF command is embedded in the text as a triangle. From this
point forward, the text will be printed in reverse plus outline. All other
special effects are turned off.

4-159
Letter Quality LQ

FORMAT ESZJLQ m
n is a number (0-9) that represents the desired print quality.
MENU E5ESM
Purpose Dot matrix printers offer a range of print qualities. LQ (Letter Quality)
allows you to select the print quality you want for the current document.
(Check your printer documentation to determine which qualities are
supported.) The values for the print qualities you can activate with
XyWrite are:
1 Draft
2 Letter
3 Letter II
4 Letter III
5 Near-letter quality Gothic
6 Near-letter quality Courier
7 Utility
8 Not assigned
9 Draft II

Action Printing in Draft Quality

If you are working on very rough draft material and don't care about the
quality of the output, you can save some time by printing in draft quality.

1. Move the cursor to the beginning of the file.

2. Enter the LQ command. For example, to turn on draft quality printing:

Type: [F5]lq 11^1

Result: The LQ command is embedded in the text as a triangle. From this

point forward, the text will be printed in draft.

NOTE Typeface vs Printer Mode. On some dot matrix printers, print quality is
associated with typeface, not printer mode. On such printers, the LQ
command has no effect.

4-160
OR Orientation

FORMAT
n is a number (0-3) of the orientation you are selecting.
MENU Not a menu option.

Purpose OR (Orientation) establishes the printing orientation of a document.

Before using the OR command, check your printer documentation to
determine which orientations are supported. The values for the
orientations you can activate with XyWrite are:

0 Portrait (the default)

1 Landscape
2 Reverse portrait
3 Reverse landscape

You can change orientation within a document, but you cannot change
orientation within a page. Therefore, the OR command must always be
issued at the top of the page you want it to affect.

Action Printing in Landscape

In landscape printing, characters are printed across the 11-inch dimension
of the page. To tum it on:

1. Move the cursor to the beginning of the file or to the top of the page
you want to print in landscape.

2. Enter the OR command. For example, to turn on landscape:

Type: [F5]or 10

3. Enter the formatting commands that are appropriate for landscape

orientation. The formatting commands you need to modify are: RM
(Right Margin), PW (Page Width), PL (Page Length), FD (Form Depth),
and UF (Use Typeface).

Result: From this point forward, the text will be printed in landscape
orientation.

4-161
Printer Insert PI

FORMAT ESQ PI string

string is a printer control code.
Menu Not a menu option.

Purpose PI allows you to send control strings directly to the printer. Unlike the PC
and PB commands, which reference strings that are defined in the PC table
of the printer file, the PI command contains the actual control codes.
XyWrite does not respond to these control codes; it simply passes the
codes to the printer when you use the PRINT command.

Action Inserting a Printer Control String

Let's assume you are using a Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Series II printer.
Like many laser printers, the LaserJet II has its own commands for
drawing rules and boxes. To insert a rule, say between two tables:

1. Move the cursor to the point in your document where you want to
insert the rule.

2. Enter the PI command along with the printer-specific control code for
drawing a rule. For a LaserJet Series II:

c1425.00a3b0P[5]
Type: [F5]pi ► *

Result: When you print your document, the code to draw a rule is sent
to the printer.

NOTE Line Endings. Do not use PI to change typeface or type size. Since
XyWrite does not process the information in these strings for formatting
purposes, it will continue to determine line and page breaks based on the
typeface and size established with XyWrite format commands.

4-162
 Styles

A style is a set of embedded format commands (such as left margin, right

margin, tabs and offset) defined together under one name. This allows
you to standardize your own formats and facilitates switching between
them.

You might define one style for letters (and name it LETTER), another for
memos (MEMO), still another for reports (REPORT), and so forth. Once
you define styles by name (using SS), you can recall them (using US) by
name. You can also define a set of ordered styles and use them by simply
saying next style (NS) or previous style (PS).

Contents page section Command

4-164 Save Style SS

4-167 Use Style US, NS, PS

4-163
Save Style SS

FORMAT ESflSS . string

name is a name you specify for the style you are defining.
nm is the 2-letter name of the command (see below).
= (equal sign) separates the name from the value.
n is the value of the command.
, (comma) separates the formatting commands.
; (semicolon) separates the formatting command from string,
string is the text or formatting commands you want inserted when you
issue a Use Style command.
MENU

Purpose SS (Save Style) saves the current default settings under a name you
specify. Once you define a style with SS, you use the US (Use Style)
command at any point in text where you want the style to take effect.
The SS command in fact does more than save the settings you specify in the
command. It also saves all of the other current settings implicit at that
point in the document, including all of those listed below.
When you invoke a style with the US command, you will be recalling all of
the format settings saved by the SS command.

Normally, you embed the SS command at the beginning of a document

and refer to it with the US command throughout the document. Thus, you
can standardize on styles you use regularly — one style for letters, another
for reports, and another for outlines.

In addition to giving you the ability to establish standard styles, the SS

command also lets you save text that you want inserted at the point that
you issue the US command. The most common application of this feature
is to create an outline by inserting formatting commands (indents, etc.)
and text (counters, punctuation, etc.).

4-164
(confd) ss
You can specify for nm any default format setting. For example:
AL Automatic leading MD Any character mode
BT Bottom margin NJ No justification
EE Element end OF Offset
EL Extra leading OP Orphan
ET Element top OR Orientation
FC Flush center PL Page length
FD Form depth PW Page width
FL Flush left RM Right margin
FR Flush right RT Relative tabs
HY Hyphenation SY Symbol set
IP Indent paragraph SZ Size
JU Justification TP Top margin
LL Line leading TS Tab settings
LM Left margin UF Use typeface
LS Line spacing WD Widow

ACTION Saving a Style

To set up a style definition:

1. Go to the top of your document:

Press: [Ctrl] |Home|

2. Type: [F5]ss letter,lm=.8,rm=6.5,md=nm1ip=.5,00

Result: This defines a style named LETTER with a left margin of .8 inch, a
right margin of 6.5 inches, normal character mode, and an indent of .5 inch
at the first line of each paragraph. To use this style, you must invoke it
with the Use Style command.

ACTION Saving Styles with Text

When you are saving a style with text, the procedure is slightly different
because you need to open a command window. As an illustration, let's
set up the style definitions for a three-level outline:

1. Go to the top of your document:

Press: [cirillHomel

4-165
ss (confd)

2. Define counters for each of the three outline levels. For example:
Type: fFsldc 1=1 A 1CT
Type: [F5]dc 2=A 10
Type: [F5] de 3=10
Refer to "Numbered Lists" for more information about the DC (Define
Counter) command.

3. Issue the SS command.

Type: [F5]ssCT
A command window opens.

4. Type the name of the style followed by the formatting commands that
you want to apply to the first outline level. At the end of the formatting
commands, type a semicolon. For example:
Type: levell ,ts=0.8r,1 ,ip=0,1;

5. Type the text of this outline level. For example:

O«C1».O

6. Press: IShiftl [fT| to close the command window.

7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 for outline levels 2 and 3.

Result: When you invoke one of the outline styles with the US command,
XyWrite applies the saved formatting commands and inserts the saved
text.

NOTE #1 Style Within Same Document The Save Style command must be in the
document that uses it. While it is an embedded format command, it
cannot be set up as a default. If you use the same style repeatedly, you
can save it on a text macro so you can quickly insert it into your
documents.

NOTE #2 Placing the SS Command. The SS command does not need to be at the
very beginning of the file, so long as it is placed before the first Use Style
(US) command that invokes it.

NOTE #3 Name Uniqueness. Each style in a file must have a unique name.

4-166
US, NS, PS Use Style

FORMAT E53US name Use Style

ESONS Next Style
ESdPS Previous Style
name is the name of the style you want to use — it must have been defined
previously with the SS command.
MENU MES

PURPOSE The US (Use Style) command invokes the style called for by name. The
name must be previously defined (somewhere in the same document) with
the Save Style (SS) command.

Once you have defined several styles, you can change styles without
calling them by name. Knowing their sequence in the document, you can
invoke either the Next Style (NS) or the Previous Style (PS). This is
especially useful for outlines with many levels.

ACTION Using a Style by Name

To call a style by name:

1. Move the cursor to the point in text you want to start a new style.

2. Enter the US command along with the name of the style you want. For
example:

Type: [F5]us letters

Result: The style named LETTER takes effect at that point in the
document. For US to work, LETTER must be defined earlier in the
document with the SS command.

4-167
US, NS, PS (confd)

Action Using Next Style and Previous Style

Before starting, assume we have set up a series of styles called HEAD,
SUBHEAD, and TEXT (in that order) with three SS commands.

Next assume that we have given a US HEAD command to format our first
heading. To use the next style, which is SUBHEAD:

Type: [F5]nsS

Result: At the place we embed this command, the SUBHEAD style

becomes the new format of the document. To use the TEXT style:

Type: [F5]nsS

Result: Now the style is changed to the TEXT style. After typing text,
when you come to a point where you want to use the SUBHEAD style
again:

Type: [F5]psS

NOTE #1 Inserting Other Format Commands. When you give new format
commands that you want to affect large parts of the document (such as IP
or TS), be aware that they are superseded by the next US, NS or PS
command that follows. We recommend you include these in the SS
command — in fact, the more format commands you include, the more
predictable your results will be.

NOTE #2 Relative Values. You can use relative values with the US command. For
example, US +1 activates the style defined immediately before the current
style; US -1 activates the style defined immediately after the current style.
You may find this option useful if you have defined many styles for an
outline and want to quickly move from one outline level to another.

4-168
 Type Style

Intro In order to add emphasis to text, you can use the MD (Mode) commands
to modify it with underlining, bold, italic, reverse, superscript, subscript,
and various combinations. You can also change the typeface with the UF
(Use Typeface) command—for Times, Helvetica, Courier, etc.—and
change type size with the SZ (Size) command.

How these modes, faces, and sizes are actually displayed and printed
depends on the capabilities of your hardware.

Contents page Section Command

4-170 Mode Commands

4-174 Type Size SZ
4-175 Symbol Set SY
4-176 Typeface UF
4-177 Language LA

4-169
Mode Commands MD

FORMAT K3ZJMD nn
nn is a two-letter mode command.
MENU

Purpose Display modes allow you to highlight text in the type styles listed below.
You can use the MD command to establish absolute styles, or you can
create relative styles by adding or subtracting styles. For example, the
command MD BO changes text to bold, overriding the type style that was
previously in effect. In contrast, the command MD +BO adds bold to the
current type style, creating, for example, bold underline or bold italic; the
command MD -BO subtracts bold from the current type style. Type styles
that can be combined with other styles are referred to as additive; as
shown in the table below, not all XyWrite type styles are additive.

Mode
Command Character Mode Additive?
— Prevailing (Default)
MD NM Normal
MD BO Bold Yes
MD UL Underline Yes
MD IT Italic Yes
MD BU Bold Underline
MDBI Bold Italic
MD SU Superscript Yes
MD SD Subscript Yes
MDRV Reverse Yes
MD BR Bold Reverse
MDFN Footnote
MDFL Flashing
MDFU Flashing Underline
MDFR Flashing Reverse
MDSO Standout (Flashing Bold)
When using MD UL, you can control how tabs and spaces are underlined.
(See Note #5.)

The procedure for new text is different than that for existing text. These
three procedures follow.
• Changing the Mode of Selected Text (Option 1)
• Changing the Mode from the Cursor Forward (Option 2)
• Selecting a Mode for New Text (Option 3)

4-170
(confd) MD

ACTION Changing the Mode of Selected Text

(Option 1) There are two ways to change the character mode of selected text. We will
use bold as an example.

Relative Command. You select the block of text (Steps 1-4) and then add
bold to existing styles in the block.
1. Move the cursor where you want the bold to start.
2. Press: [F3]
3. Move the cursor where you want the bold to end.
4. Press: [F3]
5. Type: [F5|md +boQ3 (to add bold)
6. Press: [Esc] (to release the selected text)

Result: XyWrite adds bold to the type styles within the selected block. If
you switch to expanded view, you will see the embedded command
«MD+BO» at the beginning of the selected block and the command
«MD-BO» at the end of the selected block. Other type style commands
may be embedded within the selected block. You can also use a keyboard
shortcut to add bold to existing type styles (see Note #1).

Absolute Command. You select the block of text and then apply bold to
it, overriding any other type styles in effect within the block.
1. Move the cursor where you want the bold to start.
2. Press: [F3]
3. Move the cursor where you want the bold to end.
4. Press: [F3]
5. Type: |F5]md bo0
6. Press: [Esc] (to release the selected text)

Result: XyWrite replaces the existing type styles with bold. If you switch
to expanded view, the command «MDBO» appears at the beginning of the
selected block. At the end of the selected block, XyWrite inserts the MD
command for the type style that was in effect before you performed this
procedure. There are no embedded MD commands within the block. You
can also use a keyboard shortcut to change existing type styles (see Note
#2).

4-171
MD (confd)

Action Changing the Mode of Existing Text

(Option 2) To change the mode of existing text, use either the absolute or relative
command, depending on what you want to achieve. Let's use underline
as an example.

1. Move the cursor to where you want underline to start.

2. Type: [fs]md +ulS or [F5]md ulgj]

3. Move the cursor to where you want underline to stop.

4. Type: [F5]md nmCT (or press fctrilN)

Result: Text between the MD +UL (or MD UL) command and the MD NM
command is now underlined. If you used the relative command, the
underline is added to the other styles in effect; otherwise, underlining
overrides the other styles.

Action Entering Text in a New Mode

(Option 3) To enter text in a new mode, use the absolute command. Let's use italic as
an example.
1. Move the cursor to where you want to type in italic text.
2. Type: [F5]md itH (to start italic)
3. Begin typing the italic text.
4. When done typing, reset the mode to normal.
Press: [ctrilN

Note #1 Keyboard Shortcuts for Additive Modes. The additive modes are
assigned to the following keys:
Bold [CtrT| B
Italic [ctrfl I
Underline |ciri]U
Superscript [ctHl [+] (on numeric keypad)
Subscript fctrfl 0 (on numeric keypad)

The keyboard shortcuts listed above are actually toggles. If the current
text is already bold, pressing turns off bold.

4-172
(confd) MD

NOTE #2 Keyboard Shortcuts for Absolute Modes. The absolute modes are
assigned to the following keys:
Normal [ctrill
Bold [Ctri]2
Underline [ctri]3
Italic [ctrT|4
Bold Underline [cifi]5
Bold Italic [ctri]6
Superscript [Ctril7
Subscript [Cui]8
Reverse [Ctd|9
These control keys also change the current typing mode, which means that
any text you enter will be in the selected mode. For example, all text you
type after pressing @2 will be in bold mode, no matter what the mode of
the surrounding text (see Note #3).

NOTE #3 Typing Mode. When you first start XyWrite, it is in the prevailing or
adaptive mode. In it, you can move the cursor about and enter text in
whatever mode exists at the new cursor location. For example, if you
place the cursor within a passage of bold text and begin typing there, the
new text will automatically be entered in bold. If you press one of the
[Ctrl]# keys described in Note #2, you are no longer in adaptive mode;
instead, text is entered in the mode you selected, no matter what mode
exists at the cursor location. You return to the adaptive mode by pressing
[Escl.

NOTE #4 Screen Display. In graphic view, type styles are displayed as they would
be printed. In formatted and draft views, some of the type styles may be
displayed differently, depending on your hardware setup. For example,
underline does not appear on color monitors; it appears instead as blue
text.

NOTE #5 Controlling Underlining. The UL default setting lets you specify how
tabs and spaces in the underline mode (MD UL) print out. The choices are
as follows:
Underline everything
Underline everything but tabs
Underline everything but tabs and spaces
Underline only letters and numbers
You change the UL setting in the default file. Refer to "Default Settings"
in the Customization Guide for more information.

4-173
Type Size SZ

FORMAT E3ZJSZ p
p is the size of the type.
MENU eshjieeeb

Purpose The SZ (Size) command allows you to change the size in which your text
is printed. The exact effect of the SZ command depends on the type of
printer you are using. Most laser printers support a wide range of type
sizes, but some have scalable fonts while others do not. A scalable font is
one that can be reduced or enlarged to any size. If your printer has them,
you can define any type size you want (practically speaking, you probably
don't want to use anything smaller than 6 point or larger than 72); if your
printer does not have scalable fonts, you can only use the type sizes
supported by the printer and defined in your printer file. (See Note #1.)
The SZ command has no effect on daisy-wheel printers, since they only
support one type size at a time.

Action Changing the Type Size

To set the text to be printed in a particular type size:

1. Move the cursor to the start of the text where you want the new type
size to begin.

2. Enter the SZ command you want. For example, if you want 14 point:
Type: [F5]sz 14pt0
Result: The SZ command is embedded in the text as a triangle. From
this point forward, the text will be printed in 14 point type.

NOTE #1 Undefined Type Size. Because it has the greatest impact on what your
page looks like, type size is the most important type style command. If
you specify a size that is not available in the current typeface, XyWrite
looks for a typeface in which the requested size is available. If XyWrite
cannot match the requested size in any typeface, it substitutes a smaller
type size.
NOTE #2 Default Type Size. The default type size is 12 point. You can change the
type size for all files by changing the DF SZ command in the default file.
NOTE #3 Automatic Leading. If you are going to use the SZ command to change
the size of text, it is a good idea to turn automatic leading on (AL 1), so
that the vertical spacing of your text is properly adjusted.
ALSO SEE Related Commands. The UF (Use Font) and MD (Mode) commands affect
other aspects of the way type looks on the page.

4-174
SY Symbol Set

FORMAT 0SZ1SY s,p,w

s is the name of the symbol set
p is the pitch (characters per inch) for monospaced fonts; for proportional
fonts, p is 0.
w is a number from -7 to +7 that specifies the weight (-3 is light, 0 is
normal, 3 is bold, 7 is ultra black).
MENU EEE1BEE1

Purpose Hewlett Packard LaserJet printers offer typefaces in a variety of symbol

sets. SY (Symbol) allows you to specify the symbol set, pitch, and weight
you want. The different symbol sets offer different special characters; for
example, one symbol set includes many foreign characters while another
one includes more line drawing characters. Refer to your Hewlett Packard
documentation for more information about available symbol sets.

Acton Selecting a Symbol Set

To use the SY command:

1. Move the cursor to where you want the new symbol set to take effect.

2. Enter the SY command.

Type: [F5]sy 8u,O,O0

Result: The SY command is embedded in the text as a triangle. From

this point forward, the text will be printed with the 8U symbol set.

NOTE #1 Default Symbol Set XyWrite uses the symbol set 23Z,0,0 as the default.
You can change the symbol set for all files by changing the DF SY
command in the default file.

4-175
Typeface UF

FORMAT ESZJUF typeface

typeface is the name of the typeface you want to use (see Note #1).
MENU

Purpose The UF (Use Face) command allows you to change the typeface in which
your text is printed. The typefaces you can select from depend on the type
of printer you are using. Most laser printers offer a large variety of
typefaces, while dot matrix printers offer a small selection. If you aren't
sure what typefaces are available, display the Typeface menu.

Action Selecting a Typeface

To set the text to be printed in a particular typeface:

1. Move the cursor to the start of the text where you want the new
typeface to begin.

2. Enter the UF command you want. For example, if you want Times:

Type: [F5]uf times0

Result: The UF command is embedded in the text as a triangle. From

this point forward, the text will be printed in the Times font.

NOTE Typeface Synonyms. To allow you to print documents on different

printers without changing the formatting, XyWrite has set up a table of
typeface synonyms. This table matches the requested typeface with one
that is similar to it for the current printer. For example, one printer may
offer Times while another offers TmesRmn. This synonym table is stored
in the XyWrite printer files.

Also See Related Commands. If you want to change the style of a typeface (say
from normal to bold), you use the MD (Mode) command. If you want to
change the type size of a typeface, you use the SZ (Size) command.

4-176
LA Language

FORMAT E5ZJLA codepage

codepage is either 437 or 850.
MENU Not a menu option.

Purpose The LA (Lanugage) command allows you to work with files that were
created in code page 437 (the United States code page) or 850 (the
multilingual code page). Code pages are language-specific character sets
that are supported by versions 3.30 and higher of MS-DOS and PC-DOS. A
code page has 256 characters, and the first 128 characters are the same in
every code page.

By default, XyWrite uses code page 437 (the United States code page) for
the first 256 characters of its character set (see Note #1). If you display a
file that was created in code page 850 (the multilingual code page), some
of the characters between 128 and 256 will display incorrectly. The LA
command lets you correct the display by mapping the 850 character set to
characters 128-256 for the current file.

Action Changing the Code Page

To change the code page for the current file to 850:
1. Move the cursor to the top of the file.

2. Type: EU la 850 H

Note #1
#i XyWrite Character Set. XyWrite's character set comprises over 900
characters, which includes characters from all the standard code pages,
plus the Bitstream international character set (see Appendix E of the
Customization Guide).

NOTE #2 Character Sets and Views. Expanded view always uses the characters in
code page 437;^Formatted and draft views display only the 256 characters
supported by the code page established by default or by the embedded LA
command. Graphic view uses the characters from the Bitstream outline
fonts that are delivered with XyWrite.

NOTE #3 Non-Displayable Characters. In all views, some characters are not

displayed, either because they are not part of the current code page or
because they are not part of the Bitstream Speedo fonts delivered with
XyWrite. If XyWrite cannot display a character, it displays its code
number in square brackets.

4-177
Language LA

NOTE #4 Signature Files. Signature, another word processing program produced

by the XYQUEST division of The Technology Group, used code page 850
as its default character set. If you want to use files created in Signature
without converting them permanently, embed the LA 850 command at the
top of each file.

NOTE #5 Default Setting. The default value for LA is 437 unless you change it in
the default file. Refer to "Default Settings" in the Customization Guide for
more information.

4-178
 Vertical Spacing

Intro To ensure readability of your printed page when you are mixing fonts of
different sizes, you must take into account the vertical spacing you are
using. Vertical spacing of type is measured from the baseline of one line to
the baseline of the next. This measurement is commonly referred to as lead
or leading. Printers allow leading to be adjusted in very small increments
as illustrated below.

CONTENTS Page Section Command

4-180 Automatic Leading AL

4-181 Extra Leading EL
4-182 Line Leading LL
4-183 Line Spacing LS

The amount of space between lines is known as leading.

There is no set rule to follow. Too much leading can
sometimes be as bad as not enough. Some typefaces re­
quire more leading than others. Sometimes the width of a

The amount of space between lines is known as leading.

There is no set rule to follow. Too much leading can
sometimes be as bad as not enough. Some typefaces re­
quire more leading than others. Sometimes the width of a

The amount of space between lines is known as leading.

There is no set rule to follow. Too much leading can

sometimes be as bad as not enough. Some typefaces re­

quire more leading than others. Sometimes the width of a

4-179
Automatic Leading AL

FORMAT BOTH AL 1
EQUAL 0
MENU ESniEEEEEffii

Purpose The AL command turns automatic leading off and on. When you turn
automatic leading on, XyWrite uses the leading value associated with the
current typeface and type size. If a line contains more than one typeface
or type size, XyWrite looks at the leading value for each one; it applies the
largest value to the line.

When automatic leading is off, XyWrite uses the value supplied by the LS
command and applies it to all lines, regardless of the size of the type being
used.

If you are using a laser printer and mixing type sizes within a document,
you probably want to use automatic leading. That way, you don't have to
worry about adjusting your line spacing to accommodate larger and
smaller type sizes.

Action Cancelling Automatic Leading

Automatic leading is on by default. To turn it off:

1. Move the cursor to the top of your document.

2. Type: [F5]al 00
Result: All text that follows the AL command automatically uses the
leading values specified by the LS (Line Spacing) command.

NOTE #1 Default Setting. You can turn automatic leading off for all files by setting
AL=0 in the default file. The initial default is 1 (on).

4-180
EL Extra Leading

FORMAT rWlEL n
n is the amount of space to insert after the current line
MENU lUneSpadn

Purpose EL inserts the specified amount of vertical space only once, at the end of
the current line. You must issue this command again for each line that
needs extra lead.

Action Inserting Extra Lead in a File

To insert extra lead in a file:

1. Move the cursor to the line after which you want extra leading.
2. Type: (F5]el .5^
Result: When you print the file, an extra .5 inch will appear once, after the
line where you inserted the EL command.

4-181
Line Leading LL

FORMAT E3ZJLL p,l

p is the amount of extra space between paragraphs.
1 is the amount of extra space between lines of text.

MENU EHIEEJEJS

Purpose LL allows you to automatically insert extra space between paragraphs. It

also allows you to modify the leading values for a document without
changing and reloading the printer file. Note that the values you specify
are added to whatever leading value is in effect.

Action Inserting Extra Vertical Space

To automatically insert 12 extra points between paragraphs and an extra 2
points between lines of text:

1. Move the cursor to the point where you want the extra vertical spacing
to begin (normally between paragraphs).

2. Enter the LL command with values for extra spaces between

paragraphs and between lines:
Type: |F5]II 12pt,2ptQ3

Result: When you PRINT the document, the spacing between paragraphs
will be increased by 12 points and the spacing between lines will be
increased by 2 points. This spacing remains in effect for the rest of the file
or until you issue a different LL command.

4-182
LS Line Spacing

FORMAT E3ULS n
n is the amount of space advanced by the printer.
Menu ees UneSpacin a
Purpose LS (Line Spacing) sets the amount of vertical space advanced by a printer
at the end of every line. Unlike Automatic Leading, LS does not take
different type sizes into account. It is therefore recommended for use
when you are applying the same type size to the entire document.

The LS command enables you to write a document single-spaced, but then

very easily print it out double-spaced, triple-spaced, etc. A few examples
of the LS command are:

• LS .251i is quarter-line spacing

• LS .51i is half-line spacing
• LS 1 li is single spacing (the default)
• LS 1.51i line-and-a-half spacing
• LS 21i is double spacing

Action Setting the Inter-Line Spacing

To set the amount of space output by the printer at the end of every line:

1. Move the cursor to the top of your document (or to the point where
you want to change the inter-line spacing).
2. Enter the LS command along with the inter-line spacing value you
want:
Type: [F5]ls 2li£j]
Result: This embedded command tells the printer to double-space this
document. Go ahead and use PRINT to print the document.

NOTE Automatic Leading. When Automatic Leading is in effect (AL 1), XyWrite
ignores LS commands and uses the leading information associated with
the current typefaces and point sizes.

4-183
 NOTES

4-184
 Special Features

INTRO Once you've learned the basics, it's time to go on to the extended
capabilities of XyWrite. We include step-by-step procedures for each of
the following topics. Commands are listed following each procedure.

Contents pafie Section

5-3 Columns
5-17 Document Assembly
5-25 Fill-In Forms
5-33 Mail Merge
5-55 Redlining
5-65 Sorting Text
5-77 Table of Contents & Index
5-97 User Programming

5-1
 NOTES

5-2
 Columns

The columns feature of XyWrite provides two basically different kinds of

column features: tables and newspaper-style columns. In both cases, text
within a column word-wraps within its own column. These two methods are
designed for different purposes.

Tables. Think of a table as a spreadsheet for text. You can create up to 12

columns on-screen with as many text entries in a column as you want.
You can add or delete text in any "cell” without disturbing any of the other cells.
This works great for handling blocks of text, such as in lists, calendars,
appointment books, and even screenplays (each stage character gets
his/her own column).

Newspaper-Style Columns. In this case, the text wraps from the bottom of
one column to the top of the next — a pattern referred to as "snaking." You
create your file as a single column and print it in up to 12 columns. This is
useful for printing long lists, reports or newsletters.

Contents page Section Command

5-4 Tables
5-6 Creating Tables CT, CO, EC
5-9 Editing Tables

5-11 Snaking Columns SN

5-14 Break Column BC
5-15 Snake Height SH

5-3
Tables

Purpose Suppose we want to set up a schedule of events in which we have the days
stretched across the top and activities listed down the page. See the
accompanying illustration.

Notice this table is made up of a number of text blocks, or "cells." This is

very much like a spreadsheet for text. You can enter as much or as little
text in each cell as you want without disturbing the other cells. The text
within a cell is considered an "entry."

Making a Text Table. The way to make such a table is described in the
next few pages. To summarize:

• Create the Column Structure. Use the CT (Create Table) command to

define the column widths. You can also define a format style for each
column.

• Enter the Text Then you enter the text into the table cells. Certain
keys allow you to add rows of cells to the table and to move about,
from cell to cell.

NOTE Planning Your Table. Before you start, plan the number of columns that
you need. If you know how many rows will be in the table, then add
them, also, before starting the text entry (using [Shift] A).

It's a good idea to have at least one row per page. In other words, you
should use [Shift] □ to create a new row of cells at least once per page, even if
a row continues for several pages.

5-4
(confd) Tables

TABLE
COLUMN CELL
ROW OF TEXT /
OFTEXT
Time Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday

9:00 AM Bus ll from Breakfast Breakfast Breakfast Breakfast

Atlanta (
....... J>
; Hike to • Swimming
Bus 12 from Paint the Clean up
Charlotte barn and • top of Mt.J the camp
mow the • Monadnauk ■
grass L_________ i

11:00 AM Assemble Chop

campers for firewood
orientation

12:00 PM Lunch Lunch Lunch on Lunch Lunch

top

2:00 PM Swimming Swimming Find lost Pottery Swimming

hikers workshop
Make a3h
trays

4:00 PM Counselors Tennis Swimming Tennis Load

Practice campers on
CPR the buse3
and move
'em out

5-5
Creating Tables CT, CO, EC

FORMAT EHZJCT offset,widthl,width!,... (Option 1)

ESO CT offset,widthl /stylel,width2/style2,.. (Option 2)
offset shifts the horizontal position of the table from the left margin.
widthl is the width of the first column,
width! is the width of the second column,
and so on up to 12 columns.
/stylel is the format style for the first column,
/style2 is the format style for the second column,
and so on up to 12 columns.
MENU EEJE5E8

Purpose The CT (Create Table) command sets up the basic structure for the table.
You define the column widths and, optionally, the styles for the columns.

The maximum number of columns you can specify is twelve. Notice that,
for the value offset, the left-most position (no offset) is 0. The amount of
space between columns of text is 0.1 inch by default. You can increase this
space with format commands — see "Creating a Table with Styles," one of
two methods described next to set up tables.

Action Creating a Table

(Option 1) To insert a table into a document:

1. Establish gutters (white space between columns) with the GU

command. The first value of GU is applied to inside columns and the
second value is applied to outside columns. The default value is .2,0.
To create an outside gutter of .1 inch while maintaining the inside
gutters of .2:

Type: [F5]gu 2...10

2. Enter CT along with an offset for positioning the table horizontally,

plus the starting position of each column. All numbers are measured
along the ruler. For example:

Type: [Fsjct 0,3,2,20

5-6
(confd) Creating Tables

Result: This sets up a three-column table; the first column runs from 0 to
2.9 inches, the second from 3 to 4.9 inches, and the last from 5 to 6.9
inches. Between the columns are gutters 0.1 inch wide. (Notice that this
command embeds four triangles into the text—CT, CO2, CO3 and EC. See
Note #3.) To add rows of cells to the table, press [Shift] Q (on the numeric
keypad).
NOTE #1 Typing in Text. You do not need to set up the number of lines of text in
each cell row beforehand. Simply enter text when you're ready; XyWrite
automatically pushes down the lower boundary of the whole row to fit it.
NOTE #2 Default Format The default format (line spacing, justification, etc.) for
each cell is the format in effect at the point the CT command was issued.
For example, if you establish a type size of 10 point for your document,
and then issue a CT command, the text in each cell is 10 point. If you have
an indent of 1 inch, it is applied to each cell. (The exception to this rule is
the cell width, which is determined by the values in the CT command.)
To establish a different format for the table, refer to the procedures
"Setting the Format for Single Cells" and "Creating a Table with Styles."
NOTE #3 Borders. You can use the BO (Border) command to draw lines around the
cells in a table. If you plan to do this, it's a good idea to define a small
gutter and a vertical offset for the table. These commands create white
space between the border and the text of the table. Use the GU command
to specify a gutter, and the EE and ET commands to specify a vertical
offset. The value of the GU (Gutter) command should accommodate the
width of the border plus any white space you want between the border
and the text. See Chapter 4 for more information about the BO, GU, EE,
and ET commands.

ACTION Setting the Format for Single Cells

(Option 1) As in the previous procedure, the CT command establishes the overall
column widths. In addition, if you wish, you can set up an entire text
format within an individual cell as you would with any document—using
the TS (Tab Set), IP (Indent Paragraph) or other format commands within
the cell boundaries. Because each cell is independent, other cells are
unaffected.

Once you have created a table, to change the format within a single cell:

1. Move the cursor to the cell you want to change. To get there, use [aF] 0
or [Aft] [2 to move left or right.

5-7
Creating Tables (confd)

2. Position the cursor within the cell at the point where you want to
change the format. Enter the format command you want. For instance,
in the previous example, the text width of the first cell was 2.9 inches.
To make the text narrower, you can change the right margin within the
cell:

Type: [fs]rm 2.50

Result: This changes the format within a single cell. To modify an entire
column, follow the next procedure.

ACTION Creating a Table with Styles

(Option 2) To create a table with styles:

1. Use SS to define the style you want within a column. When using
columns, RM 1 means set the right margin 1 inch from the left edge of
the cell. For example, create a style called BODY:
Type: [F5|ss body,ip=.2,rm=1 S
2. Create the table, assigning the style to the column(s) you want:
Type: [Fslct 0.2,1.1 /bodyCT
Result: The style BODY is assigned to the third column of text.

NOTE #4 Inserting Tables Within Other Page Elements. XyWrite does not allow
nesting of one table within another, nor does it allow a column table
inside a running header, running footer, or footnote.

NOTE #5 The CO and EC Commands. Entering the CT command automatically

enters other commands that define the boundaries of the columns. In the
example, when you entered the CT command, you also embedded the
commands CO2, CO3 and EC. If you look at the command markers going
from left to right, row by row:
CT starts the table.
CO2 separates the first and second cells of each row, CO3 separates the
second and third cells of each row, and so on.
CO1 separates the last cell in a row from the first cell in the next row.
EC indicates the end of the very last cell.
CO1 is present only if there is more than one row of cells.

5-8
 Editing Tables

FORMAT ®S Move Cursor One Column to the Left

Move Cursor One Column to the Right
[Shift] 0 (on numeric keypad) Delete a Row of Cells
[Shift] Q (on numeric keypad) Insert a New Row of Cells
MENU EEJES (see Note #1)

PURPOSE You use these keystrokes to move around and edit within tables. Refer to
the illustration at the beginning of this section. Think of the table as a grid
of cells. The table is very similar to a spreadsheet, except the cells have
variable lengths.
The text in any cell can run as long as you want—the cell will
automatically grow in length to accommodate the text. (The length of the
longest cell in a row determines the length of the entire row.)

ACTION Adding a Row of Cells to a Table

To add a new row of cells to an existing table:
1. Move the cursor to the row of cells above where you want to insert the
new row.
2. Press: [ShiftlfT] (on the numeric keypad)
Result: A new row of empty text cells is inserted below the current row.
The cursor moves to the first position of the empty cell below. Without
moving the cursor, you can begin typing text into that cell.

NOTE Changing the Width of a Column. To change the width of a column in an

existing table, move the cursor to the embedded CT command and press
[ctri][F8] for expanded view. Change the appropriate column width number.
When you return to formatted or graphic view, the column width is
changed and the row depth altered to fit the text in the row.

5-9
Editing Tables (confd)

Action Moving/Copying Text from One Cell to Another

To move or copy text from one cell to another:
1. Move to the beginning of the cell you want to move or copy.
2. Press: [F3]
3. Move to the end of the cell.
4. Press: [F3]
5. Move to the target cell.
6. Press [§30 to copy or fcFilM to move the text.

NOTE #1 Editing Tables via the Menus. The Table menu O, I, T) offers several
editing options that are not available through the keyboard. These options
allow you to:
• Delete tables, rows, and columns
• Select tables, rows, and columns
• Clear rows and columns
• Move rows and columns

NOTE #2 Selecting Text Within Cells. You can use [F3| (select a block of text) to
select text within a cell, but selecting by sentence and paragraph is
restricted. You cannot select text across cells using the keyboard (see Note
#1).

NOTE #3 Simple Columns with Hanging Indent If you have a one-line header or
number to the left of a paragraph (such as the style of this note), it may be
easier to use the IP (Indent Paragraph) command rather than the CT
command. For example:
1. Move to where you want to begin.
2. Type: [F5]ip 0,1.60
3. Type: [F^tS 1.60
Result: You can start each paragraph with a heading followed by a
tab—the paragraphs hang at 1.6 inches.

NOTE #4 Line Spacing. XyWrite displays actual line spacing in column tables, even
when you are in formatted view.

NOTE #5 Draft View. Column tables are not formatted in draft or expanded view.

5-10
SN Snaking Columns

FORMAT EB3SN cl,c2,c3,.. .£12

cl is the starting position of 1st column of text,
c2 is the starting position of 2nd column of text,
and so on, up to cl2.
, (comma) separates the values.
MENU

Purpose The SN (Snaking) command sets up single-column text to print in multiple

columns (up to 12) on a single page. The unique property here is that the
text wraps from the bottom of each column to the top of the next. (See the
illustration that follows.)
For example, suppose you have a telephone list of 300 people that would
take six pages to print out as one long, narrow list. You can use the SN
command to print this list as 6 columns on one page.
Or maybe you want to print a newsletter with two or more columns side-
by-side. The SN command lets you do that, too.
When you specify more than one column, XyWrite displays the multiple
columns as they will print. You can move from column to column by
pressing [Ah]0 or @ 0- If you turn off page breaks ([Ait][F8]), you will see only
one long column on the screen.

Action Snaking Columns

To print text with snaking columns, move to the top of the text.

1. Set up the columns using the snaking command SN. To create

columns of text starting at positions 0,3, and 5 inches:
Type: [F5)sn 0,3,50

2. Set the space between columns with the GU command. For example:
Type: [F5]gu .30

3. (Optional) Switch to graphic view to see how the columns look.

(Remember, you can move quickly between columns by pressing
and ® S-)

4. Print the text.

Type: [F5]print0

Result: The document has three columns, with a .3-inch gutter between
columns.

5-11
Snaking Columns (confd)

NOTE #1 Spacing Between Columns. If the spacing between columns is too tight,
you can either (1) make the gutters wider (and the text narrower) by
increasing the Gutter (GU) command, or (2) make the columns wider by
changing the starting positions of your columns within the SN command.
Refer to Chapter 4 for more information about the GU command.
NOTE #2 Column Breaks. When you want to break a column, use the BC (Break
Column) command. This causes the text which follows to start at the top
of the next column. If you are in the last column on a page, the new
column starts on the next page.
NOTE #3 Controlling Column Length. XyWrite uses the BT (Bottom Margin)
values for controlling the text length within the columns. Each column is
treated as a separate page. Widow and orphan settings are also observed
when determining the text length.
NOTE #4 Footnotes. You can add footnotes to your text. They print out at the foot of
the column they are referenced within. Be sure to define an FM command
that specifies the same width for footnotes as you have defined for the
columns; otherwise, the footnotes will use the full text width established
by default (6.5 inches).
NOTE #5 Borders. You can use the BO (Border) command to draw lines around
snaked columns. If you do, you may want to specify a gutter value for the
outside edges of the columns. Refer to Chapter 4 for more information
about the GU (Gutter) and BO (Border) commands.
NOTE #6 Page Break View. XyWrite displays the current page number, column
number and page depth in the header. For example, 5/003-2 in the header
refers to page 5, column 3, line depth 2 inches.
NOTE #7 Column Width. The width of each column is determined by the values in
the SN command. The width of the last column is determined by the
starting position of the column and the right offset (established by the OF
command).

5-12
(confd) Snaking Columns

SNAKING COLUMNS OF TEXT - PRINTOUT

Example: SN 1,3,5

1 3 5
I 1 1

I 1 1
I 1 1
I 1 1
I
1 1
All advert io- Copyright Act, it in Section 101 of
ing agencies and should be noted. the Copyright Act
public relations brought signifi­ of 1976,
firms must often cant changes in A ’collective
commission out- thio area. In *
work is defined
oide creative per- order for the ad by the Copyright
sons to assist m agency, as the Act as a work.
special projects. commissioning such as a peri­
The Copyright Act party, to retain odical issue, an­
of 1976 oubotan- the full bundle thology. or ency­
tially changed the of rights encom­ clopedia. inwhich
rules concerning passed by copy­ a number of con­
who owns the copy­ right it must tributions, con­
right in such com­ first be deter­ stituting sepa­
missioned works. mined that the rate and indepen­
The present ar­ work that will be dent works in
ticle will set performed by the themselves, are
forth some basic comm 1ssioned assembled into a
definitions and party fits into collective whole.
important guide­ cne of the follow­ A’conpilation’ is
lines in approach­ ing categories: defined as a work
ing typical com­ formed by the col -
mission situa­ 1) a contribution lection ar.d as­
tions. to a collec­ sembling of pre­
First of all. tive work existing materi­
one should be 2) a part of a als or of data
aware that in the motion picture that are selected.
employer-employee or other au- coordinated, or
situation, it is dio-visual arranged in such
well-established work a way that the
that the copyright 3) a translation resulting work as
m any work per­ 4) a supplemen­ a whole consti­
formed by the em­ tary work tutes an original
ployee. within the 5) a conpilation work of author­
scope of his em­ 6) an instruc­ ship. A 'supple­
ployment, belongs tional text mentary work’ is
to the employer. 7) a test a work prepared
In the com­ 8) answer materi­ for publ icat ion as
missioned situa­ als for a test a secondary ad­
tion. however. 9) an atlas junct to a work by
different rules another author for
apply. The en­ These catego­ the purpose of in­
actment of che new ries are set out troducing, con-

5-13
Break Column BC

FORMAT ESZJbc

MENU EH Column Break.. Insert Column Break

PURPOSE The EC (Break Column) command causes the text that follows to advance
to the top of the next column. If you issue this command on the last
column on a page, the new column starts on the next page.

If you don't use the BC command, XyWrite creates column breaks for you,
after the number of text lines established by the BT (Bottom Margin) or SH
(Snake Height) command.

ACTION Inserting a Column Break

To create a column break within snaked text:

1. Move the cursor to the line before where you want the column to
break.

2. Enter the BC command.

Type: EJbcS

Result: The next column starts on the line following the BC command.

5-14
 Snake Height

FORMAT ESZJSH n
n is the depth of the columns for snaked text.
MENU Column Break.. Set Column Depth

PURPOSE The SH (Snake Height) command sets the depth for snaked columns when
you want the columns to be shorter than the standard text length.

In general, XyWrite uses the text length defined by the TP (Top Margin)
and BT (Bottom Margin) commands when determining column breaks.
Sometimes, there may not be enough text on the last page of columnar
material to fill all the columns. With the SH command, you can create
shorter columns that are more evenly balanced.

ACTION Setting the Column Height

To set the column height within a snaked column:

1. Move the cursor to the spot within the snaked column where you
would like to change the column height.

2. To set a height of 4 inches:

Type: [F5]sh 40

Result: The snaked columns now have a height of 4 inches.

5-15
 NOTES

5-16
 Document Assembly

Intro XyWrite gives you the ability to build customized documents using
standard paragraphs (boilerplate) from other documents. This section first
describes the procedure for assembling documents, and then describes
each of the commands in detail.

Contents page section Command

Document Assembly Procedure
5-19 Part I. Create the Source File
5-20 Part II. Create the Template File
5-21 PartHI. Assemble the Custom Document

Document Assembly Commands

5-23 Document Build DOCBLD
5-24 Put Paragraph PP

5-17
Document Assembly Procedure

PURPOSE The Document Assembly feature lets you build a customized document
from other documents, or selected sections of other documents. You can
organize the pieces in any order, and you can include as many or as few
pieces as you want.

You might use this feature if you are responsible for preparing contracts;
you can build a library of standard paragraphs, and create customized
contracts by pulling in just those paragraphs that apply.

The basic procedure for Document Assembly has three parts:

• Part I. Create the source files. These files contain the standard
paragraphs from which you want to select for your assembled
documents.

• Part 11. Create the template file. The template file contains custom text
and formatting commands, as well as the PP (Put Paragraph)
commands to insert the paragraphs you want from the source files.

• Part III. Assemble the source files and template file to create the final,
customized document. You can assemble the file and send it directly to
the printer with the PRINT command or you can create a new file that
you can edit with the DOCBLD command.

Optionally, you can combine some Mail Merge features with Document
Assembly to create multiple versions of your assembled documents. For
example, you might want to assemble the same lease for two different
apartments or two different tenants. To do this, you use the PF (Put Field)
and FI (Field Identification) commands.

5-18
(confd) Document Assembly Procedure

ACTION Performing Basic Document Assembly

This procedure has three separate parts to it, which we list here as one
sequence.

PART I Create the source file. To begin, open a file and give it a name (we'll
use SOURCE).
Type: [F5]new source CT

2. Write the text you want to select from when you build your custom
documents. You will be able to use this text repeatedly, rearranging
and omitting sections according to your needs.

3. Use LB (Label) commands to identify the separate sections. (A section is

anything between two labels, or between a label and the end of file.)
The labels can be a combination of up to 20 letters and numbers;
numbers used alone have a special meaning (see Note #1).
a. Move the cursor to the beginning of the section you want to label.
b. Type the label. For example:

Type: [F5]lb rent0

c. Move the cursor to the beginning of the next section you want to
label and repeat step b, using a unique label name.
d. Repeat step c until all sections are labeled.

4. Store the source file. You have now completed the source file, so store
it.

5. Create additional source files (optional). If you have a lot of material,

you may want to organize it into several source files. XyWrite's
Document Assembly feature lets you copy text from as many different
source files as you need.

NOTE #1 Numbered Sections. You can also use the PG (Page Break) command to
separate the sections in a source file. If you use this option rather than
labels, you refer to the sections by page number when you create the
template file. Thus, you cannot use numbers as label names unless they
are combined with letters (e.g., 1st is an acceptable label name but 1 is
not).

5-19
Document Assembly Procedure (confd)

PART II 6. Create the template file. Decide on a name for your template file.
We'll use the name LEASE, since we are going to build a customized
lease from text stored in SOURCE.

7. Type in the appropriate formatting commands. Let's say you want

the lease to be in 9 point Times:
Type: [FsJijf times0
Type: [F5]sz9pt0

8. Type in the custom text (optional). Custom text is text that is

associated only with this file. There is no need to store it in a source
file because it won't appear in any other document.

9. Type in the PP (Put Paragraph) commands. Use the PP command to

place sections from the source files wherever you want them to be
inserted into your assembled document. For example, to insert the
section labeled RENT from the file SOURCE:

Type: [Fsjpp source,rents

10. Store the template file. You have now completed the template file, so
store it.

Type: [fs] storeS

NOTE #2 File Location. The template and source files must be in the same
directory.

5-20
(cant'd) Document Assembly Procedure

PART in ll- Assemble the final document To assemble the document and send it
directly to the printer, use the PRINT command. For example:
Type: Sprint leased
where LEASE is the name of the template file. If you want to review
the assembled version before printing, use the PRINTS command.
Type: [F5]prints Iease0
If you want to be able to edit the assembled file before printing, you
can create a new file with the DOCBLD command. For example:
Type: [Fsjdocbld lease,lease.asm0
where LEASE is the name of the template file and LEASE.ASM is the
file created by DOCBLD. You can display LEASE.ASM and edit it
before sending it to the printer.

ACTION Personalizing Assembled Documents

Let's say you want to create personalized leases. First you need to create
the data file that contains the variable information you need to personalize
the leases.
1. Create a data file for the tenants' information.
Type: [fs]new tenantsS
2. Type in the data. Type a tab between each field. For example:
-
Type: Ross, Betsy Unit No. 1776
*
-
Type: Columbus, Chris Unit No. 1492
*
3. Store the data file.
4. Call (or create) the template file.
5. At the beginning of the file, enter the FI (Field Identification) command
to assign field names to the fields in the data file (see Note #3). For
example:
Type: [F5]fi name,unit0
6. Enter the PF (Put Field) commands (see Note #3) to place the fields
wherever you want the data to be inserted. For example:
Type: [F5]pf name0
7. Store the template file.

5-21
Document Assembly Procedure (confd)

8. Print the personalized, final documents (see Note #4). In our example,
the data file is named TENANTS and the template file is named
LEASE.
Type: [fs] print tenants+leaseS
(You can review the assembled file before printing by issuing the
PRINTS + command.)

NOTE #3 Variable Fields in Source Files. You can insert PF (Put Field) commands
into either the template file or source files to place information from the
data file. Always put the FI (Field Identification) command in the
template file, regardless of which file contains the PF commands.

NOTE #4 Creating Permanent Files. If you are using a data file as part of the
document assembly procedure, the DOCBLD command lets you create a
file that merges the template file with the designated sections of the source
files and the first record of the data file. You can review this version for
accuracy before you print all the records with the PRINT + command.
The format of the DOCBLD command with a data file is:

Type: [g]docbld tenants+leaseS

ALSO SEE Related Information. Refer to "Mail Merge" in Chapter 5 for more
information on data files and the PF, FI, and PRINT + commands.

5-22
DOCBLD Document Assembly

FORMAT bwi DOCBLD d:filename,d:targetfile

taWflDOCBLD d:datafile+d:filename,targetfile
filename is the name of the template file that defines the document you
want to assemble.
targetfile is the name of the assembled file.
datafile is the name of the data file that contains the variable fields.
MENU | Assemble Doc

PURPOSE DOCBLD creates a new file based on the instructions in the template file.
The instructions determine which paragraphs get copied from the source
files, and in what order.

You create the source files, data files, and template files as described
earlier in the section "Document Assembly Procedures." The DOCBLD
command takes these files and assembles a new one. There are two ways
you can assemble a file with DOCBLD:
• Assembling a file without variable data
told DOCBLD d:filename^: targetfile
• Assembling a file with variable data
ESl3 DOCBLD d:datafile+d:filename,d:targetfile

ACTION Assembling a File Without Variable Data

When you are ready to assemble your new document, enter the DOCBLD
command using the format given above. For example, if the template
filename is CONTRACT and you want the target file to be named
CONTRACT.REG:

Type: [Fsjdocbld contract,contract.reg0

ACTION Assembling a File With Variable Data

If the document you want to assemble includes variable data from a data
file, you can use the DOCBLD + command to create a permanent version
of the first record from the data file. You can use this version as a review
copy before you process the entire data file with the PRINT + command.
For example, if the data filename is REG, the template filename is
CONTRACT, and you want the target file to be named CONTRACT.REG:

Type: [F5]docbld reg+contract,contract.reg0

5-23
Put Paragraph PP

FORMAT ESZJPP filename,label

filename is the name of the file that contains the source text
label (optional) is the name or number of the text block. If omitted,
XyWrite places the entire file into the assembled document.
Menu Assemble Doc

Purpose The PP (Put Paragraph) command identifies the block of text you want to
copy into your assembled file. You enter the PP command into the
template file, specifying the name of the file that contains the text and
either a number or a name:

ESOPP source .conditio ns Copies the text labeled "conditions" from

the file SOURCE into the assembled file
(see Note #1).

EMpp source,1 Copies the text on page 1 of the file

SOURCE into the assembled file.

Action Inserting Paragraphs into the Template File

To insert a paragraph into the template file, move the cursor to the point in
the file where you want to place a paragraph, and enter the PP command.

Type: [F5]pp rights,termination^

Result: This command is embedded in the template file as

APPirights,termination. On assembly, text labeled "termination" is copied
from the source file RIGHTS into the final document (see Note #1).

NOTE #1 Labeled Sections. All the text between the specified label and the next
label is copied into the final document. If the specified label is the last
label in the source file, then all the text between the specified label and the
end of the source file is copied into the final document.

5-24
 Fill-in Forms

Intro XyWrite provides you with the ability to fill in preprinted forms—or
create your own forms to fill in. Typical forms are questionnaires,
surveys, tax forms, credit applications, and invoices—any sheet that needs
to be filled in with information.

This section begins with a general procedure for filling in preprinted

forms and then describes the commands.

Contents page section Command

Fill-In Forms Procedure

5-26 Creating the Form File
5-28 Filling in the Form

Commands
5-30 New Form NEF
5-31 Call a Form CAF

5-25
Fill-in Forms Procedure

PURPOSE The best place to start is by looking at the illustration on the next page. A
typical scenario is this:

Filling in a Preprinted Form. You might start with a preprinted form like
the one shown. You wish to feed this into your printer and fill in the
blanks using XyWrite. This procedure is easy:

• Create the Form File. You create a form file to match your preprinted
form.

• Fill in the Form File. To fill in the preprinted form, you type into the
blanks of the form file you created. You then print onto your
preprinted form.

ACTION Creating the Form File

To create a form file, do the following:

1. Print the Grid (optional). Print the file GRID onto an extra copy of
your preprinted form (see Note #2). Do this as follows:

Insert an extra copy of your preprinted form into your printer. Note the
position of the form as you insert it, so that later you can insert other pages
the same way.

Type: [F5]print gridH

Result A grid pattern of numbers overwrites the preprinted form, giving

you coordinates for step 3. (If the preprinted form has non-standard
vertical spacing, you can add line spacing commands directly into GRID
to make the pages coincide.)

2. Start a New File. Open a new file. Let's call it M ASTER.FRM:

Type: [F5]new master.frm£3

While it is not required, we recommend that you use the extension

.FRM on all master forms.

5-26
(confd) Fill-in Forms Procedure

ZIP

5-27
Fill-in Forms Procedure (cord'd)

3. Duplicate the Preprinted Form. Now duplicate the preprinted form

by typing it into your computer as follows. Using the page you printed
in Step 1 as a guide, enter the text and fill-in areas at the lines and
columns indicated:
• Enter the fixed text in reverse mode. For example, to enter the word
NAME:
Type: [F5]md n/0
Type: Name
• Enter the blank fill-in areas in normal mode. For example:
Press: FctrilN
Press: Ispace Bar| as many times as vou need to establish the length
of the fill-in area. Do not use [Tab] (it will not work properly with
NEFor CAF).

Repeat the previous two tasks until you have entered all the text and fill-in
areas. When you have finished the form file, store it:
Type: [F5]storeH
Result: You are now done creating a blank fill-in form. This is your
master template.

Action Filling in the Form

To fill in a preprinted form using the form file you produced earlier (in
"Creating the Form File"):
1. Create the Working Form. Make a working copy of the form file. Let's
call this copy WORKFORM.
Type: [fs]net workform.master.frm0
Result: You have created a new form with spaces waiting for you to fill
in. Notice that the cursor moves only in the fill-in areas.

2. Fill in the Blanks. Fill in the blanks of this working copy by typing
into them. For instance, after NAME:
Type: Betsy Ross
Result: This form file looks like:
ICT Betsy Ross «-

Pol E3 <-
Notice the words "NAME," "ADDRESS," "STATE," and "ZIP" are
fixed text; you cannot alter them. You move the cursor from one field
to the next with the 0 key.

5-28
(confd) Fill-in Forms Procedure

3. Print the Forms. Finally, insert the preprinted form into your printer.
Be sure to position the paper the same as you positioned the page you
printed the grid onto (in "Creating the Form File"). Print the
information from the working form:
Type: [F5]printg3
The fixed text will not print; only the information entered in the blanks
(during Step 2) is printed.

NOTE #1 Edit a Form File. If you should ever need to call up a working form file to
change only the text in the fill-in areas, use the CAF command. For
example, if the form is named WORKFORM:
Type: [F5]caf workform0
To edit a master form file, use the CALL command.

NOTE #2 Using the File GRID. To locate the fill-in areas of your preprinted form,
we provide a file called GRID (stored in the \DOCS directory). You print
the following grid onto an extra copy of your preprinted form:
Line 1 78901234567890123456789012345678
012345678901234567890123456789012345678
Line 3 78901234567890123456789012345678
012345678901234567890123456789012345678

NOTE #3 Carriage Return. If you enter the carriage return 0 in normal mode, the
length of the blank area will be flexible, adjusting to the length of the text
being entered—even if it is several lines. If you enter the carriage return
in reverse mode, it fixes the length of the blank area.

NOTE #4 Printing Fixed Text In the earlier procedure, the fixed text did not print.
You can cause the fixed text to be printed by using [ctrilB (bold) or MU
(underline) or [CtrilI (italic) for fixed text instead of reverse. When you print
the form file, the fixed text will print out in the character mode you
chose—either bold, underline, or italic.

NOTE #5 Printer File Requirement All XyWrite printer files come prepared for
printing on preprinted forms—they are set up to not print any text
displayed in the reverse mode. (Each character displayed in reverse mode
is printed as a space.)

NOTE #6 Inserting the Date and Time. XyWrite's automatic date (TODAY and DA)
and time (NOW, SEC, and TM) commands do not work in forms. If your
form includes a date or time field, you must type in the required
information.
5-29
New Form NEF

FORMAT BSD NEF d:workform, d:masterform

d: is the letter of the drive you want to use.
workform is the name you specify for the new form.
masterform is the master form file that you want to copy from.
MENU

Purpose NEF (New Form) creates a working copy of the master form file. This
copy is a new, blank form, ready for you to fill in.

NEF functions the same as NEW, except NEF prevents you from altering
any text which is not in normal mode. Text that is in reverse, underline,
italic, or bold is fixed text.

Action Starting a New Fill-In Form from a Master

To start a new fill-in form (say, INVOICED from a master (called
MASTER.FRM):

Type: [Fsjnef invoice!,master.frm0

Result: This creates a new file called INVOICE1 and copies the contents of
MASTER.FRM into it. XyWrite will not create a new file if one with the
same name already exists on the specified drive.

NOTE Unprotected Mode. By default, normal mode is the unprotected form

mode, which means you can edit text that appears in it. If you want to
make a different mode unprotected, change the MF (Mode for Forms)
default setting. For more information, refer to "Default Settings" in the
Customization Guide.

5-30
CAF Call a Form

FORMAT RTflCAF d:workform

d: is the letter of the drive you want to use.
workform is the name of a form.
Menu

Purpose CAF (Call Form) calls a working form file from the disk to the display for
changing or adding to the information in the fill-in areas.

Any fixed text (reverse, underline, italic, or bold) cannot be altered. (To
modify fixed text, use the CALL command instead.)

Action Calling a Working Form

Call the form file you want to fill in. For example, if its name is
TAXFORM:

Type: Eicaf taxform[Z]

Result: This file is ready for you to revise in the fill-in areas. (Notice the
cursor is confined to the fill-in areas.)

NOTE Any File is a Working Form. Technically, any file can be called up as a
working form with CAF. When it is, the cursor moves only in areas that
are displayed in normal mode — not into areas that are reverse, underline,
italic, or bold. This points out that what confines the cursor is the manner
in which you call the file (CALL or CAF), rather than anything special
about the file itself.

5-31
 NOTES

5-32
 Mail Merge

INTRO This section fully describes the Mail Merge feature of XyWrite. We begin
this section with an overview and a complete example of the basic Mail
Merge procedure. You can model your own Mail Merge application after
the examples presented, and may have to read little else in this section.
Following these procedures are descriptions of the basic Mail Merge
commands.

The last topics in this section are some special instructions you can
incorporate into the Mail Merge operation. These instructions can
establish conditions you want to be met before the merge takes place, or
they can define mathematical evaluations you want XyWrite to perform.

Contents page section Command

Mail Merge Procedure

5-36 Part I. Create the Data File
5-37 Part II. Create the Main File
5-38 Part III. Preview the Finished Versions

Mail Merge Commands

5-40 Field Identification FI
5-41 Put Field PF
5-44 Print to Printer PRINT +
5-44 Print File to Screen PRINTS +
5-44 Print File to Disk PRINTF +
5-45 Repeat Records RR

Mail Merge Separators

5-46 Record Separator RS
5-47 Field Separator FX

Mail Merge Options

549 Conditional Instructions IF
5-53 Mathematical Instructions EV

5-33
Mail Merge Procedure

PURPOSE What Is Mail Merge? Mail Merge enables you to create multiple versions
of a document more easily than you could create them manually, one-by-
one. You could, for instance, create a dozen individual letters from a
general form letter (main file) and a dozen addresses (data file). To print
the dozen letters, you issue a single command (PRINT +), which merges
the addresses and form letter as it prints them.

Why Use Mail Merge? Mail Merge removes the tedium of typing many
versions of a document. It is useful when creating many nearly identical
documents which are personalized at critical points such as name, address
and salutation. These can include letters, contracts, notices, and
statements.

Mail Merge requires you to leam only two new commands: Put Field (PF)
and Field Identification (FI). The following instructions should allow you
to use Mail Merge when you want.

The basic procedure for Mail Merge has three parts, as illustrated in the
accompanying figure.

• Part I. Create the Data File. It contains a series of records. The records
are made up of fields, which are inserted at the markers in the main
file. The field information individualizes each version of the main file.

• Part II. Create the Main File. This is the form letter — it contains the
text which is common to all finished versions, along with markers that
indicate where record data should be inserted.

• Part III. Merge and Print the Finished Versions. This is where you
combine and print the file created in the two previous steps. You use
the simple command:

Sprint datafile+mainfilett

5-34
(confd) Mail Merge Procedure

MAIL MERGE

Part I. Create the Data File Part II. Create the Main File
(File name DATA) (File name LETTER)

Betsy Ross
A
two
bolts of red cloth Dear AETdMIM.ll:
$17.76

Peter Cottontail
one dozen We would like to Inform you that your
carrots
$1.75 Id dF-li'iMITTl
check for ▲ [PF: amount has been received,
and we have shipped you the requested
Miss Muffet
one pint AlddMIM.M AE^m.
curds and whey
$.85
J J

Part III. Merge and print the Finished Versions

PRINT DATA + LETTER

Version 1
Version 2
Version 3

Dear Betsy Ross:

Dear Peter Cottontail:
Dear Miss Muffet:
We would like to inform
you that your check for We would like to inform
you that your check for We would like to inform
$17.76 has been received, you that your check for
and we have shipped you $1.75 has been received,
and we have shipped you $.85 has been received,
the requested two bolts and we have shipped you
of red cloth. the requested one dozen
carrots. the requested one pint
curds and whey.

5-35
Mail Merge Procedure (cant'd)

Action Creating Mail Merge Documents

This procedure has three separate parts to it, which we list here as one
sequence.

PARTI 1. Create the Data File. Decide on a name for your data file. We'll use
the name DATA, since it will contain our clients' data. (This data will
be inserted later into the main file.)

Type: [Fslnew data CT

2. Type in the Data. Our example starts with the client name, which is
followed by the quantity, item, and amount. Here is one record:

Betsy Ross two bolts of red cloth $17.76«-

When entering the data, use these rules:

• Type a tab between fields of data; if the field is empty, type the tab
anyway.

• End the last field in a record with a carriage return—this puts each
record on it own line. (When printing with mail merge, each record
results in another version of the letter.)

3. Store the Data File. You have now completed the data file, so let's
store it.

Type: [F5]storeCT

DATA FILE

Betsy Ross field 1

two field 2 record 1
bolts of red cloth field 3
$17.76 field 4

Peter Cottontail field 1

one dozen field 2 record 2
carrots field 3
$1.75 field 4

Miss Muffet field 1

one pint field 2 record 3
curds and whey field 3
$.85 field 4

5-36
(confd) Mail Merge Procedure

PART II 4. Create the Main File. To begin, open a file and give it a name (we'll
use the name LETTER):

Type: [F5]new letterH

Write the text you want, as in the illustration below.

Use PF (Put Field) to place fields wherever you want data to be

inserted. To insert the field "client" for instance:

Type: [F5]pf clients

You may use a field in more than one place within the letter.

5. Add the Field Identification. This command links the field names
(created in the previous step) to the order of fields in the data file.

Move the cursor to the top of your letter, anywhere ahead of the first

5-37
Mail Merge Procedure (confd)

Enter the FI command and the field names in the order that they
appear in the data file (rather than their order in the letter).
Type: [F5]fi client, quantity, item, amount 0
Result: This FI command is embedded in the letter as a triangle.

6. Store the Main File. You have now completed the main file, so let's
store it.
Type: [glstoreH

PART in 7. Preview the Finished Versions. If you wish, you may display the
finished versions of the letter on the screen, before printing them on
paper (see Note #3). Use the command:
Type: [Fsjprints data+letterO
where DATA and LE ITER are the names of the data file and main file
created in Parts I and II, respectively.
8. Print the Finished Versions. If the displayed versions look fine, then
print them with the command:
Type: [gjprint data+letterg3
A different version of LETTER is printed for each record it finds in the
data file. The following is the first of the three finished versions.

FINISHED VERSION

O i
i To
O i
;o
O i
!°
i
O i Dear Betsy Ross: i O
O i
i
! °
O i We would like to inform you « O
O i
i
that your check for $17.76 has ! O
O i been received, and we have [ O
i
O i shipped you the requested two i O
O i bolts of red cloth. ! O
O
i
i !o

5-38
(confd) Mail Merge Procedure

NOTE #1 Importing Data. The data file could just as well originate from some other
mail list manager or data base program, such as dBase III or R-Base, as
long as it's an ASCII file. If it's not already in the format of a tab between
fields, you can either: (1) modify the Mail Merge separators to accept the
data, or (2) do a search-and-replace on the data file to make it conform to
the Mail Merge format.
NOTE #2 Changing the Separators. If you have a special application, you can
change the characters which separate fields and records. You would use
FX (Field Separator) and RS (Record Separator) in your default file. These
are described later in this section.
NOTE #3 Graphic View. You cannot review the merged files in graphic view.

5-39
Field Identification

FORMAT E3ZJFI fieldl,field2,field3,...

fieldl is the name you specify (with the PF command) for the first field in
each record,
field2 is the name you specify (with the PF command) for the second field
in each record, and so on.
MENU EJHE3 CSE3E3 ES0

Purpose FI (Field Identification) assigns descriptive names to fields for use in the
main file. It links the order of fields in each record in the data file to the
names used in PF commands in the main file. FI is required if you use
field names, but not if you use field numbers.

Action Entering the Field Identification

Insert the FI command into the main file as follows:
1. Position the cursor at the beginning of the main file, ahead of any Put
Field command.
2. Enter FI along with all fields used in the main file but ordered as they
appear in the data file. Using the example given in the earlier Mail
Merge procedure:
Type: (F5]fi client,quantity,item,amount^
Result: This command is embedded in the text, displayed as a triangle.
The above statement would be the proper Field Identification
statement for the following record:

Betsy Ross two bolts of red cloth $17.76

i-------------- 1 i—i i______________ i i_____i
T t T T
client quantity item amount

Notice that the field names are listed in the order that the fields appear
in the record in the data file, rather than the order they appear in the
main file. These four names are the names which you have used in the
main file—names which identify the fields.

NOTE #1 Skip a Field. You do not need to name all fields in a record. You can skip
a field by leaving its position blank but keeping the commas. If, in the
previous example, your letter used the first and third fields but not the
second and fourth, you could specify:
[F5]fi client„itemS

NOTE #2 Field Numbers. The FI command is not required in a main file if you
refer to the fields by number rather than by name. Refer to the Put Field
command for further details.
5-40
PF Put Field

FORMAT PF field
field is a name or number
MENU E2HE]E3E?n ESSED

PURPOSE The PF (Put Field) command places a field from the data file within the
text of the main file. Refer to the illustrations earlier in this section for
examples. You enter the PF command into the main file, specifying either
a number or a name:

EWpf client Includes a field named "client" in the main file.

LELiXJpf 1 Includes a field in the main file. This field receives its
data from the first field in each record. Thus, the
number refers to the position of the field in each record.

ACTION Inserting Fields into the Main File

To insert a field into the main file:

1. As you type the main file, when you reach the point in the text where
you want to place a field, enter the PF command. Select a general
name which identifies the field, such as "client," "item" or "quantity";
for example:

Type: [F5]pf client0

Result: This command is embedded in the letter as APF:client. On

printout, the effect of the PF command is as follows (using the example
given in the previous Mail Merge Procedure). The field named
"client" is replaced in successive documents by: Betsy Ross, Peter
Cottontail, and Miss Muffet.

2. When using a field name, be sure to include that name in an FI (Field

Identification) command at the beginning of the main file.

5-41
Put Field (confd)

NOTE #1 Field Name. Field names can make the main file far easier to read than
field numbers. You can use field names that describe what the field is. See
the illustration below for an example. When a field name is used, the FI
command must also be used to link those names to the fields in the data
records.

NOTE #2 Field Number. Use the field number when it is easier to refer to a field by
its numbered place in the record (than to assign it a name). However, field
numbers generally make a document harder for others to read than a
name would. The illustration below makes a comparison between field
names and field numbers.

5-42
(confd) Put Field

The fields obtain their numbers from the order in which they appear in the
data file. Thus, a record to fit the previous illustration (Field Numbers)
would have its fields listed in the following order:

client
quantity
item
amount

Using field numbers is a shortcut, since no FI (Field Identification)

command is needed. The FI command is needed only when using field
names.

The previous example using field numbers is given simply to illustrate the
equivalence of field numbers and field names. A more practical example
of field numbers would be one where you were using only a few fields
from a record of enormous length. It might be easy to refer to an item in
the record as field number 45. (The alternative would be to give field 45 a
name with the Field Identification command; however, the FI command
would require 44 commas ahead of the specified field name.)

5-43
Printing Mail Merge Documents PRINT+

FORMAT KTO PRINT datafile+mainfile„P

kvt fl PRINTS datafile+mainfile
frKMl PRINTF datafile+mainfile,targetfile
datafile is the data file (containing the records).
mainfile is the main file (form letter).
„P (optional) causes the printer to stop after each page; resume with Q.
Menu E2HE3EDE33

Purpose PRINT + merges record data into a main file and outputs the results to a
printer. The records are listed in a data file; one document is printed for
each record. See the previous Mail Merge Procedure for illustrations.
These three commands operate like the normal PRINT, PRINTS and
PRINTF commands you are probably already familiar with, except that
PRINTS + requires that both the main file and data file be stored.

If the data file is currently displayed, you can omit the datafile name and
type:

PRINT +mainfile or PRINTF +mainfile

Similarly, if the main file is currently displayed, you can omit the mainfile
name and type:

PRINT datafile+ or PRINTF datafile+

You can use a selected block as the data file with PRINT and PRINTF (but
not with PRINTS).

Action Printing Mail Merge Documents

When you are ready to print the Mail Merge versions, enter PRINT using
the format given above. For example, with a data file named DATA and a
main file named LETTER:

Type: [F5]print data+letterH

Result: This statement merges the records from DATA into the LEITER
as it prints. Once printing begins, you are free to continue editing other
files while printing continues in the background.

5-44
RR Repeat Records

FORMAT EWIRR
MENU Not a menu option.

Purpose The RR (Repeat Record) command allows you to create a main file that
behaves somewhat differently from a normal mail merge file. Instead of
generating a separate document for each record, a main file created with
the RR command strings the information for each record together in one
continuous file. This is ideal for generating mailing labels.

Action Creating a File with Repeat Records

To use Repeat Records in a main file that will generate mailing labels:
1. Open a new file.
Type: [F5]new labels 0
2. Enter the RR command.
Type: fFs]rr[7j]
Result: The Repeat Record window opens in the top of the screen.
3. Enter the NB (Non-Breakable Block) command to ensure that a mailing
address isn't broken across two different labels.
Type: fFslnbCTH
4. Enter the PF commands that you want to extract from your data file.
For instance:
Type: [F5]pf 10
Type: [F5]pf 20
Type: (F5]pf 30
5. Enter the BB (Breakable Block) command.
Type: [F5]bbH
6. Press |Shift|[Fi1 to close the command window and store the file.

NOTE #1 Depth of Label. It's a good idea to add enough carriage returns inside the
RR command window to fill up the depth of the mailing label. To
vertically center the mailing address on the label, you may want to enter
one or two carriage returns before the PF commands and the balance after
the PF commands.
NOTE #2 Multi-Column Labels. If you are printing multi-column labels, add the
SN (Snake) command to establish the number of columns and the starting
point of each.

5-45
Mail Merge Separators FX, RS

FORMAT FX=separator Field Separator

RS=separator Record Separator
separator is the new string of characters
Menu mjw&i mb atafl

PURPOSE FX and RS redefine the characters that separate fields and records in a
data file. You enter these definitions into the default file or from the
command line with the DEFAULT command. All characters between the
equals sign and the carriage return become the new separator.

The Mail Merge separator commands may be useful when you import a
data file from another program to be used as a data file for Mail Merge. If
the data file you import uses different field separators, simply redefine FX
in your default file. This way you can change Mail Merge to accommo­
date the data file rather than vice versa.

FX (Field Separator) redefines the separator between fields in the data file.
The default is a tab (see Note #2).

RS (Record Separator) redefines the separator between records in the data

file. The default is a hard return, represented on screen as each record
is on its own line.

ACTION Changing the Mail Merge Separators

You can enter both separators using this same procedure.

1. Call the default file. For example:

Type: [Fsjcall settings.dflH

2. Search for the separator you want to change. For example:

Type: [F5]se/FX=/

3. Move the cursor after the equal sign and replace the existing separator
with the new separator character(s).

4. Type: [F5]store 0

5. Type: [Fsjload settings.dflEl

Result: Step 4 loads the new separator into memory in order for it to take
effect.

5-46
(confd) Mail Merge Separators

NOTE #1 Default File. You enter FX and RS into the default file. Each of these must
appear on its own line in the default file. After you change a value, you
must reload the file using the LOAD command (Step 4 above).

If you use different Mail Merge separators for different data files, you
might create a "default file" that contains nothing but the field and record
separators. Keep it with its data file, and load it only when needed (using
LOAD). You might call it datafile.DFL.

NOTE #2 Default Command. If you want to change the FX or RS separator

temporarily, you specify it with the DEFAULT command. Refer to
"Defaults" in the Customization Guide for more information.

NOTE #3 Displaying Tab Characters. By default tab characters are only displayed
in expanded view, where they appear as 0. You can display tabs in draft
and formatted views by changing the ST (Show Tabs) default setting to 2.
When ST is set to 2, tabs appear in draft and formatted views as (Refer
to "Default Settings" in the Customization Guide for more information.)

NOTE #4 Carriage Return/Line Feed. It is important to remember that XyWrite's

hard return (<-) actually represents two characters: a carriage return and a
line feed (in that order). To use a carriage return or line feed as part of the
separator definition, you must enter them as follows:

• Carriage Return: [Ctrl] [Ait] 13

The code appears as a /.

• Line Feed: [Ctrl] [Ait] 10

The code appears as a D.

5-47
Mail Merge Options

Intro XyWrite allows you to embed some optional commands in the main
document file. These commands represent instructions that direct XyWrite
to perform certain tasks before or during the merge. There are two catego­
ries of these instructions:

• Conditional instructions. You use these instructions when you want a

field to match the condition you specify.

• Mathematical instructions. You use these instructions when you want

to perform a calculation and insert the result in the merged file.

5-48
IF Conditional Instructions

FORMAT EOTZlIF (condition)

RITZ! El
(condition) is the condition you want to check
Menu EnsjonzfflEffl

Purpose A conditional instruction is an IF statement that compares the contents of a

field with a variable. You insert the IF statement in the main file. When
you merge the main file and data file, XyWrite checks each record in the
data file against the condition in the IF statement. If the condition is met,
XyWrite prints the text that is between the IF statement and the El (End If)
command; if the condition is not met, XyWrite ignores the text between
the IF statement and the El command.

You can use IF statements to test for the following conditions:

• Field equals the variable (==)
• Field does not equal the variable (<>)
• Field is greater than the variable (>)
• Field is greater than or equal to the variable (>=)
• Field is less than the variable (<)
• Field is less than or equal to the variable (<=)
The condition part of the command has the following format:

(fieldop"variable")

where field is a field number (fl, f2, etc.) or field name in brackets (e.g.,
ffname] or f[address]); op is the symbol for the type of condition you are
testing for (==, <, >, etc.); and "variable" is what you are comparing the
field against. For example:
(f9==”01824-) or (f[zip]=="01824”)
tells XyWrite to see if field 9 (or the field labeled ZIP) equals 01824. You
might use this condition like this:
«I F(f[zip]=="01824")» Chelmsford, MA«EI»
This sequence tells XyWrite to insert the text "Chelmsford, MA" in the
letter when the zip code field equals 01824.

5-49
IF (cant'd)

You can design the IF statement to test for two or more conditions by
using an AND (represented by &) or OR (represented by !) connector. For
example:

«IF(f 10>=
*1989")&(f7== MChelmsford")» Special
offer for new residents of Chelmsford«EI»

This sequence tells XyWrite to insert the text "Special offer for new
residents of Chelmsford" when field 10 is greater than or equal to 1989 and
field 7 equals Chelmsford.

Action Inserting IF Statements into the Main File

Let's create a letter that contains an extra paragraph for addresses in the
01824 zip code.

1. Create the main file (refer to the sample file below). Be sure to include
the PF (Put Field) commands where you want data to be inserted, and
the FI command to link the field names to the order of fields in the data
file.

2. Move the cursor to the point where you want the conditional text to be
inserted.

3. Enter the IF statement. For example:

Type: [F5]if (f[zip]=="01824")S

A
PF:title rJPF:lname
I am pleased to announce the opening of a new Zippy Pizza
Shop at 17 Main Street in Chelmsford. To celebrate this
opening, we are offering a spectacular deal: $5.00 off
‘The Works," our large, super-deluxe pizza.

Sincerely,

5-50
(confd) IF

4. Type the text you want to include if the conditions of the IF statement
are met, as shown in the illustration below.

5. Enter the El (End IF) command.

Type: [FgeiH

Result: In expanded mode, your file should look like this:

«FItitle,fname,lname,address,city,state,zip»

Dear «PFtitle» «PFlname»:

I am pleased to announce the opening of a new Zippy Pizza

Shop at 17 Main Street in Chelmsford. To celebrate this
opening, we are offering a spectacular deal: $5.00 off
"The Works," our large, super-deluxe pizza.

«IF(f[zip]=="01824")»You can also take advantage of our

free delivery. From our door to yours in 45 minutes, or
you get your pizza for 1/2 price! «EI»

Sincerely,

7. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each conditional instruction you want to

include.

8. Store the file.

Result: When you merge the data and main files, XyWrite checks the
records to see if the zip code field contains the zip code 01824. If it
does, it prints the text you entered in step 5.

5-51
IF (confd)

NOTE #2 Empty Fields. To test to see if a field is empty, you use the @SIZ operator
to determine the number of characters in the field. You can then test for
the condition "if the field equals 0" (contains no characters). For example,
if you want to insert the text "bonus gift" when field 3 is blank:

«1F(@siz(f3)==0)» bonus gift«ei»

NOTE #3 Customizing Data Files. You can use the SORTD command to rearrange
the records in a data file, or to extract specific records and fields and store
them in a new data file. The SORTD command is described later in this
chapter, in the section entitled "Sorting Text."

5-52
EV Mathematical Instructions

FORMAT FflTZlEV expression,decimal

expression is the expression you want to evaluate

decimal is the number of decimal places you want to appear in the output.

MENU Not a menu option.

Purpose The EV (Evaluate) command is a mathematical instruction that you insert

in the main file. When you merge the data file and the main file, XyWrite
performs the specified calculation and inserts the result in the merged file
at the location of the EV command.

For example, if your data file contains prices and quantities, you can use
the mathematical instructions in the main file to calculate the total cost of
a customer's order, and insert it in the customer's confirmation letter.

The expression part of the EV command has the following format:

@num(field)op@num(field)

where field is a field number (fl, f2, etc.) or field name in brackets (e.g.,
f[qty], fltax]) and op is the symbol for the type of calculation you are
performing (*, +, -, or /). Fields must be enclosed in parentheses, and
must be preceded by the string ©num. The ©num string converts the
contents of the field into a mathematical value (otherwise, XyWrite treats
the numbers as ASCII characters). For example:

[F5]ev @num(f[price])+©num(f[s&h]),2[5]

This command adds the value in the Price field to the value in the S&H
field, and inserts the result, two decimal places long, in the merged file. If
the Price field contains 90 and the S&H field contains 12, the result would
be 102.00.

You can use the EV command to add, subtract, multiply, or divide the
values in the fields you specify, and then insert the result of the calculation
into your merged file.

5-53
EV (confd)

Jones, John Patrick0nuts0100$2.95<-

Joyce, Walter0bolts020$4.95-<-

ACTION Calculating the Cost of an Order

Let's assume your data file looks like the one shown above. Fields 3 and 4
contain the quantity ordered and the unit price. To calculate the total cost
of an order and insert it in the merged files:

1. Call the main file.

2. Move the cursor to the point where you want the result to appear.

3. Enter the EV command.

*
Type: [F5]ev @num(f3)
@num(f4),2[3

This letter confirms your order for «PF3» «PF2» at

«PF4»/unit. The total cost of your order is
@num(F4)».
*
$«EV@num(F3)

4. Store the main file.

5. Merge the main file with the data file. For example:

Sprint orderlist+confirmH

Result: XyWrite merges the data in the file ORDERLIST with the text
in CONFIRM. It inserts the results of the calculation where you
embedded the EV command.

5-54
 Redlining

There may be times that you want to keep track of the changes you are
making to a document. For example, if you are editing someone else's
work, you may want the author to review your changes before finalizing
them. Or you might be preparing a contract that you want to return for
review with all changes marked.

XyWrite's Redlining lets you do this. It helps you keep a record of all
additions and deletions. When you are ready to finalize the changes, you
can use Put Edit to incorporate them. Conversely, you can use Clear Edit
to remove them and restore the document to its original condition. With
both commands, there is a Verify option that lets you selectively review
and incorporate (or discard) the changes.

Also described in this section are two commands that let you store notes
in your file.

Contents page section Command

5-56 Redlining On/Off RED

5-60 Put Edits PE, PEV
5-62 Clear Edits CE, CEV
5-64 Insert Note NT, IV

5-55
Redlining On/Off RED

FORMAT ESZJRED ON
ROTZ! RED OFF
MENU EEnCSEEJJI

Purpose The RED command lets you turn redlining on and off within a window.
When you turn redlining on and then edit a document, you have a record
of all of the changes you make.

With redlining ON, XyWrite automatically displays all the changes you
make in a different mode: in formatted view on a monochrome monitor,
additions are displayed in bold and deletions in reverse; in graphic view,
additions have a double underline and deletions have a line drawn
through them. This lets you see at a glance where changes have been
made. These visual differences stay with the file until you use the Clear
Edit or Put Edit command to clear them.

In addition to displaying the changes in a different mode, XyWrite inserts

a tag that identifies who made the change and when. The tags are not
printed, and are only displayed when redlining is on.

Action Keeping Track of Edits in a File

To keep a record of the changes you make to a file:

1. Turn redlining on.

Type: [fs]red onQ3

Result: Redlining is now active in the current window. The letter "R"
appears in reverse mode at the top right comer of the screen. Turning
redlining on also automatically puts you in insert mode.

2. Call the file you want to edit. We'll use CHAPTER.DOC.

Type: [Fsjcall chapter.doc 0

3. Make whatever additions and deletions you wish to the text. (See Note
#1.)

Result Text that you add appears in bold or with a double underline,
depending on which view is active. Text that you delete appears in
reverse or strike-through mode.

5-56
RED ON, RED OFF (confd)

4. When you are finished editing CHAPTER.DOC, store it.

Type: [fs] store S3

Result: The edited file is stored to disk. You can call it back to the
screen at any time to review or incorporate the edits you made, or to
make more edits.

5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each file you want to edit using redlining.

6. When you are finished with the editing session, turn redlining off.
Type: [fs] red off £3
Result: The letter "R" disappears from the top right comer of the
screen. You can resume normal editing.
7. If you later want to remove the editing tracks, see "Put Edits" or
"Clear Edits."

NOTE #1 Prevailing Mode. When redlining is on, prevailing mode is deactivated.

This means that text is inserted in normal mode, no matter what the mode
of surrounding text. In addition, the MD commands are not allowed while
redlining is on. You cannot press [CtrflB to insert bold text, nor can you
issue the MD BO command from the command line.

NOTE #2 Correcting Mistakes. If you make a mistake when you are deleting
original text, you can undo it with a second deletion. For example, if you
are deleting by character with the Delete key and you go one character too
far, you can back up by simply using the Backspace key.
Similarly, if you delete a word with [ctril [Dei] but then change your mind, just
move the cursor to that word again and press [ciri][D^]. The word changes
from delete mode to its original mode.
When you delete new text (i.e., text that appears in insert mode), no record
is made of the changes. For example, if you add the sentence "It was a
very dark and stormy night," you can delete the word "very." In this case,
the word disappears; it is not displayed in delete mode since you had just
inserted it.

NOTE #3 Hidden Notes. If you want to put a note in your document, but don't
want to disturb the flow of text on the screen or in your printed copy, you
can use the NT (Note) or IV (Invisible) command. These commands are
described later in this section.

5-57
(confd) RED ON, RED OFF

NOTE #4 Window Status. When you turn redlining on and off, you are changing
the status of the active window, not of the displayed document. You must
turn redlining on and off in each window you want to use.

NOTE #5 Changing Views. You cannot switch between views while redlining is on,
and you cannot use redlining in expanded view.

NOTE #6 Assigning a Toggle Key. If you use redlining frequently, you can assign a
redlining on/off toggle to a key in your keyboard file. (See 'Keyboard
File" in the Customization Guide.) The function call for this toggle is RO
(Redline On/Off).

NOTE #7 Delete Character Modes. When you insert text with redlining on, XyWrite
enters it in Insert mode; when you switch to expanded view, you will see
the command «MDIN». When you delete text with redlining on, XyWrite
preserves the text's original mode by converting it to one of several Delete
modes, as described below. Because this mode information is saved, you
can restore text to its original form with the Clear Edit command.
Standard Delete
Modes Modes Description
MD NM MDDN Normal
MD BO MDDB Bold
MDUL MD DU Underline
MDIT MD DI Italic
MD BU MD DL Bold Underline
MDBI MD DO Bold Italic
MD BR MD DV Bold Reverse
MD SU MDDS Superscript
MD SD MDDD Subscript
MD RV MD DR Reverse

NOTE #8 Changing Display Modes. You can change the way the various character
modes appear on the screen by modifying the default file. For example, if
you have a color monitor, you might want new "normal" text to appear in
bright white characters on a blue background. Call up SETTINGS.DFL
and enter the following definition:
MD IN=31

5-58
RED ON, RED OFF (confd)

NOTE #9 Printing a Document You can use the PRINT command to print a copy of
your document with the redlining markers in place. Standard XyWrite
printer files define INSERT and DELETE print attributes that enable you
to identify text you inserted or deleted with redlining on.
When your document is printed, the inserted text prints in normal mode
with the additional effect defined by the INSERT attribute. The standard
INSERT attribute prints inserted text in square brackets. (Because these
brackets are inserted, the alignment of justified text is thrown off.)

The delete modes (DN, DB, DU, etc.) assume the print characteristics of
the standard modes with the additional effect defined by the DELETE
attribute. The DELETE attribute is typically defined to strike over deleted
text with a backslash (\), so delete bold mode (MD DB) would print text in
bold with a backslash through each character.

NOTE #10 Editing Commands. If you open a command marker for editing,
Redlining is temporarily turned off. As soon as you close the marker,
Redlining is turned back on.

NOTE #11 Tagline Toggle. Each time you make an edit with redlining on, XyWrite
inserts a tag that identifies who made the change and when. In a heavily
edited document, these tags may become distracting. The LT function call
lets you turn the display of these tags on and off. The information is still
stored with the file. Refer to "Keyboard Files" in the Customization Guide
for more information about using function calls.

5-59
Put Edits PE, PEV

FORMAT EHZJpe
ECTIPEV
Menu EE3EEESIH

Purpose The PE (Put Edit) and PEV (Put Edit Verify) commands incorporate the
changes made with redlining on. The Put Edit commands search for the
redlined character modes and make the indicated changes. They convert
inserted text (MD IN) to normal mode (MD NM) and erase text that is
marked for deletion.

You can use either command on a selected block of text or on an entire file.
The conversion begins at the cursor position and continues to the end of
the file (or selected block).

You have two choices for incorporating the changes:

• Putting in all the edits at once (Option 1)
• Putting in the edits selectively (Option 2)

Action Putting in All the Edits

(Option 1) Suppose you have reviewed the edits made to a file and know that you
want to incorporate all of them into your original document.

1. Move the cursor to the beginning of the file.

Press: |~ctri| | Home |
2. Enter the Put Edit command.
Type: [F5]peE3
Result: All edits are incorporated. Text that was in a delete mode is
erased; text that was in an insert mode is converted to normal display
mode.

Action Putting in the Edits Selectively

(Option 2) To search a file for redlining modes and have XyWrite stop at each one to
verify that you want it incorporated into your original text:

1. Move the cursor to the point in text where you want to begin putting in
the edits.
2. Enter the Put Edit, Verify command.
Type: [FslpevCT
The cursor moves to the first change in the file. This could be added
text (displayed in bold or with a double underline) or deleted text
(displayed in reverse or strike-through mode).
5-60
(confd) Put Edits

3. Verify whether or not XyWrite should incorporate the change. Type Y,

N, S, O, or U (or press (Escl):
Y Yes, incorporate this change and continue to the next change.
N No, do not incorporate this change but continue to the next
change. The redlined edit remains in the file so you can review it
again later.
S Stop. Do not incorporate the change. Abandon the process and
stop at the current point.
O One More. Incorporate this change and then abandon the process.
Return to the starting point.
U Undo this change and continue to the next change. The redlined
edit is removed from the file.
Esc Cancel. Do not incorporate the change. Abandon the process and
return to the starting point.

4. Repeat Step 3 until you have reviewed all the changes.

TIP Renaming Your File. After you have revised your file, you may want to
store the file with a new filename. This can help you to keep track of the
various versions that are generated with each new generation of edits.

5-61
Clear Edits CE, CEV

FORMAT E33CE
eotzicev
menu esiehi
PURPOSE The CE (Clear Edit) and CEV (Clear Edit Verify) commands remove the
changes made to a document during redlining. Like the Put Edit
commands, the Clear Edit commands search for the redlining character
modes, but, instead of making the indicated changes, they restore the text
to its original state.

You can use either command on a selected block of text or on an entire file.
The conversion begins at the cursor position and continues to the end of
the file (or selected block).

You have two choices for clearing the edits:

• Clearing all the edits at once (Option 1)
• Clearing the edits selectively (Option 2)

ACTION Clearing All the Edits

(Option 1) Suppose you have reviewed the edits made to a file and know that you
want to discard all of them and restore your document to its original
condition.
1. Move the cursor to the beginning of the file.
Press: [Ctri]|Home|
2. Enter the Clear Edit command.
Type: [F5]ce[Z»l
Result: All the redlined changes in the file are removed. Text that was
in a delete mode is restored to its original mode, and text that was in an
insert mode is deleted.

ACTION Clearing the Edits Selectively

(Option 2) To search a file for redlining modes and have XyWrite stop at each one to
verify that you want to remove the change:
1. Move the cursor to the point in text where you want to begin the
cleanup.
2. Enter the Clear Edit, Verify command.
Type: [FSlcevCT
Result: The cursor moves to the first change in the file. This could be
added text (displayed in bold mode) or deleted text (displayed in reverse
mode).
5-62
(confd) Clear Edits

3. Verify whether or not XyWrite should remove the change. Type Y, N,

S, or O (or press [Esc]).
Y Yes, remove this change and continue to the next change.
N No, do not remove this change but continue to the next change.
S Stop. Do not remove the change. Abandon the process and stop at
the current point.
O One more. Remove this change and then abandon the process.
Esc Cancel. Do not remove the change. Abandon the process and
return to the starting point.

4. Repeat Step 3 until you have reviewed all the changes.

NOTE #1 Recovering from a Mistake. Remember these commands are removing

previous edits. Care should be taken to ensure that you don't
inadvertently lose any of your work. If you do, don't forget that you can
ABORT the file and recall it to begin again.

5-63
Insert Note NT, IV

FORMAT fWlNT (Option 1)

EQZJiv (Option 2)

Menu StopCodei..

PURPOSE The NT (Note) and IV (Invisible) commands allow you to enter notes in
text. The notes can be of any length, and you can have as many in a file as
you like. The text of the notes is not visible except in expanded view, and
it does not print.

The only difference between the two commands is that the NT command
appears in the text as a command marker, while the IV command is
completely invisible except in expanded view.

ACTION Inserting a Note

To enter a note:

1. Move the cursor to where you want to insert the note.

2. Type: |F5]ntCT

Result: A command window opens in the middle of the screen.

3. Type the text of the note.

4. Press: [shin] |f7|

The command window closes and an embedded command triangle

appears on the screen. (If you used the IV command, no triangle
would appear, but the note would still be stored with the file, visible
on the status line and in expanded view.)

NOTE #1 Shortcut If the note text is only one line, you can type it all on the
command line as follows:

Type: [fs] nt Be sure to verify this data before publishing CT

5-64
 Sorting Text

INTRO XyWrite's SORT command lets you rearrange a list of items, while the
SORTD command lets you rearrange a data file. The principal difference
between the two is that SORT treats each line in the file as a single record.
SORTD recognizes each field within a record, and allows you to
extensively customize how you want the list sorted.

You might use SORT to alphabetize your phone list, a materials list, or
your personal spelling dictionary. SORTD is useful for rearranging
mailing lists, personnel records, or other files that contain several fields of
data for each entry.

Contents page Section Command

5-66 Sorting a List SORT

Sort Data File Procedure

5-68 Part I. Create the Data File
5-69 Part II. Determine the Sorting Rules
5-69 Part III. Sort the Data File

Sort Data File Commands

5-70 Sort Setting SO
5-72 Extract Records XR
5-75 Extract Fields XF
5-76 Sorting a Data File SORTD

5-65
Sorting a List SORT

FORMAT ESI SORT filename,targetfile (Option 1)

ESZISORT (Option 2)
filename is the file you want to sort.
targetfile is the file where sorted text is stored.
MENU MINIUM

PURPOSE The SORT command allows you to rearrange the entries in a file, in a
selected block, or in a selected column into alphabetical order. (An entry
can be a single character or a group of words. Each entry ends with a hard
return.)

ACTION Sorting a File

(Option 1) To sort the entries in a file into alphabetical order:
1. Call the file to the screen and check that each entry ends with a hard
return.
2. Store the file and enter the SORT command.
Type: [Fsjsort Jist.list.srtS
Result: A new file called LIST.SRT contains entries from LIST rearranged
into alphabetical order. The file LIST remains unchanged.
ACTION Sorting a Selected Block
(Option 2a) To sort the entries in a selected block:
1. Call the file to the screen and select the section you want to sort into
alphabetical order.
2. Enter the SORT command.
Type: [F5]sortCT
Result: The selected block disappears from the screen for an instant. When
it reappears, the entries in the selected block are in alphabetical order.

ACTION Sorting Based on a Selected Column

(Option 2b) Suppose you have a tabular list that you want to rearrange based on the
information in the second or third column.

1. Call the file to the screen and select the column you want SORT to use.
a. Move the cursor to the beginning of the column of text.
b. Press: ES(F3]
c. Move the cursor to the end of the column of text.
d. Press: [F3]

e rr
(confd) SORT

2. Enter the SORT command.

Type: [F5]sortH
Result: The selected block disappears from the screen for an instant. When
it reappears, the lines in the listing are rearranged according to the
alphabetical order of the column you selected.

NOTE #1 Default Sort Key. The SORT command arranges the entries in a file or
defined block into alphabetical order. By default, it uses the first 80
characters of each entry, sorts numbers in decimal order, and preserves
duplicate entries. You can change one or more of these defaults by
changing the SK setting in the default file (see the Customization Guide for
information about default settings).
The SK setting has the following form:
sk=nl,n2
where nl is one, or a combination of, the following numbers (the default is
1):
0 Sorts numbers by first digit (01,10,2,3)
1 Sorts numbers in decimal order (01,2,3,10)
2 Sorts entries in reverse order (Z to A, 9 to 0)
4 Deletes duplicate entries.

n2 defines the number of characters that XyWrite uses when sorting a list.
The default size is 80. If you have a very large file, you can reduce the
amount of memory required to sort it by defining a smaller number of
characters. Conversely, if your entries are very similar, you can refine the
sort by defining a larger number of characters.

5-67
Sort Data File Procedure

Purpose XyWrite allows you to select and rearrange the entries in a data file into
alphabetical or numerical order. You can organize a mailing list once by
last name, another time by state, and a third time by zip code. Because
XyWrite does not alter your original file, you can sort the same list in
several different ways for different applications.

The procedure for sorting a data file has three parts:

• Part I. Create the Data File — The data file contains the entries you
want sorted. It might be a mailing list, personnel records, a parts lists,
sales information, etc. Each entry in the data file is called a record and
each record is divided into fields.
• Part II. Determine the Sorting Rules — XyWrite gives you lots of
control over how your data file is sorted. You can choose specific fields,
start at any point within a field, sort in reverse order, even determine
how numbers are sorted. You can also limit the sort to the records that
meet certain criteria, and output only those fields that are of interest to
you.
• Part III. Sort the File — This is where you apply the sorting rules you
established in Part II to the data file you created in Part I. You can sort
either the entire file or just a defined portion of it.

Action Sorting a Data File

This procedure is composed of three parts. It begins with the creation of a
simple data file, then explains the options for sorting, and ends with the
execution of the SORTD command.

PART I Create the Data File

A data file is a text file that is made up of fields and records. For example,
the data file might be a customer mailing list, with one record for each
customer, and eight fields in each record (title, first name, last name,
company, street address, city, state, and zip code).
To create a mailing list:
1. Type: [F5]new mail0
2. Enter the record for the first customer. Use a tab to separate fields.
Type a hard return at the end of the record.
3. Enter the records for the rest of your customers (see Notes #1 and #3).
4. Store the data file.

NOTE #1 Data File Restrictions. Data file records can contain up to 3500 characters.
You can increase or decrease that number by changing the RZ default
setting. The overall size of the data file that XyWrite can sort is based on
the sort criteria that you establish.

5-68
(confd) Sort Data File Procedure

NOTE #2 Field and Record Separators. The default field separator is a tab and the
default record separator is a hard return. You can use the FX and the RS
commands to change these default settings. (See "Mail Merge" for
information on FX and RS.)
NOTE #3 Number of Fields. Each record must have the same number of fields.
When there is no entry for a field, you still must type in the field separator
to hold its place. For example, if your customer has no company
affiliation, the record would look like this in expanded view:
Mr.OBenOFranklinOO12 Poor Richard LaneO Flyakite0PA055555<-
PART II Determine the Sorting Rules
There are three default settings that determine the sorting rules for data
files: SO (Sort), XR (Extract Records), and XF (Extract Fields). These
settings, which are described in detail at the end of this section, are
entered in the default file.
For this example, let's assume we want to sort the data file by zip code. In
the data file created in the previous step, the zip code field is field 8.
1. Call the default file to the screen (see Note #4).
Type: [Fsjcall settings.dflH
2. Enter the SO setting.
Type: df so=f8<-
3. Store and load the default file.

PART III Sort the Data File

To sort the entries in the data file into the order you specified in Part II,
enter the SORTD command. For example:
Type: [Fsjsortd mail, mail.srt0
Result: A new file called MAJL.SRT contains records from MAIL
rearranged according to zip code. That means that all records with the
same zip code are grouped together, starting with the lowest zip code in
the file. The original file MAIL is not changed.
NOTE #4 Multiple Sort Files. If you use different sorting rules for different data
files, you may prefer to create a series of default files that contain nothing
but the XR, XF, and SO settings. You can then load the appropriate file
with the LOAD command when you need it.
If you do this, it is a good idea to include all three settings in each file,
even if one or more have no arguments. That's because once XR, XF, or SO
values are established, they remain in memory until they are overridden
(or until you quit XyWrite). If you don't redefine the sorting rules, you
may end up using values that you don't intend to.

5-69
Sort Setting SO

FORMAT SO=fieldl,field2...
fieldl,field2... define what fields to use and how to use them.

MENU EEE3EHS

PURPOSE The SO (Sort) setting establishes the field or section of the field you want
XyWrite to sort on, as well as the order of the sort. The SO setting can be
specified with the DF command in the default file or with the DEFAULT
command from the command line. There are five parameters you can set
with SO:
F# Field number (Fl, F2,...).
W# Word within field (W1 is the first word; W2 is the second word,
etc.) A negative number means count from the back of the field.
(The default value is the entire field.)
L# Length of field, or number of characters to use in the sort. (The
default value is 20.)
N Sort numbers in numerical order, e.g., 1,2,5,10,20,100. (The
default is to sort numbers by first digit, e.g., 1,10,100,2,20,5.)
R Reverse the sorting order.

For tie-breaking, you can use more than one field for the sort.

ACRON Establishing the SO (Sort) Setting

Suppose your data file is a mailing list that you want to organize by zip
code (from highest zip code to lowest). You then want XyWrite to
organize records with the same zip code alphabetically by name.
1. Call the default file.
Type: [F5]call settings.dfIS
2. Enter (or modify) the SO setting to sort first by zip code (which we
assume to be in field 8), then by last name (field 3), and then by first
name (field 2). Put a hard return at the end. For example:
Type: df S0=f8r,f3,f2«-
3. Store and load the default file.
4. Issue the SORTD command.
Type: [Fslsortd mail.zipCT
Result: XyWrite creates a new file called ZIP which contains all the
records from MAIL arranged by zip code (field 8) in reverse order. If there
is more than one record with the same zip code, XyWrite looks at last
names (field 3), and organizes the entries with the same zip codes
alphabetically by last name; finally, if there are records that have the same

5-70
(confd) SO

last name and the same zip code, XyWrite looks at the first name (field 2)
and organizes those records alphabetically by first name.

NOTE Dates. If you add the letter D after a field number, XyWrite treats the
contents of that field as a date. For example:

df so=f3d

Examples so=fiw3i5nr
Uses the third word of the first field, looks at only the first five characters
of that word, sorts numbers as decimal values, and arranges the entries in
reverse order.

df so=f1w3l5nr,f3w-1
Same as above for the first field. If that field is the same for more than one
record, XyWrite looks at the last word in field 3.

df so=f1w3l5nr,f3w-1,f6l3
Same as above for fields 1 and 3. When more than one record is the same
for these two fields, XyWrite looks at the first three characters in field 6.

df so=f1w3l5nr,f3w-1 ,f 6!3,f2r
Same as above for fields 1,3, and 6. When more than one entry is the same
for these three fields, XyWrite looks at field 2, and sorts those entries in
reverse order.

5-71
Extract Records XR

FORMAT XR=fnop "variable "

fn is the field number
op is the symbol for the condition you are testing for
"variable" is what you are comparing the field against; it must be enclosed
in double quotation marks as shown.
MENU LLEJEB

PURPOSE The XR setting, which can be specified with the DF command in the
default file or with the DEFAULT command from the command line,
allows you to create a new data file that contains only those records that
meet your criteria. It does this by comparing the information in a field
with a variable you supply. When you run SORTD, it outputs only the
records that match your conditions and puts them in a new file; your
original file is untouched. For example, you can create a new data file that
contains only those records for a specific zip code.
You can compare the contents of the field against the variable in the
following ways:
• Field equals the variable (==)
• Field does not equal the variable (<>)
• Field is greater than the variable (>)
• Field is greater than or equal to the variable (>=)
• Field is less than the variable (<)
• Field is less than or equal to the variable (<=)
For example:
DF XR=f1o"Mr."
extracts all records in which field 1 is not "Mr." You might use this setting
if you wanted to extract all records in which the title field was "Miss,"
"Mrs." or "Ms."
You can further refine the record extraction by testing for two or more
conditions. You string tests together with the AND (&) and OR (!)
connectors. In this case, the tests must be enclosed in parentheses. For
example:
df xr=(f8==”O1821H) !(f8==”01824")
extracts those records that have 01821 or 01824 in field 8.

5-72
(confd) XR

ACTION Extracting Records

Suppose your data file looks like the one in the illustration below. To
create a new data file that contains the records of all the people hired since
1985:

1. Call the default file.

Type: [F5]call settings.dfIS

2. Enter the XR setting to extract all records in which field 3 is greater

than or equal to 1985. Type a hard return at the end of the setting.
Type: df xr=f3>="1985"<-

3. Store and load the default file.

4. RunSORTD.
Type: [Fsjsortd pers.hiredgg

r ------------------- >

David DerickOAdministration019820Full-TimeOHMO<-
Ron DoneODevelopmentOl9840Fu11-TimeOBC/BS<-
John Hi1lOAdministrationOl9820Fu11-TimeOBC/BS <-
Meg Kanik0Development019860Full-Time0BC/BS«-
Brian Mass0Manufacturing019870Part-Time0HMO<-
Judith MintOMarket ingOl9840Ful1-TimeOHMO <-
Chris RoseOTech Support019850Temporary0BC/BS<-

NOTE #1 Case-Sensitive. XR is case-sensitive. If you ask it to extract records that

contain “Mr." in field 1, it ignores those fields that contain “MR/' and
"mr." To override the case sensitivity, you can use the ©UPR operator to
convert the contents of the field to all uppercase, and then use uppercase
when you define the variable. For example:

df xr=@upr(f1)=="MR."

NOTE #2 Dates. You can use the ©DAT operator to indicate that the contents of a
field or a variable is a date. For example:
df xr=@dat(f8)<@dat("10-31")

5-73
XR (confd)

EXAMPLES df xr=(f4==HTemporary”)!(f4==”Part-TimeM)
This setting outputs records of employees who are either temporary or
part-time.

df xr=f5=="BC/BS"
This setting outputs the records of employees who have Blue Cross/Blue
Shield.

df xr=(f5==MHMO")&(f4==MPart-TimeM)
This setting outputs the records of part-time employees who have HMO
insurance.

5-74
XF Extract Field

FORMAT XF=fl,f2...
flft are the numbers of the fields you want to extract
MENU E0HEBS

Purpose By default, the SORTD command rearranges the records you select in the
order you define, but does not change the information within a record.
The XF (Extract Field) setting allows you to select the fields you want to
put into the sorted file. For example, you can create a data file that
contains corporate names and addresses, but not the personal contact.

The XF setting can be specified with the DF command in the default file or
with the DEFAULT command from the command line.

Action Extracting Fields

To define the fields you want SORTD to extract from the data file and
output to the sorted file:

1. Call the default file to the screen.

2. Enter the XF setting, with the numbers of the fields you want to output.

Type: df Xf=f4,f5,f6,f7,f8

3. Store and load the default file.

Result: When you sort the data file, SORTD outputs field 4 through field 8
only.

5-75
Sorting a Data File SORTD

FORMAT [Wi SORTD filename,targetfile

filename is the file you want to sort.
targetfile is the file where sorted text is stored.
MENU EEEE3E3S

Purpose The SORTD command extracts the fields and records you defined with the
XF and XR settings, arranges them in the order you defined with the SO
setting, and stores them in a new data file. The original data file is
unchanged.

ACTION Sorting a Data File

To sort the entries in a data file, say MAIL, into the order you specify,
enter the SORTD command:
Type: [F5]sortd mail.mail.srtH
Result: A new file called MAIL.SRT contains records from MAIL
rearranged according to the rules you establish with the SO, XR, and XF
settings. The original file MAIL is not changed.

5-76
 Table of Contents and Index

INTRO With long documents such as detailed reports and books, at times you will
want to include a table of contents or index. In this section we discuss
how to generate them. This discussion begins with basic procedures and
ends with a reference of all the commands.

Contents Description Command

Table of Contents & Index Procedure

5-80 Terminology
5-80 Generating a Table of Contents or Index
5-80 Part I: Mark the Text
5-81 Part II: Specify the Format
5-82 Part III: Extract the Table of Contents or Index

Commands
5-85 Text Marker XI through X9
5-86 Suppress Page Number EX
5-87 Index Label IL
5-89 No Index NI
5-90 Table of Contents Command T1-T9
5-91 Index Command 11-19
5-92 Set Record SR
5-93 Index Break IB
5-94 Table of Contents Extraction TX1-TX9
5-96 Index Extraction IX1-IX9

5-77
Table of Contents & Index Procedure

PURPOSE The following procedures will enable you to generate a table of contents
or index in a step-by-step fashion. The procedure is in three parts and
begins after a general overview and introduction of our terminology.

We use the term table of contents to mean any list that is sorted by page
number. We use index to mean any list sorted alphabetically. XyWrite will
produce a table of contents or index for you from the text that you mark in
your document. There are three basic parts to generating an index or table
of contents. Refer to the following illustration.

• Part I. Mark the Text — Mark the words or phrases you want
included in the index or table of contents. Use one of the text markers
(XI through X9).

• Part II. Specify the Format — Specify the format you want using an
index command (Il through 19) or a table of contents command (T1
through T9).

• Part III. Extract the Table of Contents or Index — Extract the marked
text and either save or print it:

a. Save the marked text to a separate file using IX (Index Extraction)

or TX (Table of Contents Extraction). From this you can print just
the index or table of contents.

b. Print the file with the index or table of contents included at the end
of the printout. (Use PRINT.)

Let's examine each of these steps in more detail.

5-78
(confd) Table of Contents & Index Procedure

5-79
Table of Contents & Index Procedure (confd)

Terminology. We use several terms with meanings specific to this

section:

• Source File — The main document. This is the document from which
you are extracting a table of contents or index.

• Target File — The file to which you save the index (using IX) or table of
contents (using TX).

• Marker — Any one of the text markers XI through X9. You mark text
in the source document for inclusion into a table of contents or index.

• Marked Text — The text which you mark for inclusion in a table of
contents or index. You choose one of the markers (say, X3) and then
mark each entry with it.

• Extract — To copy the marked text from a source file into a target file.
The text is sorted either alphabetically (using IX) or by page number
(using TX).

ACTION Generating a Table of Contents or Index

This procedure is composed of three parts. For more details on any
command, refer to its description in the latter part of this section.
PART I Mark the Text
To mark words or phrases for entry into your table of contents or index:
1. Call your document to the display (the source document, that is). Let's
call it CHAPTER.
Type: [Recall chapter^

2. You can mark text in three different ways:

a. Single Word. For each word you want included in the table of
contents or index:
Move the cursor to the point immediately following the word.
Type: [F5]x3[^»l
Press: [Shift] [Fi]
Result: The X3 triangle is inserted in the text, marking the word that
precedes it. There must be no space (or tab) between the X3 marker
and the word.
(Note: Go to expanded view and make sure there are no mode
commands — such as « MDNM» — between the text and the X3
marker. If there are, move the X3 marker next to the text.
5-80
(confd) Table of Contents & Index Procedure

b. Entire Line. You can mark any phrase ending with a carriage return —
such as a title on its own line. The whole phrase, from marker to
carriage return (up to 200 characters including embedded
commands), is picked up. The cursor must either be at the start of a
line or have a space (or tab) ahead of it.

Put the cursor before the phrase ending with a carriage return.
Type: [F5]x30
Press: [Shift] [fT|
c. Any Phrase. You can also enter a phrase that doesn't appear
explicitly in the text (or is in the middle of a line). This is especially
useful for alternate entries in an index, where "red wagon" appears
in the text, but you also want to include "wagon, red." You must
type in the "wagon, red" yourself, as follows:
Type: [F5]x3 wagon, red0
3. Repeat step 2 until you mark all text you want included in the table of
contents or index.

PART II Specify the Format

At the end of the source document you must provide a format such as the
one in the following illustration.

1. Move the cursor to the end of your source document.

Type: [cvi] [E^d]
We move the cursor to the end because only the marked text above this
point will be included in the table of contents or index.

2. Make sure the cursor is at the beginning of the line. Enter a command
T1 through T9 for a table of contents or II through 19 for an index. In
our example, the text was marked with X3 and we want a table of
contents, so we will use T3.
Type: [F5]t3S

Result: A command window opens.

5-81
Table of Contents & Index Procedure (confd)

3. Enter the two commands SR IX (to place marked text) and SR PN (to
place page numbers) in the order you will want them positioned on a
line in the table of contents. Also include leadering (LD) between
them, if you wish, and any margin (LM, RM) or other format
command.
In our example we want the marked text placed at the left, a leader
composed of periods, and the page number on the right. (Be sure to
include a space between the LD command and the period.)
Press: |F5|sr ixCT
Type: [F5]ld .£0
Type: [F5]sr pn0
Another SR command, SR CH, gives you the option to set the chapter
number and page number together, such as 2-35. See the Set Record
command later in this section.
4. Press: |Shifi| [fT|
5. Type: 0
6. Type: [F5]storeS

PART in Extract the Table of Contents or Index

Let's review what we have done so far to make a table of contents or
index. In Part I we used the X3 marker to mark the words and phrases
that we wanted included. Then in Part II we provided a format for the
table of contents, using the T3 command (for an index we would have
used the 13 command).
Now that everything is set up, we have a choice of two ways to output the
table of contents or index.
1. Extract and Save to a Separate File
If you wish to revise your table of contents or index before printing it,
you may want to save it in a separate file.
Enter the appropriate command TX1 to TX9 (Extract Table of Contents)
or 1X1 to 1X9 (Extract Index) — for our example we will use TX3, which
extracts only the text marked by X3. To extract text from CHAPTER
and save it to a file called CONTENTS:
Type: [F5]tx3 chapter.contentsCT
Result: XyWrite extracts the marked text and page numbers according
to the format we specified in Part II. It saves this text to the file named
CONTENTS. If you were to omit a name for the target file, XyWrite
would place the table of contents into a file called TABLE3
(corresponding to marker X3). To view the table of contents, type
CALL CONTENTS.

5-82
(confd) Table of Contents & Index Procedure

EXAMPLES OF SPECIFYING FORMATS (T# and I#)

These first two examples show how you might list a Table of Contents (using
T3). Notice in the second figure that the spaces around the LD command
creates spaces at either end of the leader.

Marked Text
-Z ■
«T3«SRIX»«LD.» «SRPN»»
Leadering
X.
Page No.

/ I X
Penguin..................................................................5
Baboon..................................................................18
Zebra................................................................... 25
Aardvark........ ..................................................... 32
Gorilla................................................................ 47

S
Page No.
■
«T3«SRPN» «LD.» «SRIX»»
Leadering
X
Marked Text

/ I
5 .............................................
XPenguin
18 ................................. Baboon
25 ............................................................... Zebra
32 ....................................... Aardvark
47 ............................................................ Gorilla

Here is an example of the same marked text listed as an index (alphabetically,

using 13).

Marked Text
> ■
«I3«SRIX» «LD.» «SRPN«»
Leadering
X Page No.

/ I X
Aardvark .......................................................... 32
Baboon ............................... •............................. 13
Gorilla ............................................................ 47
Penguin ............................................. 5
Zebra ............................................................... 25

5-83
Table of Contents & Index Procedure (confd)

2. Print the Source File and Table of Contents

To print the entire document including its table of contents, simply
print the source document (here, named CHAPTER). (Unlike Option 1
above, this procedure does not save the table of contents or index to a
file.)
Type: Sprint chapter^

To suppress the table of contents or index while printing the source

document, enter the NI (No Index) command at the top of your source
document.

NOTE #1 Index Entry Without Page Number. You can create an index entry that
has no page number by using the EX (End X-Marker) command. This is a
convenient way to refer your reader to another entry in the index, or to
insert an index entry that is only a header under which you list subentries.
For details on how to use the EX command, refer to "Suppress Page
Numbers" later in this section.
NOTE #2 Subentries. You can place one entry under another by using an IL (Index
Label) command. For example, you can place "Dog" under "Animals."
You can even have sub-subentries like "Collie" under "Dog." For details,
refer to "Index Label" later in this section.
NOTE #3 Automatic Separators. The IB (Index Break) command automatically
places letters in your index to separate words starting with one letter of
the alphabet from words starting with the next. The IB command also lets
you control the format of these letter headings or insert other separators.
Refer to "Index Break" later in this section for more information.
NOTE #4 Concise Sorting. After sorting your index, XyWrite removes duplicate
entries (with the same word or phrase and page numbering) and combines
multiple page numbers on one line, separated by a comma and space. For
example, if the entry "Computer" is indexed on pages 7,16 and twice on
24, its listing will read:
Computer............ 7, 16, 24
In addition, XyWrite combines three or more consecutive pages into a
page range. For example, if an entry appears on pages 3,4, and 5, XyWrite
combines the references and outputs the page range "3-5". (This feature
does not work with SR CH.)
NOTE #5 Automatic Index Creation. You can use the CORRECT command to
append an index marker to every occurrence of a word or a list of words.
You can then format and extract the index. For more information on the
CORRECT command, refer to Chapter 3.

5-84
XI through X9 Text Marker

FORMAT MX#
# is any digit between 1 and 9.
Menu Table of Contents EHES5, EHn eis Enznm

PURPOSE Use Text Marker commands XI through X9 to mark text for a table of
contents or index. There are nine markers to allow you to create up to
nine sets of marked text. You can mark one set of text using XI, a second
set with X2, and so on. You might use XI for a table of contents, X2 for an
index, and X3 for a List of Figures.

You have the option of sorting the marked text in alphabetical order as an
index or in page order as a table of contents.

You can mark any amount of text as a single entry in a table of contents or
index. You do this by typing in the text along with the X command. If you
enter the X command with no text, it marks the single word to its
immediate left or up to a hard return to its immediate right.

ACTION Marking T ext

To mark text, follow the procedure given earlier in "Part I: Mark the
Text."

NOTE #1 Temporary Files. When you PRINT, PRINTF, or PRINTS a file, separate
temporary files are created to accumulate the text for building an index or
table of contents. These temporary files are stored on the default drive (as
defined by the DR setting in STARTUP.INT).

5-85
Suppress Page Number EX

FORMAT ESSEX
MENU IEJES3EIE

PURPOSE The EX (End X-Marker) command allows you to create an index entry that
has no page number. You can use such entries as titles under which you
list other entries (see "Index Label") or as cross-references to other entries.

ACTION Create Cross-Reference

When you want to refer your reader to a different entry in your index:

1. Enter a Text Marker command followed by the index entry and the
cross-reference information:

Type: [F5]x2S

Type: Folios, See Page Numbers

2. Enter the EX command to suppress the page number.

Type: [F5|exM

3. Close the window.

Type: [ShftllFil

Result: When you print your index, the entry "Folios, See Page
Numbers" will appear without a page number.

NOTE #1 Text Entry. When you use the EX command, you must type in the text of
the entry; the shortcuts for marking text that were described earlier do not
apply to the EX command.

5-86
 IL Index Label

FORMAT 033 il
MENU lEIIEHJEfflEBI

Purpose The IL (Index Label) command allows you to have an index entry appear
as a subentry under another entry. The text that appears within the IL
command is not printed; it is used only for sorting.

Include the IL command as part of the X command when you are marking
text.

Action Creating Subentries

To create an index that contains the entry "Animals" with a subentry of
"Cat" and a sub-subentry of "Siamese":

1. Move the cursor to the start of the document and enter the marker for
the major entry.
Type: [F51x2r^j|

Result: A window opens in the middle of the screen.

2. Enter the text of the major entry.

Type: Animals
\
3. To suppress the page number for this entry, enter the EX (End X-
11 Marker) command before you close the window.
Type: [F5]exg
Press: IShjfllFil

Result: An embedded triangle appears in the text. When you process

the index, the entry "Animals" will appear without page numbers.

4. Move the cursor to the text of the first subentry and enter the marker
for it.
Type: [F5]x2£j|

Result: A window opens in the middle of the screen.

5. Enter the Index Label command along with the text of the entry under
which you want this subentry to appear:

Type: fFslil Animals CT

5-87
IL (cant'd)

6. Type a tab and then the text of the subentry:

Type: [Tai Cat

7. Close the window by pressing [Shift] [fT| .

8. Move the cursor to the text of the next subentry or sub-subentry. Let's
assume that this time we want to mark the sub-subentry "Siamese."

Type: [F51x2[7»1

Type: [F5]il AnimalsfTalCatCT

Type: [fairfal Siamese

Press: [Shiftl [Fi]

8. Repeat this procedure until all entries and subentries have been
marked.

Result: When your index is processed, the following entries will appear:

Animals
Cat, 7,11,15
Siamese, 11

5-88
NI No Index

FORMAT ECTZ1NI
MENU Not a menu item.

Purpose The command NI (No Index) prevents the printing of an index or table of
contents when you use PRINT or PRINTF. It has no effect on Index
Extraction (IX) or Table of Contents Extraction (TX) to a separate file.

You use this command when you want to print your document without the
table of contents or index also being printed. The NI command overrides
any Table of Contents command (T1 - T9) or Index Command (Il -19).

Action Using the NI Command

To prevent a table of contents or index from printing when you use PRINT
or PRINTF, enter the NI command at the top of your source document.

Type: [FsJniH

5-89
Table of Contents Command T1 through T9

FORMAT E3ZJT#
# is any digit between 1 and 9.
| Table of Contents!
MENU

Purpose The Table of Contents commands T1 through T9 are an essential part of

generating a table of contents. The T1 command produces the table of
contents for text marked by XI, T2 for text marked X2, and so on up to T9.
Let's use T3 here as an example. When you enter a T3 command in your
document, the table of contents is printed along with the document when
you use PRINT (or PRINTF). You use the T3 command to do the
following:
• To specify the format. You type in the format of your table of contents
as part of the T3 command. For example, you can define your format
as being marked text on left, leadering consisting of periods, and page
number on the right. This would require using SR IX, LD, and SR PN,
as follows:
«T3«SRIX»«LD.»«SRPN»»
• To place the table of contents into your document. When you print
your document (using PRINT or PRINTF):
a. The marked text is accumulated from the start of the document
down to the location of T3 (and no further). Thus, the position of the
T3 command in your document is important — normally you place
it at the end of your document.
b. This accumulated text is kept in its page-order sequence (proper for
a table of contents).
c. On printout, the table of contents is printed at the point that the T3
command is located in the document. (Unlike TX3, no separate file
is created.)

Action Formatting a Table of Contents

To format a table of contents using T1 through T9, follow the procedure
given earlier in this section under "Part II: Specify the Format."

5-90
Il through 19 Index Command

FORMAT Ml#
• is any digit between 1 and 9.
MENU EDHJEEH3

Purpose The Index commands II through 19 are an essential part of generating an

index. The II command produces the index for text marked by XI, 12 for
text marked X2, and so on.

Let's use 13 here as an example. When you enter an 13 command in your

document and print it using PRINT, the index is printed along with the
document.

The Index commands II through 19 parallel the Table of Contents

commands T1 through T9 except that the marked text is sorted
alphabetically rather than by page number. You use the 13 command to
do the following:

• To specify the format. You type in the format of your index as part of
the 13 command. You do this the same as you do for the Table of
Contents. For example, you might specify marked text on the left,
followed by a comma, a space, and the page number:

«I3«SRIX», «SRPN»»

• To place the index into your document. When you print your
document (using PRINT or PRINTF):

a. The marked text is accumulated from the start of the document

down to the location of 13 (and no further). Thus, the position of the
13 command in your document is important — normally you place
it at the end of your document.
b. This accumulated text is sorted alphabetically (proper for an index).
c. On printout, the index is printed at the point that the 13 command is
located in the document. (Unlike 1X3, no separate file is created.)

Action Formatting an Index

To format an index using II through 19, follow the procedure given earlier
in this section under "Part II: Specify the Format."

5-91
Set Record SR

FORMAT ESQ SR IX Place Marked Text

RH71SR PN Place Page Number
ESZJSR CH n Place Chapter Number-Page Number
n is the separator between chapter and page values.
MENU lEDEEBSEnSSEiEffl/ EDE3E3B
Purpose The SR (Set Record) commands allow you to position the page number
(using SR PN or SR CH) and the marked text (using SR IX) in a Table of
Contents or index. When you use SR CH, XyWrite supplies both the
chapter number and the page number, separated by the character you
define.
You enter these commands as part of the commands T1 to T9 and 11 to 19.
Action Using the SR CH Command
We illustrate use of SR IX and SR PN in the procedure "Specify the
Format" earlier in this section. Let's now take a look at the SR CH
command, which produces page references in chapter number-page
number format.
1. Be sure that you have used Counter 0 (CO) as the counter for chapter
numbers. (See "Numbering" in Chapter 4 for more information on
counters.)
2. Mark the words and phrases that you want included in your table of
contents or index.
3. Move the cursor to the end of the document and enter the appropriate
Index or Table of Contents command. We'll use 13 as an example:
Type: [F5]i3[5]
4. Enter the command to place the marked text on the left, followed by a
space and the command to put the page references in chapter-page
format.
Type: [F5]sr ixB
Type: [Space Bar|
Type: [F5]sr ch-CT (Note the hyphen)
Type: |Shift| (fT|

Result: Your index entries will appear in the following format:

"museums 3-5." You do not need to include an SR PN command
because SR CH provides both page and chapter numbers.
NOTE Concise Sorting. If you use the SR PN command to place a page number,
XyWrite combines three or more consecutive pages into a page range (for
example, instead of listing pages 3,4,5, and 6, XyWrite uses the range 3-6).
If you use the SR CH command to place chapter-page number, XyWrite
does not combine consecutive pages into a range.

5-92
IB Index Break

FORMAT ESQ IB n
n (optional) defines the separator.
MENU HEDESEnffll

Purpose The IB command inserts a separator between entries starting with one
character and entries starting with the next. This separator can be one or
more blank lines or a heading that you specify with the IB command.
The IB command also lets you control the format of the separator. You can
specify the amount of space above and below a heading, its mode (bold,
underline, etc.), and how it is placed on the line (e.g., flush left, centered,
flush right). These formatting instructions affect only the separators, or
headings, not the text of the index.
A special variation of the IB command automatically places uppercase
letters into your index (see Note #1). To use this function, you simply
define the separator to be a pound sign (#); XyWrite interprets the # to
mean "insert uppercase letters as index separators." If there are no entries
fora particular letter, XyWrite skips the heading for that letter. See the
description below for details on how to use this variation of the command.

Action Specifying Letters as Separators

If you want your index to contain capital letters as separators and to have
them be bold, centered and separated from the entries above and below by
one blank line:
1. Go to the top line of the text file.
2. Type: [§]ibH
Result: A window opens in the middle of the screen.
3. Enter the formatting commands.
Press: 0
Type: [F5]fcS
Type: [F5]mdboS
4. Enter the pound sign (#) to activate the letter separators. Follow it with
two carriage returns.
Type: #CT CT
Press: [Shittl [FTl
Result: When you process your index, it will contain bold, centered
capital letters as headings. They will be separated from the index entries
by one carriage return.

5-93
Table of Contents Extraction TX1 through TX9

FORMAT 0SZJTX# sourcefile,targetfile

is any digit between 1 and 9.

sourcefile is the file containing marked items.
targetfile is where the table of contents is saved.
MENU

Purpose Each Table of Contents Extraction command TX1 through TX9 allows you
to extract a table of contents from your document and save it to a file
separate from the original file. It extracts text from the sourcefile and saves
it to a targetfile. When you use the command TX2, for instance, the source
file accumulates text marked with marker X2 and formats the text as
specified by the T2 command.

If you omit the sourcefile, XyWrite extracts a table of contents from the
document currently displayed. If you omit the targetfile, XyWrite saves
the table of contents to a file it names TABLEI (for XI) or TABLE2 (for X2),
and so on.

Acton Extracting Tables of Contents

To extract a table of contents from a source file, follow the procedure
described earlier in this section under '"Extract the Table of Contents or
Index."

NOTE #1 Table of Contents for a List of Filenames. To create a single table of

contents across several files, place a command T1 through T9 at the end of
the last file, and use:

ESZJTX# ©parentfile,targetfile

Refer to PRINT @ for more information.

NOTE #2 NI Command. The command NI (No Index) does not inhibit execution of
this command.

NOTE #3 Requirement Each TX command extracts text according to the format

established by the corresponding Table of Contents command. For
instance, if T1 is not present in your source document (or if it is at the top),
TX1 will extract nothing.

5-94
(confd) Table of Contents Extraction

NOTE #4 Unnumbered Text There may be times when you want to produce
documents that contain no chapter or section numbers in the text, but do
contain the numbers in the table of contents.

When you are preparing such documents, use the LVO through LV14
commands instead of the CO through C14 commands. The LV commands
work like the C commands except that the LV commands do not output
numbers when you print.

When you have completed your document and are ready to create the
table of contents, use the TX command to save the table of contents to a
separate file. TX converts the LV commands to C commands. You can then
enter the appropriate DC commands to define the counter values so the
printed table of contents will contain section numbers. For more
information on the C and DC commands, refer to "Numbering" in
Chapter 4.

5-95
Index Extraction 1X1 through 1X9

FORMAT E3ZJIX# sourcefile,targetfile

# is any digit between 1 and 9.
sourcefile is the file containing marked items.
targetfile is where the index is saved.
MENU EE3JDE3ESS3

Purpose Each Index command 1X1 through 1X9 allows you to extract an index from
your document and save it to a file separate from the original file. It
extracts text from the sourcefile and saves it to a targetfile. When you use
the command 1X2, for instance, the source file accumulates text marked
with marker X2 and formats it according to the 12 command. The target
file is created especially to hold this index.
If you omit the sourcefile, XyWrite will extract an index from the document
currently displayed. If you omit the targetfile, XyWrite will save the index
to a file it names INDEX1 (for XI) or INDEX2 (for X2), and so on.

Action Extracting an Index

To extract an index from a source file, follow the procedure described in
"Extract the Table of Contents or Index" earlier in this section.

Note #1 Index of a List of Filenames. To create a single index across several files,
place a command II through 19 at the end of the last file, and use:
RTTZlIX# ©parentfile, targetfile
Refer to PRINT @ for more information.

NOTE #2 NI Command. The command NI (No Index) does not inhibit execution of
this command.

NOTE #3 Requirement Each IX command extracts text according to the format

established by the corresponding index command. For instance, if II is
not present in your source document (or if it is at the top), 1X1 will extract
nothing.

NOTE #4 Sort Key. If you are creating a very large index, you may get the message
"Out of memory." One way to avoid this situation is to reduce the
number of characters XyWrite uses when it sorts the entries. On the other
hand, if your index contains several sublevels, you may want to increase
the number of characters used for sorting. To make either change, modify
the SK (Sort Key) setting (see "Sorting a List" earlier in this chapter for
details about the SK setting).

5-96
 User Programming

XyWrite gives you the ability to write a variety of customized application

programs. This section introduces some basic concepts and describes two
methods of using XyWrite to write simple programs. The first method,
Record Keystroke mode, is the simplest to use. The second method,
Program mode, is also easy to use, and allows you to write programs that
you can embellish as your programming expertise grows.

/zUser Programming" begins with a general discussion of programming,

describes the procedure for using Record Keystroke mode and its related
commands, and ends with a description of Program mode and its related
commands.

Contents page Description Command

5-98 Programming Overview

5-99 Record Keystroke Mode Procedure

5-101 Record Keystrokes [§ri]K
5-102 Load Recorded Keystrokes LDRK
5-103 Saving Recorded Keystrokes SAVERK
5-104 Running a Program File RUN

5-105 Program Mode Procedure

5-108 Turning Program Mode On and Off (Scroll Lock]
5-109 Loading a Program LDPM
5-110 Pausing During Execution P
5-112 Program Function Call PFUNC

5-97
Overview

Purpose What is Programming? Programming is a powerful technique that

enables you to record any sequence of keystrokes for later execution. You
can write your own programs to perform complicated operations, load
them to macro keys, and then run them with as few as two keystrokes (for
example, [F2]X).

Programming is powerful because it allows you to record and run

automatically any keystrokes you can type manually from the keyboard
within XyWrite.

The first step in programming is the planning step. Once you work out the
various steps for the operation you want to perform, you record the
sequence of keystrokes and then run the program. Running the program
automatically executes the stored keystrokes one after another, as if you
typed them from the keyboard.

There are two ways you can record keystrokes:

• Record Keystroke Mode—This mode saves keystrokes in memory as

you type them. You can save the keystrokes and replay them later.

• Program Mode—In this mode, the keystrokes you type are not
processed but are stored in a file so they can be processed later. This
mode allows you to write more complex programs than Record
Keystroke mode does.

5-98
 Record Keystroke Mode Procedure

PURPOSE Record Keystroke mode records keystrokes that you can save and play
back again and again to perform some task. It is an easy way to learn how
to use XyWrite's Programming Language.

There are three basic steps involved in Record Keystroke mode:

1. Record the keystrokes.

2. Save the recorded keystrokes to a macro key or to a program file.

3. Run the program.

This procedure takes a look at each of these steps. The individual

commands are described in more detail at the end of the procedure.

ACTION Recording the Keystrokes

Let's create a program that saves a file:

1. Turn Record Keystroke mode on.

Press: [CtrilK
XyWrite displays the message "Recording keystrokes" on the status
line.

2. Type the exact keystrokes for the procedure you want. For example, to
record the keystrokes needed to save a file:
Press: [F5]
Type: save
Press: [F9]
3. Turn off Record Keystroke mode to indicate that the program is
complete.

Press: [ctrflK

ACTION Saving the Recorded Keystrokes

Once you have completed your program in Record Keystroke mode, you
can use the LDRK (Load Recorded Keystrokes) command to assign the
program to a macro key or the SAVERK command to save the program to
a file. Let's assign the program we just created to a macro key:

Type: [F5]ldrk S0

Result: Your program is loaded to macro key S.

5-99
Record Keystroke Mode Procedure (confd)

ACTION Running the Program

When you want to re-execute the keystrokes you recorded and saved with
the LDRK command, you press the macro key to which the program was
assigned. For example:
Press: [F2|S

If you use the SAVERK command to store the recorded keystrokes in a

file, you can execute the program by using the RUN command. SAVERK
and RUN are described later in this section.

5-100
[cvTIK Record Keystrokes

FORMAT [CtrilK

MENU iProgrammin

PURPOSE E3K turns Record Keystroke mode on and off. When it is on, you can
enter text and execute commands as usual. In addition to processing the
keystrokes as you enter them, XyWrite stores them in memory so you can
later replay them (see Note #1).

Record Keystroke mode lets you reduce a procedure involving many

commands to as few as two keystrokes. For example, if there is a series of
Change commands that you execute to reformat draft documents to final
format, you could record those commands once, save them on a macro
key or in a program file, and reissue them over and over.

ACTION Turning Record Keystroke Mode On and Off

To turn Record Keystroke mode on:

Press: [CtrflK

Once this mode is on, all the keys you press, whether they perform a
function or simply enter text, are recorded in XyWrite's memory.

To turn Record Keystroke mode off:

Press: [cuT| K

NOTE #1 Saving Your Programs. After you press [Ctrl]K, XyWrite records all your
keystrokes temporarily in an internal macro. You can execute the program
in this internal macro by using the function call RX, which you can assign
to a key.

However, XyWrite clears this macro each time you begin a Record
Keystroke mode session. Therefore, you should save your program either
to a regular macro key or in a program file. You do this with LDRK (Load
Recorded Keystrokes) or SAVERK (Save Recorded Keystrokes). These
commands are described on the following pages.

5-101
Load Recorded Keystrokes LDRK

FORMAT ES3LDRK #
# is the single letter (A-Z) or number (0-9) or two characters &A-&Z or &0-
&9 where you want to save the program created in Record Keystroke
mode.
MENU

PURPOSE I-DRK (Load Recorded Keystrokes) loads a program created in Record

Keystroke mode to a macro key, and clears the temporary macro that
contained it. It enables you to run the recorded keystrokes as a program
by pressing a macro key.

Action Loading Recorded Keystrokes on a Macro

To save the program you just created with Record Keystroke mode to a
macro key:

Type: [Fsjldrk x0

Result: Your program is copied to the macro key (in memory). You can
now run the program by pressing [F2] X.

NOTE #1 Saving to Disk. If you want to keep the program loaded on the macro for
use after you QUIT XyWrite, use the STSGT command. Refer to Chapter 3
for more information on the STSGT command.

NOTE #2 Modifying the Program. Once you have created a program and stored it
on a macro, you cannot edit it. If you make a mistake when recording the
keystrokes, you must start the procedure over again by re-recording the
keystrokes and re-saving them to the macro. If you save the program to a
file (with SAVERK) rather than loading it to a key, you can call the file and
edit it.

5-102
 SAVERK Saving Recorded Keystrokes

FORMAT E5M1 SAVERK drprogramfile

d: is the letter (for example A:, B:, C:) you specify for the drive you want.
programfile is the name of the new program file.
Menu IProarammin

Purpose SAVERK (Save Recorded Keystrokes) saves a program created in Record

Keystroke mode to a program file so you can execute it as often as you
want (see Note #1).

Once the keystrokes are recorded in a program file, you can display the
file and edit it using the Program mode procedure described later in this
section.

Action Saving Recorded Keystrokes

To save the program you just created in Record Keystroke mode to a file
named SAVE.PGM:

Type: [F5]saverk save.pgmH

Result: XyWrite creates a new file named SAVE.PGM. (The .PGM

extension is not required, but is useful for distinguishing files that contain
programs from other types of files.)

NOTE #1 Running the Program File. You execute the stored program with the
RUN command, which is described later in this section.

ALSO SEE Related Command. You can load the program file created with SAVERK
to a macro key with the LDPM (Load Program) command.

5-103
Running a Program File RUN

FORMAT ESQ RUN drprogramfile

d: (optional) is the letter of the drive that contains programfile,
programfile (optional) is the name of the program file you want to run.
MENU Proqrammin

Purpose RUN causes the specified program file to execute. This means the
commands (and text) stored in the program file are executed
automatically, as if typed from the keyboard.

Action Running a Program File

To run a program file — for example, EXERCISE.PGM:

Type: [FsJnjn exercise.pgm 0

Result: This command runs the program file named EXERCISE.PGM —

the keystrokes stored in that file are automatically processed.

To stop the program (if necessary):

Press: [CtRI |Break]

NOTE Shortcuts. XyWrite remembers the name of the last file run. Therefore, if
you enter the RUN command without specifying the name of a program
file, XyWrite reruns the most recently run file.

If you want to run a new program but aren't sure of its name, you can
build a directory to locate the file and then execute the RUN command
while pointing at the program name.

5-104
 Program Mode Procedure

PURPOSE Program mode is similar to Record Keystroke mode in that it lets you
store a series of keystrokes so you can replay them later. The principal
difference between the two is that Program mode does not process the
keys as you press them; it records them as keycodes in a program file that
you run after program creation is complete.
The basic procedure for Program mode involves six steps.
1. Plan the Program. Analyze the steps you'd take if you manually
performed the task. You can then prepare a list of instructions to tell
your computer how to do the same task automatically. If the task is
complex, you may find it helpful to draw a flowchart.

2. Create or Call a Program File. A program file is simply a XyWrite text

file in which you store commands (and text) for later execution.

3. Write the Program. Press I Scroll Lock I to turn on Program mode and type
the exact keystrokes for the procedure you want. Press |ScroU Lockl to turn
Program mode off when the program is complete. (If you make a
mistake while writing the program, see Note #1.)

4. Store the Program. When the program is as you want it, store it on
disk. You cannot run your program until it is stored on disk.

5. Test the Program. Try out your program to see if you get the results
you expected.

6. Load the Program to a Key. This step is optional, but it makes using
your program easier.

ACTION Creating and Running a Program File

Let's take a look at the simple example of changing a paragraph of text to
bold.

1. Plan the Program. To change a paragraph to bold, you move the

cursor to that paragraph, select it, change the display mode, and restore
the selection. Because the position of the paragraph would vary from
document to document, locating it must be performed outside of the
program. All the other steps can be automated.

2. Create the Program File. Use the NEW command to create a new
program file. For example, to create a program file named BOLD.PGM:
Type: [F5]new bold.pgmH
Result: XyWrite creates a new (empty) file with the name BOLD.PGM.
(The .PGM extension is not required, but is useful for distinguishing
files that contain programs from other types of files.)
5-105
Program Mode Procedure (confd)

3. Write the Program

Type: (Scroll Lock| (to turn on Program mode)
Press: [g] (to select the paragraph)
Press: [CtrflB (to change to bold mode)
Press: [Escl (to restore the selected text)
Press: I Scroll Lock I (to turn off Program mode)

Result: Once Program mode is on, XyWrite enters the keycode for each
subsequent keystroke in your program file. The file should look like
this:

DP BX (MD+BO)M2 ES

The program code functions as follows:

DP selects the current paragraph.
BX (MD+BO) puts the selected text in bold mode.
ES restores the selected text and resets the current display mode to
prevailing mode.

4. Store the Program

Type: EsJstoreS

5. Test the Program. Let's test the program by changing a paragraph in

an existing file to bold. For example:

Type: [Fsjcall chapter.doc^

Move the cursor to the paragraph you want to change to bold.
Type: (Fsjrun bo Id. pg m0

Result: XyWrite changes the display mode of the current paragraph to

bold. If it did not, review the procedures in Steps 2 through 4. (For
more information about the Run command, refer to the earlier section
on Record Keystroke mode.)

5-106
(corn'd) Program Mode Procedure

6. Load the Program onto a Macro Key. In the case of BOLD.PGM, the
program will be much easier to access if it is loaded to a key.

Type: (F5]ldpm bold.pgm.b0

Result: The program is saved to macro B. The status line says DONE.
You can now run the program by pressing [F21B.

NOTE #1 Correcting Mistakes. If you make a mistake while in Program mode,

press I Scroll Lode I to turn it off. Then correct the mistake. The keyboard
functions now work normally — you can use | Backspace! or move the cursor
around. After correcting the mistake, press Iscroii Lock! again to continue
recording keystrokes.

NOTE #2 Improving Readability. For commands executed from the command line,
your program will be more readable if you use a carriage return 0 as a
replacement for [F9]. To do this, follow the command with [Scroll Lock| 0 Iscroii Lock I
rather than [F9]. The file STARTUP.INT is written this way; look at it to see
how much easier it is to read such a program file.

5-107
Turning Program Mode On/Off IScroll Lockl

FORMAT (ScroJILod^l

MENU Not a menu item.

Purpose I Scroll Lock | toggles Program mode on and off. When Program mode is on, all
the keys you press are recorded in the current file, but they are not
processed. You can execute the recorded keys by storing the current file
and running it.

ACTION Turning Program Mode On and Off

To turn Program mode on:

Press: I Scroll Lock|

Result: An "S" appears in bold in the upper right corner of the screen, and
the message "Program mode is on. Press Scoll Lock to exit" appears on the
status line. Once program mode is on, all the keys you press, whether they
perform a function or simply enter text, are recorded in the current file as
keycodes.

To turn Program mode off:

Press: I Scroll Lock!

5-108
LDPM Loading a Program

FORMAT EEJJLDPM dyrogramfile,#

d: is the letter of the drive that contains programfile.
programfile is the existing program file you want to load.
# is the single letter (A-Z) or number (0-9) or two characters &A-&Z or &0-
&9 where you want to save the program file.
MENU | Programming |Save to Kej

Purpose LDPM (Load Program) loads a program file onto the specified macro key
so you can run the program file with an [F2] key (rather than with the RUN
command).

You can assign programs to two different kinds of macros:

• Macros A-Z and 0-9. You normally run this kind of program from the
keyboard using [F2)# (which accesses the function calls @A-@Z or @0-
@9).
• Macros &A-&Z and &0-&9. You run this kind of program from any
key where you have assigned the corresponding function call &A-&Z
or &0-&9 in your keyboard file, or with the FUNC command (such as
FUNC &A).

To see how LDPM fits into the overall programming procedure, refer to
the earlier section "Program Mode Procedure."

Action Loading a Program onto a Macro Key

To load a program onto a macro key:

1. Load the program. To load the program file EXERCISE.PGM onto

macro X:
Type: [F5|Idpm exercise.pqm.xCT
Result: The program file is copied to the macro key (in memory). You
can now run the program file EXERCISE.PGM by pressing |F21X>

2. Store the Macro Key. (Optional) If you wish to keep this program file
loaded on the macro key for use at future editing sessions (after you
QUIT), use STSGT. Refer to STSGT in Chapter 3.

NOTE #1 Removing a Program. To delete a program that is stored on a macro key,

use the REMOVE command as described in Chapter 3.

ALSO SEE Related Command. The LDRK (Load Recorded Keystrokes) command
assigns a program written in Record Keystroke mode to a macro key.

5-109
Pausing During Execution P

FORMAT ESQP t comment

t (optional) is length of the pause, in seconds. (The default is 1 second.)
comment (optional) is any message you want displayed on the command
line during the pause
MENU Not a menu item.

PURPOSE When entered in a program file, P (Pause) causes the program execution to
pause for one second. For longer pauses, you can specify the amount of
time you want. You may find the pause useful for slowing down the
program sequence, or for viewing intermediate results before they flash
by.

ACTION Pausing During Execution

For example, let's add a pause of three seconds to the beginning of the
XyWrite startup file STARTUP.INT (which is a program file).

1. Use CALL to call the program file.

Type: [Fsjcall startup.int 0

2. After turning on Program mode, type the Pause command on the first
line of STARTUP.INT.

Press: I Scroll Lock |

Type: [F5]p 3
Press: I Scroll Lock|
Press: S
(The first time you press |Scroll Lock|, XyWrite turns on Program mode and
displays an "S" at the top right of the screen. The second time you
press I Scroll Lock | r XyWrite turns off Program mode and the "S"
disappears.)

Result: The first line of STARTUP.INT now contains code that looks
like this:
BC p 3<-
The program code functions as follows:
BC (Blank Command Line) clears the command line.
p 3 pauses the program for 3 seconds.
<- executes the PAUSE command.

5-110
(confd) Pausing During Execution

4. Run the program. To observe the pause:

Type: [Fortin startup.intH

Result: Notice that the sequence pauses at the beginning.

5-111
Program Function Calls PFUNC

FORMAT RH71PFUNC ##
## is a two-letter function call.
MENU Not a menu item.

Purpose When you have Program mode on and press a key, the function call
associated with that key is entered into the program file. The PFUNC
command lets you enter a XyWrite function call into your program file
when that function call is not assigned to a key. PFUNC gives you a lot of
flexibility in creating your program files, and eliminates the need to assign
seldom-used function calls to a key.

Action Using the PFUNC Command

Let's suppose you are creating a program in which you want to clear the
command line, but leave the cursor in the text area. The function call for
this action is CH (Clear Header), which is not typically assigned to a key.
To enter it in your program:

1. Make sure Program mode is off.

2. Type: [F5]pfuncch0

Result: A bold CH appears in your program file. When you run the
program, XyWrite will clear the command line without moving the cursor
there.

ALSO SEE Related Command. The FUNC command allows you to execute any of the
two-letter function calls directly from the command line. Refer to
"Keyboard File" in the Customization Guide for more information.

5-112
 Index

Symbols A
Symbols, * (read only), 2-63 A drive, 2-4
Symbols, ▲ (embedded command), 4-5 See also Drive; Path
Symbols, ▼ (non-breaking space), 4-17 A wild card character, 3-56
Symbols,! (OR operator), 5-50 Abbreviation expansion, 3-84,3-86
Symbols, # (setting page numbers), 4-109 adding entry, 3-73
Symbols, % (text macro), 2-67,3-45 ABORT command, 2-6
Symbols, & (AND operator), 5-50 and selected text, 3-24
Symbols, () (negative number), 3-39 and windows, 3-94
Symbols, * (drawing lines), 4-69 See also Clearing; Deleting
Symbols, * (multiplication), 3-38 Absolute case match, 3-54,3-62
Symbols, * (setting page numbers), 4-109 See also Case
Symbols, * (wild card character), 2-22 Action Bar, 3-4
Symbols, + (addition), 3-38 moving to, 3-10,3-16
Symbols, + (displaying directories), 2-22 See also Menu
Symbols, - (automatic numbering), 4-99, 4-102 Active window, 3-92,3-99
Symbols, - (hard hyphen), 4-22 AD (Append Define to Macro Text) function call,
Symbols, - (page depth), 3-66 3-46
Symbols, - (selected text indicator), 3-24 Adding
Symbols, - (subtraction), 3-38 formatting units, 4-6
Symbols, - (wild card character), 3-57 rows to tables, 5-9
Symbols,. (wild card character), 3-57 type styles, 4-170
Symbols, / (division), 3-38 zoom percentage, 4-12
Symbols, / (switch separator), 3-54 See also Inserting
Symbols, < and > (data file operators), 5-49,5-72 Adding to files. See Merging
Symbols, « and »(embedded command), 3-59 Addition. See Calculations
Symbols, = (arithmetic calculation), 3-38 AL (Automatic Leading) command, 4-180,4-183
Symbols, = (data file operator), 5-49,5-72 Alignment
Symbols, = (selected text indicator), 3-24 flush left/right/center, 4-14, 4-152
Symbols, ? (automatic numbering command), 4-98 hyphenation, 4-18
Symbols, ? (wild card character), 2-22 justification, 4-16
Symbols, @ (chain printing), 2-57 non-breaking spaces, 4-17
Symbols, @ (spell-checking), 3-78 Alphabetical order. See Index; Sorting
Symbols, curved line (embedded command), 4-5 AND connector, in mail merge, 5-50
Symbols, \ (path name), 2-2 AP (AutoPause) command, 4-155
Symbols, ~ (soft hyphen), 4-23 APPEND command, 2-8
Append Define to Macro Text (AD) function call,
3-46
Append To Top (APT) command, 2-8

Index-1
Index

Appending Automatic features (confd)

files, 2-8 vertical spacing, 4-180,4-183
to text macros, 3-46 See also Default settings; Program, user;
See also Merging Startup file
APT (Append To Top) command, 2-8 Automatic Leading (AL) command, 4-180, 4-183
Argument, in commands, 1-2 Automatic Uppercase (AU) command, 3-35
Arithmetic. See Calculations AutoPause (AP) command, 4-155
Arranging. See Sorting
Arrow keys, 3-9
and command stack, 3-8
See also Cursor movement Background printing, 2-46, 2-60
ASCII file disabling, 2-71
and XyWrite files, 1-3 I Backs pace | key, 3-29
calling, 2-12 Backup files. See Copying
creating, 2-52 Backwards order. See Reverse order
merging, 4-83 Batch file, DOS, 2-28
Asterisk (*) BB (Breakable Block) command, 4-131
as wild card character, 2-22 BC (Break Column) command, 5-14
drawing lines with, 4-69 Beep
in multiplication, 3-38 changing or disabling, 3-83
setting page numbers, 4-109 deleting text, 3-29
Attribute (ATTRIB) command, 2-9 spelling-checker, 3-82,3-83
Attributes of type. See Type style BF (Bottom Footnote) command, 4-41
AU (Automatic Uppercase) command, 3-35 with end notes, 4-36
Auto-Check/Correct, 3-82 Binary file, 2-12
Auto-Expand, 3-86 dictionaries, 3-70
Auto-Replace, 3-84 searching, 3-61
AUTOEXEC.BAT file BL (Blank Lines) command, 4-135
including XyWrite directories, 2-3 Blank line
running DOS programs under XyWrite, 2-28 as footnote separator, 4-35,4-38,4-39
Automatic features as header and footer separator, 4-73
abbreviation expansion, 3-84,3-86 Blank lines (BL) command, 4-135
capitalization, 3-35 Blank space
converting DCA format files, 2-72 and graphics borders, 4-63,4-66
hyphenation, 4-18 and line drawing, 4-68
page-page depth display, 3-5 as leader, 4-152
saving, 2-67 between columns, 4-142,5-12
sizing graphics, 4-58 between footnotes, 4-48
spell-checking, 3-82 in graphics frame, 4-59
in SEARCH commands, 3-56,3-59

Index-2
 Index

Blank space (confd) Border

non-breaking, 4-17 and line drawing, 4-68
searching for, 3-59 around headers and footers, 4-74
underlining, 4-173 around page elements, 4-54,4-61
vertical offset, 4-127 around tables and columns, 5-7,5-12
See also Fill-in form; Page layout of screen, 3-6
Block of text of windows, 3-95
and mail merge, 5-44 Bottom Footnote (BF) command, 4-36,4-41
calculating sums, 3-39 Bottom Margin (BT) command, 4-125
changing case, 3-34 in columns, 5-12
changing type style, 4-171 BOX command, 4-68
copying, 3-25 Break Column (BC) command, 5-14
counting words, 3-102 Breakable Block (BB) command, 4-131
deleting and undeleting, 3-28,3-29 Breaking columns, 5-12
deselecting, 3-23 Breaking hard hyphen, 4-22, 4-23
formatting, 4-7 BT (Bottom Margin) command, 4-125
in columns, 5-10 in columns, 5-12
moving, 3-26
non-breakable, 4-131 c
previewing, 2-56
printing, 2-48 C0-C14 (Counter) commands, 4-102
printing to file, 2-51 See also Numbering, automatic
protecting, 3-27 CAF (Call Form) command, 5-31
saving, 2-66 Calculations, 3-38
searching, 3-54,3-56,3-62 with mail merge documents, 5-53
selected status indicator, 3-24 CALL command, 2-10
selecting with function keys, 3-20 Call Form (CAF) command, 5-31
selecting with mouse, 3-17 Calling files, 2-10
sorting, 5-66 for reading only, 2-63
spell-checking, 3-75 forms, 5-31
See also Text in DCA format, 2-73
BO (Border) command, 4-61 when running XyWrite, 2-33
Boilerplate with path, 2-3
in text macros, 3-42 Calling XyWrite, 2-33
merging, 2-41 Canceling. See Clearing
See also Document assembly; Mail merge Capitalization. See Case
Bold type, 4-170,4-172 Capitalize First (CF) command, 3-33
See also Type style I Caps Lock I key, 3-13
Border (BO) command, 4-61 Carriage return, 5-47
and line drawing, 4-68
and text justification, 4-16

Index-3
Index

Carriage return (cont'd)

as field separator, 5-69
at end of file, 4-74 Changing
at end of paragraph, 4-146 case, 3-33,5-73
in forms, 5-29 directories, 2-13,2-70
in mail merge files, 5-36 Chapter numbering, 4-97, 4-103
in user programs, 5-107 Chapter-page numbering, 4-97
searching for, 3-59 in index or table of contents, 5-92
soft, 4-146 referencing, 4-113
Case Character mode. See Type style
and spelling checker, 3-74 Character overstrike typing mode, 3-13
automatic uppercase, 3-35 Character substitution, 2-50
changing, 3-33 Character
converting to uppercase, 5-73 changing case, 3-33
searching and replacing text, 3-54, 3-62 counting, 3-66
CC (Change Case) command, 3-33 deleting, 3-29
CE (Clear Edit) command, 5-62 in code pages, 4-177
Cell. See Table in symbol sets, 4-175
Center tab, 4-149 moving cursor to specified, 3-66
Centimeters (CM) unit of measure, 4-8 searching for, 3-56
CEV (Clear Edit Verify), 5-62 CHDIR (Change Directory) command, 2-13
CF (Capitalize First) command, 3-33 with TREE command, 2-70
CF (Change Footnote Separator) default setting, Checking spelling. See Spelling checker
4-38 Ciceros (CI) unit of measure, 4-8
CGM file format, 4-79 CK (Spelling Checker) default setting, 3-72
See also Transferring files Clear Edit (CE) command, 5-62
CH (Change) and CHA (Change Absolute) Clear Edit Verify (CEV) command, 5-62
commands, 3-62 Clear Single Text Macro Key (REMOVE)
Chain printing, 2-57 command, 3-51
and automatic numbering, 4-97, 4-98, 4-107, Clear Sum command (CLRSUM), 3-39
4-110 Clear Text Macro Keys (CLRSGT) command, 3-51
and footnotes, 4-47 Clearing
and index, 5-96 automatic leading, 4-180
and referencing, 4-116 borders, 4-61, 4-64
and table of contents, 5-94 command line, 3-8
Change (CH, CHA, CV, CVA) commands, 3-62 directory sort order, 2-32
Change Case (CC) command, 3-33 files from memory, 2-6, 3-11
CHANGE command, 3-65 headers and footers, 4-74
Change Directory (CHDIR) command, 2-13 internal sums, 3-39
with TREE command, 2-70 printing, 2-38

Index-4
 Index

Clearing (cont'd) Command Line, 3-4,3-8

redlining, 5-62 cursor-movement, 3-8,3-10,3-16
screen, 2-6,2-68 math calculations, 3-38
selected text, 3-23 COMMAND.COM (DOS) file, 2-28,2-30
text macro keys, 3-45,3-51 Comment, sorting directories by, 2-31
with LOGOFF command, 2-39 Comparing files, 3-67
See also Deleting Concordance, 3-81
Clipboard, 3-25,3-26 See also Index
See also Copying Conditional page break, 4-130
Closing files, 2-6,3-11 Conditions
See also Clearing for data file records, 5-72
Closing windows, 2-7,3-94,3-99 for database links, 4-87
CLRSGT (Clear Text Macro Keys) command, 3-51 for mail merge, 5-49
CLRSUM (Clear Sum) command, 3-39 Conversion Filters Path (WW) default setting, 4-89
CM (centimeters) unit of measure, 4-8 Converting files. See Transferring files
CO (Column) command, 5-8 COPY command, 2-15
Code pages, 4-177 Copying
Color printing, 4-157 embedded commands, 4-5
mode commands, 4-170 files, 2-15
Column (CO) command, 5-8 one file into another, 2-41,2-43
Column, non-table text, 3-25,3-26
math calculations, 3-39 text in tables, 5-10
selecting, 3-23 with text macros, 3-42
sorting, 5-66 See also Merging; Saving
with hanging indent, 5-10 CORRECT command, 3-79
See also Table Correcting. See Editing text; Undoing
COMI. See DOS device Counter (C0-C14) commands, 4-102
Comma, in commands, 1-2 See also Numbering, automatic
Command Counter String (CS) table, 4-46
DOS, 2-26,2-28 automatic numbering, 4-101
embedded and immediate, 2-2,4-5 footnotes, 4-46
entering, 1-2 page numbers, 4-109
executing, 3-8 Counting
getting help, 1-4 text occurrences in range of files, 3-61
recalling from command stack, 3-8 words in file, 3-102
types of, 2-2 CR (Cursor Type) default setting, 3-18
See also Embedded command; Function call; Create Table (CT) command, 5-6
Program, user Cropping graphics, 4-77, 4-79
Command file, 4-88 printing over graphics, 4-80
CS table. See Counter String table

Index-5
Index

CT (Create Table) command, 5-6 Date (cont'd)

|Ctrl| Iah| [Dei] keystroke, 2-62 in headers and footers, 4-72
Current count, 4-102 sorting directories by, 2-31
in headers and footers, 4-102 DC (Define Counter) command, 4-100
See also Reference commands DCA format. See RFT:DCA file
Cursor arithmetic, 3-38 DD (didots) unit of measure, 4-8
See also Calculations Deci-inches (DI) unit of measure, 4-8
Cursor movement, 3-4 Decimal tab, 4-149
and ruler, 4-138 Default drive, 2-4
between text area and command line, 3-8 See also Path
for selecting text, 3-21 Default settings
list of keys, 3-9 and mouse, 3-18
to specified page, depth, or character, 3-66 in draft and expanded mode, 4-9
with mouse, 3-16 with LOGON and LOGOFF commands, 2-40
with tab key, 4-149 Define Counter (DC) command, 4-100
Cursor Type (CR) default setting, 3-18 [Dei] key,
Customization Guide, 1-4 clipboard, 3-26
Customizing. See Default settings; Document and undeleting, 3-29
assembly; Keyboard file; Mail DELETE command, 2-18
CUT file format, 4-79 Delete Stack, 3-30
See also Transferring files Deleting
Cutting. See Copying; Moving and redlining, 5-57,5-58
CV (Change Verify) and CVA (Change Verify directories, 2-14
Absolute) commands, 3-62 files from disk, 2-18
files from screen, 2-6
D hyphens, 4-23
keys for, 3-29
Dl, 3-30 text, 3-26,3-28,3-65
DA (Date) command, 4-26 See also Clearing
Data file Deselecting text, 3-23
creating, 5-36 DF (Dump Footnotes) command, 4-36,4-42
separators, 5-46 DI (Directory Settings) default setting, 2-25,2-37
sorting, 5-68 Diagnosing printer-ready file, 2-50
See also Mail merge Dialog box, 3-17
Database file DICT.SPL file, 3-70
extraction, 4-88 Dictionary, spelling, 3-70
linking, 4-85,4-87 adding replacement words, 3-84
Date (DA) command, 4-26 editing, 3-72
Date hyphenation, 4-18
formatting, 4-26 loading, 3-74
in directory display, 2-23
in forms, 5-29

Index-6
 Index

Dictionary (cont'd) Displaying (cont'd)

personal, 3-70,3-86 redlining, 5-58
See also Spelling checker tab character, 4-151
Didots (DD) unit of measure, 4-8 type styles, 4-173
DIR (Directory) command, 2-20 See also Graphics; Listing; Previewing
Directory, 2-13 Division. See Calculations
changing, 2-14 DO command, 2-26
copying files from, 2-15, 2-16 See also DOS
making, 2-14 DOCBLD (Document Assembly) command, 5-23
removing, 2-14 Document. See File
searching multiple, 2-36 Document assembly, 5-17
for XyWrite files, 1-3,2-2 personalizing, 5-21
See also Path See also Mail merge
Directory display, 2-20 Document Assembly (DOCBLD) command, 5-23
default settings for, 2-25 Document summary information, 2-23,2-44
displaying document summary information, and logon names, 2-39
2-23 sorting directories by, 2-31
displaying file size, 2-20,2-25 Documentation set, 1-4
displaying in tree structure, 2-70 DOS command, 2-28
displaying with file text, 2-24 DOS device
editing or read-only, 2-23 and printer-ready files, 2-50,2-53
printing, 2-23 saving to, 2-67
sorting, 2-31, 5-76 DOS
See also Listing executing commands and programs from
Directory Settings (DI) default setting, 2-25,2-37 XyWrite, 2-26,2-35
Directory Sort (DSORT) command, 2-31, 5-76 printing from, 2-53
DIRL (Long Directory) command, 2-24 Double rule, 4-69
Display mode. See Type style Double spacing, 4-183
Displaying Double words, finding, 3-78
clearing screen, 2-6 Double-sided printing, 2-49
column number, 5-12 Draft quality printing, 4-160
draft, formatted, graphic, and expanded Draft view, 4-9
views, 4-9 displaying type styles, 4-173
draft, graphic, and expanded views, 4-138 Drawing
embedded commands, 4-5 borders, 4-66
footnotes and endnotes, 4-36,4-37 lines and boxes, 4-68
headers and footers, 4-74 with symbol sets, 4-175
line numbers, 4-105 See also Graphics
mail-merge files, 5-38
notes, 5-64

Index-7
Index

Drive Element Top (ET) command, 4-66, 4-127

default, 2-4 Embedded command, 2-2,4-5
listing, 2-23 and printing, 4-6
saving to, 2-66,2-69 and relative values, 4-6
DSORT (Directory Sort) command, 2-31 converting to DC A format, 2-72
Dump Footnotes (DF) command, 4-36, 4-42 entering directly into text, 4-8
DXF file format, 4-79 hiding, 4-7
See also Transferring files in text macros, 3-42
Dye (DY) command, 4-157 spell-checking, 3-76
stripping, 2-52
E viewing and editing, 4-5
See also Formatting
EC (End Column) command, 5-8 End Column (EC) command, 5-8
Editing tables, 5-10 End If (El) command, 5-49
Editing [End] key, 3-9
and read-only files, 2-9
End of file marker, 4-83
directory display, 2-23
End X-Marker (EX) command, 5-86
embedded commands, 4-5
Ending XyWrite, 2-61
footnotes, 4-35
Endnote, 4-35,4-42, 4-43
forms, 5-29
Enlarging. See Sizing
headers and footers, 4-73, 4-74
S key, 3-8,3-9
spelling-checker files, 3-79
Erasing. See Deleting
tables, 5-9
Error. See Editing text; Undoing
text macros, 3-45
|E$cl key
user programs, 5-102, 5-107
releasing selected text, 3-23
Editing text, 3-19,3-53
returning to prevailing type style, 4-173
copying, moving, and deleting, 3-20
ET (Elapsed Time) function call, 4-30
protecting text, 3-27
ET (Element Top) command, 4-66,4-127
redlining, 5-55
Evaluate (EV) command, 5-53
searching and replacing, 3-53
Even page numbers. See Odd-even page numbers
with spelling checker and thesaurus, 3-69
EX (End X-Marker) command, 5-86
See also Redlining
Excel, linking, 4-87
EDITOR command, 2-33
Execute key (F9), 3-8
and DOS command, 2-35
EXIT command (DOS), 2-28,2-35
EE (Element End) command, 4-66,4-127
Exiting XyWrite, 2-61
Effect (EF) command, 4-158
key for, 3-11
El (End If) command, 5-49
Expanded memory, 2-33
EL (Extra Leading) command, 4-181
Expanded view, 4-9
Elapsed Time (ET) function call, 4-30
embedded commands, 4-5
Element End (EE) command, 4-66,4-127
ruler line, 4-138

Index-8
 Index

Expanding abbreviations, 3-84,3-86 File (cont'd)

setting up, 3-73 moving, 2-17
Exporting files. See Transferring files printing, 2-38,2-45
Extending text selection read-only, 2-9
with function key, 3-23 saving, 2-3, 2-65,2-68
with mouse, 3-17 searching for text in, 3-60
Extension, filename spell-checking, 3-76
rules for, 2-44 File conversion. See Transferring files
sorting directories by, 2-31 File format
Extra Leading (EL) command, 4-181 ASCII, 1-3,2-12,2-52,4-83
Extract Field (XF) command, 5-75 binary, 2-12
Extract Records (XR) command, 5-72 graphics, 4-76,4-79
Extracting RFT:DCA and L3P, 2-12,2-41,2-72
fields, 5-75 spreadsheets and databases, 4-86
index or table of contents, 5-82,5-94,5-96 word processors, 4-85
records, 5-72 See also Transferring files
File-end marker, 4-83
F Filename
and saving, 2-66, 2-68
FA (Framed Area) command, 4-53,4-55 displaying on status line, 3-5
FC (Force Center) command, 4-14 global, 2-11,2-22
FD (Form Depth) command, 4-123 renaming, 2-64
FI (Field Identification) command, 5-40 rules for, 2-44
Field, data file. See Data file; Mail merge sorting directories by, 2-31
Field, database, 4-87 Fill-in form, 5-25
Field Identification (FI) command, 5-40 Final Page (FP) command, 2-60,4-106
Field Separator (FX) command, 5-46 FIND command, 2-36
File, 2-1 Finding. See Searching
appending text, 2-8 FINDL command, 2-36
calling, 2-3,2-10 First character SEARCH command switch, 3-54
calling multiple times, 2-11 First letter, capitalizing, 3-34
calling when running XyWrite, 2-33 Fix Spelling (FS) function call, 3-83
dosing, 2-6, 3-11 Fixed date, 4-26
comparing, 3-67 Fixed Time (NOW) command, 4-29
copying, 2-15 Fixed Time with Seconds (SEC) command, 4-29
creating new, 2-42 FL (Flush Left) command, 4-14
deleting, 2-18 Flashing type, 4-170
importing, 4-76 See also Type style
memory status, 3-96 Flush and hang indenting, 5-10
merging, 2-41 Flush Left (FL) command, 4-14

Index-9
Index

Flush Left (FL) command, 4-14 Formatted view, 4-9

Flush Right (FR) command, 4-14 displaying type styles, 4-173
FM (Footnote Format) command, 4-48, 4-49 Formatting 4-1
FN (Footnote) command, 4-37 aligning text, 4-13
FO.TMP file, 2-50 and chain printing 2-60
Font and printing 2-49, 4-153
and line drawing, 4-69 and style sheets, 4-163
scalable, 4-174 blocks of text, 4-7
typeface, 4-176 date, 4-26
See also Type style dates in directories, 2-23
Footer. See Header and footer, running footnotes, 4-31
Footnote, 4-31 frames, borders, and lines, 4-51
and referencing, 4-102, 4-114 headers and footers, 4-71
defining symbols, 4-46 imported files, 2-72, 4-75
editing, 4-35 index or table of contents, 5-81, 5-92
endnotes, 4-35, 4-42, 4-43 numbering 4-91
formatting, 4-41, 4-48 page layout, 4-117
in columns, 5-12 page width, 4-137
including in word count, 3-102 stripping embedded commands, 2-52
numbering, 4-44 tables, 5-7
printing, 4-36, 4-47 time, 4-29
separators, 4-35, 4-38, 4-39 type styles, 4-169
sets of, 4-37, 4-48 See also Page layout
spell-checking 3-76 FP (Final Page) command, 2-60, 4-106
viewing 4-36, 4-37 FR (Flush Right) command, 4-14
Footnote (FN) command, 4-37 Framed Area (FA) command, 4-55
Footnote Format (FM) command, 4-48, 4-49 Framed area for graphics, 4-55
Footnote Separator (FS) command, 4-35, 4-38 and blank space, 4-63, 4-127
Footnote Transition (FT) command, 4-48 displaying space without image, 2-10,4-81
Footnote Unit (FU) default setting 4-116 with imported graphics, 4-79
Footnote Wrap Separator (FW) command, 4-39 See also Border; Graphics
Force Center (FC) command, 4-14 .FRM extension, 5-26
Form Depth (FD) command, 4-123 FS (Fix Spelling) function call, 3-82
Form feed character, 4-83 FS (Footnote Separator) command, 4-35, 4-38
See also Page break FT (Footnote Transition) command, 4-48
Form, fill-in, 5-25 FU (Footnote Unit) default setting 4-116
Form letter. See Mail merge Function call, in user programs, 5-112
Format, file. See File format; Transferring files Function keys, 3-11
FORMAT command. See PRINTF command FW (Footnote Wrap Separator) command, 4-39
FX (Field Separator) command, 5-46

Index-10
 Index

g Horizontal alignment, 4-14

See also Page layout
GCA file format, 4-79 Horizontal offset, 4-140
See also Transferring files See also Blank space
Getting text from text macro keys, 3-47 Horizontal window, 3-94
Global filename, 2-11,2-22 HY (Hyphenation) command, 4-21
See also Wild card character HY.TMP file, 4-20
GO command, 3-66 Hyphenation, 4-18
Graphic view, 4-9 Hyphenation (HY) command, 4-21
and IS command, 3-52
displaying type styles, 4-173
key, 3-12
I
zoom, 4-12 11-19 (Index) commands, 5-91
Graphics, 4-51 IB (Index Break) command, 5-93
borders, 4-54,4-61 IC (Interrupt) command, 4-73
displaying space without image, 2-10,4-81 ICA file format, 4-79
importing, 4-76 See also Transferring files
in headers and footers, 4-72 IE (Import End) command, 4-85,4-90
line drawing, 4-68 IF statement, mail merge, 5-49
GRID file, 5-26, 5-29 See also Conditions
GU (Gutter) command, 4-142 IG (Import Graphic) command, 4-76
Gutter (GU) command, 4-142 and graphics frames, 4-59
Gutter. See Blank space and printer-ready files, 2-53
Gutters, in tables, 5-6 IL (Index Label) command, 5-87
Illustrations. See Graphics
H IMG file format, 4-79
See also Transferring files
Hanging indent, 5-10 Import End (IE) command, 4-85,4-90
Hard date, 4-26 Import Graphic (IG) command, 2-53,4-59,4-76
Header and footer, running, 4-71 Importing files, 4-76
and borders, 4-66 and mail merge, 5-39
and page numbering, 4-106 importing graphics, 2-53,4-59,4-76
and referencing, 4-102 linking files, 4-84
including in word count, 3-102 See also Transferring files
spell-checking, 3-76 IN (inches) unit of measure, 4-8
Header calculations, 3-38 IN (Include Printer-Ready File) command, 2-53,
Header, directories, 2-31 4-82
Help, 1-4 and graphics frames, 4-59
Help, context-sensitive, 1-4 Indent Paragraph (IP) command, 4-144
Hiding, embedded commands, 4-7
iHomel key, 3-9

Index-11
Index

Indenting Installation and Learning Guide, 1-4

hanging indent, 5-10 Interrupt (IC) command, 4-73
paragraphs, 4-144 Inverse printing, 4-158
text in graphics frames, 4-57 Invisible Note (IV command), 5-64
Index, 5-77 IP (Indent Paragraph) command, 4-144
Index (11-19) commands, 5-91 IS (Insert Text Macro) command, 3-52
Index Break (IB) command, 5-93 Italic type, 4-170, 4-172
Index Extract (IX1-LX9) commands, 5-96 See also Type style
Index Label (IL) command, 5-87 IV (Invisible Note) command, 5-64
Index IX1-1X9 (Index Extract) commands, 5-96
alphabet breaks, 5-93
and chapter counter, 4-103
and spell-checker concordance, 3-81
J
cross-references, 5-86 Jump (JMP) command, 3-66
extracting, 5-82, 5-96 Justify On QU) command, 4-16
formatting, 5-81, 5-92 See also Alignment
including in word count, 3-102
marking text, 5-80, 5-85 K
memory management, 5-96
printing, 5-84, 5-89, 5-91 Keyboard, 3-7
spell-checking, 3-76 See also Cursor movement; Toggle keys
subentries, 5-87 Keystrokes, recording. See Program, user
suppressing page numbers, 5-86 Keyword
Information On/Off (IO) default setting, 2-32, 2^14 for graphic borders, 4-63
Insert Text Macro (IS) command, 3-52 sorting directories by, 2-31
Insert typing mode, 3-13 Kill Print (KILPRN or KP) command, 2-38
cursor, 3-4 and chain printing, 2-60
Inserting KILTYP (KT) command. See Kill Print command
date, 4-26
headers and footers, 4-72 L
hyphens, 4-22,4-23 L wild card character, 3-56
page breaks, 4-129 L3P file, 2-12
page numbers, 4-106 merging, 2-41
text, 3-25,3-26 LA (Language) command, 4-177
time, 4-29 Label (LB) command, and document assembly,
with text macros, 3-42,3-52 5-19
Inset border, 4-63 with automatic numbering, 4-111
See also Blank space LAN Administrator's Guide, 1-4
Inside shading, 4-158 LAN environment. See Network
of borders, 4-64 Landscape orientation, 4-161

Lndex-12
 Index

Language (LA) command, 4-177 Line-feed character, 5-47

Language-specific character sets, 4-177 searching for, 3-57
Layout. See Page layout Link Text (LT) command, 4-85,4-90
LC (Lowercase) command, 3-33 Linking files, 4-84
LD (Leadering) command, 4-152,5-82 See also Importing files
LDPM (Load Program) command, 5-109 LINKTX command, 4-84
LDRK (Load Recorded Keystrokes) command, List, sorting, 5-66
5-102 Listing
LDSGT (Load Text Macro Keys) command, 3-50 selection options, 3-11
Leadering (LD) command, 4-152 text macro keys, 3-48
in index or table of contents, 5-82 LJ (Line Justify) command, 4-14
Leading, 4-179 LL (Line Leading) command, 4-182
and type size, 4-174 LM (Left Margin) command, 4-139
Leaving XyWrite, 2-61 LN (Line Numbering) command, 4-104
Left Margin (LM) command, 4-139 Load Program (LDPM) command, 5-109
Left tab, 4-149 Load Recorded Keystrokes (LDRK) command,
Length. See Page layout 5-102
Letter quality (LQ) command, 4-160 Load Text Macro Keys (LDSGT) command, 3-50
Letter Loading
as index separator, 5-93 spelling dictionaries, 3-74
as page number, 4-109 text macros, 3-45,3-50
in automatic numbering, 4-98,4-100 user programs, 5-102,5-109
in footnote numbering, 4-47 XyWrite, 2-33
See also Character Logical operators
LI (Line) unit of measure, 4-8 and database links, 4-87
Line (LI) unit of measure, 4-8 for extracting records, 5-72
Line Justify (LJ) command, 4-14 in mail merge, 5-49
Line Leading (LL) command, 4-182 LOGOFF and LOGON commands, 2-39
Line Numbering (LN) command, 4-104 and sorting directories, 2-31
Line spacing, 4-179 See also Network
automatic leading, 4-180 Long directory, 2-24
extra leading, 4-181,4-182 See also Directory display
Line Spacing (LS) command, 4-183 Lotus 1-2-3, linking, 4-87,4-89
Line Lowercase (LC) command, 3-33
as footnote separator, 4-35,4-38 See also Case
double, 4-69 LPT1. See DOS device
drawing, 4-68,4-175 LQ (Letter Quality) command, 4-160
leadering, 4-152 LS (Line Spacing) command, 4-183
shading, 4-64 LT (Link Text) command, 4-85, 4-90
weight of borders, 4-63 LV0-LV14 (Level) commands, 5-95

Index-13
Index

m Menu, with mouse, 3-16

Merging
Macro. See Program, user; Text macro key DCA format files, 2-73
Mail merge, 5-33 existing file into new file (NEW command),
and document assembly, 5-21, 5-23 2-43
conditional, 5-49 graphics (IG command), 4-76
empty fields, 5-36, 5-52 one file at beginning or end of another
mailing labels, 5-45 (APPEND and APT commands), 2-8
sorting records, 5-68 one file into another (MERGE command), 2-41
See also Data file; Document assembly printer-ready files (IN command), 2-53,4-59,
Mailing labels, 5-45 4-82
Make Directory (MKDIR) command, 2-13 See also Document assembly; Mail merge
Manual hyphenation, 4-22 MKDIR (Make Directory) command, 2-13
Margin MM (millimeters) unit of measure, 4-8
and tabs, 4-147 Mode (MD) commands, 4-170
bottom, 4-125 See also Type style
in graphics frames, 4-57,4-59 Modifying. See Editing; Editing text
left and right, 4-139 Mouse, 3-4,3-16
top, 4-124 default settings, 3-18
Marker. See Embedded command; Index; Table of Mouse Double Click (R2) default setting, 3-18
contents Mouse Repetition Interval (Rl) default setting,
Matching text, finding 3- 18
by comparing files, 3-67 Moving text, 3-26
with SEARCH commands, 3-54 in tables, 5-10
Math. See Calculations with text macros, 3-42
Maximize Windows (MW) default setting, 3-96 See also Merging
MD (Mode) commands, 4-170 Moving
See also Type style embedded commands, 4-5
Measuring time, 4-30 files, 2-17
Measurement, formatting. See Unit of measure to previous spelling error, 3-83
Memory MSP file format, 4-79
clearing files from, 2-6 See also Transferring files
listing status of, 3-96 Multiple files
system requirements, 1-1 comparing, 3-67
text macro limit, 3-46 finding, 2-36
Memory management saving, 2-67,2-69
indexing, 5-96 searching for text, 3-60
printing preview, 2-55 sorting, 2-67,2-69
running DOS programs, 2-27,2-30 spell-checking, 3-77
Menu. See Action bar

Index-14
 Index

Multiplication. See Calculations NJ (No Justify) command, 4-16

MW (Maximize Window) default setting, 3-96 NM (No Modifications) command, 3-27
No Footnotes (NF) command, 4-35,4-43
N No Index (NI) command, 5-89
No Justify (NJ) command, 4-16
N wild card character, 3-56 No Modifications (NM) command, 3-27
Name, logon, 2-31,2-39 No Pause (NP) command, 4-155
Naming files, 2-44 Non-Breakable Block (NB) command, 4-131
with COPY command, 2-15 Non-breaking hyphen, 4-22,4-23
with NEW command, 2-42 Non-breaking space, 4-17
with RENAME command, 2-64 Non-collated printing, 2-48,2-60
with SAVE command, 2-66 Note (NT) command, 2-72, 5-64
with STORE command, 2-68 NOW (Fixed Time) command, 4-29
Naming NP (No Pause) command, 4-155
graphic borders, 4-63 NS (Next Style) command, 4-167
mail merge fields, 5-42 NT (Note) command, 2-72, 5-64
style sheets, 4-164,4-166 ©Num string, 5-53
text macro files, 3-44 Number
Navigating. See Cursor movement as wild card character, 3-57
NB (Non-Breakable Block) command, 4-131 sorting by, 5-70
Near-letter quality printing, 4-160 spell-checking, 3-72
NEF (New Form) command, 5-30 See also Calculations
Nested commands Numbering, automatic
automatic numbering, 4-99,4-101 and chain printing, 2-60,4-97,4-98, 4-107,
borders, 4-66 110
4-
editing, 4-5 creating original style, 4-101
Network in headers and footers, 4-74
and login files, 2-31,2-39 non-printing, 5-95
and READ command, 2-63 of each line, 4-104
See also DOS device referencing, 4-113,4-115
NEW command, 2-42 with letters, 4-47
New Form (NEF) command, 5-30 See also Counter string table; Page number
New name, saving with, 2-66 Numbering footnotes, 4-44, 4-49
See also Naming files Numeric Lock
New Window (NW) default setting, 2-12,3-94, [NumLockl key, 3-13
3-
99 NW (New Window) default setting, 2-12,3-94,
Newspaper-style column. See Snaking column 99
3-
Next Style (NS) command, 4-167
NF (No Footnotes) command, 4-35,4-43
NI (No Index) command, 5-89

Index-15
Index

o Page break, 4-129

and document assembly, 5-19
O wild card character, 3-56 and endnotes, 4-42
Odd-even page numbers at end of file, 4-74
and horizontal offset, 4-140 in chain printing, 2-58
in headers and footers, 4-72 moving to, 3-10
positioning graphics, 4-59 viewing, 4-9
printing, 2-49 Page Break (PG, PG ODD, PG EVEN) commands,
Odd-numbered page, 4-130 129
4-
OF (Offset) command, 4-140 Page layout, 4-117
Offset aligning text, 4-13
horizontal, 4-140 frames, borders, and lines, 4-51
vertical, 4-127 horizontal spacing, 4-140
One-Sided Format command, 4-156 indenting paragraphs, 4-144
OP (Orphan) command, 4-133 leadering, 4-152
Opening files, 2-42 margins, 4-124, 4-125,4-139
fill-in forms, 5-30 non-breaking blocks, 4-131
See also Calling files page breaks, 4-129
Opening windows page orientation, 4-161
with WINDOW command, 3-98 paper length, 4-123
with window menu, 3-94 positioning graphics, 4-58, 4-77, 4-79
OR (Orientation) command, 4-161 previewing, 2-54,4-9,4-12
OR connector, 5-50 ruler, 4-138
Ordering. See Sorting setting width, 4-143
Orientation, printing (OR command), 4-161 tab stops, 4-147
Orphan (OP) command, 4-133 vertical spacing, 4-127, 4-179
OS (One-Sided Format) command, 4-156 widow and orphan control, 4-133
Outline printing, 4-158 See also Formatting
See also Type style Page length (PL) command, 4-126
Outline, numbering automatically, 4-93 See also Bottom Margin
Outputting, to devices other than printer, 2-50 Page number
See also Printing and chain printing, 2-60,4-97,4-98,4-107,
Overscore printing, 4-158 4-
110
See also Type style automatic, 4-97,4-98,4-106
Overstrike typing mode, 3-13 chapter-page format, 4-97
cursor, 3-4 creating original style, 4-109
displaying, 3-5
P in headers and footers, 4-72,4-73
in index or table of contents, 5-92
P (Pause) command, 5-110 moving cursor to specified, 3-66
PA (Pause) command, 4-154
and WAIT command, 2-71

Index-16
 Index

Page number (cont'd) Path (cont'd)

non-printing, 5-95 saving files, 2-66,2-69
referencing, 4-112 setting default, 2-4
setting, 2-49,4-108 sorting directories by, 2-31
See also Odd-even page numbers Thesaurus, 3-88
Page Number (PN) command, 4-106 See also Directory
Page range Path statement, DOS
previewing, 2-54 adding XyWrite directories, 2-3
printing, 2-45 running DOS programs, 2-28
printing to file, 2-50, 2-52 Pause (PA) command, 2-71,4-154
Page width, 4-137 Pausing printing
Page Width (PW) command, 4-143 at end of page, 2-45,4-155
and page borders, 4-62,4-66 for prompt, 4-154
See also Page layout Pausing user programs (P command), 5-110
Page-line depth, 3-5 PCL file format, 4-76
in printer-ready files, 4-82 See also Transferring files
moving to specified, 3-66 PCX file format, 4-76
Paragraph See also Transferring files
deleting, 3-29 PE (Put Edit) command, 5-60
indenting, 4-144 Personal dictionaries, 3-70
merging, 5-24 See also Dictionary, spelling
numbering, 4-92 Personalized files. See Mail merge
selecting, 3-21 PEV (Put Edit Verify) command, 5-60
spacing, 4-182 PF (Put Field) command, 5-41
widow and orphan control, 4-133 PFUNC (Program Function Call) command, 5-112
Parent file PG, PG ODD, PG EVEN (Page Break) commands,
printing multiple files, 2-57, 2-58 4-129
spell-checking multiple files, 3-77 See also Page break; Page layout
See also Chain printing PGL file format, 4-79
Password, 2-39 See also Transferring files
Pasting. See Copying; Moving .PGM filename extension, 5-103,5-105
Path, 2-2 |PqUp| and I PgDn | keys, 3-9
calling files, 2-3 PI (Picas) unit of measure, 4-8
copying files, 2-15 PI (Printer Insert) command, 4-162
displaying, 3-5 PIC file format, 4-79
displaying multi-path directories, 2-22 See also Transferring files
for dictionaries, 3-74 Picas (PI) unit of measure, 4-8
for graphics files, 4-81 PL (page length) command, 4-126
importing files, 4-89 See also Bottom Margin
naming files, 2-44 PN (Page Number) command, 4-106

Index-17
Index

Point size, type size, 4-174 Printing (cont'd)

Pointing directories, 2-23
calling files, 2-12 double-sided, 2-49
copying files, 2-16 file on disk, 2-46
deleting files, 2-19 file on screen, 2-47
printing files, 2-48 files in queue, 2-49
reading files, 2-63 files in sequence, 2-57
running program files, 5-104 fill-in forms, 5-29
See also Selecting footnotes and endnotes, 4-35, 4-36,4-47
Points (PT) unit of measure, 4-8 from DOS, 2-53
Port. See DOS device; Printer file in background, 2-46,2-60, 2-71
Portrait orientation, 4-161 in color, 4-157
Positioning graphics, 4-58, 4-77,4-79 in reverse order, 2-48, 2-60
PP (Put Paragraph) command, 5-24 index or table of contents, 5-84, 5-89, 5-90, 5-91,
PR (Prompt) command, 4-154 95
5-
and WAIT command, 2-71 last page, 4-74
Previewing mail merge documents, 5-44
files, 2-54 one-sided format, 4-156
footnotes, 4-35 orientation of, 4-161
headers and footers, 4-74 pausing at end of page, 2-45,4-155
in graphic view, 4-9, 4-12 pausing for prompt, 2-71,4-154
mail-merge files, 5-38 quality of, 4-160
See also Displaying redlined documents, 5-59
Previous Style (PS) command, 4-167 reverse color, 4-76, 4-158
PRINT command, 2-45 selected text, 2-48
PRINT % (Print Single Text Macro), 3-45 special effects, 4-158
PRINT + (Print Mail Merge), 5-44 stopping or suspending, 2-38
PRINT® (Chain Print), 2-57 text macro key contents, 3-45
PRINTF (Print to File), 2-50,2-71 text over graphics, 4-80
PRINTS (Print to Screen), 2-54 with text macros, 3-52
Printer control code, inserting, 4-162 See also Graphics
See also Printer-ready file PRINTS (Print to Screen) command, 2-54
Printer Insert (PI) command, 4-162 PRINTS +, 5-44
Printer-ready file, 2-50 PRINTS @,2-57
merging, 4-59,4-82 PRN command. See PRINT command
PRINTF (Print to File) command, 2-50,2-71 Program Function Call (PFUNC) command, 5-112
PRINTF +, 5-44 Program mode, turning off, 5-108
PRINTF @,2-57 Program, user, 5-97
Printing, 2-45 creating in program mode, 5-105
and reference commands, 4-116 creating in record keystroke mode, 5-99
borders, 4-66

Index-18
 Index

Program, user (cont'd) R

including function calls, 5-112
loading, 5-102,5-109 R2X command, 2-72
pausing, 5-110 Range. See Multiple files; Page range
running, 5-104 RB (Reverse Buttons) default setting, 3-18
saving, 5-99,5-101, 5-103 READ command, 2-63
Prompt (PR) command, 4-154 Reading files. See Calling
and WAIT command, 2-71 Read-only files, 2-9
Prompt message REC (Reference) command, 4-111
displaying, 3-5 Record. See Data file; Mail merge
during printing, 4-154 Record Separator (RS) command, 5-46
Proofreading. See Spelling checker Recording keystrokes. See Program, user
Protecting text, 3-27 Recovering files, 2-19
PRS command. See PRINTS command RED ON and RED OFF (Redlining) commands,
PS (Previous Style) command, 4-167 56
5-
PT (Points) unit of measure, 4-8 Redlining, 5-55
Punctuation and logon names, 2-39
and automatic numbering, 4-99,4-100 tagline display, 5-59
searching for, 3-57 Redlining (RED ON and RED OFF) commands,
See also list of symbols at beginning of index; 56
5-
Separator; Symbol Reducing. See Sizing
Put Edit (PE) command, 5-60 Reference (REF, REP, REC) commands, 4-111
Put Edit Verify (PEV) command, 5-60 and chain printing, 2-60
Put Field (PF) command, 5-41 and chapter counter, 4-103
Put Paragraph (PP) command, 5-24 Relative Tabs (RT) command, 4-147
PW (Page Width) command, 4-143 Releasing selected text, 3-23
and page borders, 4-62,4-66 See also Clearing
See also Page layout REMOVE (Clear Single Text Macro Key)
command, 3-51
Remove Directory (RMDIR) command, 2-13
Remove Screen (RMVSCR) command, 3-99
Question mark (?), 2-22 Removing. See Clearing; Closing; Deleting
See also Wild card character RENAME command, 2-64
Queue, print, 2-49 REP (Reference) command, 4-111
clearing, 2-38 Repeat Records (RR) command, 5-45
QUIT command, 2-61 Replacing text
key for, 3-11 misspelled words, 3-71
QUlTn.TMP files, 2-62 with abbreviation expansion, 3-81
with Auto-Replace, 3-84

Index-19
Index

Replacing text (cont'd) Row

with CHANGE commands, 3-62 deleting, 3-29
with synonyms, 3-88 math calculations, 3-39
See also Editing text See also Column, non-table; Table
Reserving illustration space. See Framed area for RR (Repeat Records) command, 5-45
graphics RS (Record Separator) command, 5-46
Restore Session, 2-34 RS (Remove Screen) command, 3-99
Restoring full-size window, 3-95,3-96, 3-98 RT (Relative Tabs) command, 4-147
Retrieving files. See Calling files Rule. See Line
Retrieving text. See Text macro key Rule shading of borders, 4-64
Reverse Buttons (RB) default setting, 3-18 Ruler, 4-138
Reverse display mode, 4-170 in draft and expanded views, 4-9
in fill-in forms, 5-28 RUN command, 5-104
See also Type style Running Footer (RF, RFE, RFO) commands, 4-71
Reverse order Running header and footer. See Header and
counting words, 3-102 footer, running
cycling through windows, 3-97 Running Header (RH, RHE, RHO) commands,
printing, 2-48, 2-60 4-72
printing orientation, 4-161 Running user programs, 5-100,5-104
replacing text, 3-65 See also Loading
searching text, 3-54 Running XyWrite, 2-33
sorting directories, 2-31
sorting text, 5-70 s
Reverse printing, 4-76,4-158
REVIEW command. See PRINTS command S wild card character, 3-57
REVIEW.TMP file, 2-54 SAVE command, 2-65
RF, RFE, RFO (Running Footer) commands, 4-72 SAVE %, 2-67,3-45
RFT:DCA files, 2-12 SAVERK (Save Recorded Keystrokes), 5-103
conversion, 2-72 SAVESEL, SAVEDEF, SAD (Save Selected
merging, 2-41 Text), 2-66
RH, RHE, RHO (Running Header) commands, Save Session, 2-62
4-72 Save Style (SS) command, 4-164
Right Margin (RM) command, 4-139 Save/get key. See Text macro key
Right tab, 4-149 SAVEGET.SGT file, 3-45
RM (Right Margin) command, 4-139 Saving
RM DIR (Remove Directory) command, 2-13 index or table of contents, 5-82
and TREE command, 2-70 list of directories, 2-23
RMVSCR (Remove Screen) command, 3-99 preview files, 2-56
Roman numerals selected text, 2-66
and automatic numbering, 4-97,4-98,4-100, style sheets, 4-164
4-108
in footnotes, 4-47

Index-20
 Index

Saving (cont'd) Selecting (cont'd)

text macro files, 2-67,3-44,3-45,3-49 program files, 5-104
to text macros, 3-42,3-46 text, 3-17,3-20
user programs, 5-99,5-101, 5-103 text in tables, 5-10
Saving files, 2-65 windows, 3-94
all files at once, 2-67,2-69 See also Pointing
and clearing screen, 2-68 Selecting files
automatically, 2-67 calling, 2-10
before running DOS programs, 2-26,2-28 copying, 2-16
in other formats, 2-67 deleting, 2-18,2-19
new files, 2-43 for reading only, 2-63
to different drive or directory, 2-3,2-4,2-66 printing, 2-48
with new filename, 2-66 with mouse, 3-16
Sec also Copying Sentence, selecting, 3-21
SBP file format, 4-79 Separator
See also Transferring files and mail merge, 5-39, 5-46
SC (Superscript Number) command, 4-49 for footnotes, 4-35,4-38,4-39
Scalable font, 4-174 index alphabet breaks, 5-93
See also Font searching for, 3-57
Scaling graphics, 4-77,4-79, 4-80 Set Footnote Number (SF) command, 4-44
See also Sizing Set Page Number (SP) command, 2-49, 4-108
Screen, 3-4 Set Record (SR) commands, 5-92
moving to next, 3-10,3-16 Settings. See Default settings
See also Displaying; Window SF (Set Footnote Number) command, 4-44
Scroll bar, 3-6 .SGT filename extension, 3-49
I Scroll Lock! key, 3-13 SH (Snake Height) command, 5-15
Scrolling text, 3-9 Shading, 4-158
with mouse, 3-16 borders, 4-64
See also Cursor movement Shadow printing, 4-158
SEARCH (SE) commands, 3-54 [Shift] key, 3-13
Search wild card character, 3-56 SHOHYP (Show Hyphenation) command, 4-20
See also Wild card character Show Hyphenation (SHOHYP) command, 4-20
Searching Show Tabs (ST) default setting, 4-151
for file differences and matches, 3-67 Sidebar, 4-59
for files on disk, 2-36 Signature, code page, 4-177
for text, 3-54 Single spacing, 4-183
SEC (Fixed Time with Seconds) command, 4-29 Single Text Macro Key (SK) function call, 3-48
Selected text status indicator, 3-24 @SIZ operator, 5-52
Selecting Size (SZ) command, 4-174
data file fields, 5-49,5-72
embedded commands, 4-5

Index-21
Index

Size of file SP (Set Page Number) command, 2-49, 4-108

in units other than bytes, 2-25 Space. See Blank space
sorting directories by, 2-31 Special character. See list at beginning of index;
Sizing Symbol
footnotes, 4-32 Special effects, printing, 4-158
graphic view, 4-12 SPELL command, 3-76
graphics, 4-77,4-79, 4-80 SPELL @,3-78
graphics frame, 4-57, 4-58 Spell One Word (SO) function call, 3-75
type, 4-174 SPELL.TMP file, 3-77
windows, 3-95, 3-98 Spelling Checker (CK) default setting, 3-72
SK (Single Text Macro Key) function call, 3-48 Spelling checker, 3-70
SK (Sort Key) default setting abbreviation expansion, 3-73,3-81
for indexes, 5-96 Auto-Replace, 3-84
for lists, 5-67 automatic, 3-82
Slider box, 3-16 creating concordance with, 3-81
Snake Height (SH) command, 5-15 function keys for, 3-12
Snaking columns (SN command), 5-11 ignore word, 3-73
and borders, 4-62, 4-63 personal dictionaries, 3-86
breaking columns, 5-14 with stored or multiple files, 3-77
column depth, 5-15 with words containing numbers, 3-72
offsetting, 4-127 See also Dictionary, spelling
See also Table Spreadsheet files, linking, 4-86, 4-89
SO (Sort Setting) default setting, 5-70 SR (Set Record) commands, 5-92
SO (Spell One Word) function call, 3-75 SS (Save Style) command, 4-164
Soft carriage return, 4-146 ST (Show Tabs) default setting, 4-151
and justification, 4-16 Stacking commands, 3-8
Soft date, 4-26 Staggered windows, 3-96
Soft hyphen, 4-22, 4-23 Startup file (STARTUP.INT)
Soft Time (TM) command, 4-29 calling when running XyWrite, 2-33
SORT command, 5-66 including default drive, 2-5
Sort Key (SK) default setting loading text macros, 3-45,3-50
for indexes, 5-96 setting windows, 3-98
for lists, 5-67 sorting directories, 2-32
Sort Setting (SO) default setting, 5-70 See also Automatic features
SORTD (Sort Data File) command, 5-76 Status Line, 3-5
Sorting, 5-65 Stopping
data files, 5-68, 5-76 print preview, 2-55
directories, 2-31 printing, 2-38,2-60
indexes, 5-96 search, 3-59,3-64
See also Index; Table of contents text deletion, 3-28

Index-22
 Index

STORE command, 2-68 Synonyms (thesaurus), 3-88

and selected text, 3-24 System, requirements, 1-1
and windows, 3-94 SZ (Size) command, 4-174
See also Saving
Store Text Macros (STSGT) Command, 3-49 T
String, 3-54
See also Text T1-T9 (Table of contents) commands, 5-90
STSGT (Store Text Macros) command, 3-49 Tab, 4-147
STSPELL,3-87 as field separator, 5-68,5-69
Style (style sheet), 4-163 Tab, decimal, 4-149
and automatic numbering, 4-93 in index entries, 5-88
and tables, 5-8 in mail merge records, 5-36,5-47
Style of type. See Font; Type style searching for, 3-59
Subdirectory. See Directory underlining, 4-173
Subscript type, 4-158,4-170,4-172 Tab Reset (TR) command, 4-147
See also Type style Tab Set (TS) command, 4-147
Subtracting Table, 5-3
formatting units, 4-6 and borders, 4-62,4-63,5-7,5-12
type styles, 4-170 column length, 5-12
zoom percentage, 4-12 column width, 5-9
Subtraction. See Calculations creating, 5-6
Summary information. See Document summary deleting text, 3-29
information editing, 5-9
Superscript Number (SC) command, 4-49 offsetting, 4-127
Superscript type, 4-158,4-170,4-172 snaking columns, 5-11
in footnotes, 4-49 See also Column, non-table
See also Type style Table of contents, 5-77
Suppressing blank lines, 4-135 extracting, 5-82,5-94
Suspending printing, 2-38 formatting, 5-81,5-92
Switching marking text, 5-80,5-85
views, 4-9 Table of contents (T1-T9) commands, 5-90
windows, 3-97 Table of Contents Extract (TX1-TX9) commands,
Symbol 5-94
drawing lines with, 4-69 Telephone assistance, 1-4
as footnotes, 4-46 Template. See Boilerplate; Document assembly;
and leadering, 4-152 Fill-in form; Mail merge
searching for, 3-58 Temporary dictionary, 3-70
and symbol sets, 4-175 Temporary file
Symbol. See list at beginning of index; Separator hyphenation, 4-20
Symbol (SY) command, 4-175 index or table of contents, 5-85

Index-23
Index

Temporary file (cont'd) Time (cont'd)

printer-ready (FO.TMP), 2-50 in headers and footers, 4-72
printing, 2-47 measuring, 4-30
printing to screen (REVIEW.TMP), 2-54 TM (Soft Time) command, 4-29
quitting XyWrite (QUITn.TMP), 2-62 .TMP extension. See Temporary file
spelling checker, 3-77 TODAY command, 4-26
Temporary text macro key, 3-42 Toggle indicator, 3-6
Terminating session, 2-61 Toggle keys, 3-13
Text Top Margin (TP) command, 4-124
and type styles, 4-169 Top of file
deleting, 3-28 appending to, 2-8
displaying with directory, 2-24 searching from, 3-55,3-63
displaying with found files, 2-37 TP (Top Margin) command, 4-124
printing, 2-45 TR (Tab Reset) command, 4-147
printing over graphics, 4-80 Transferring files, 2-12
searching for and replacing, 3-54 and ASCII files, 1-3,2-12,2-52,4-83
sorting, 5-65 and mail merge, 5-39
with graphic frames, 4-53, 4-55,4-57,4-59 DCA format conversion, 2-72
See also Block of text; File importing graphics, 4-76
Text area, 3-6 linking files, 4-84
Text macro key, 3-41 saving in other formats, 2-67
and user programs, 5-102,5-109 stripping embedded commands, 2-52
clearing, 3-51 Transpose text, 3-32
displaying contents, 3-48 TREE command, 2-70
getting text from, 3-47 TS (Tab Set) command, 4-147
inserting into printout, 3-52 Turning off. See Clearing; Stopping
loading, 3-50 TX1-TX9 (Table of Contents Extract) commands,
pre-defined, 3-45 5-94
saving, 2-67,3-45,3-46,3-49 TXLNK file, 4-34
temporary, 3-42 TY command. See PRINT command
Text Marker (XI-X9) commands, 5-85 TYF command. See PRINTF command
Thesaurus, 3-88 Type size, 4-174
key, 3-12 See also Point size
TIFF file format, 4-76 Type style (MD commands), 4-169
converting to, 4-79 and fill-in forms, 5-29
See also Transferring files and redlining, 5-57,5-58
Time, 4-29 and SEARCH commands, 3-59
displaying on status line, 3-6 list of, 4-170
in forms, 5-29 prevailing, 4-173
special effects, 4-158

Index-24
 Index

TYPEF command. See PRINTF command UR (Use Pointer) default setting, 3-18
Typeface, 4-176 US (Use Style) command, 4-167
See also Font Use Border (UB) command, 4-61
TYS command. See PRINTS command Use Face (UF) command, 4-176
Use Page Border (UP) command, 4-61
Use Pointer (UR) default setting, 3-18
Use Style (US) command, 4-167
UB (Use Border) command, 4-61 User name, 2-39
UC (Uppercase) command, 3-33 sorting directories by, 2-31
UF (Use Face) command, 4-176 User programming. See Program, user
UH (Unit Horizontal) default setting, 4-8 UV (Unit Vertical) default setting, 4-8
Uncollated printing, 2-48,2-60
Unconditional page break, 4-130
Undeleting text, 3-30
V
Undeleting Verification message, suppressing
files, 2-19 with ABORT command, 2-7
text, 3-11,3-29 with CHANGE commands, 3-65
Underlining, 4-170,4-172,4-173 with COPY command, 2-16
printing, 4-158 with DELETE command, 2-19
Undoing with DO command, 2-26
errors, 2-6 with PRINT commands, 2-48,2-52
file deletion, 2-19 Verifying
redlining, 5-57 redlining, 5-60,5-62
text deletion, 3-11, 3-29 text replacement, 3-62,3-63
Unit Horizontal (UH) default setting, 4-8 Vertical offset, 4-127
Unit of measure, 4-8 Vertical spacing, 4-179
on ruler, 4-138 See also Page layout
relative values, 4-6 Vertical window, 3-94
Unit Vertical (UV) default setting, 4-8 Viewing. See Displaying; Listing; Window
Unselecting text, 3-23
UP (Use Page Border) command, 4-61 w
Updating
date, 4-26 W wild card character, 3-57
directories, 2-23 WAIT command, 2-71
linked text, 4-90 WC (Word Count) command, 3-102
time, 4-29 WCB (Word Count Back) command, 3-102
Uppercase (UC) command, 3-33 WD (Widow) command, 4-133
Uppercase White space. See Blank space
automatic, 3-35 Widow (WD) command, 4-133
changing, 3-33
See also Case

Index-25
Index

Wild card character, 2-22 Word-processor files, linking, 4-85

calling files, 2-11 WPG file format, 4-79
copying files, 2-17 See also Transferring files
displaying directories, 2-21 Wrapping footnotes, 4-39
in replacement text, 3-64 WW (Conversion Filters Path) default setting, 4-89
reading files, 2-63 WYSIWYG. See Graphic view
renaming files, 2-64
searching for files, 2-36,2-37 X
searching for text, 3-56,3-60
Window, 3-91 X wild card character, 3-57
and Auto-Check, 3-83 XI-X9 (Text Marker) commands, 5-85
and calling files, 2-12 X2R command, 2-72
and redlining, 5-58 XF (Extract Field) command, 5-75
and saving files, 2-67,2-69 XR (Extract Records) command, 5-72
borders, 3-95 .XY4 extension, 2-72
clearing, 2-6, 2-68 XyWrite
closing, 2-7,3-94,3-99 directories, 1-3,2-2
copying and moving text between, 3-25,3-26 files, 1-3
defined, 3-92 running DOS from, 2-26, 2-28, 2-35
displaying number, 3-5 system requirements, 1-1
moving between, 3-9,3-17,3-97 text macro files, 3-45
opening, 3-94, 3-98
See also Displaying z
WINDOW command, 3-98
Zero tab stop, 4-149
WMF file format, 4-79
Zero Time (ZT) function call, 4-30
See also Transferring files
Zero, in automatic numbering, 4-99
Word
Zoom, 4-12
capitalizing first letter, 3-34
counting, 3-102
defined, 3-102
deleting, 3-29
including in index or table of contents, 5-80
searching for, 3-54, 3-59,3-62
selecting, 3-21
sorting by, 5-70
spell-checking, 3-75
synonyms for, 3-88
Word Count (WC) commands, 3-102
Word Count Back (WCB) commands, 3-102
Word overstrike typing mode, 3-13

Index-26
 36 South Charles Street
Baltimore, Maryland 21201
(410) 576-2040 Fax (410) 576-1968